PEB22554 [INFINEON]
ICs for Communications; 集成电路通信
| 型号： | PEB22554 |
| 厂家： | 
Infineon |
| 描述： | ICs for Communications |
| 文件： | 总397页 (文件大小：1936K) |
| 中文： | 中文翻译 | 下载： | 下载PDF数据表文档文件 |
ICs for Communications
Quad Framing and Line Interface Component for E1 / T1 / J1
QuadFALCTM
PEB 22554 Version 1.1
Preliminary Data Sheet 09.98
DS 1
PEB 22554
Revision History:
Current Version: 09.98
Previous Version:
None
Page
(in previous Version)
For questions on technology, delivery and prices please contact the Semiconductor
Group Offices in Germany or the Siemens Companies and Representatives worldwide:
see our webpage at http://www.siemens.de/semiconductor/communication.
QuadFALCTM is a trademarks of Siemens AG.
Published by Siemens AG,
HL SC,
Balanstraße 73,
81541 München
© Siemens AG 1998.
All Rights Reserved.
Attention please!
As far as patents or other rights of third parties are concerned, liability is only assumed for components, not for
applications, processes and circuits implemented within components or assemblies.
The information describes the type of component and shall not be considered as assured characteristics.
Terms of delivery and rights to change design reserved.
Due to technical requirements components may contain dangerous substances. For information on the types in
question please contact your nearest Siemens Office, Semiconductor Group.
Siemens AG is an approved CECC manufacturer.
Packing
Please use the recycling operators known to you. We can also help you – get in touch with your nearest sales
office. By agreement we will take packing material back, if it is sorted. You must bear the costs of transport.
For packing material that is returned to us unsorted or which we are not obliged to accept, we shall have to invoice
you for any costs incurred.
Components used in life-support devices or systems must be expressly authorized for such purpose!
Critical components1 of the Semiconductor Group of Siemens AG, may only be used in life-support devices or
systems2 with the express written approval of the Semiconductor Group of Siemens AG.
1 A critical component is a component used in a life-support device or system whose failure can reasonably be
expected to cause the failure of that life-support device or system, or to affect its safety or effectiveness of that
device or system.
2 Life support devices or systems are intended (a) to be implanted in the human body, or (b) to support and/or
maintain and sustain human life. If they fail, it is reasonable to assume that the health of the user may be en-
dangered.
PEB 22554
Page
Table of Contents
1
1.1
1.2
Features E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Logic Symboly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Typical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
2
2.1
2.2
Pin Descriptions E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Pin Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Pin Definitions and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Functional Description E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Microprocessor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Boundary Scan Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Receive Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
System Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Transmit Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Framer Operating Modes E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Doubleframe Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
CRC-Multiframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
4
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
Operational Description E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Signaling Controller Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
HDLC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Extended Transparent Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Signaling Controller Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
4.1.3.1 HDLC Data Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
4.1.3.2 HDLC Data Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
4.1.4
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
Sa bit Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Operational Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Specific E1 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Control Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Status Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
5
5.1
5.2
Features T1 / J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Logic Symboly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Typical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
6
6.1
6.2
Pin Descriptions T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Pin Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Pin Definitions and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
7
Functional Description T1 / J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Microprocessor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Boundary Scan Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
7.1
7.2
7.3
Semiconductor Group
3
09.98
PEB 22554
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.7.1
7.7.2
7.7.3
7.7.4
7.7.5
Receive Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
System Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Transmit Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Framer Operating Modes T1 / J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
4-Frame Multiframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
12-Frame Multiframe (D4 or SF Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Extended Superframe ( F24, ESF Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
72-Frame Multiframe (SLC96 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
8
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
Operational Description T1 / J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Signaling Controller Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
HDLC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Extended Transparent Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Signaling Controller Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
8.1.3.1 HDLC Data Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
8.1.3.2 HDLC Data Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.2
8.3
8.4
Bit Oriented Message Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
4 Kbit/s Data Link Access in F72 Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Operational Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Specific T1 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Control Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Status Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
8.5
9
9.1
9.2
9.3
Preliminary Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
DC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Input/Output Waveforms for Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Master Clock Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
JTAG Boundary Scan Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Microprocessor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4
9.4.5
9.4.5.1 Siemens/Intel Bus Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
9.4.5.2 Motorola Bus Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
9.4.6
9.4.7
9.4.8
Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
System Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Pulse Templates - Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
9.4.8.1 Pulse Template E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
9.4.8.2 Pulse template T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
9.5
Capacitances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
10
Package Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Semiconductor Group
4
09.98
PEB 22554
11
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
12
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Protection Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Application Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Software Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
12.1
12.2
12.3
Semiconductor Group
5
09.98
Quad Framing and Line Interface Component for E1/T1
QFALC
PEB 22554
CMOS
QuadFALC in E1 Mode
1
Features E1
Quad Line Interface
• High density, generic interface for all E1 / T1 / J1
applications
• Quad analog receive and transmit circuitry for long/
short haul applications
P-TQFP-144
• Data and clock recovery using an integrated
digital phase locked loop
• Maximum line attenuation up to -34 dB at 1024 kHz
adaptively controlled receive equalization network adjusts up to 4500 feet (PULP 22
AWG) in length, noise - and crosstalk -filter, line attenuation status
• Programmable transmit pulse shapes for E1 signals
• Programmable Line Build-Out according to FTZ221
• Low transmitter output impedances for high transmit return loss
• Tri-state function of the analog transmit line outputs
• Transmit line monitor protecting the device from damage
• Jitter specifications of ITU-T I.431 , G.703 , G.736 and G.823 met
• Crystal-less wander and jitter attenuation/compensation
• Low frequency reference clock: 2.048MHz
• Power down function per channel
• Dual rail or single rail digital inputs and outputs
• Unipolar NRZ or CMI for interfacing fibre optical transmission routes
• Selectable line codes (HDB3, AMI)
• Loss of signal indication with programmable thresholds according to ITU-T G.775
and ETS300233
• Clock generator for jitter free system/ transmit clocks per channel
• Local loop and remote loop for diagnostic purposes
• Ultra low power device , single power supply: 3.3 V
Type
Version
Ordering Code
Package
PEB 22554-HT
V1.1
Q67003H9339
P-TQFP-144(SMD)
Semiconductor Group
6
09.98
PEB 22554
Features E1
Quad Frame Aligner
• Frame alignment/synthesis for 2.048 MBit/s according to ITU-T G.704
• Programmable formats : Doubleframe, CRC Multiframe
Selectable conditions for recover / loss of frame alignment
• CRC4 to Non-CRC4 Interworking of ITU-T G. 706 Annex B
• Error checking via CRC4 procedures according to ITU-T G. 706
• Alarm and performance monitoring per second
16 bit counter for CRC-, framing errors, code violations, error monitoring via E bit and
SA6 bit, errored blocks, PRBS bit errors
• Insertion and extraction of alarms (AIS, Remote Alarm …)
• IDLE code insertion for selectable channels
• Flexible system clock frequency different for receiver and transmitter
• Supports programmable system data rates: 2048 , 4096, 8192 and 16.384MBit/s
with independent receive/transmit offset programming
• Mux of 4 channels into a single rail 8.192 MBit/s data bus and v.v.
with byte - or bitinterleaved formats
• Elastic store for receive and transmit route clock wander and jitter compensation;
controlled slip capability and slip indication;
• Programmable elastic buffer size: 2 frames / 1 frame / short buffer / bypass
• Supports fractional E1 access
• Flexible transparent modes
• Programmable In-Band Loop Code detection and generation
• Channel loop back , line loop back or Payload loop back capabilities
• Pseudo Random Bit Sequence (PRBS) generator and monitor
Quad Signaling Controller
• HDLC controller
Bit stuffing, CRC check and generation, flag generation, flag and address recognition,
handling of bit oriented functions
• CAS controller with last look capability , enhanced CAS- register access and freeze
signaling indication
• Provides access to serial signaling data streams
• Multiframe synchronization and synthesis acc. to ITU-T G.732
• Alarm insertion and detection (AIS and LOS in Timeslot 16)
• Transparent Mode
• FIFO buffers (64 bytes deep) for efficient transfer of data packets.
• Time-slot assignment
Any combination of time slots selectable for data transfer independent of signaling
mode.
• Time-slot 0 SA8-4 bit handling via FIFOs
Semiconductor Group
7
09.98
PEB 22554
Features E1
• HDLC access to any SA bit combination
MP Interface
• 8/16 bit microprocessor bus interface (Intel or Motorola type)
• All registers directly accessible (byte or word access)
• Multiplexed and non-multiplexed address bus operations
• Hard / software reset options
• Extended interrupt capabilities
• One second timer (internal /external access)
General
• Boundary scan standard IEEE 1149.1
• P-TQFP-144 package (body size 20x20)
• 3.3 V power supply
• Typical power consumption 650 mW
Applications
• Wireless Basestations
• E1/T1/J1ATM Gateways
• E1/T1/J1 Channel & Data Service Units (CSU, DSU)
• ISDN PRI, PBXs
• E1/T1/J1 Internet Access Equipement
• LAN / WAN Router
• SONET/SDH Add/ Drop Mux
• E1/T1/J1 Multiplexer
• Digital Access Cross-Connect Systems (DACS)
Semiconductor Group
8
09.98
PEB 22554
Features E1
1.1
Logic Symboly
VDDR(1-4)
SSR(1-4)
V
SCLKR(1-4)
RDO(1-4)
RPA(1-4)
RPB(1-4)
RPC(1-4)
RPD(1-4)
Receive
Line
Interface
RL1/RDIP/ROID(1-4)
RL2/RDIN/RCLKI(1-4)
Receive
System
Interface
TDI
TMS
TCK
TRS
TDO
Boundary
Scan
QuadFALCTM
PEB 22554
SCLKX(1-4)
XDI(1-4)
Transmit
System
Interface
V
DDX(1-4)
SSX(1-4)
XPA(1-4)
XPB(1-4)
XPC(1-4)
XPD(1-4)
V
Transmit
Line
Interface
XL1/XDOP/XOID(1-4)
XL2/XDON/XFM(1-4)
V
V
ITL10297
Microprocessor Interface
Figure 1
QuadFALC Logic Symbol
Semiconductor Group
9
09.98
PEB 22554
Features E1
1.2
Typical Applications
The figures below show multiple link applications realized with the QuadFALC.
MTSL
PEB 2047
Memory Time Switch
QuadFALCTM
PEB 22554
4 x E1/T1
M 128X
PEB 20324
MUNICH128
PCI/Generic
System Bus
CPU
MEM
ITS10302
Figure 2
4 Channel E1 Interface for Frame Relay Applications
Semiconductor Group
10
09.98
PEB 22554
Features E1
RAM
QuadFALCTM
PEB 22554
4
4
4 x E1/T1
4 x E1/T1
PCM-Highway
UTOPIA
IWE8TM
PXB 4220
ATM
Layer
QuadFALCTM
PEB 22554
AAL1 or ATM-Mode
ITS10303
Figure 3
8 Channel E1 Interface to the ATM Layer
Semiconductor Group
11
09.98
PEB 22554
Pin Descriptions E1
2
Pin Descriptions E1
Pin Diagram
2.1
P-TQFP-144
V
V
V
V
V
V
XL1_1/XDOP1/XOID1
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
XL1_4/XDOP4/XOID4
VDDX
XL2_4/XDON4/XFM4
SEC/FSC
IM
VDDR
RL1_4/RDIP4/ROID4
RL2_4/RDIN4/RCLKI4
VSSR
N.C.
ALE
VDDX
XL2_1/XDON1/XFM1
TDI
TDO
VDDR
RL1_1/RDIP1/ROID1
RL2_1/RDIN1/RCLKI1
VSSR
N.C.
RCLK1
XPA1
XPB1
XPC1
XPD1
VDD
RCLK4
XPD4
XPC4
XPB4
XPA4
VSS
VSS
XPA2
XPB2
XPC2
XPD2
RCLK2
TRS
QuadFALCTM
PEB 22554
VDD
XPD3
XPC3
XPB3
XPA3
SCLKX4
XDI4
VDD
MCLK
N.C.
VSS
SYNC
RCLK3
RES
VSSR
VSSR
RL2_2/RDIN2/RCLKI2
RL1_2/RDIP2/ROID2
VDDR
RL2_3/RDIN3/RCLKI3
RL1_3/RDIP3/ROID3
VDDR
INT
DBW
TCK
TMS
XL2_2/XDON2/XFM2
VDDX
XL1_2/XDOP2/XOID2
XL2_3/XDON3/XFM3
VDDX
XL1_3/XDOP3/XOID3
ITP10391
V
V
V
V
V
V
Figure 4 Pin Configuration of QuadFALC
Note: All unused input pins have to be connected to a defined level (VSS / VDD).
Semiconductor Group
12
09.98
PEB 22554
Pin Descriptions E1
2.2
Pin Definitions and Functions
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
83 - 74
A9 … A0
I
Address Bus
Address bus selects one of the internal
registers for read or write.
107 - 103 D15 … D11 I/O
100 - 93 D10 … D3
Data Bus
Bi-directional three-state data lines which
interface with the system’s data bus. Their
configuration is controlled by the level of pin
DBW:
90 - 88
D2 … D0
– 8-bit mode (DBW = 0): D0 … D7 are active.
D8 … D15 are in high impedance and have to
be connected to VDD or VSS.
– 16-bit mode (DBW = 1): D0 … D15 are active.
In case of byte transfers, the active half of the
bus is determined by A0 and BHE/BLE and the
selected bus interface mode (via pin IM). The
unused half is in high impedance.
62
ALE
I
Address Latch Enable
A high on this line indicates an address on the
external address/data bus. The address
information provided on lines A0 … A9 is
internally latched with the falling edge of ALE.
This function allows the QuadFALC to be
directly connected to a multiplexed address/data
bus. In this case, pins A0 … A9 must be
externally connected to the Data Bus pins. In
case of demultiplexed mode this pin has to be
connected directly to ground or VDD.
Note: All unused input pins have to be connected to a defined level (VSS / VDD)
Note: PU = If not connected an internal pull-up transistor ensure high input level.
Semiconductor Group
13
09.98
PEB 22554
Pin Descriptions E1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
85
RD/DS
I
Read Enable (Siemens/Intel bus mode)
This signal indicates a read operation. When
the QuadFALC is selected via CS the RD signal
enables the bus drivers to output data from an
internal register addressed via A0 … A9 on to
Data Bus.
Data Strobe (Motorola bus mode)
This pin serves as input to control read/write
operations.
84
WR/RW
I
Write Enable (Siemens/Intel bus mode)
This signal indicates a write operation. When
CS is active the QuadFALC loads an internal
register with data provided via the Data Bus.
Read/Write Enable (Motorola bus mode)
This signal distinguishes between read and
write operation.
86
46
CS
I
I
Chip Select
A low signal selects the QuadFALC for read/
write operations.
RES
Reset
A low signal on this pin forces the QuadFALC
into reset state. During Reset the QuadFALC
needs an active clock on pin MCLK.
During Reset all bi-directional output stages
(data bus) arein high-impedance state if signal
RD is “high”.
Semiconductor Group
14
09.98
PEB 22554
Pin Descriptions E1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
87
BHE/BLE
I
Bus High Enable (Siemens/Intel bus mode)
If 16-bit bus interface mode is enabled, this
signal indicates a data transfer on the upper
byte of the data bus (D8 … D15). In 8-bit bus
interface mode this signal has no function and
should be tied to VDD.
Bus Low Enable (Motorola bus mode)
If 16-bit bus interface mode is enabled, this
signal indicates a data transfer on the lower
byte of the data bus (D0 … D7). In 8-bit bus
interface mode this signal has no function and
should be tied to VDD.
40
41
DBW
I
Data Bus Width (Bus Interface Mode)
A low signal on this input selects the 8-bit bus
interface mode. A high signal on this input
selects the 16-bit bus interface mode. In this
case word transfer to/from the internal registers
is enabled. Byte transfers are implemented by
using A0 and BHE/BLE.
INT
O/oD
Interrupt Request
INT serves as general interrupt request which
may include all interrupt sources. These
interrupt sources can be masked via registers
IMR0 … 5. Interrupt status is reported via
registers GIS (Global Interrupt Status) and
ISR0 …5.
Output characteristics (push-pull active low/
high, open drain) are determined by
programming the IPC register.
68
IM
I
Interface Mode
The level at this pin defines the bus interface
mode:
A low signal on this input selects the INTEL
interface mode. A high signal on this input
selects the Motorola interface mode.
Semiconductor Group
15
09.98
PEB 22554
Pin Descriptions E1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
115, 138, RL1(1-4)
43, 66
I
Line Receiver 1
Analog Input from the external transformer.
Selected if LIM1.DRS = 0.
RDIP(1-4)
I
Receive Data Input Positive
Digital input for received dual rail PCM(+) route
signal which will be latched with the internal
generated Receive Route Clock. An internal
DPLL will extract the Receive Route Clock from
the incoming data pulse. The duty cycle of the
receiving signal has to be closely to 50 %.
The Dual Rail mode is selected if LIM1.DRS = 1
and FMR0.RC1 = 1. Input sense is selected by
bit RC0.RDIS (after Reset: active low).
Receive Optical Interface Data
ROID(1-4)
I
Unipolar data received from fibre optical
interface with 2.048 MBit/s. Latching of data is
done with the falling edge of RCLKI. Input
sense is selected by bit RC0.RDIS.
The Single Rail mode is selected if
LIM1.DRS = 1 and FMR0.RC1 = 0.
116, 137, RL2(1-4)
44, 65
I
I
Line Receiver 2
Analog Input from the external transformer.
Selected if LIM1.DRS = 0.
RDIN(1-4)
Receive Data Input Negative
Input for received dual rail PCM(-) route signal
which will be latched with the internal generated
Receive Route Clock. An internal DPLL will
extract the Receive Route Clock from the
incoming data pulse. The duty cycle of the
receiving signal has to be closely to 50 %.
The dual rail mode is selected if LIM1.DRS = 1
and FMR0.RC1 = 1. Input sense is selected by
bit RC0.RDIS (after Reset: active low).
Receive Clock Input
RCLKI(1-4) I
Receive clock input for the optical interface if
LIM1.DRS = 1 and FMR0.RC1/0 = 00.
Clock frequency: 2048 kHz
Semiconductor Group
16
09.98
PEB 22554
Pin Descriptions E1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
42, 67,
114, 132,
139
VDDR
I
Positive Power Supply for the analog receiver.
Power Supply Ground for the analog receiver
45, 64,
117,135,
136
VSSR
I
111, 142, XL2(1-4)
39, 70
O
Transmit Line 2
Analog output for the external transformer.
Selected if LIM1.DRS = 0. After Reset this pin is
in a high impedance state until register
FMR0.XC1 is set to one.
XDON(1-4) O
Transmit Data Output Negative
This digital output for transmitted dual rail
PCM(-) route signals can provide
– half bauded signals with 50% duty cycle
(LIM0.XFB = 0) or
– full bauded signals with 100% duty cycle
(LIM0.XFB = 1)
The data will be clocked off on the positive
transitions of XCLK in both cases. Output sense
is selected by bit LIM0.XDOS (after Reset:
active low).
The dual rail mode is selected if LIM1.DRS = 1
and FMR0.XC1 = 1. After Reset this pin is in a
high impedance state until register LIM1.DRS is
set to one.
XFM(1-4)
O
Transmit Frame Marker
This digital output marks the first bit of every
frame. This function is only available in the
optical interface mode LIM1.DRS=1 and
FMR0.XC1 = 0. The data will be clocked off on
the positive transitions of XCLK. After Reset this
pin is in a high impedance state until register
LIM1.DRS is set to one.
In remote loop configuration the XFM marker is
not valid.
Semiconductor Group
17
09.98
PEB 22554
Pin Descriptions E1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
109, 144, XL1(1-4)
37, 72
O
Transmit Line 1
Analog output for the external transformer.
Selected if LIM1.DRS = 0. After Reset this pin is
in a high impedance state until register
FMR0.XC1 is set to one.
XDOP(1-4) O
Transmit Data Output Positive
This digital output for transmitted dual rail
PCM(+) route signals can provide
– half bauded signals with 50% duty cycle
(LIM0.XFB = 0) or
– full bauded signals with 100% duty cycle
(LIM0.XFB = 1)
The data will be clocked off on the positive
transitions of XCLK in both cases. Output
sense is selected by bit LIM0.XDOS (after
Reset: active low). The dual rail mode is
selected if LIM1.DRS = 1 and FMR0.XC1 = 1.
After Reset this pin is in a high impedance state
until register LIM1.DRS is set to one.
Transmit Optical Interface Data
XOID(1-4)
O
Unipolar data sent to fibre optical interface with
2.048 MBit/s which will be clocked off on the
positive transitions of XCLK. Clocking off data in
NRZ code is done with 100 % duty cycle. Data
in CMI code are shifted out with 50 % or 100 %
duty cycle according to the CMI coding. Output
sense is selected by bit LIM0.XDOS (after
Reset: data is sent active high).
The single rail mode is selected if
LIM1.DRS = 1 and FMR0.XC1 = 0. After Reset
this pin is in a high impedance state until
register LIM1.DRS is set to one.
38, 71,
110, 143
VDDX
I
I
Positive Power Supply for analog transmitter
1, 36, 73, VSSX
Power Supply Ground for analog transmitter
108
Semiconductor Group
18
09.98
PEB 22554
Pin Descriptions E1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
133
MCLK
I
Reference Clock 2.048 MHz
A reference clock of 2.048 MHz +/- 50 ppm
must be provided to this pin.
134
48
NC
Not connected
SYNC
I + PU
Clock Synchronization
If a clock is detected at the SYNC pin the
DCO-Rs of the QuadFALC synchronize to this
2.048 MHz clock. This pin has an integrated pull
up resistor.
69
SEC
I + PU
Second Timer Input
A pulse with logical one for at least two
2.048MHz cycles will trigger the internal second
timer.
FSC
SEC
O
O
Enabled with GPC1.FSS2-0 an 8-kHz Frame
Synchronization Pulse is output via this pin.
The synchronization pulse is active high / low
for one 2 MHz cycle (pulse width = 488 ns).
Second Timer Output
Activated high every second for two 2.048 MHz
clock cycles. Enabled with GPC1.CSFP1-0.
119, 130, RCLK(1-4) I/O + PU
47, 61
Receive Clock
After Reset this port is configured to an input.
Setting of bit PC5.CRP will switch this port to an
output. Input function not defined.
Output function:
CMR1.RS1/0 = 00: Receive Clock extracted
from the incoming data pulses. Frequency:
2048 kHz
CMR1.RS1/0 = 01: RCLK is set high in case of
loss of signal (FRS0.LOS=1).
Optional one of the dejittered system clocks
sourced by DCO-R is clocked out. Clock
frequency: 2048 or 8192 kHz . Selected by
CMR1.RS1/0.
Wih GPC1.R1S1/0 one of the four RCLK(1-4) is
output on RCLK1.
Semiconductor Group
19
09.98
PEB 22554
Pin Descriptions E1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
8, 13, 26, SCLKR
31 (1-4)
I/O + PU
System Clock Receive
Working clock for the receive system interface
with a frequency of 16.384 / 8.192 / 4.096 /
2.048 MHz. If the receive elastic store is
bypassed SIC1.RBS1/0 the clock supplied on
this pin is ignored.
If SCLKR is configured to an output, the internal
working clock of the receive system interface
sourced by DCO-R or RCLK is output.
In system interface multiplex mode a 16.384 or
8.192 MHz clock has to be provided on
SCLKR1, which is a common clock for all 4 rec.
system interfaces.
9, 12, 27, RDO(1-4)
30
O
Receive Data Out
Received data which is sent to the system
highway. Clocking off data is done with the
rising or falling edge (SIC3.RESR) of
SCLKR(1-4) or RCLK(1-4) if the receive elastic
store is bypassed. The delay between the
beginning of time-slot 0 and the initial edge of
SCLKR(1-4) (after SYPR goes active) is
determined by the values of registers RC1 and
RC0.
If received data is shifted out with higher data
rates, the active channel phase is defined by
bits SIC2.SICS2-0. In system interface
multiplex mode all 4 received datastreams are
merged into a single datastream byte or bit
interleaved on RDO1.
Semiconductor Group
20
09.98
PEB 22554
Pin Descriptions E1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
4 -7,
RP(A-D)1
RP(A-D)2
RP(A-D)3
RP(A-D)4
I/O + PU
Receive Multifunction Port A-D
14 -17,
22 - 25,
32 - 35
Depending on programming of bits PC(1-
4).RPC(2-0) this multifunction ports carries
information to the system interface or from the
system to the QuadFALC. After Reset these
ports are configured to inputs. With the
selection of the pinfunction the in/output
configuration is also achieved. Depending on bit
SIC3.RESR all outputs / inputs of the receive
system interface are updated / sampled with the
rising or falling edge of SCLKR.
I + PU
Synchronous Pulse Receive (SYPR)
Defines the beginning of time-slot 0 at system
highway port RDO in conjunction with the
values of registers RC0/1. In system interface
multiplex mode SYPR has to be provided at
port RPA1 for all 4 channels and defines the
beginning of time-slot 0 on port RDO1/RSIG1.
Enabled with PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 000 (reset
configuration).
Pulse Cycle: Integer multiple of 125 µs.
Receive Frame Marker (RFM)
O
Enabled with PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 001.
CMR2.IRSP = 0: The receive frame marker
could be active high for a 2.048 MHz period
during any bit position of the current frame.
IProgramming is done with registers RC1/0.
CMR2.IRSP = 1: Internal generated frame
synchronization pulse generated by the DCO-R
circuitry. Together with registers RC1/0 the
frame begin on the receive system interface is
defined. This frame synchronization pulse is
active low 2.048 MHz period.
O
Receive Multiframe Begin (RMFB)
Enabled with PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 010.
RMFB marks the beginning of every received
multiframe (RDO). Optionally the time-slot 16
CAS multiframe begin could be marked
(SIC3.CASMF). Active high for one 2.048 MBit/s
period.
Semiconductor Group
21
09.98
PEB 22554
Pin Descriptions E1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
4 -7,
RP(A-D)1
RP(A-D)2
RP(A-D)3
RP(A-D)4
O
Receive Signaling Marker (RSIGM)
14 -17,
22 - 25,
32 - 35
Enabled with PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 011.
Marks the time-slots which are defined by
register RTR1-4 of every frame on port RDO.
O
Receive Signaling Data (RSIG)
Enabled with PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 100.
The received CAS signaling data is sourced by
this pin. Time-slots on RSIG correlates directly
to the time-slot assignment on RDO. In system
interface multiplex mode all four received
signaling datastreams are merged into a single
datastream byte or bit interleaved and is
transmitted on port RPB1.
O
O
Data Link Bit Receive (DLR)
Enabled with PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 101.
Marks the SA8-4 bits within the data stream on
RDO. The SA8-4 bit positions in time-slot 0 of
every frame not containing the frame alignment
signal are selected by register XC0.
Freeze Signaling (FREEZE)
Enabled with PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 110.
The freeze signaling status is active high by
detecting a Loss of Signal alarm, or a Loss of
CAS Frame Alignment or a receive slip (pos. or
neg.). It will hold high for at least one complete
multiframe after the alarm disappears. Setting
SIC2.FFS enforces a high on pin FREEZE.
Frame Synchronous Pulse (RFSP)
Enabled with PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 111.
Active low framing pulse derived from the
received PCM route signal. During loss of
synchronization (bit FRS0.LFA), this pulse is
suppressed (not influenced during alarm
simulation).
O
Pulse frequency: 8 kHz, Pulse width: 488 ns
Semiconductor Group
22
09.98
PEB 22554
Pin Descriptions E1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
3, 19, 21, SCLKX
50 (1-4)
I/O + PU
System Clock Transmit
Working clock for the transmit system interface
with a frequency of 16.384 / 8.192 / 4.096 /
2.048 MHz.
In system interface multiplex mode a 16.384 or
8.192 MHz clock has to be provided on
SCLKX1, which is a common clock for all 4
transmit system interfaces.
2, 18, 20, XDI(1-4)
49
I
Transmit Data In
Transmit data received from the system
highway. Latching of data is done with rising or
falling transitions of SCLKX according to bit
SIC3.RESX.
The delay between the beginning of time-slot 0
and the initial edge of SCLKX (after SYPX goes
active) is determined by the registers XC1/0.
In system interface multiplex mode latching of
datastream containing the 4 frames is done
byte or bit interleaved on port XDI1. In higher
data rates sampling of data is defined by bits
SIC2.SICS2-0.
Semiconductor Group
23
09.98
PEB 22554
Pin Descriptions E1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
120 - 123 XP(A-D)1
126 - 129 XP(A-D)2
I/O + PU
Transmit Multifunction Port A-D
Depending on programming of bits PC(1-
4).XPC(2-0) this multifunction ports carries
information to the system interface or from the
system to the QuadFALC. After Reset these
ports are configured to inputs. With the
selection of the pinfunction the in/output
configuration is also achieved. Depending on bit
SIC3.RESX all outputs / inputs of the transmit
system interface are updated / sampled with the
rising or falling edge of SCLKX
51 - 54
57 - 60
XP(A-D)3
XP(A-D)4
I + PU
Synchronous Pulse Transmit (SYPX)
Defines the beginning of time-slot 0 at system
highway port XDI in conjunction with the values
of registers XC0/1. In system interface multiplex
mode SYPX has to be provided at port XPA1 for
all 4 channels and defines the beginning of
time-slot 0 on port XDI1/XSIG1. Enabled with
PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 000 (reset configuration).
Pulse Cycle: Integer multiple of 125 µs.
Transmit Multiframe Synchronization
(XMFS)
I + PU
Enabled with PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 001 this port
defines the frame and multiframe begin on the
transmit system interface ports XDI and XSIG.
Depending on PC5.CXMFS the signal on XMFS
is active high or low. For correct operation of
XMFS no SYPX pin function should be selected
for the remaining multifunction ports of the
same channel.
In system interface multiplex mode XMFS has
to be provided at port XPB1 for all 4 channels.
Note: A new multiframe position has been
settled at least one multiframe after pulse XMFS
has been supplied.
Semiconductor Group
24
09.98
PEB 22554
Pin Descriptions E1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
120 - 123 XP(A-D)1
126 - 129 XP(A-D)2
I + PU
Transmit Signaling Data (XSIG)
Enabled with PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 010.
Input for transmit signaling data received from
the signaling highway. Optionally (SIC3.TTRF)
sampling of XSIG data is controlled by the
active high XSIGM marker. In higher data rates
sampling of data is defined by bits SIC2.SICS2-
0. In system interface multiplex mode latching
of the datastream containing the 4 signaling
multiframes is done byte or bit interleaved on
port XPC1.
51 - 54
57 - 60
XP(A-D)3
XP(A-D)4
I + PU
Transmit Clock (TCLK)
Enabled with PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 011.
A 2.048 / 8.192 MHz clock has to be sourced by
the system if the internal generated transmit
clock (DCO-X) should not be used. Optional this
input functions as a synchronization clock for
the DCO-X circuitry with a frequency of
2.048 MHz clock.
O
O
Transmit Multiframe Begin (XMFB)
XMFB marks the beginning of every transmitted
multiframe (XDI). Active high for one
2.048 MBit/s period. Enabled with PC(1-
4).XPC(2-0) = 100.
Transmit Signaling Marker (XSIGM)
Marks the transmit time-slots which are defined
by register TTR1-4 of every frame transmitted
via port XDI.
O
O
Enabled with PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 101.
Data Link Bit Transmit (DLX)
Marks the SA8-4 bits within the data stream on
XDI. The SA8-4 bit positions in time-slot 0 of
every frame not containing the frame alignment
signal are selected by register XC0.SA8E-
SA4E. Enabled with PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 110.
Transmit Clock (XCLK)
Transmit line clock, frequency: 2.048 MHz
Derived from SCLKX/R, RCLK or internally
generated by the DCO-X circuitry.
Enabled with PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 111.
Semiconductor Group
25
09.98
PEB 22554
Pin Descriptions E1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
11, 29,
VSS
I
Power Ground
56, 92,
102, 125,
Supply for digital subcircuits (0 V)
For correct operation, all six pins have to be
connected to ground.
10, 28,
VDD
I
Positive Power Supply
55, 91,
101, 124,
for the digital subcircuits (3.3 V)
For correct operation, all six pins have to be
connected to positive power supply.
112
TDI
I + PU
Test Data Input for Boundary Scan
acc. to IEEE Std. 1149.1
113
141
140
131
TDO
TMS
TCK
TRS
O
Test Data Output for Boundary Scan
Test Mode Select for Boundary Scan
Test Clock for Boundary Scan
I + PU
I + PU
I + PU
Test Reset for Boundary Scan
(active low)
If the JTAG Boundary Scan is not used this pin
can be connected to pin RES or VSS.
63, 118 RSVD
I/O + PU
Reserved
Semiconductor Group
26
09.98
PEB 22554
Pin Descriptions E1
Semiconductor Group
27
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
3
Functional Description E1
Functional Block Diagram
3.1
RCLK(1-4)
FALC 4
FALC 3
FALC 2
FALC 1
Receive Jitter
Attenuator
SCLKR(1-4)
RDO(1-4)
RPA(1-4)
RPB(1-4)
RPC(1-4)
RPD(1-4)
Receive Framer
Alarm Detector
PRBS Monitor
Line Decoder
RL1/RDIP/
ROID(1-4)
Long+Short
Haul Line
Interface
Receive Elastic
Buffer
Receive
Backplane
Interface
RL2/RDIN/
RCLKI(1-4)
or
Bypass
Perform. Monitor.
Clock/Data
Recovery
Signaling
Controller
CAS-CC
CAS-BR
HDLC/BOM
Controller
XDI(1-4)
XPA(1-4)
XPB(1-4)
XPC(1-4)
XPD(1-4)
XL1/XDOP/
XOID(1-4)
Transmit Elastic
Frame Gen.
Alarm Gen.
PRBS Generator
Line Coding
Long + Short
Haul Transmit
Line Interface
Transmit
Backplane
Interface
Buffer
or
Bypass
XL2/XDON/
XFM(1-4)
SCLKX(1-4)
Transmit Jitter
Attenuator
TCLK
RCLK
RCLK
(1-4)
TCLK SCLKX
(1-4) (1-4)
Boundary Scan
JTAG 1149
Microprocessor Interface
Intel/Motorola
Clocking Unit
TDI TMS TCK TRS TDO
D0...15 A0...9
WR/RW
ALE
BHE/BLE
IM
DBW INT
MCLK SYNC SEC/FSC
ITS10300
CS
RD/DS
RES
Figure 5Functional Block Diagram PEB 22554
Semiconductor Group
28
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
3.2
Microprocessor Interface
The communication between the CPU and the QuadFALC is done via a set of directly
accessible registers. The interface may be configured as Siemens/Intel or Motorola type
with a selectable data bus width of 8 or 16 bits.
The CPU transfers data to/from the QuadFALC (via 64 byte deep FIFOs per direction
and channel), sets the operating modes, controls function sequences, and gets status
information by writing or reading control/status registers. All accesses can be done as
byte or word accesses if enabled. If 16-bit bus width is selected, access to lower/upper
part of the data bus is determined by address line A0 and signal BHE/BLE as shown in
table 1 and 2.
In table 3 is shown how the ALE (address latch enable) line is used to control the bus
structure and interface type. The switching of ALE allows the QuadFALC to be directly
connected to a multiplexed address/data bus.
Mixed Byte/Word Access to the FIFOs
Reading from or writing to the internal FIFOs (RFIFO and XFIFO of each channel) can be
done using a 8-bit (byte) or 16-bit (word) access depending on the selected bus interface
mode. Randomly mixed byte/word access to the FIFOs is allowed without any
restrictions.
Table 1
Data Bus Access (16-Bit Intel Mode)
BHE
A0
Register Access
QuadFALC Data Pins
Used
0
0
FIFO word access
D0 – D15
Register word access (even addresses)
0
1
1
1
0
1
Register byte access (odd addresses)
D8 – D15
Register byte access (even addresses) D0 – D7
No transfer performed None
Semiconductor Group
29
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Table 2
Data Bus Access (16-Bit Motorola Mode)
BLE
A0
Register Access
QuadFALC Data Pins
Used
0
0
FIFO word access
D0 – D15
Register word access (even addresses)
0
1
1
1
0
1
Register byte access (odd addresses)
Register byte access (even addresses)
No transfer performed
D0 – D7
D8 – D15
None
Table 3
Selectable Bus and Microprocessor Interface Configuration
ALE
IM
1
Microprocessor interface
Bus Structure
demultiplexed
demultiplexed
multiplexed
GND/VDD
GND/VDD
switching
Motorola
Intel
0
0
Intel
The assignment of registers with even/odd addresses to the data lines in case of 16-bit
register access depends on the selected microprocessor interface mode:
Siemens/Intel
Motorola
(Adr. n + 1)
(Adr. n)
(Adr. n)
(Adr. n + 1)
↑
↓
↑
↓
Data Lines
D15
D8
D7
D0
n: even address
Complete information concerning register functions is provided in – Detailed Register
Description.
FIFO Structure
In transmit and receive direction of the signaling controller 64-byte deep FIFOs for each
channel are provided for the intermediate storage of data between the system internal
highway and the CPU interface. The FIFOs are divided into two halves of 32-bytes. Only
one half is accessible to the CPU at any time.
Semiconductor Group
30
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
In case 16-bit data bus width is selected by fixing pin DBW to logical ‘1’ word access to
the FIFOs is enabled. Data output to bus lines D0-D15 as a function of the selected
interface mode is shown in figure 6 and 7. Of course, byte access is also allowed.The
effective length of the accessible part of RFIFO can be changed from 32 bytes (RESET
value) down to 2 bytes independent for each channel.
RFIFO
XFIFO
32
32
1
32
1
32
4
3
2
1
Byte 4
Byte 3
Byte 2
Byte 1
4
3
2
1
Byte 4
Byte 3
Byte 2
Byte 1
D15
D8 D7
D0
D15
D8 D7
D0
ITD01798
Figure 6
FIFO Word Access (Intel Mode)
Semiconductor Group
31
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
RFIFO
XFIFO
32
32
1
32
1
32
4
3
2
1
Byte 4
Byte 3
Byte 2
Byte 1
4
3
2
1
Byte 4
Byte 3
Byte 2
Byte 1
D15
D8 D7
D0
D15
D8 D7
D0
ITD01799
Figure 7
FIFO Word Access (Motorola Mode)
Semiconductor Group
32
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Interrupt Interface
Special events in the QuadFALC are indicated by means of a single interrupt output with
programmable characteristics (open drain, push-pull; IPC register), which requests the
CPU to read status information from the QuadFALC, or to transfer data from/to
QuadFALC.
Since only one INT request output is provided, the cause of an interrupt must be
determined by the CPU by reading the QuadFALC’s interrupt status registers (CIS, GIS,
ISR0-4) that means the interrupt on pin INT and the interrupt status bits are reset by
reading the interrupt status registers. Register ISR0-4 are from type “Clear on Read“.
The structure of the interrupt status registers is shown in figure 8.
Channel Interrupt Status
CIS
C4
C3
C2
C1
Global Interrupt Status
(Per Channel)
GIS
ISR4 ISR3 ISR2 ISR1 ISR0
ISR4
IMR4
ISR3
IMR3
ISR0
IMR0
ISR2
IMR2
ISR1
IMR1
ITS10309
Figure 8
QuadFALC Interrupt Status Register Structure
Each interrupt indication of registers ISR0-4 can be selectively masked by setting the
corresponding bit in the corresponding mask registers IMR0-4. If the interrupt status bits
are masked, they neither generate an interrupt at INT nor are they visible in ISR0-4.
CIS, the non-maskable Channel Interrupt Status Register, serves as a pointer to pending
channel related global interrupt status registers. After the QuadFALC has requested an
interrupt by activating its INT pin, the CPU should first read the Channel Interrupt Status
Semiconductor Group
33
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
register CIS to identify the requesting channel. The global interrupt status register serves
itself as a pointer to pending interrupt status registers ISR0 -4 for each channel. After
reading the assigned global interrupt status register and the assigned interrupt status
registers ISR0- 4, the pointer in the GIS and CIS registers are cleared or updated if
another interrupt requires service.
If all pending interrupts are acknowledged by reading (CIS and GIS are reset), pin INT
goes inactive.
Updating of interrupt status registers ISR0…4 , GIS and CIS is only prohibited during
read access.
Masked Interrupts Visible in Status Registers
The channel and global interrupt status registers indicates those interrupt status
registers with active interrupt indications.
An additional mode may be selected via bit IPC.VIS.
In this mode, masked interrupt status bits neither generate an interrupt on pin INT nor are
they visible in CIS and GIS, but are displayed in the respective interrupt status
register(s) ISR0..4.
This mode is useful when some interrupt status bits are to be polled in the individual
interrupt status registers.
Notes:
• In the visible mode, all active interrupt status bits, whether the corresponding actual
interrupt is masked or not, are reset when the interrupt status register is read. Thus,
when polling of some interrupt status bits is desired, care must be taken that
unmasked interrupts are not lost in the process.
• All unmasked interrupt statuses are treated as before.
Please note that whenever polling is used, all interrupt status registers concerned have
to be polled individually (no “hierarchical” polling possible), since GIS only contains
information on actually generated - i.e. unmasked-interrupts.
3.3
Boundary Scan Interface
Identification Register: 32 bit
Version:
1 H
Part Number:
Manufacturer:
004D H
083 H
In QuadFALC a Test Access Port (TAP) controller is implemented. The essential part of
the TAP is a finite state machine (16 states) controlling the different operational modes
Semiconductor Group
34
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
of the boundary scan. Both, TAP controller and boundary scan, meet the requirements
given by the JTAG standard: IEEE 1149.1. Figure 9 gives an overview.
TRS
TAP Controller Reset
Test Access Port
Pins
TCK
1
2
CLOCK
Clock
Generation
Reset
CLOCK
Reset
TMS
TDI
Test
BS Data IN
Control Bus
Control
TAP Controller
-Finite State Machine
-Instruction Register (3 bits)
-Test Signal Generator
Data IN
6
ID Data OUT
TDO
Enable
SS Data OUT
n
Data OUT
ITB10938
Figure 9
Block Diagram of Test Access Port and Boundary Scan
Test handling is performed via the pins TCK (Test Clock), TMS (Test Mode Select), TDI
(Test Data Input) and TDO (Test Data Output). Test data at TDI are loaded with a 4-MHz
clock signal connected to TCK. ‘1’ or ‘0’ on TMS causes a transition from one controller
state to an other; constant ’1’ on TMS leads to normal operation of the chip.
If no boundary scan testing is planned TMS and TDI do not need to be connected since
pull-up transistors ensure high input levels in this case. Nevertheless it would be a good
practice to put the unused inputs to defined levels. In this case, if the JTAG is not used:
TMS = TCK = ‘1’.
After switching on the device (VDD = 0 to 3.3 V) pin TRS has to reset which forces the
TAP controller into test logic reset state.
Semiconductor Group
35
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
3.4
Receive Path
Peak
Detector
RL1/
RDIP/
ROID
RDP
RDN
Clock & Data
Recovery
Line
Decoder
Equalizer
RDATA
RL2/
RCLK
RDIN/
RCLKI
RCLK
Analog-
LOS
Detector
Alarm
Detector
RCLK
DCO-R
Receive
System
Interface
Receive
Jitter
Attenuator
SYNC
MCLK
FSC
Clocking
Unit
ITS10306
Figure 10
Receive Clock System
Receive Line Interface
For data input, three different data types are supported:
• Ternary coded signals received at multifunction ports RL1 and RL2 from a -34 dB
ternary interface. The ternary interface is selected if LIM1.DRS is reset.
• Digital dual rail signals received at ports RDIP and RDIN. The dual rail interface is
selected if LIM1.DRS and FMR0.RC1 is set.
• Unipolar data at port ROID received from a fibre optical interface. The optical interface
is selected if LIM1.DRS is set and FMR0.RC1 is reset.
Long Haul Interface
The QuadFALC has an integrated short- and long- haul line interface, comprising a
receive equalization network and noise filtering.
Semiconductor Group
36
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Receive Equalization Network
The QuadFALC automatically recovers the signals received on pins RL1/2 in a range of
up to -34 dB. The maximum reachable length with a 22 AWG twisted-pair cable is 1500
m. After Reset the QuadFALC is in „Short Haul“ mode, received signals are recovered up
to -10 dB of cable attenuation. Switching in „Long Haul“ mode is done by setting of
register LIM0.EQON.
The integrated receive equalization network recovers signals with up to -34 dB of cable
attenuation. Noise filters eliminate the higher frequency part of the received signals. The
incoming data is peak detected and sliced at 55% of the peak value to produce the
digital data stream. The received data is then forwarded to the clock & data recovery unit.
Receive Line Attenuation Indication
Status register RES reports the current receive line attenuation in a range from 0 to -34
dB in 25 steps of approximately 1.4 dB each. The least significant 5 bits of this register
indicate the cable attenuation in dB. These 5 bits are only valid in conjunction with the
most significant two bits (RES.EV1/0 = 01) .
Receive Clock and Data Recovery
The analog received signal at port RL1/2 is equalized and then peak-detected to produce
a digital signal. The digital received signal at port RDIP/N is directly forwarded to the
DPLL. The receive clock and data recovery extracts the route clock RCLK from the data
stream received at the RL1/2, RDIP/RDIN or ROID lines and converts the data stream
into a single rail, unipolar bit stream. The clock and data recovery works with the
internally generated high frequency clock based on MCLK. Normally the clock that is
output via pin RCLK is the recovered clock from the signal provided by RL1/2 or RDIP/N
has a duty cycle close to 50 %. The free run frequency is defined by MCLK = 2.048 MHz
in periods with no signal. The intrinsic jitter generated in the absence of any input jitter is
not more than 0.035 UI. In digital bipolar line interface mode the clock and data recovery
will accept only HDB3 coded signals with 50 % duty cycle.
Receive Line Coding
The HDB3 line code or the AMI coding is provided for the data received from the ternary
or the dual rail interface. In case of the optical interface a selection between the NRZ
code and the CMI Code (1T2B) with HDB3 postprocessing is provided. If CMI code
(1T2B) is selected the receive route clock will be recovered from the data stream. The
1T2B decoder does not correct any errors. In case of NRZ coding data will be latched
with the falling edge of pin RCLKI. The HDB3 code is used along with double violation
detection or extended code violation detection (selectable). In AMI code all code
violations will be detected.
The detected errors increment the code violation counter (16 bits length).
Semiconductor Group
37
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
When using the optical interface with NRZ coding, the decoder is by-passed and no code
violations will be detected.
The signal at the ternary interface is received at both ends of a transformer.
The operating modes 75 or 120 Ω are selectable by switching resistors in parallel. This
selection does not require changing transformers.
RL1
Line
FALC R
t2
t1
R2
RL2
ITS10967
Figure 11
Receiver Configuration
Recommended Receiver Configuration Values
Parameter
Characteristic Impedance [Ω]
120
100-120
1 : 1
75
R1 (± 1 %) [Ω]
t2 : t1
75
1 : 1
Loss of Signal Detection
There are different definitions for detecting Loss of Signal (LOS) alarms in the ITU-T
G.775 and ETS 300233. The QuadFALC covers all these standards. The LOS indication
is performed by generating an interrupt (if not masked) and activating a status bit.
Additionally a LOS status change interrupt is programmable via register IPC.SCI.
• Detection:
An alarm will be generated if the incoming data stream has no pulses (no transitions)
for a certain number (N) of consecutive pulse periods. “No pulse” in the digital receive
interface means a logical zero on pins RDIP/RDIN/ROID. A pulse with an amplitude
less than Q dB below nominal is the criteria for “no pulse” in the analog receive
interface (LIM1.DRS=0). The receive signal level Q is programmable via three control
bits LIM1.RIL2-0 in a range of about 900 to 50 mV differential voltage between pins
RL1/2. The number N can be set via an 8 bit register PCD. The contents of the PCD
register will be multiplied by 16, which results in the number of pulse periods or better,
the time which has to suspend until the alarm has to be detected. The range results
Semiconductor Group
38
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
therefore from 16 to 4096 pulse periods. ETS300233 requires detection intervals of at
least 1 ms. This time period results always in a LFA (Loss of Frame Alignment) before
a LOS will be detected.
• Recovery:
In general the recovery procedure starts after detecting a logical ‘one’ (digital receive
interface) or a pulse (analog receive interface) with an amplitude more than Q dB
(defined by LIM1.RIL2-0) of the nominal pulse. The value in the 8 bit register PCR
defines the number of pulses (1 to 255) to clear the LOS alarm. Additional recovery
conditions may be programmed by register LIM2.
Receive Jitter Attenuator
The receive jitter attenuator is placed for each channel in the receive path. The working
clock is an internally generated high frequency clock based on the clock provided on pin
MCLK (2.048 MHz). The jitter attenuator meets the requirements of ITU-T I.431, G.
736-739, G.823 and ETSI TBR12/13.
The internal PLL circuitry DCO-R generates an „jitterfree“ output clock which is directly
dependent on the phase difference of the incoming clock and the jitter attenuated
clock.The receive jitter attenuator could be either synchronized to the extracted receive
clock RCLK or to a 2.048 MHz clock provided on pin SYNC. The received data is written
into the receive elastic buffer with RCLK and are read out with the dejittered clock
sourced by DCO-R. The jitter attenuated clock could be output via pins RCLK or SCLKR.
Optionally a 8 kHz clock is provided on pin SEC/FSC.
The DCO-R circuitry attenuates the incoming jittered clock starting at 2 Hz jitter
frequency with 20 dB per decade fall off. Wander with a jitter frequency below 2 Hz will
be passed unattenuated. The intrinsic jitter in the absence of any input jitter is < 0.02 UI.
For some applications it might be useful starting of jitter attenuation at lower frequencies.
Therefore the corner frequency is switchable by the factor of ten downto 0.2 Hz
(LIM2.SCF).
The DCO-R circuitry is automatically centered to the nominal bit rate if the reference
clock on pin SYNC / RCLK is missed for two 2.048 MHz clock periods. This center
function of DCO-R may be optionally disabled (CMR2.DCF = 1) in order to accept a
gapped reference clock. In analog line interface mode the RCLK is always running. Only
in digital line interface mode with single rail data a gapped clock may occur.
Semiconductor Group
39
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
The receive jitter attenuator works in two different modes:
• Slave mode
In Slave mode (LIM0.MAS = 0) the DCO-R will be synchronized to the recovered
route clock. In case of LOS the DCO-R switches automatically to Master mode. If bit
CMR1.DCS is set automatic switching from RCLK to SYNC is disabled.
• Master mode
In Master mode (LIM0.MAS = 1) the jitter attenuator is in free running mode if no clock
on pin SYNC is supplied. If a c2.048 MHz clock at the SYNC input is applied the
DCO-R will synchronize to this input.
The following table shows the clock modes with the corresponding synchronization
sources.
Mode
Internal
SYNC
System Clocks generated by DCO-R
LOS Active Input
Master
Master
independent Fixed to
VDD
DCO-R centered, if CMR2.DCF =0. (CMR2.DCF
should not be set)
independent 2 MHz
Synchronized on SYNC input (external 2 MHz)
Slave
Slave
Slave
no
Fixed to
VDD
Synchronized on Line RCLK1-4 , selected by
CMR1.DRSS1/0
no
2 MHz
Synchronized on Line RCLK1-4 , selected by
CMR1.DRSS1/0
yes
Fixed to
VDD
CMR1.DCS = 0:
DCO-R is centered, if CMR2.DCF = 0.
(CMR2.DCF should not be set)
CMR1.DCS = 1:
Synchronized on Line RCLK1-4, selected by
CMR1.DRSS1/0
Slave
yes
2 MHz
CMR1.DCS = 0:
Synchronized on SYNC input
(external 2.048 MHz)
CMR1.DCS = 1:
Synchronized on Line RCLK1-4, selected by
CMR1.DRSS1/0
Semiconductor Group
40
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
The jitter attenuator meets the jitter transfer requirements of the Rec. I.431 and
G.735-739 (refer to figure 12).
ITD10312
10
dB
ITU G.736 Template
FALC R
0
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
1
10
100
1000
10000
Hz 100000
Frequency
Figure 12
Jitter Attenuation Performance
Also the requirements of ETSI TBR12/13 will be satisfied. Insuring adequate margin
against TBR12/13 output jitter limit with 15 UI input at 20 Hz the DCO-R circuitry will start
jitter attenuation at nearly 2 Hz.
Semiconductor Group
41
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Jitter Tolerance
The QuadFALC receiver’s tolerance to input jitter complies to ITU for CEPT application.
Figure 13 shows the curves of different input jitter specifications stated below as well as
the QuadFALC performance.
ITD10308
1000
PUB 62411
UI
TR-NWT 000499 Cat II
CCITT G.823
ITU-T I.431
FALC R
100
10
1
0.1
1
10
100
1000
10000
Hz 100000
Jitter Frequency
Figure 13
Jitter Tolerance
Output Jitter
In the absence of any input jitter the QuadFALC generates the output jitter, which is
specified in the table below..
Specification
Measurement Filter Bandwidth
Output Jitter
(UI peak to peak)
Lower Cutoff
Upper Cutoff
100 kHz
ITU-T I.431
20 Hz
< 0.015
< 0.015
700 Hz
100 kHz
Transmit jitter attenuator
The transmit jitter attenuator DCO-X circuitry generates a „jitterfree“ transmit clock for
each channel and meets the following requirements: ITU-T I.431, G. 703, G. 736-739,
G.823 and ETSI TBR12/13. The DCO-X circuitry works internally with the same high
frequency clock as the receive jitter attenuator it does. It synchronizes either to the
working clock of the transmit backplane interface or the clock provided by pin TCLK or
Semiconductor Group
42
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
the receive clock RCLK (remote loop / loop-timed). The DCO-X attenuates the incoming
clock jitter starting at 2 Hz with 20 dB per decade fall off. With the jitter attenuated clock,
which is directly dependent on the phase difference of the incoming clock and the jitter
attenuated clock, data is read from the transmit elastic buffer (2 frames) or from the
JATT buffer (2 frames, remote loop) Wander with a jitter frequency below 2 Hz are
passed transparently.
The DCO-X accepts gapped clocks which are used in ATM or SDH/SONET applications.
The jitter attenuated clock is output by pin XCLK.
The transmit jitter attenuator could be disabled. In that case data is read from the
transmit elastic buffer with the clock sourced by pin TCLK (2.048 or 8.192 MHz).
Synchronization between SCLKX and TCLK has to done externally.
In the loop-timed clock configuration (LIM2.ELT) the DCO-X circuitry generates a
transmit clock which is frequency synchronized to RCLK. In this configuration the
transmit elastic buffer has to be enabled.
XL1/
XDOP/
XOID
DR
Transmit
Elastic
Store
D
DR
Framer
XDI
A
XL2/
XDON
Pulse Shaper
XCLK
TCLK
(E1: 8MHz)
(T1: 6MHz)
SCLKR
÷ 4
Internal Clock of
Receive System
Interface
E1: 8MHz
T1: 6MHz
DCO-X
SCLKX
TCLK
RCLK
Transmit
Jitter
Attenuator
Clocking
Unit
MCLK
ITS10305
Figure 14
Transmit Clock System
Note: DR = Dual Rail Interface
DCO-X Digital Controlled Oscillator Transmit
Semiconductor Group
43
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Framer/Synchronizer
The following functions are performed:
• Synchronization on pulse frame and multiframe
• Error indication when synchronization is lost. In this case, AIS is automatically sent to
the system side and Remote Alarm to the remote end if en/disabled.
• Initiating and controlling of resynchronization after reaching the asynchronous state.
This may be automatically done by the QuadFALC, or user controlled via the
microprocessor interface.
• Detection of remote alarm indication from the incoming data stream.
• Separation of service bits and data link bits. This information is stored in status
registers.
• Generation of various maskable interrupt statuses of the receiver functions.
• Generation of control signals to synchronize the CRC checker, and the receive elastic
buffer.
If programmed and applicable to the selected multiframe format, CRC checking of the
incoming data stream is done by generating check bits for a CRC submultiframe
according to the CRC 4 procedure (refer to ITU-T Rec. G704). These bits are compared
with those check bits that are received during the next CRC submultiframe. If there is at
least one mismatch, the CRC error counter (16 bit) will be incremented.
Receive Elastic Buffer
The received bit stream is stored in the receive elastic buffer. The memory is organized
as a two-frame elastic buffer with a maximum size of 64 × 8 bit. The size of the elastic
buffer can be independently configured for the receive and transmit direction.
Programming of the receive buffer size is done by SIC1.RBS1/0 :
• RBS1/0 = 00 : two frame buffer or 512 bits
Maximum of wander amplitude (peak-to-peak): 190 UI (1 UI = 488 ns )
average delay after performing a slip: 1 frame or 256 bits
• RBS1/0 = 01 : one frame buffer or 256 bits
Max. wander amplitude: 100 UI
average delay after performing a slip: 128 bits, (SYPR = output)
• RBS1/0 = 10 : short buffer or 96 bits :
Max. wander amplitude: 38 UI
average delay after performing a slip: 48 bits, (SYPR = output)
• RBS1/0 = 11 : Bypass of the receive elastic buffer
The functions are:
• Clock adaption between system clock (SCLKR) and internally generated route clock
(RCLK).
• Compensation of input wander and jitter.
• Frame alignment between system frame and receive route frame
Semiconductor Group
44
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
• Reporting and controlling of slips
Controlled by special signals generated by the receiver, the unipolar bit stream is
converted into bit-parallel data which is circularly written to the elastic buffer using
internally generated Receive Route Clock (RCLK).
Reading of stored data is controlled by the System Clock sourced by SCLKR or by the
receive jitter attenuator and the Synchronous Pulse (SYPR) in conjunction with the
programmed offset values for the receive time-slot/clock-slot counters. After conversion
into a serial data stream, the data is given out via port RDO. If the receive buffer is
bypassed programming of the time-slot offset is disabled and data is clocked off with
RCLK instead of SCLKR.
In one frame or short buffer mode the delay through the receive buffer is reduced to an
average delay of 128 or 46 bits. In bypass mode the time-slot assigner is disabled. In this
case SYPR programmed as input is ignored. Slips will be performed in all buffer modes
except the bypass mode. After a slip is detected the read pointer is adjusted to one half
of the current buffer size.
The following table gives an overview of the receive buffer operating mode .
Buffer Size
TS Offset program.
Slip perform.
(SIC1.RBS1/0)
(RC1/0) + SYPR = input
bypass1)
short buffer
1 frame
disabled
recom. SYPR = output
no
not recommended,
recom. SYPR = output
yes
yes
yes
not recommended,
recom. SYPR = output
2 frames
enabled
1) In bypass mode the clock provided on pin SCLKR is ignored. Clocking is done with RCLK.
In single frame mode ( SIC1. RBS) , values of receive time-slot offset (RC1/0) have to be
specified great enough to prevent too great approach of frame begin (line side) and
frame begin (system side).
Figure 15 gives an idea of operation of the receive elastic buffer:
A slip condition is detected when the write pointer (W) and the read pointer (R) of the
memory are nearly coincident, i.e. the read pointer is within the slip limits (S +, S –). If a
slip condition is detected, a negative slip (one frame or one half of the current buffer size
is skipped) or a positive slip (one frame or one half of the current buffer size is read out
twice) is performed at the system interface, depending on the difference between RCLK
and the current working clock of the receive backplane interface. i.e. on the position of
Semiconductor Group
45
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
pointer R and W within the memory. A positive / negative slip is indicated in the interrupt
status bits ISR3.RSP and ISR3.RSN.
Frame 2 Time Slots
R’
R
Slip
S-
S+
W
Frame 1 Time Slots
Moment of Slip Detection
W : Write Pointer (Route Clock controlled)
R : Read Pointer (System Clock controlled)
S+, S- : Limits for Slip Detection (mode dependent)
ITD10952
Figure 15
The Receive Elastic Buffer as Circularly Organized Memory
Semiconductor Group
46
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Receive Signaling Controller
Each of the four signaling controller can be programmed to operate in various signaling
modes. The QuadFALC will perform the following signaling and data link methods:
• HDLC or LAPD access
In case of common channel signaling the signaling procedure HDLC/SDLC or LAPD
according to Q.921 will be supported. The signaling controller of the QuadFALC
performs the FLAG detection , CRC checking, address comparisson and zero
bit-removing. The received data flow and the address recognition features can be
performed in very flexible way, to satisfy almost any practical requirements.
Depending on the selected address mode, the QuadFALC performs a 1 or 2 byte
address recognition. If a 2-byte address field is selected, the high address byte is
compared with the fixed value FEH or FCH (group address) as well as with two
individually programmable values in RAH1 and RAH2 registers. According to the
ISDN LAPD protocol, bit 1 of the high byte address will be interpreted as
COMMAND/RESPONSE bit (C/R) and will be excluded from the address comparison.
Buffering of receive data is done in a 64 byte deep RFIFO. Refer also to chapter 4.1.
In signaling controller transparent mode, fully transparent data reception without
HDLC framing is performed, i.e. without FLAG recognition, CRC checking or
bit-stuffing. This allows user specific protocol variations.
The QuadFALC offers the flexibility to extract data during certain time-slots. Any
combination of time-slots may be programmed independently for the receive and
transmit direction.
• Sa bit Access
The QuadFALC supports the Sa bit signaling of time-slot 0 of every other frame as
follows:
- the access via registers RSW
- the access via registers RSA4-8, capable of storing the information for a complete
multiframe
- the access via the 64 byte deep receive FIFO of the signaling controller. This Sa bit
access gives the opportunity to receive a transparent bit stream as well as HDLC
frames where the signaling controller automatically processes the HDLC protocol.
Any combination of Sa bits which should be extracted and stored in the RFIFO may be
selected by XC0.SA8-4. The access to the RFIFO is supported by ISR0.RME / RPF.
• Channel Associated Signaling CAS
The signaling information is carried in time-slot 16 (TS16). Receive data is stored in
registers RS1-16 on the CAS multiframe boundary. The signaling controller samples
the bit stream either on the receive line side or if external signaling is enabled on the
receive system side. External signaling is enabled by selecting the RSIG pinfunction
via register PC1-4.
Optionally the complete CAS multiframe may be transmitted on pin RSIG. The
signaling data is clocked out with the working clock of the receive highway (SCLKR)
in conjunction with the rec. synchron. pulse (SYPR). Data on RSIG will be transmitted
Semiconductor Group
47
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
in the last 4 bits per time-slot and are aligned to the data on RDO. The first 4 bits per
time-slot could be optionally fixed high or low, except time-slot 0 and 16. In time-slot
0 the FAS / NFAS word is transmitted, in time-slot 16 the CAS multiframe pattern. Data
on RSIG are only valid if the freeze signaling status is inactive. With FMR1.SAIS an all
ones may be transmitted on RDO and RSIG.
The signaling procedure will be done as it is described in ITU-T G.704 and G.732.
The main functions are:
- Synchronization to a CAS multiframe
- Detection of AIS and Remote Alarm in CAS multiframes
- Separation of CAS Service bits X1-X3
- Storing of received signaling data in registers RS1-16 with last look capability
Updating of the received signaling information is controlled by the freeze signaling
status. The freeze signaling status is automatically activated if a Loss of Signal, or a
Loss of CAS Multiframe Alignment or a receive slip occurs. The current freeze status
is output on port FREEZ (RPA-D) and indicated by register SIS.SFS. If SIS.SFS is
active updating of the registers 1-16 is disabled. Optionally automatic freeze signaling
may be disabled by setting bit SIC3.DAF.
To relieve the µP load from always reading the complete RS1-16 buffer every 2 msec
the QuadFALC notifies the µP via interrupt ISR0.CASC only when signaling changes
from one multiframe to the next. Additionally the QuadFALC generates a receive
signaling data change pointer (RSP1/2) which directly points to the updated RS1-16
register .
Semiconductor Group
48
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
3.5
System Interface
The QuadFALC offers a flexible feature for system designers where for transmit and
receive direction different system clocks and system pulses are necessary. The interface
to the receive system highway is realized by two data buses, one for the data RDO and
one for the signaling data RSIG. The receive highway is clocked via pin SCLKR, while
the interface to the transmit system highway is independently clocked via pin SCLKX.
The frequency of these working clocks and the data rate of 2.048 / 4.096 / 8.192 / 16.384
MBit/s for the receive and transmit system interface is programmable by SIC1.SSC1/0 ,
and SIC1.SSD1, FMR1.SSD0. Selectable system clock and data rates and their valid
combinations are shown in the table below
Table 4
System Clocking and Data Rates
System Data Rate Clock Rate
2.048 MHz
Clock Rate
4.096 MHz
Clock Rate
8.192 MHz
Clock Rate
16.384 MHz
2.048 MBit/s
4.096 MBit/s
8.192 MBit/s
16.384 MBit/s
x
x
x
x
x
--
x
x
x
x
--
--
--
x
--
--
x = valid , -- = invalid
Generally the data or marker on the system interface are clocked off or latched on the
rising or falling edge (SIC3.RESR/X) of the SCLKR/X clock. Some clocking rates allow
transmitting of time-slots in different channel- phases. Each channel-phase which should
be active on ports RDO, XDI, RP(A-D) and XP(A-D) is programmable by SIC2.SICS2-0,
the remaining channel-phases are cleared or ignored.
The signals on pin SYPR in conjunction with the assigned timeslot offset in register RC0
and RC1 will define the beginning of a frame on the receive system highway.The signal
on pin SYPX in conjunction with the assigned timeslot offset in register XC0 and XC1 will
define the beginning of a frame on the transmit system highway.
Adjusting the frame begin (time-slot 0, bit 0) relative to SYPR/X is possible in the range
of 0 - 125 µsec. The minimum shift of varying the time-slot 0 begin could be programmed
between 1 bit and 1/8 bit depending of the system clocking and data rate. e.g. with a
clocking / data rate of 2.048 MHz shifting is done bitwise, while running the QuadFALC
with 16.384 MHz and 2.048 MBit/s data rate it is done by 1/8 bit.
A receive frame marker RFM could be activated during any bit position of the entire
frame. Programming is done with registers RC1/0. The pin function RFM is selected by
PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 001. The RFM selection disables the internal time-slot assigner, no
offset programming is performed. The receive frame marker is active high for one
Semiconductor Group
49
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
2.048 MHz cycle and is clocked off with the rising or falling edge of the clock which is
in/output on port SCLKR.
SCLKR
DCO-R
RSIGM
Receive
RSIG
Signaling
Buffer
RMFB
RFM
DLR
FREEZ
RFSPQ
RP(A-D)
Receive
Backplane
Receive
Elastic
Buffer
SYRPQ
DCO-R
RDO
BYP.
Receive
Data
Receive
Jitter
Attenuator
Receive
Clock
SCLKX
DCO-R
XSIG
Transmit
Signaling
Buffer
SYPXQ
XMFS
TCLK
XP(A-D)
Transmit
XSIGM
XMFB
DLX
Backplane
Transmit
Elastic
Buffer
XCLK
BYP.
PLB
Transmit
Data
XDI
Transmit
Jitter
Attenuator
Transmit
Clock
TCLK
RCLK
ITS10298
Figure 16
System Interface
System Interface Multiplex Mode
Setting this bit enables a single rail data stream of 16.384 or 8.192 MBit/s containg all
four E1 frames. The receive system interface for all four channels is running with the
clock provided on SCLKR1 and the frame sync pulse provided on SYPR1. The transmit
system interface is running with SCLKX1 and SYPX1. Data will be transmitted / accepted
Semiconductor Group
50
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
in a byte or bit interleaved format. Bit interleaving is valid with the 16.384 or 8.192 MHz
clocking rates. All four single channel FALCs(1-4) have to be configured equally with the
following parameters:
• clocking rate : 16.384 / 8.192 MHz ,
SIC1.SSC1/0
• data rate : 16.384 / 8.192 MBit/s, SIC1.SSD1, FMR1.SSD0
• time-slot offset programming : RC1/0 , XC1/0
• receive buffer size : SIC1.RBS1/0 = 00 (2 frames)
The multiplexed data stream is internal logically ored. Therefore the selection of the
active channel phase have to be configured different for each single channel FALC.
Programming is done with SIC2.SICS2-0.
In system interface multiplex mode signals on RDO2-4 and RSIG2-4 are undefined,
while signals on SCLKR2-4, SYPR2-4, SCLKX2-4, SYPX2-4, XDI2-4 and XSIG2-4 are
ignored.
Semiconductor Group
51
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Multi Frame 1
FRAME 1 FRAME 2 FRAME 3
Multi Frame 2
FRAME 15 FRAME 16 FRAME 1 FRAME 2
FRAME 15
RDO
RMFB
SYPR
SYPR
Trigger
Edge1)
Sample
Edge
SCLKR
8.192 MHz
T
Programmable via RC0/1
SCLKR
2.048 MHz
TS0
RDO/RSIG
2 Mbit/s Data Rate
Bit 255 Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
RDO/RSIG
4 Mbit/s Data Rate
(SCLKR = 8.192 MHz)
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
Bit 255
RDO/RSIG
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
4 Mbit/s Data Rate
(SCLKR = 8.192 MHz)
DLR
Sa-Bit Marker
XC0 . SA8E-SA4E
marks any
Sa Bit
4 Mbit Interface
2 Mbit Interface
RFM
Receive Frame Marker
RC0/1
marks any
bit position
2 Mbit Interface
4 Mbit Interface
RSIGM
Time-Slot Marker
RTR1...4
marks any
Time-Slot
1)
ITD10951
only falling trigger edge shown, depending on Bit SIC3.RESR
Figure 17
Receive System Interface Clocking
Semiconductor Group
52
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
125
µs
SYPR
SCLKR
T
TS31
TS0
TS1
TS31
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RDO
A B C D FAS / NFAS
A B C D
A B C D
RSIG
T
= Time-Slot Offset (Register RC1/0)
FAS = Frame Alignment Signal
NFAS = TS0 not containing the FAS word
ABCD = Signaling Bits for Time-Slot 1-30 of CAS Multiframe
ITT10517
Figure 18
2.048 MHz Receive Signaling Highway
Time-Slot Assigner
The QuadFALC offers the flexibility to connect data during certain time-slots, as defined
by registers RTR1-4 and TTR1-4, to the RFIFO and XFIFO, respectively. Any
combinations of time-slots can be programmed for the receive and transmit directions. If
CCR1.EITS = 1 the selected time-slots (RTR1-4) will be stored in the RFIFO of the
signaling controller and the XFIFO contents will be inserted into the transmit path as
controlled by registers TTR1-4.
Semiconductor Group
53
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Table 5
Time-Slot Assigner
Time-Slots
Receive Time-Slot
Register
Transmit Time-Slot
Register
RTR1.7
RTR1.6
RTR1.5
RTR1.4
RTR1.3
RTR1.2
RTR1.1
RTR1.0
RTR2.7
RTR2.6
RTR2.5
RTR2.4
RTR2.3
RTR2.2
RTR2.1
RTR2.0
RTR3.7
RTR3.6
RTR3.5
RTR3.4
RTR3.3
RTR3.2
RTR3.1
RTR3.0
RTR4.7
RTR4.6
RTR4.5
RTR4.4
RTR4.3
RTR4.2
RTR4.1
RTR4.0
TTR1.7
TTR1.6
TTR1.5
TTR1.4
TTR1.3
TTR1.2
TTR1.1
TTR1.0
TTR2.7
TTR2.6
TTR2.5
TTR2.4
TTR2.3
TTR2.2
TTR2.1
TTR2.0
TTR3.7
TTR3.6
TTR3.5
TTR3.4
TTR3.3
TTR3.2
TTR3.1
TTR3.0
TTR4.7
TTR4.6
TTR4.5
TTR4.4
TTR4.3
TTR4.2
TTR4.1
TTR4.0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Semiconductor Group
54
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
3.6
Transmit Path
Compared to the receive paths the inverse functions are performed for the transmit
direction.
The interface to the transmit system highway is realized by two data buses, one for the
data XDI and one for the signaling data XSIG. The time-slot assignment is equivalent to
the receive direction.
Latching of data is controlled by the System Clock (SCLKX) and the Synchronous Pulse
(SYPX / XMFS) in conjunction with the programmed offset values for the Transmit
Time-slot/Clock-slot Counters XC1/0. The frequency of the working clock of 2.048 /
4.096 / 8.192 / 16.384 MHz for the transmit system interface is programmable by
SIC1.SSC1/0. Refer also table 4.
The received bit stream on ports XDI and XSIG could be multiplexed internally on a
time-slot basis, if enabled by SIC3.TTRF = 1. The data received at port XSIG could be
sampled if the transmit signaling marker XSIGM is active high. Data at port XDI will be
sampled if XSIGM is low for the respective time-slot. Programming the XSIGM marker is
done with registers TTR1-4.
125
µs
SYPX
SCLKX
T
TS31
TS0
TS1
TS31
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
XDI
A B C D FAS / NFAS
A B C D
A B C D
XSIG
T
= Time-Slot Offset (Register XC1/0)
FAS = Frame Alignment Signal
NFAS = TS0 not containing the FAS word
ABCD = Signaling Bits for Time-Slot 1-30 of CAS Multiframe
ITT10518
Figure 19
2.048 MHz Transmit Signaling Highway
Semiconductor Group
55
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Multi Frame 1
Multi Frame 2
FRAME0
FRAME1
FRAME2
FRAME15
FRAME0
FRAME1
FRAME2
XDI
XMFB
XMFS
SYPX
Bit 0 Sample Edge 1)
Trigger Edge 1)
SYPX
T 2)
SCLKX
XSIGM
XDI/XSIG
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
TS0
DLX
Sa-Bit Marker
XC0.SA8E-SA4E
Bit 4
marked
1) only falling edge mode shown
2) delay T is programmable by XC0/1;
Transmit Clocking E1 Rev.1.0
Figure 20
Transmit System Interface Clocking: 2.048 MHz
Semiconductor Group
56
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Multi Frame 1
Multi Frame 2
FRAME0
FRAME1
FRAME2
FRAME15
FRAME0
FRAME1
FRAME2
XDI
XMFB
XMFS
SYPX
Bit 0 Sample Edge 1)
Trigger Edge 1)
SYPX
T 2)
SCLKX
XSIGM
Time-Slot Marker
XTR1...4
SIC2.SICS2-0=000
XDI/XSIG
SIC2.SICS2-0=000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
XDI/XSIG
SIC2.SICS2-0=001
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DLX
Sa-Bit Marker
XC0.SA8E-SA4E
SIC2.SICS2-0=000
Bit 4
marked
DLX
Sa-Bit Marker
XC0.SA8E-SA4E
SIC2.SICS2-0=000
Bit 4
marked
1) only falling edge mode shown
2) delay T is programmable by XC0/1;
Transmit Clocking E1 8MHz Rev.1.0
Figure 21
Transmit System Interface Clocking: 8.192 MHz and 4.096 MBit/s
Semiconductor Group
57
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Transmit Signaling Controller
Similar to the receive signaling controller the same signaling methods and the same
time-slot assignment is provided. The QuadFALC will perform the following signaling and
data link methods:
• HDLC or LAPD access
The transmit signaling controller of the QuadFALC performs the FLAG generation,
CRC generation, zero bit-stuffing and programmable IDLE code generation. Buffering
of transmit data is done in the 64 byte deep XFIFO. The signaling information will be
internally multiplexed with the data applied to port XDI or XSIG.
In signaling controller transparent mode, fully transparent data transmission without
HDLC framing is performed. Optionally the QuadFALC supports the continuous
transmission of the XFIFO contents.
The QuadFALC offers the flexibility to insert data during certain time-slots. Any
combinations of time-slots may be programmed separately for the receive and
transmit directions.
• Sa bit Access
The QuadFALC supports the Sa bit signaling of time-slot 0 of every other frame as
follows:
- the access via registers XSW
- the access via registers XSA8-4, capable of storing the information for a complete
multiframe
- the access via the 64 byte deep XFIFO of the signaling controller. This Sa bit access
gives the opportunity to transparent a bit stream as well as HDLC frames where the
signaling controller automatically processes the HDLC protocol. Any combination of
Sa bits which should be inserted in the outgoing data stream may be selected by
XC0.SA8-4.
• Channel Associated Signaling CAS
Transmit data stored in registers XS1-16 will transmitted on a multiframe boundary in
time-slot 16. The signaling controller inserts the bit stream either on the transmit line
side or if external signaling is enabled on the transmit system side via pinfunction
XSIG, which is selected by register PC1-4.
In external signaling mode the signaling data is received at port XSIG. The signaling
data is sampled with the working clock of the transmit system interface (SCLKX) in
conjunction with the transmit synchron. pulse (SYPX). Data on XSIG will be latched in
the bit positions 5-8 per time-slot, bits 1-4 will be ignored. Time-slot 0 and 16 are
sampled completly (bit 1-8). The received CAS multiframe will be inserted frame
aligned into the data stream on XDI. Data sourced by the internal signaling controller
will overwrite the external signaling data.
If the QuadFALC is optioned for no signaling, the data stream from the system interface
will pass the QuadFALC undisturbed.
Semiconductor Group
58
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Transmit Elastic Buffer
The received bit stream from pin XDI is optionally stored in the transmit elastic buffer.
The memory is organized as the receive elastic buffer. The functions are also equal to
the receive side. Programming of the transmit buffer size is done by SIC1.XBS1/0 :
• XBS1/0 = 00 : Bypass of the transmit elastic buffer
• XBS1/0 = 01 : one frame buffer or 256 bits
Max. wander amplitude (peak-to-peak): 94 UI (1 UI = 488 ns )
average delay after performing a slip: 128 bits
• XBS1/0 = 10 : two frame buffer or 512 bits
Maximum of wander amplitude: 190 UI
average delay after performing a slip: 1 frame or 256 bits
• XBS1/0 = 11 : short buffer or 92 bits :
Max. wander amplitude: 18 usec
average delay after performing a slip: 46 bits
The functions of the transmit buffer are:
• Clock adaption between system clock (SCLKX) and internally generated transmit
route clock (XCLK).
• Compensation of input wander and jitter.
• Frame alignment between system frame and transmit route frame
• Reporting and controlling of slips
Writing of received data from XDI is controlled by SCLKX/R and SYPX / XMFS in
conjunction with the programmed offset values for the transmit time-slot/clock-slot
counters. Reading of stored data is controlled by the clock generated by DCO-X
circuitry or the externally generated TCLK and the transmit framer. With the dejittered
clock data is read from the transmit elastic buffer and are forwarded to the transmitter.
Reporting and controlling of slips is done according to the receive direction. Positive /
negative slips are reported in interrupt status bits ISR4.XSP and ISR4.XSN. If the
transmit buffer is bypassed data is directly transfered to the transmitter.
The following table gives an overview of the transmit buffer operating modes.
Buffer Size
bypass
TS Offset program.
enabled
Slip perform.
no
short buffer
1 frame
enabled
yes
yes
yes
enabled
2 frames
enabled
Semiconductor Group
59
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Transmitter
The serial bit stream is then processed by the transmitter which has the following
functions:
• Frame/multiframe synthesis of one of the two selectable framing formats
• Insertion of service and data link information
• AIS generation (Alarm indication signal)
• Remote alarm generation
• CRC generation and insertion of CRC bits
CRC bits inversion in case of a previously received CRC error
• IDLE code generation per DS0
The frame / multiframe boundries of the transmitter may be externally synchronized by
using the SYPX / XMFS pin. Any change of the transmit time-slot assignment will
subsequently produce a change of the framing bit positions on the line side. This feature
is required if signaling- and service- bits are routed through the switching network and
are inserted in transmit direction via the system interface.
In loop-timed configuration (LIM2.ELT) disconnecting the control of the transmit system
highway from the transmitter is done by setting XSW.XTM. The transmitter is now in a
free running mode without any possibility to actualize the multiframe position in case of
changing the transmit time-slot assignment. The framing bits are generated independent
of the transmit system interface. For proper operation the transmit elastic buffer size
should be programmed to 2 frames.
The contents of selectable time-slots can be overwritten by the pattern defined via
register IDLE. The selection of “idle channels” is done by programming the four-byte
registers ICB1 … ICB4.
Semiconductor Group
60
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Transmit Line Interface
The analog transmitter transforms the unipolar bit stream to ternary (alternate bipolar)
return to zero signals of the appropriate programmable shape. The unipolar data is
provided by the digital transmitter.
R1
XL1
FALC R
t1
t2
Line
R1
XL2
ITS10968
Figure 22
Transmitter Configuration
Recommended Transmitter Configuration Values
Parameter
Characteristic Impedance [Ω]
120
7.5
1 : 2.4
75
R1 (± 1 %) [Ω]
7.5
t2 : t1
1 : 2.4
Similar to the receive line interface three different data types are supported:
• Ternary Signal
Single rail data is converted into a ternary signal which is output on pins XL1 and XL2.
The HDB3 and AMI line code is employed. Selected by FMR0.XC1/0 and
LIM1.DRS = 0.
• Dual rail data PCM(+), PCM(–) at multifunction ports XDOP/ XDON with 50 % or
100 % duty cycle and with programmable polarity. Line coding is done in the same
way as in the ternary interface. Selected by FMR0.XC1/0 and LIM1.DRS = 1.
• Unipolar data on port XOID will be transmitted either in NRZ (Non Return to Zero) with
100 % duty cycle or in CMI (Code Mark Inversion or known as 1T2B) Code with or
without (FMR3.CMI) preprocessed HDB3 coding to a fibre optical interface. Clocking
off data is done with the rising edge of the transmit clock XCLK (2048 kHz) and with
a programmable polarity. Selection is done by FMR0.XC1 = 0 and LIM1.DRS = 1.
Semiconductor Group
61
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Programmable Pulse Shaper
The analog transmitter includes a programmable pulse shaper to satisfy the
requirements of ITU-T I.431. The amplitude and shape of the transmit pulses are
completely programmable via registers XPM0-2 from the microprocessor interface.
The transmitter requires an external step up transformer to drive the line.
Transmit Line Monitor
The transmit line monitor compares the transmit line current on XL1 and XL2 with an
on-chip transmit line current limiter. The monitor detects faults on the primary side of the
transformer indicated by a highly increased transmit line current (more than 120 mA for
at least 3 pulses) and protects the device from damage by setting the transmit line driver
XL1/2 automatically in a high impedance state. Two conditions will be detected by the
monitor: transmit line ones density (more than 31 consecutive zeros) indicated by
FRS1.XLO and transmit line high currrent indicated by FRS1.XLS. In both cases a
transmit line monitor status change interrupt will be provided.
Line
Monitor
TRI
XL1
Pulse
Shaper
XL2
XDATA
ITS10936
Figure 23
Transmit Line Monitor Configuration
Semiconductor Group
62
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
3.7
Framer Operating Modes E1
General
Bit: FMR1.PMOD = 0
PCM line bit rate
:
2.048 MBit/s
Single frame length : 256 bit, No. 1 … 256
Framing frequency : 8 kHz
HDLC controller
Organization
:
:
nx64 kbit/s , n = 1 ... 32 or nx4 kbit/s , n=1 ... 5
32 time-slots, No. 0 … 31
with 8 bits each, No. 1 … 8
The operating mode of the QuadFALC is selected by programming the carrier data rate
and characteristics, line code, multiframe structure, and signaling scheme.
The QuadFALC implements all of the standard framing structures for E1 or PCM 30
(CEPT, 2.048 MBit/s) carriers. The internal HDLC- or CAS Controller supports all
signaling procedures including signaling frame synchronization / synthesis and signaling
alarm detection in all framing formats. The time-slot assignment from the PCM line to the
system highway and vv. is performed without any changes of numbering (TS0 ↔
TS0, … , TS31 ↔ TS31).
Summary of E1- Framing Modes
• Doubleframe format according to ITU-T G. 704
• Multiframe format according to ITU-T G. 704
CRC4 processing according to ITU-T G. 706
• Multiframe format with CRC4 to non CRC4 interworking according to ITU-T G. 706
• Multiframe format with modified CRC4 to non CRC4 interworking
• Multiframe format with CRC4 performance monitoring
After RESET, the QuadFALC is switched into doubleframe format automatically.
Switching between the framing formats is done via bit FMR2.RFS1/0 and FMR3.EXTIW
for the receiver and FMR1.XFS for the transmitter.
Semiconductor Group
63
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
3.7.1
Doubleframe Format
The framing structure is defined by the contents of time-slot 0 (refer to table 6).
Table 6
Allocation of Bits 1 to 8 of Time-Slot 0
Bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Alternate
Frames
Number
Frame Containing the
Frame Alignment Signal Si
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Note 1
Frame Alignment Signal
Frame not Containing
the Frame Alignment
Signal or
Si
1
A
Sa4 Sa5
Sa6
Sa7
Sa8
Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4
Service Word
Note:
1. Si bits: reserved for international use. If not used, these bits should be fixed to ‘1’.
Access to received information via bits RSW.RSI and RSP.RSIF. Transmission is
enabled via bits XSW.XSIS and XSP.XSIF.
2. Fixed to ‘1’. Used for synchronization.
3. Remote alarm indication: In undisturbed operation ‘0’; in alarm condition ‘1’.
4. Sa bits: Reserved for national use. If not used, they should be fixed at ‘1’. Access to
received information via bits RSW.RY0 … RY4. Transmission is enabled via bits
XSW.XY0 … XY4. HDLC-signaling in bits Sa4- Sa8 is selectable. (*)
Note: (*) As a special extension for double frame format, the Sa -bit registers RSA4-8 /
XSA4-8 may be used optionally.
Semiconductor Group
64
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Transmit Transparent Modes
In transmit direction, contents of time-slot 0 frame alignment signal of the outgoing PCM
frame are normally generated by the QuadFALC. However, transparency for the
complete time-slot 0 can be achieved by selecting the transparent mode XSP.TT0. With
the Transparent Service Word Mask register TSWM the Si-bits, A-bit and the SA4-8 bits
can be selectively switched through transparently.
Transmit Transparent Source for
Enabled by
Framing
(int. generated) XSW.XRA2) XSW.XY0 … 43) XSW.XSIS, XSP.XSIF
via pin XDI1)
via pin XDI via pin XDI via pin XDI
(int. generated) XSW.XRA XSW.XY0 … 4 via pin XDI
(int. generated) XSW.XRA XSW.XY0 … 4 via pin XDI
(int. generated) via pin XDI XSW.XY0 … 4 XSW.XSIS, XSP.XSIF
A Bit
Sa Bits
Si Bits
–
XSP.TT0
TSWM.TSIF
TSWM.TSIS
TSWM.TRA
TSWM.TSA4-8 (int. generated) XSW.XRA via pin XDI
XSW.XSIS, XSP.XSIF
1) pin XDI or XSIG or XFIFO-Buffer (signaling controller)
2) Additionally, automatic transmission of the A-bit is selectable
3) As a special extension for double frame format, the Sa-bit register may be used optionally.
Synchronization Procedure
Synchronization status is reported via bit FRS0.LFA. Framing errors are counted by the
Framing Error Counter (FEC). Asynchronous state is reached after detecting 3 or 4
consecutive incorrect FAS words or 3 or 4 consecutive incorrect service words (bit 2 = 0
in time-slot 0 of every other frame not containing the frame alignment word), the
selection is done via bit RC1.ASY4. Additionally, the service word condition can be
disabled. When the framer lost its synchronization an interrupt status bit ISR2.LFA is
generated.
In asynchronous state, counting of framing errors and detection of remote alarm will be
stopped. AIS is automatically sent to the backplane interface (can be disabled via bit
FMR2.DAIS).
Further on the updating of the registers RSW, RSP, RSA4-8, RSA6S and RS1-16 will be
halted (remote alarm indication, Sa/Si-Bit access).
The resynchronization procedure starts automatically after reaching the asynchronous
state. Additionally, it may be invoked user controlled via bit: FMR0.FRS (Force
Resynchronization: the FAS word detection is interrupted until the framer is in the
asynchronous state. After that, resynchronization starts automatically).
Synchronous state is established after detecting:
– a correct FAS word in frame n,
– the presence of the correct service word (bit 2 = 1) in frame n + 1,
Semiconductor Group
65
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
– a correct FAS word in frame n + 2.
If the service word in frame n + 1 or the FAS word in frame n + 2 or both are not found
searching for the next FAS word will be start in frame n + 2 just after the previous frame
alignment signal.
Reaching the synchronous state causes a frame alignment recovery interrupt status
ISR2.FAR if enabled. Undisturbed operation starts with the beginning of the next
doubleframe.
A-Bit Access
If the QuadFALC detects a remote alarm indication in the received data stream the
interrupt status bit ISR2.RA will be set. With setting of bit XSW.XRA a remote alarm (RAI)
will be send to the far end.
By setting FMR2.AXRA the QuadFALC automatically transmit the remote alarm bit = 1 in
the outgoing data stream if the receiver detects a loss of frame alignment FRS0.LFA = 1.
If the receiver is in synchronous state FRS0.LFA = 0 the remote alarm bit will be reset.
Note: The A-bit may be processed via the system interface. Setting bit TSWM.TRA
enables transparency for the A bit in transmit direction (refer to table 7).
Sa - Bit Access
As an extension for access to the Sa-bits via registers RSA4-8/XSA4-8 an option is
implemented to allow the usage of internal Sa-bit registers RSA4-8/XSA4-8 in
doubleframe format.
This function is enabled by setting FMR1.ENSA = 1 for the transmitter and
FMR1.RFS1/0 = 01 for the receiver. The QuadFALC works then internally with a
16-frame structure but no CRC multiframe alignment/generation is performed.
3.7.2
CRC-Multiframe
The multiframe structure shown in table 7 is enabled by setting bit: FMR1.RFS1/0 for the
receiver and FMR1.XFS for the transmitter.
Multiframe
Frame alignment
:
:
2 submultiframes = 2 × 8 frames
refer to section Doubleframe Format
Multiframe alignment : bit 1 of frames 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 with the pattern ‘001011’
CRC bits
CRC block size
CRC procedure
:
:
:
bit 1 of frames 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14
2048 bit (length of a submultiframe)
CRC4, according to ITU-T Rec. G.704, G.706
Semiconductor Group
66
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Table 7
CRC-Multiframe Structure
Sub-
Frame
Bits 1 to 8 of the Frame
Multiframe
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Multiframe I
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C1
0
C2
0
C3
1
C4
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
A
0
A
0
A
0
A
1
1
0
1
1
Sa4 Sa5 Sa61 Sa7 Sa8
1
Sa4 Sa5 Sa62 Sa7 Sa8
1
Sa4 Sa5 Sa63 Sa7 Sa8
1
Sa4 Sa5 Sa64 Sa7 Sa8
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
II
8
9
C1
1
C2
1
C3
E*
C4
E*
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
A
0
A
0
A
0
A
1
1
0
1
1
Sa4 Sa5 Sa61 Sa7 Sa8
1
Sa4 Sa5 Sa62 Sa7 Sa8
1
Sa4 Sa5 Sa63 Sa7 Sa8
1
Sa4 Sa5 Sa64 Sa7 Sa8
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
E:
Spare bits for international use. Access to received information via bits
RSP.RS13 and RSP.RS15. Transmission is enabled via bits XSP.XS13 and
XSP.XS15. Additionally, automatic transmission for submultiframe error
indication is selectable.
Sa:
Spare bits for national use. Additionally, Sa bit access via registers
RSA4 … 8 and XSA4 … 8 is provided. HDLC-signaling in bits Sa4- Sa8 is
selectable.
C1 … C4: Cyclic redundancy check bits.
A: Remote alarm indication. Additionally, automatic transmission of the A-bit is
selectable.
Semiconductor Group
67
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
For transmit direction, contents of time-slot 0 are additionally determined by the selected
transparent mode:
Transmit Transparent Source for
enabled by
Framing + CRC A Bit
Sa Bits
E Bits
–
(int. generated) XSW.XRA2) XSW.XY0 … 43) XSP.XS13/XS154)
XSP.TT0
TSWM.TSIF
TSWM.TSIS
TSWM.TRA
via pin XDI1)
via pin XDI
via pin XDI
via pin XDI
(int. generated) XSW.XRA1) XSW.XY0 … 42) (int. generated)
(int. generated) XSW.XRA1) XSW.XY0 … 42) via pin XDI
(int. generated) via pin XDI
XSW.XY0 … 42) XSP.XS13/XS153)
TSWM.TSA4–8 (int. generated) XSW.XRA1) via pin XDI
XSP.XS13/XS153)
1) pin XDI or XSIG or XFIFO buffer (signaling controller)
2) Automatic transmission of the A-bit is selectable
3) The Sa-bit register XSA4-8 may be used optionally
4) Additionally, automatic transmission of submultiframe error indication is selectable
The CRC procedure is automatically invoked when the multiframe structure is enabled.
CRC errors in the received data stream are counted by the 16 bit CRC Error Counter
CEC (one error per submultiframe, maximum).
Additionally a CRC4 error interrupt status ISR0.CRC4 may be generated if enabled by
IMR0.CRC4.
All CRC bits of one outgoing submultiframe are automatically inverted in case a CRC
error is flagged for the previous received submultiframe. This function is enabled via bit
RC0.CRCI. Setting the bit RC0.XCRCI will invert the CRC bits before transmission to the
distant end. The function of RC0.XCRCI and RC0.CRCI are logically ored.
Synchronization Procedure
Multiframe alignment is assumed to have been lost if doubleframe alignment has been
lost (flagged at status bits FRS0.LFA and FRS0.LMFA). The rising edge of these bits will
cause an interrupt status bits ISR2.LFA + ISR2.LMFA.
The multiframe resynchronization procedure starts when Doubleframe alignment has
been regained which is indicated by an interrupt status bit ISR2.FAR. For Doubleframe
synchronization refer to section Doubleframe Format. It may also be invoked by the user
by setting
– bit FMR0.FRS for complete Doubleframe and multiframe re-synchronization
– bit FMR1.MFCS for multiframe re-synchronization only.
Semiconductor Group
68
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
The CRC checking mechanism will be enabled after the first correct multiframe pattern
has been found. However, CRC errors will not be counted in asynchronous state.
In doubleframe asynchronous state, counting of framing errors, CRC4 bit errors and
detection of remote alarm will be stopped. AIS is automatically sent to the backplane
interface (can be disabled via bit FMR2.DAIS). Further on the updating of the registers
RSW, RSP, RSA4-8, RSA6S and RS1-16 will be halted (remote alarm indication,
Sa/Si-bit access).
The multiframe synchronous state is established after detecting two correct multiframe
alignment signals at an interval of n × 2 ms (n = 1, 2, 3 …). The Loss of multiframe
alignment flag FRS0.LMFA will be reset. Additionally an interrupt status multiframe
alignment recovery bit ISR2.MFAR is generated with the falling edge of bit FRS0.LMFA.
Automatic Force Resynchronization
In addition, a search for Doubleframe alignment is automatically initiated if two
multiframe pattern with a distance of n × 2 ms have not been found within a time interval
of 8 ms after doubleframe alignment has been regained (bit FMR1.AFR). A new search
for frame alignment will be started just after the previous frame alignment signal.
Floating Multiframe Alignment Window
After reaching doubleframe synchronization a 8 ms timer is started. If a multiframe
alignment signal is found during the 8 ms time interval the internal timer will be reset to
remaining 6 ms in order to find the next multiframe signal within this time. If the
multiframe signal is not found for a second time an interrupt status ISR0. T8MS will be
provided. This interrupt will usually occur every 8 ms until multiframe synchronization is
achieved.
CRC4 Performance Monitoring
In the synchronous state checking of multiframe pattern is disabled. However, with bit
FMR2.ALMF an automatic multiframe resynchronization mode can be activated. If 915
out of 1000 errored CRC submultiframes are found then a false frame alignment will be
assumed and a search for double- and multiframe pattern is initiated. The new search for
frame alignment will be started just after the previous basic frame alignment signal. The
internal CRC4 resynchronization counter will be reset when the multiframe
synchronization has been regained.
Modified CRC4 Multiframe Alignment Algorithm
The modified CRC4 multiframe alignment algorithm allows an automatic interworking
between framers with and without a CRC4 capability. The interworking is realized as it is
described in ITU-T G.706 Appendix B.
Semiconductor Group
69
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
If doubleframe synchronization is consistently present but CRC4 multiframe alignment is
not achieved within 400 ms it is assumed that the distant end is initialized to doubleframe
format. The CRC4 - Non CRC4 interworking is enabled via FMR2.RFS1/0 = 11 and is
activated only if the receiver has lost its synchronization. If doubleframe alignment (basic
frame alignment) is established a 400 ms timer and searching for multiframe alignment
will be started. A research for basic frame alignment will be initiated if the CRC4
multiframe synchronization could not be achieved within 8 ms and will be started just
after the previous frame alignment signal. The research of the basic frame alignment is
done in parallel and is independent of the synchronization procedure of the primary basic
frame alignment signal. During the parallel search all receiver functions are based on the
primary frame alignment signal, like framing errors, Sa-, Si-, A-bits …). All subsequent
multiframe searches are associated with each basic framing sequence found during the
parallel search.
If the CRC4 multiframe alignment sequence was not found within the time interval of
400 ms, the receiver will be switched into a Non CRC4 mode indicated by setting the bit
FRS0.NMF (No Multiframing Found) and ISR2.T400MS. In this mode checking of CRC
bits is disabled and the received E-bits are forced to low. The transmitter framing format
will not be changed. Even if multiple basic FAS resynchronizations have been
established during the parallel search, the receiver will be maintained to the initially
determined primary frame alignment signal location.
However, if the CRC4 multiframe alignment could be achieved within the 400 ms time
interval assuming a CRC4 to CRC4 interworking, then the basic frame alignment
sequence associated to the CRC4 multiframe alignment signal will be chosen. If
necessary, the primary frame alignment signal location will be adjusted according to the
multiframe alignment signal. The CRC4 performance monitoring will be started if
enabled by FMR2.ALMF and the received E-bits will be processed in accordance with
ITU-T G.704.
Switching into the doubleframe format (non CRC4) mode after 400 msec can be disabled
by setting of FMR3.EXTIW. In this mode the QuadFALC continues search for
multiframing. In the interworking mode setting of bit FMR1.AFR is not allowed.
A-Bit Access
If the QuadFALC detects a remote alarm indication (bit 2 in TS0 not containing the FAS
word) in the received data stream the interrupt status bit ISR2.RA will be set. With the
deactivation of the remote alarm the interrupt status bit ISR2.RAR is generated.
By setting FMR2.AXRA the QuadFALC automatically transmits the remote alarm bit = 1
in the outgoing data stream if the receiver detects a loss of frame alignment
(FRS0.LFA = 1). If the receiver is in synchronous state (FRS0.LFA = 0) the remote alarm
bit will be reset in the outgoing data stream.
Semiconductor Group
70
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Additionally, if bit FMR3.EXTIW is set and the multiframesynchronous state could not be
achieved within the 400 msec after finding the primary basic framing, the A-bit will be
transmitted active high to the remote end until the multiframing is found.
Note: The A-bit may be processed via the system interface. Setting bit TSWM.TRA
enables transparency for the A bit in transmit direction (refer to table 7).
Sa - Bit Access
Due to signaling procedures using the five Sa bits (Sa4 … Sa8) of every other frame of the
CRC multiframe structure, three possibilities of access via the microprocessor are
implemented.
• The standard procedure allows reading/writing the Sa-bit registers RSW, XSW without
further support. The Sa-bit information will be updated every other frame.
• The advanced procedure, enabled via bit FMR1.ENSA, allows reading/writing the
Sa-bit registers RSA4 … 8, XSA4 … 8.
A transmit or receive multiframe begin interrupt (ISR0.RMB or ISR1.XMB) is provided.
Registers RSA4-8 contains the service word information of the previously received
CRC-multiframe or 8 doubleframes (bitslots 4-8 of every service word). These
registers will be updated with every multiframe begin interrupt ISR0.RMB.
With the transmit multiframe begin an interrupt ISR1.XMB is generated and the
contents of this registers XSA4-8 will be copied into shadow registers. The contents
will subsequently sent out in the service words of the next outgoing CRC multiframe
(or every doubleframes) if none of the time-slot 0 transparent modes is enabled. The
transmit multiframe begin interrupt XMB request that these registers should be
serviced. If requests for new information will be ignored, current contents will be
repeated.
• The extended access via the receive and transmit FIFOs of the signaling controller. In
this mode it is possible to transmit / receive a HDLC frame or a transparent bit stream
in any combination of the Sa bits. Enabling is done by setting of bit CCR1.EITS and
the corresponding bits XC0.SA8E-4E / TSWM.TSA8-4 and resetting of registers
TTR1-4, RTR1-4 and FMR1.ENSA. The access to and from the FIFOs is supported
by ISR0.RME,RPF and ISR1.XPR,ALS.
– SA6-Bit Detection according to ETS 300233
Four consecutive received SA6-bits are checked on the by ETS 300233 defined SA6-bit
combinations. The QuadFALC will detect following fixed SA6-bit combinations:
SA61,SA62,SA63,SA64 = 1000; 1010; 1100; 1110; 1111. All other possible 4 bit
combinations are grouped to status “X”.
A valid SA6-bit combination must occur three times in a row. The corresponding status
bit in register RSA6S will be set. Register RSA6S is from type “Clear on Read”. With any
Semiconductor Group
71
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
change of state of the SA6-bit combinations an interrupt status ISR0.SA6SC will be
generated.
During the basicframe asynchronous state updating of register RSA6S and interrupt
status ISR0.SA6SC is disabled. In multiframe format the detection of the SA6-bit
combinations can be done either synchronous or asynchronous to the submultiframe
(FMR3.SA6SY). In synchronous detection mode updating of register RSA6S is done in
the multiframe synch. state (FRS0.LMFA=0). In asynchr. detection mode updating is
independent to the multiframe synchronous state.
– Sa6 Bit Error Indication Counters
The Sa6 bit error indication counter CRC2L/H (16 bits) counts the received Sa6 bit
sequence 0001 or 0011 in every CRC submultiframe.In the primary rate access digital
section this counter option gives information about CRC errors reported from the TE via
Sa6 bit. Incrementing is only possible in the multiframe synchronous state.
The Sa6 bit error indication counter CRC3L/H (16 bits) counts the received Sa6 bit
sequence 0010 or 0011 in every CRC submultiframe. In the primary rate access digital
section this counter option gives information about CRC errors detected at T-reference
point and reporting them via the Sa6 bit. Incrementing is only possible in the multiframe
synchronous state.
Semiconductor Group
72
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
E-Bit Access
Due to signaling requirements, the E bits of frame 13 and frame 15 of the CRC
multiframe can be used to indicate received errored submultiframes:
Submultiframe I status E- Bit located in frame 13
Submultiframe II status E- Bit located in frame 15
no CRC error:
CRC error:
:
:
E = 1
E = 0
– Standard Procedure
After reading the Submultiframe Error Indication RSP.SI1 and RSP.SI2, the
microprocessor has to update contents of register XSP (XS13, XS15). Access to these
registers has to be synchronized to Transmit or Receive Multiframe Begin Interrupts
(ISR0.RMB or ISR1.XMB).
– Automatic Mode
By setting bit XSP.AXS status information of received submultiframes is automatically
inserted in E-bit position of the outgoing CRC Multiframe without any further
interventions of the microprocessor.
In the double- and multiframe asynchronous state the E-bits are set to zero. However
they can be set to one in the async. state if enabled by bit XSP.EBP. In the multiframe
sync. state the E-bits are processed according to ITU-T G.704 independent of bit
XSP.EBP
– Submultiframe Error Indication Counter
The EBC (E-Bit) Counter EBCL and EBCH (16 bits) counts zeros in E-bit position of
frame 13 and 15 of every received CRC Multiframe. This counter option gives
information about the outgoing transmit PCM line if the E bits are used by the remote end
for submultiframe error indication. Incrementing is only possible in the multiframe
synchronous state.
Note: E-bits may be processed via the system interface. Setting bit TSWM.TSIS enables
transparency for E bits in transmit direction (refer to table 7).
Semiconductor Group
73
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
OUT of Primary BFA:
Inhibit Incoming CRC-4 Performance Monitoring
Reset all Timers
Set FRS0.LFA/LMFA/NMF = 110
No
Primary
BFA Search ?
Yes
IN Primary BFA:
Start 400 ms Timer
Enable Primary BFA Loss Checking Process
Reset Internal Frame Alignment Status
(FRS0.LFA = 0)
CRC-4 MFA Search
Start 8 ms Timer
Yes
Parallel
BFA Search
Good ?
No
No
400 ms
Timer
Elapsed ?
Can CRC-4
MFA be found
in 8 ms ?
Yes
No
Yes
Assume CRC-4 to CRC-4 Interworking:
Assume CRC-4 to non CRC-4 Interworking:
Confirm Primary BFA Associated with CRC-4 MFA
Adjust Primary BFA if Necessary
Reset Internal Multiframe Alignment Status
(FRS0.LMFA = 0)
Confirm Primary BFA
Set Internal 400 ms Timer Expiration Status Bit
(FRS0.NMF = 1)
Start CRC-4 Performance Monitoring
CRC-4
Error Count 915
Yes
No
_
<
Continue CRC-4 Performance Monitoring
or LFA ?
ITD10310
Figure 24
CRC4 Multiframe Alignment Recovery Algorithms (BFA = Basic Frame Alignment)
Semiconductor Group
74
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
3.7.3
Additional Functions
Error performance monitoring and alarm handling
• alarm detection and generation
Alarm Indication Signal: Detection and recovery is flagged by bit FRS0.AIS and
ISR2.AIS. Transmission is enabled via bit FMR1.XAIS.
Loss of Signal: Detection and recovery is flagged by bit FRS0.LOS and ISR2.LOS.
Remote Alarm Indication: Detection and release is flagged by bit FRS0.RRA, RSW.RRA
and ISR2.RA/RAR. Transmission is enabled via bit XSW.XRA.
AIS in Time-Slot 16: Detection and release is flagged by bit FRS1.TS16AIS and
ISR3.AIS16. Transmission is enabled by writing all ones in registers XS1-16.
LOS in Time-Slot 16: Detection and release is flagged by bit FRS1.TS16LOS.
Transmission is enabled by writing all zeros in registers XS1-16.
Remote Alarm in Time-Slot 16: Detection and release is flagged by bit FRS1.TS16RA
and ISR3.RA16. Transmission is enabled via bit CCR1.XTS16RA or XS1.2 .
Transmit Line Shorted: Detection and release is flagged by bit FRS1.XLS and
ISR1.XLSC.
Transmit Ones Density: Detection and release is flagged by bit FRS1.XLO and
ISR1.XLSC.
Semiconductor Group
75
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Table 8
Summary of Alarm Detection and Release
Alarm
Detection Condition
Clear Condition
programmble number of ones
Loss of Signal
(LOS)
no transitions (logical
zeros) in a programmable (1-256) in a programmable time
time interval of 16 - 4096 interval of 16 - 4096 consecutive
consecutive pulse periods. pulse periods. A one is a signal
Programmable receive
input signal threshold
with a level above the
programmed threshold.
Alarm Indication
Signal (AIS)
FMR0.ALM = 0:
less than 3 zeros in
FMR0.ALM = 0:
more than 2 zeros in
250 µsec and loss of frame 250 µsec
alignment declared
FMR0.ALM = 1:
FMR0.ALM = 1:
more than 2 zeros in each of two
500 µsec periods
less than 3 zeros in
each of two consecutive
250 µsec periods
Remote Alarm
(RRA)
bit 3 = 1 in time-slot 0 not
containing the FAS word
set conditions no longer detected.
Y-bit = 0 received in CAS
Remote Alarm in
Time-Slot 16
(TS16RA)
Y-bit = 1 received in CAS
multiframe alignment word multiframe alignment word
Loss of Signal in
Time-Slot 16
(TS16LOS)
all zeros for at least 16
consecutively received
time-slots 16
receiving a one in
time-slot 16
Alarm Indication
time-slot 16 containing less time-slot 16 containing more than
Signal in Time-Slot 16 than 4 zeros in each of two 3 zeros in each of two
(TS16AIS)
consecutive CAS
multiframes periods
consecutive CAS multiframes
periods
Transmit Line Short
(XLS)
more than 32 pulse periods no transmit line current limiter
with highly increased
transmit line current on
XL1/2
active
Transmit Ones
Density
(XLO)
32 consecutive zeros in the Cleared with each transmitted
transmit data stream on
XL1/2
pulse
Semiconductor Group
76
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
• Auto modes
- Automatic remote alarm access
If the receiver has lost its synchronization a remote alarm could be sent automatically,
if enabled by bit FMR2.AXRA to the distant end. The remote alarm bit will be
automatically set in the outgoing data stream if the receiver is in asynchronous state
(FRS0.LFA bit is set). In synchronous state the remote alarm bit will be removed.
- Automatic E bit access
By setting bit XSP.AXS status information of received submultiframes is automatically
inserted in E-bit position of the outgoing CRC Multiframe without any further
interventions of the microprocessor.
- Automatic AIS to system interface
In asynchronous state the synchronizer enforces automatically an AIS to the receive
system interface. However, received data can be transparently switched through if bit
FMR2.DAIS is set.
- Automatic clock source switching
In Slave mode (LIM0.MAS = 0) the DCO-R will synchronize to the recovered route
clock. In case of Loss of Signal LOS the DCO-R switches automatically to Master
mode. If bit CMR1.DCS is set automatic switching from RCLK to SYNC may be
disabled.
- Automatic freeze signaling:
Updating of the received signaling information is controlled by the freeze signaling
status. The freeze signaling status is automatically activated if a Loss of Signal, or a
Loss of CAS Multiframe Alignment or a receive slip occures. The internal signaling
buffer RS1-16 is frozen. Optionally automatic freeze signaling may be disabled by
setting bit SIC3.DAF.
• Error counter
The QuadFALC offers six error counters each of them has a length of 16 bit. They
record code violations, framing bit errors, CRC4 bit errors and CRC4 error events
which are flagged in the different SA6 bit combinations or the number of received
multiframes in the asynchronous state or the change of frame alignment (COFA).
Counting of the multiframes in the asyn. state and the COFA parameter is done in a
6 / 2 bit counter and is shared with CEC3L/H. Each of the error counter is buffered.
Updating the buffer is done in two modes:
- one second accumulation
- on demand via handshake with writing to the DEC register
In the one second mode an internal/external one second timer will update these
buffers and reset the counter to accumulate the error events in the next one second
period. The error counter can not overflow. Error events occuring during reset will not
lost.
• Status : errored second
The QuadFALC supports the error performance monitoring by detecting the following
alarms or error events in the received data:
framing errors , CRC errors , code violations , loss of frame alignment , loss of signal,
Semiconductor Group
77
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
alarm indication signal , E bit error , receive and transmit slips.
With a programmable interrupt mask register ESM all these alarms or error events
could generate an Errored Second interrupt (ISR3.ES) if enabled.
• Second timer
Additionally per channel a one second timer interrupt could be internally generated to
indicate that the enabled alarm status bits or the error counters have to be checked.
If enabled via bit GPC1.FSS2-0 the one second timer of the selected channel can be
output on port SEC/FSC (GPC1.CSFP1/0). Optionally if all four channels of the
QuadFALC should synchronized to an external second timer an appropriate clock has
to be provided to pin SEC/FSC. Selecting the external second timer is done with
GCR.SES. Refer also to register GPC1.
In-Band Loop Generation and Detection
The QuadFALC generates and detects a framed or unframed in-band loop up/actuate
- and down/deactuate pattern with bit error rates as high as 1/100. Framed or unframed
in-band loop code is selected by LCR1.FLLB . Replacing transmit data with the in-band
loop codes is done by FMR3.XLD / XLU.
The QuadFALC also offers the ability generating and detecting of a flexible in-band loop
up - and down pattern (LCR1.LLBP = 1). The loop up and loop down pattern is individual
programmable from 2 to 8 bit in length (LCR1.LAC1/0 and LCR1.LDC1/0). Programming
of loop codes is done in registers LCR2 and LCR3.
Status and interrupt-status bits will inform the user whether loop up - or loop down code
was detected.
Time-Slot 0 Transparent Mode
The transparent modes are useful for loopbacks or for routing data unchanged through
the QuadFALC.
In receive direction, transparency for ternary or dual / single rail unipolar data is always
achieved if the receiver is in the synchronous state. In asynchronous state the data may
be transparently switched through if bit FMR2.DAIS is set. However, correct time-slot
assignment can not be guaranteed due to missing frame alignment between line and
system side.
Setting of bit FMR2.RTM disconnects control of the internal elastic store from the
receiver. The elastic buffer is now in a “free running” mode without any possibility to
actualize the time slot assignment to a new frame position in case of re-synchronization
of the receiver. Together with FMR2.DAIS this function can be used to realize
undisturbed transparent reception.
Transparency in transmit direction can be achieved by activating the time-slot 0
transparent mode (bit XSP.TT0 or TSWM.7-0). If XSP.TT0 = 1 all internal information of
Semiconductor Group
78
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
the QuadFALC (framing, CRC, Sa/Si bit signaling, remote alarm) will be ignored. With
register TSWM the Si-bits, A-bit or the Sa4-8 bits could be selectively enabled to send
data transparent from port XDI to the far end. For complete transparency the internal
signaling controller, IDLE code generation and AIS alarm generation, single channel and
payload loop back has to be disabled.
Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence Generation and Monitor
The QuadFALC has the added ability to generate and monitor 215-1 and 220-1 pseudo-
random bit sequences (PRBS). The generated PRBS pattern will be transmitted
optionally inverted or not to the remote end via pins XL1/2 resp. XDOP/N. Generating
and monitoring of PRBS pattern is done according to ITU-T O. 151.
The PRBS monitor senses the PRBS pattern in the incoming data stream.
Synchronization is done on the inverted and non inverted PRBS pattern. The current
synchronization status is reported in status and interrupt status registers. Enabled by bit
LCR1.EPRM each PRBS bit error will increment
an error counter (CEC2).
Synchronization will be reached within 400 msec with a probability of 99.9% and a BER
of 1/10.
Semiconductor Group
79
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Single Channel Loop Back
Each of the 32 time-slots may be selected for loopback from the system PCM input (XDI)
to the system PCM output (RDO). This loopback is programmed for one time-slot at a
time selected by register LOOP. During loopback, an idle channel code programmed in
register IDLE is transmitted to the remote end in the corresponding PCM route time-slot.
For the time-slot test, sending sequences of test patterns like a 1 kHz check signal
should be avoided. Otherwise, an increased occurrence of slips in the tested time-slot
will disturb testing. These slips do not influence the other time-slots and the function of
the receive memory. The usage of a quasi-static test pattern is recommended.
RCLK
Clock +
Data
Recovery
MUX
RL1
RL2
Rec.
Framer
Elast.
Store
RDO
MUX
XL1
XL2
Trans.
Framer
Elast.
Store
XDI
IDLE Code
ITS09747
Figure 25
Single Channel Loopback
Semiconductor Group
80
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Payload Loop Back
To perform an effective circuit test a payload loop is implemented. The payload loop
back (FMR2.PLB) will loop the data stream from the receiver section back to transmitter
section. The looped data will pass the complete receiver including the wander and jitter
compensation in the receive elastic store and were output on pin RDO. Instead of the
data an AIS (FMR2.SAIS) could be sent to the system interface.
The framing bits, CRC4 and Spare bits are not looped, if XSP.TT0 =0. They are
originated by the QuadFALC transmitter. If the PLB is enabled the transmitter and the
data on pins XL1/2 or XDOP/XDON are clocked with SCLKR instead of SCLKX. If
XSP.TT0 = 1 the received time-slot 0 is sent transparently back to the line interface.
Data on the following pins are ignored: XDI, XSIG, TCLK, SCLKX, SYPX and XMFS. All
the received data is processed normally.
RCLK
AIS-GEN
MUX
Clock +
Data
Recovery
RL1
RL2
RDO
Rec.
Framer
Elast.
Store
SCLKR
XL1
XL2
XDI
Trans.
Framer
Elast.
Store
SCLKX
ITS09748
Figure 26
Payload Loop
Semiconductor Group
81
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Local Loop
The local loopback mode, selected by LIM0.LL = 1, disconnects the receive lines RL1/2
or RDIP/RDIN from the receiver. Instead of the signals coming from the line the data
provided by system interface are routed through the analog receiver back to the system
interface. However, the bit stream will be undisturbed transmitted on the line. However
an AIS to the distant end could be enabled by setting FMR1.XAIS without influencing the
data looped back to the system interface.
Note that enabling the local loop will usually invoke an out of frame error until the receiver
can resync to the new framing. The serial code from the transmitter and receiver has to
be programmed identically.
RCLK
Clock +
Data
Recovery
RL1
RL2
Rec.
Framer
Elast.
Store
RDO
Trans.
Framer
Elast.
Store
MUX
XL1
XL2
XDI
AIS-GEN
ITS09749
Figure 27
Local Loop
Semiconductor Group
82
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Remote Loop
In the remote loopback mode the clock and data recovered from the line inputs RL1/2 or
RDIP/RDIN are routed back to the line outputs XL1/2 or XDOP/XDON via the analog or
digital transmitter. As in normal mode they are also processed by the synchronizer and
then sent to the system interface.The remote loopback mode is selected by setting the
respective control bits LIM1.RL+JATT. Received data may be looped with or without the
transmit jitter attenuator (FIFO).
RCLK
Clock +
Data
Recovery
RL1
RL2
Rec.
Framer
Elast.
Store
RDO
FIFO
MUX
MUX
XL1
XL2
Trans.
Framer
Elast.
Store
XDI
RCLK
XCLK
DCO1/2
ITS09750
Figure 28
Remote Loop
Semiconductor Group
83
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description E1
Alarm Simulation
Alarm simulation does not affect the normal operation of the device, i.e. all time-slots
remain available for transmission. However, possible ‘real’ alarm conditions are not
reported to the processor or to the remote end when the device is in the alarm simulation
mode.
The alarm simulation is initiated by setting the bit FMR0.SIM. The following alarms are
simulated:
• Loss of Signal
• Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
• Loss of pulse frame
• Remote alarm indication
• Receive and transmit slip indication
• Framing error counter
• Code violation counter (HDB3 Code)
• CRC4 error counter
• E-Bit error counter
• CEC2 counter
• CEC3 counter
Some of the above indications are only simulated if the QuadFALC is configured in a
mode where the alarm is applicable (e.g. no CRC4 error simulation when doubleframe
format is enabled).
– Setting of the bit FMR0.SIM initiates alarm simulation, interrupt status bits will be set.
Error counting and indication will occurs while this bit is set. After it is reset all
simulated error conditions disappear, but the generated interrupt statuses are still
pending until the corresponding interrupt status register is read. Alarms like AIS and
LOS are cleared automatically. Interrupt status register and error counters are
automatically cleared on read.
Semiconductor Group
84
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
4
Operational Description E1
4.1
Signaling Controller Operating Modes
The HDLC controller can be programmed to operate in various modes, which are
different in the treatment of the HDLC frame in receive direction. Thus, the receive data
flow and the address recognition features can be performed in a very flexible way, to
satisfy almost any practical requirements.
There are 4 different operating modes which can be set via the MODE register.
4.1.1
HDLC Mode
All frames with valid addresses are forwarded directly via the RFIFO to the system
memory.
Depending on the selected address mode, the QuadFALC can perform a 1 or 2 byte
address recognition (MODE.MDS0).
If a 2-byte address field is selected, the high address byte is compared with the fixed
value FEH or FCH (group address) as well as with two individually programmable values
in RAH1 and RAH2 registers. According to the ISDN LAPD protocol, bit 1 of the high byte
address will be interpreted as COMMAND/RESPONSE bit (C/R) and will be excluded
from the address comparison.
Similarly, two compare values can be programmed in special registers (RAL1, RAL2) for
the low address byte. A valid address will be recognized in case the high and low byte of
the address field correspond to one of the compare values. Thus, the QuadFALC can be
called (addressed) with 6 different address combinations. HDLC frames with address
fields that do not match any of the address combinations, are ignored by the FALC.
In case of a 1-byte address, RAL1 and RAL2 will be used as compare registers. The
HDLC control field, data in the I-field and an additional status byte are temporarily stored
in the RFIFO. Additional information can also be read from a special register (RSIS).
As defined by the HDLC protocol, the QuadFALC perform the zero bit insertion/deletion
(bit-stuffing) in the transmit/receive data stream automatically. That means, it is
guaranteed that at least after 5 consecutive “1”-s a “0” will appear.
Non-Auto-Mode (MODE.MDS2-1=01)
Characteristics: address recognition, FLAG - and CRC generation/check, bit-stuffing
All frames with valid addresses are forwarded directly via the RFIFO to the system
memory.
Transparent Mode 1 (MODE.MDS2-0=101)
Characteristics: address recognition, FLAG - and CRC generation/check, bit-stuffing
Semiconductor Group
85
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Only the high byte of a 2-byte address field will be compared with registers RAH1/2. The
whole frame excluding the first address byte will be stored in RFIFO.
Transparent Mode 0 (MODE.MDS2-0=100)
Characteristics: FLAG - and CRC generation/check, bit-stuffing
No address recognition is performed and each frame will be stored in the RFIFO.
Receive Data Flow
The following figure gives an overview of the management of the received HDLC frames
in the different operating modes.
Ι
FLAG
ADDR
CTRL
CRC
FLAG
1)
1)
RAH1, 2
RAL1, 2
2)
MODE
0
.MDS2 - 0
RFIFO
RFIFO
RFIFO
RFIFO
Non
Auto/16
2)
1
1
0
1
0
RSIS
RSIS
RSIS
RSIS
X
RAL1, 2
2)
Non
Auto/8
0
1
1
1
RAH1, 2
2)
0
0
Transparent 1
Transparent 0
1)
ITD06455
Description of Symbols:
Compared with (register)
Note: In case of on 8 Bit Address,
the Control Field starts here!
Processed autonomously
1)
CRC optionally stored in RFIFO
if CCR3 RCRC = "1".
.
Stored (FIFO, register)
2)
Address optionally stored in RFIFO
if CCR3.RADD = "1".
Figure 29
Receive Data Flow of QuadFALC
Semiconductor Group
86
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Transmit Data Flow
The frames can be transmitted as shown below.
Ι
FLAG
ADDR
CTRL
CRC
FLAG
ADDRESS
CONTROL
DATA
CHECKRAM
Transmit
HDLC
XFIFO
Frame
(XHF)
ITD06456
Figure 30
Transmit Data Flow of QuadFALC
Transmitting a HDLC frame via register CMDR.XTF, the address, the control fields and
the data field have to be entered in the XFIFO.
If CCR3.XCRC is set, the CRC checksum will not be generated internally. The checksum
has to be provided via the transmit FIFO (XFIFO) as the last two bytes. The transmitted
frame will be closed automatically only with a (closing) flag.
The QuadFALC does not check whether the length of the frame, i.e. the number of bytes
to be transmitted makes sense or not.
4.1.2
Extended Transparent Mode
Characteristics: fully transparent
In no HDLC mode, fully transparent data transmission/reception without HDLC framing
is performed, i.e. without FLAG generation/recognition, CRC generation/check, or bit-
stuffing. This feature can be profitably used e.g for:
• Specific protocol variations
• Transmission of a BOM frame
• Test purposes
Data transmission is always performed out of the XFIFO. In transparent mode, the
receive data is shifted into the RFIFO.
Semiconductor Group
87
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
4.1.3
Signaling Controller Functions
Shared Flags
The closing Flag of a previously transmitted frame simultaneously becomes the opening
Flag of the following frame if there is one to be transmitted. The Shared Flag feature is
enabled by setting bit SFLG in control register CCR1.
Transparent Transmission and Reception
When programmed in the extended transparent mode via the MODE register (MDS2-
0 = 111), the QuadFALC performs fully transparent data transmission and reception
without HDLC framing, i.e. without
• FLAG insertion and deletion
• CRC generation and checking
• Bit-stuffing
In order to enable fully transparent data transfer, bit MODE.HRAC has to be set.
Received data is always shifted into RFIFO.
Data transmission is always performed out of XFIFO by directly shifting the contents of
XFIFO in the outgoing datastream. Transmission is initiated by setting CMDR.XTF (04H).
A synch-byte FFH is automatically sent before the first byte of the XFIFO will be
transmitted.
Cyclic Transmission (fully transparent)
If the extended transparent mode is selected, the QuadFALC supports the continuous
transmission of the contents of the transmit FIFO.
After having written 1 to 32 bytes to XFIFO, the command XREP.XTF via the CMDR
register (bit 7 … 0 = ‘00100100’ = 24H) forces the QuadFALC to transmit the data stored
in XFIFO repeatedly to the remote end.
Note: The cyclic transmission continues until a reset command (CMDR: SRES) is issued
or with resetting CMDR.XREP, after which continuous ‘1’-s are transmitted.
During cyclic transmission the XREP-bit has to be set with every write operation to
CMDR.
CRC ON/OFF Features
As an option in HDLC mode the internal handling of received and transmitted CRC
checksum can be influenced via control bits CCR3.RCRC and CCR3.XCRC.
• Receive Direction
The received CRC checksum is always assumed to be in the 2 (CRC-ITU) last bytes
of a frame, immediately preceding a closing flag. If CCR3.RCRC is set, the received
CRC checksum will be written to RFIFO where it precedes the frame status byte
(contents of register RSIS). The received CRC checksum is additionally checked for
Semiconductor Group
88
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
correctness. If HDLC mode is selected, the limits for ‘Valid Frame’ check are modified
(refer to description of bit RSIS.VFR).
• Transmit Direction
If CCR3.XCRC is set, the CRC checksum is not generated internally. The checksum
has to be provided via the transmit FIFO (XFIFO) as the last two bytes. The
transmitted frame will only be closed automatically with a (closing) flag.
The QuadFALC does not check whether the length of the frame, i.e. the number of
bytes to be transmitted makes sense or not.
4.1.3.1 HDLC Data Transmission
In transmit direction 2x32 byte FIFO buffers are provided. After checking the XFIFO
status by polling the bit SIS.XFW or after an interrupt ISR1.XPR (Transmit Pool Ready),
up to 32 bytes may be entered by the CPU to the XFIFO.
The transmission of a frame can be started by issuing a XTF or XHF command via the
command register. If the transmit command does not include an end of message
indication (CMDR.XME), the QuadFALC will repeatedly request for the next data block
by means of a XPR interrupt as soon as no more than 32 bytes are stored in the XFIFO,
i.e. a 32-byte pool is accessible to the CPU.
This process will be repeated until the CPU indicates the end of message per XME
command, after which frame transmission is finished correctly by appending the CRC
and closing flag sequence. Consecutive frames may be share a flag, or may be
transmitted as back-to-back frames, if service of XFIFO is quick enough.
In case no more data is available in the XFIFO prior to the arrival of XME, the
transmission of the frame is terminated with an abort sequence and the CPU is notified
per interrupt ISR1.XDU. The frame may be aborted per software CMDR.SRES.
Semiconductor Group
89
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
The data transmission sequence, from the CPU’s point of view, is outlined in figure 31.
START
N
Transmit
Pool Ready
?
XPR Interrupt, or
XFW Bit in SIS Register = 1
Y
Write Data
(up to 32 bytes)
to XFIFO
Command
XTF/XHF
End of
Message
?
N
Y
Command
+
XTF/XHF XME
END
ITD08565
Figure 31
Interrupt Driven Data Transmission (flow diagram)
The activities at both serial and CPU interface during frame transmission (supposed
frame length = 70 bytes) shown in figure 32.
Transmit Frame (70 bytes)
32
32
6
System
Interface
FALC R
CPU
Interface
XPR
XHF
Command
XHF
XPR
XHF + XME XPR
WR XFIFO
32 bytes
WR XFIFO
32 bytes
WR XFIFO
6 bytes
ALLS
ITD10971
Semiconductor Group
90
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Figure 32
Interrupt Driven Transmission Example
4.1.3.2 HDLC Data Reception
Also 2 × 32 byte FIFO buffers are provided in receive direction. There are different
interrupt indications concerned with the reception of data:
RPF (Receive Pool Full) interrupt, indicating that a 32-byte-block of data can be read
from RFIFO and the received message is not yet complete.
RME (Receive Message End) interrupt, indicating that the reception of one message is
completed.
The following figure gives an example of a reception sequence, assuming that a “long”
frame (66 bytes) followed by two short frames (6 bytes each) are received.
Receive Frame 1 (66 bytes) RF2 RF3
2
6
6
32
32
System
Interface
FALC R
CPU
Interface
RD RFIFO
32 bytes
RD RFIFO
32 bytes
RMC
RPF
RMC
RME
RMC
RME
RMC
RME
RMC
RPF
ITD10972
Figure 33
Interrupt Driven Reception Sequence Example
Semiconductor Group
91
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
4.1.4
Sa bit Access
The QuadFALC supports the Sa bit signaling of time-slot 0 of every other frame as
follows:
• The access via registers RSW / XSW
• the access via registers RSA8-4 / XSA4-8
capable of storing the information for a complete multiframe
• the access via the 64 byte deep receive/transmit FIFO of the integrated signaling
controller. This Sa bit access gives the opportunity to transmit/receive a transparent bit
stream as well as HDLC frames where the signaling controller automatically
processes the HDLC protocol. Enabling is done by setting of bit CCR1.EITS and
resetting of registers TTR1-4, RTR1-4 and FMR1.ENSA.
The data written to the XFIFO will subsequently transmit in the Sa bit positions defined
by register XC0.SA8E-4E and the corresponding bits of TSWM.TSA8-4. Any
combination of Sa bits can be selected. After the data have been completely sent out
an “all ones” or Flags (CCR1.ITF) will be transmitted. The continuous transmission of
a transparent bit stream, which is stored in the XFIFO, can be enabled.
With the setting of bit MODE.HRAC the received Sa bits can be forwarded to the
receive FIFO.
The access to and from the FIFOs is supported by ISR0.RME/RPF and
ISR1.XPR/ALS.
4.2
Operational Phase
The QuadFALC is programmable via a microprocessor interface which enables byte or
word access to all control and status registers.
After RESET the QuadFALC must be first initialized. General guidelines for initialization
are described in section Initialization.
The status registers are read-only and are continuously updated. Normally, the
processor periodically reads the status registers to analyze the alarm status and
signaling data.
Reset
The QuadFALC is forced to the reset state if a high signal is input at port RES for a
minimum period of 10 µs. During RESET the QuadFALC needs an active clock on pin
MCLK. All output stages are in a high impedance state, all internal flip-flops are reset and
most of the control registers are initialized with default values.
Semiconductor Group
92
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
After RESET, the QuadFALC is initialized for doubleframe format with register values
listed in Table 9.
Table 9
Initial Values after RESET
Register
Reset Value Meaning
FMR0
00H
00H
NRZ Coding, no alarm simulation.
FMR1
FMR2
PCM 30 – doubleframe format, 2 MBit/s system data rate,
no AIS transmission to remote end or system interface,
Payload Loop off.
SIC1
SIC2,
SIC3
00H
00H
00H
8.192 MHz system clocking rate, Rec. Buffer 2 Frames,
Transmit Buffer bypass, Data sampled or transmitted on
the falling edge of SCLKR/X, Automatic freeze signaling,
data is active in the first channel phase
LOOP
XSW
XSP
00H
40H
00H
00H
Channel loop back and single frame mode are disabled.
All bits of the transmitted service word are cleared (bit 2
excl.). Spare bit values are cleared.
TSWM
No transparent mode active.
XC0
XC1
00H
00H
The transmit clock offset is cleared.
The transmit time-slot offset is cleared.
RC0
RC1
00H
00H
The receive clock slot offset is cleared.
The receive time-slot offset is cleared.
IDLE
00H
Idle channel code is cleared.
ICB 1 … 4 00H
Normal operation (no ‘Idle Channel’ selected).
LIM0
LIM1
PCD
PCR
00H
00H
00H
00H
Slave Mode, Local Loop off
Analog interface selected, Remote Loop off
Pulse Count for LOS Detection cleared
Pulse Count for LOS Recovery cleared
XPM2-0
IMR0-4
00H, 03H, 9CH Transmit Pulse Mask
FFH,FFH,FFH, All interrupts are disabled
FFH,FFH,
RTR1-4
TTR1-4
00H,00H,00H, No time-slots selected
00H,
GCR
00H
Internal second timer, Power on of all 4 single FALC
channels,
CMR1
00H
DCO-R reference clock: channel 1, RCLK output: DPLL
clock, DCO-X enabled, DCO-X internal reference clock
Semiconductor Group
93
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Table 9
Initial Values after RESET (cont’d)
Register
Reset Value Meaning
CMR2
00H
SCLKR selected, SCLKX selected, Rec. synchr. pulse
sourced by SYPR, Tr. synchr. pulse sourced by SYPX,
GPC1
00H
system multiplex mode disabled, SEC port input active
high, FSC is sourced by channel 1, RCLK1 clock source:
channel 1,
PC1-4
PC5
00H , 00H
00H , 00H
Input function of ports RP(A-D) : SYPR,
Input function of ports XP(A-D) : SYPX
00H
SCLKR, SCLKX, RCLK configured to inputs,
XMFS active low
MODE
00H
Signaling controller disabled
RAH1/2
RAL1/2
FDH, FFH
FFH, FFH
Compare register for receive address cleared
Initialization
For a correct start up of the Primary Access Interface a set of parameters specific to the
system and hardware environment must be programmed after RESET goes inactive.
Both the basic and the operational parameters must be programmed before the
activation procedure of the PCM line starts. Such procedures are specified in ITU-T and
ETSI recommendations (e.g. Fault conditions and consequent actions). Setting optional
parameters primarily makes sense when basic operation via the PCM line is guaranteed.
Table 10 gives an overview of the most important parameters in terms of signals and
control bits which are to be programmed in one of the above steps. The sequence is
recommended but not mandatory. Accordingly, parameters for the basic and operational
set up, for example, may be programmed simultaneously. The bit FMR1.PMOD should
always be kept low.
Semiconductor Group
94
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Table 10
Initialization Parameters
Basic Set Up
E1
Mode Select
FMR1.PMOD = 0
Specification of Line interface and clock
generation
LIM0, LIM1, XPM2-0
Line interface coding
Loss of Signal detection/recovery
conditions
FMR0.XC1/0, FMR0.RC1/0
PCD, PCR, LIM1, LIM2
System clocking and data rate
SIC1.SSC1/0, SIC1.SSD1,FMR1.SSD0
CMR2.IRSP/IRSC/ IXSP/IXSC
XC0.XCO, XC1.XTO
RC0.RCO, RC1.RTO
FMR2.DAIS/SAIS
Transmit offset counters
Receive offset counters
AIS to system interface
Operational Set Up
E1
Select framing
FMR2.RFS1/0, FMR1.XFS
RC1.ASY4, RC1.SWD
FMR1.AFR, FMR2.ALMF
XSP, XSW, FMR1.ENSA, XSA8-4,
TSWM, MODE, CCR1, CCR2, RAH1/2,
RAL1/2
Framing additions
Synchronization mode
Signaling mode
Features like channel loop back, idle channel activation, extensions for signaling
support, alarm simulation, …may be activated later. Transmission of alarms (e.g. AIS,
remote alarm) and control of synchronization in connection with consequent actions to
remote end and internal system depend on the activation procedure selected.
Note: Read access to unused register addresses: value should be ignored.
Write access to unused register addresses: should be avoided, or set to ‘00’ hex.
All control registers (except XFIFO, XS1-16, CMDR, DEC) are of type:
Read/Write.
Semiconductor Group
95
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
4.3
Specific E1 Initialization
The following is a suggestion for a basic initialization to meet most of the E1
requirements. Depending on different applications and requirement any other
initialization can be used.
LIU Initialization
FMR0.XC0/
FMR0.RC0/
LIM1.DRS
FMR3.CMI
The QuadFALC supports requirements for the analog line
interface as well as the digital line interface. For the analog line
interface the codes AMI and HDB3 are supported. For the digital
line interface modes (dual or single rail) the QuadFALC supports
AMI, HDB3, CMI (with and without HDB3 precoding) and NRZ.
PCD = 0x0A
LOS detection after 176 consecutive “zeros” (fulfills G.775 spec).
LOS recovery after 22 “ones” in the PCD intervall. (fulfills G.775).
PCR = 0x15
LIM1.RIL2-0 = 0x02 LOS threshold of 0.6 V (fulfills G.775).
Framer Initialization
The selection of the following modes during the basic initialization supports the ETSI
requirements for E-Bit Access, Remote Alarm and Synchronization (please refer also to
QuadFALC driver code of the Evaluation System EASY22554 and application notes)
and helps to reduce the software load. They are very helpful especially to meet
requirements as specified in ETS300 011.
XSP.AXS = 1
ETS300 011 C4.x for instance requires the sending of E-Bits in
TS0 if CRC4 errors have been detected. By programming
XSP.AXS = 1 the submultiframe status is inserted automatically
in the next outgoing multiframe.
XSP.EBP = 1
If the QuadFALC has reached asynchronous state the E-Bit is set
to 0 if XSP.EBP = 0 and set to 1 if XSP.EBP = 1. ETS300 011
requires that the E-Bit is set to 1 in asynchronous state.
FMR2.AXRA = 1
The transmission of RAI via the line interface is done
automatically by the QuadFALC in case of Loss of Frame
Alignment (FRS0.LFA = 1). If basic framing has been reinstalled
RAI is automatically reset.
FMR2.FRS1/2 = 10 In this mode a search of double framing is automatically
FMR1.AFR = 1
reinitiated if no CRC4 multiframing could be found within 8ms.
Together with FMR2.AXRA = 1 this mode is essential to meet
ETS300 011 and reduces the processor load heavily.
Semiconductor Group
96
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
FMR2.ALMF = 1
The receiver initiates a new basic- and multiframing research if
more than 914 CRC4 errors have been detected in one second.
FMR2.FRS1/0 = 11 In the interworking mode the QuadFALC stays in double framing
format if no multiframe pattern could be found in a time intervall of
400 ms. This is also indicated by a 400 ms interrupt. Additionally
the extended interworking mode (FMR3.EXTIW = 1) will activate
after 400 ms the remote alarm (FMR2.AXRA = 1) and will still
search the multiframing without switching completely to the
double framing. A complete resynchronization in an 8 ms interval
is not initiated.
Signaling Controller Initialization
Initialization of the HDLC controller:
MODE = 0x88
CCR1 = 0x18
HDLC Receiver active, no address comparison.
Enable Signaling via TS0-31, Interframe Time Fill with continous
FLAGs.
IMR0.RME = 0
IMR0.RPF = 0
IMR1.XPR = 0
Unmask interrupts for HDLC processor requests.
RTR3.TS16 = 1
XTR3.TS16 = 1
Select TS16 for HDLC data reception and transmission.
Initialization of the CAS-CC controller:
XSP.CASEN = 1
CCR1.EITS = 0
Send CAS infos stored in the XS1-16 registers.
Enable interrupt with any data change in the RS1-16 registers.
IMR0.CASC = 0
After the device initialization a software reset should be executed by setting of bits
CMDR.XRES/RRES.
Semiconductor Group
97
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
4.4
Control Register Description
Table 11
Control Register Address Arrangement
Address
00
Register Type Comment
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
XFIFO
XFIFO
CMDR
MODE
RAH1
RAH2
RAL1
RAL2
IPC
W
W
W
Transmit FIFO
01
Transmit FIFO
02
Command Register
03
R/W Mode Register
04
R/W Receive Address High 1
R/W Receive Address High 2
R/W Receive Address Low 1
R/W Receive Address Low 2
R/W Interrupt Port Configuration
R/W Common Configuration Register 1
R/W Common Configuration Register 2
R/W Receive Timeslot Register 1
R/W Receive Timeslot Register 2
R/W Receive Timeslot Register 3
R/W Receive Timeslot Register 4
R/W Transmit Timeslot Register 1
R/W Transmit Timeslot Register 2
R/W Transmit Timeslot Register 3
R/W Transmit Timeslot Register 4
R/W Interrupt Mask Register 0
R/W Interrupt Mask Register 1
R/W Interrupt Mask Register 2
R/W Interrupt Mask Register 3
R/W Interrupt Mask Register 4
R/W Framer Mode Register 0
R/W Framer Mode Register 1
R/W Framer Mode Register 2
R/W Channel Loop Back
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
109
10A
10C
10D
10E
10F
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
11C
11D
11E
11F
120
209
20A
20C
20D
20E
20F
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
21C
21D
21E
21F
220
309
30A
30C
30D
30E
30F
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
31C
31D
31E
31F
320
CCR1
CCR2
RTR1
RTR2
RTR3
RTR4
TTR1
TTR2
TTR3
TTR4
IMR0
IMR1
IMR2
IMR3
IMR4
FMR0
FMR1
FMR2
LOOP
XSW
R/W Transmit Service Word
Semiconductor Group
98
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Table 11
Control Register Address Arrangement (cont’d)
Address
21
Register Type Comment
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
12B
12C
12D
12E
12F
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
318
139
13A
13B
13C
13D
13E
13F
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
22B
22C
22D
22E
22F
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
23A
23B
23C
23D
23E
23F
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
32B
32C
32D
32E
32F
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
33A
33B
33C
33D
33E
33F
XSP
XC0
R/W Transmit Spare Bits
22
R/W Transmit Control 0
23
XC1
R/W Transmit Control 1
24
RC0
R/W Receive Control 0
25
RC1
R/W Receive Control 1
26
XPM0
XPM1
XPM2
TSWM
IDLE
XSA4
XSA5
XSA6
XSA7
XSA8
FMR3
ICB1
ICB2
ICB3
ICB4
LIM0
LIM1
PCD
R/W Transmit Pulse Mask 0
R/W Transmit Pulse Mask 1
R/W Transmit Pulse Mask 2
R/W Transparent Service Word Mask
R/W Idle Channel Code
27
28
29
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
R/W Transmit SA4 Bit Register
R/W Transmit SA5 Bit Register
R/W Transmit SA6 Bit Register
R/W Transmit SA7 Bit Register
R/W Transmit SA8 Bit Register
R/W Framer Mode Register 3
R/W Idle Channel Register 1
R/W Idle Channel Register 2
R/W Idle Channel Register 3
R/W Idle Channel Register 4
R/W Line Interface Mode 0
R/W Line Interface Mode 1
R/W Pulse Count Detection
R/W Pulse Count Recovery
R/W Line Interface Mode 2
R/W Loop Code Register 1
R/W Loop Code Register 2
R/W Loop Code Register 3
R/W System Interface Control 1
R/W System Interface Control 2
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
PCR
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
LIM2
LCR1
LCR2
LCR3
SIC1
SIC2
Semiconductor Group
99
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Table 11
Control Register Address Arrangement (cont’d)
Address
40
Register Type Comment
140
144
145
146
147
160
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
17A
17B
17C
17D
17E
17F
180
181
182
183
184
240
244
245
246
247
260
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
27A
27B
27C
27D
27E
27F
280
281
282
283
284
340
344
345
346
347
360
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
37A
37B
37C
37D
37E
37F
380
381
382
383
384
SIC3
CMR1
CMR2
GCR
ESM
DEC
XS1
R/W System Interface Control 3
44
R/W Clock Mode Register 1
R/W Clock Mode Register 2
R/W Global Configuration Register
R/W Errored Second Mask
45
46
47
60
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Disable Error Counter
70
Transmit CAS Register 1
Transmit CAS Register 2
Transmit CAS Register 3
Transmit CAS Register 4
Transmit CAS Register 5
Transmit CAS Register 6
Transmit CAS Register 7
Transmit CAS Register 8
Transmit CAS Register 9
Transmit CAS Register 10
Transmit CAS Register 11
Transmit CAS Register 12
Transmit CAS Register 13
Transmit CAS Register 14
Transmit CAS Register 15
Transmit CAS Register 16
71
XS2
72
XS3
73
XS4
74
XS5
75
XS6
76
XS7
77
XS8
78
XS9
79
XS10
XS11
XS12
XS13
XS14
XS15
XS16
PC1
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
80
R/W Port Configuration 1
R/W Port Configuration 2
R/W Port Configuration 3
R/W Port Configuration 4
R/W Port Configuration 5
R/W Global Port Configuration 1
81
PC2
82
PC3
83
PC4
84
PC5
85
GPC1
Semiconductor Group
100
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
After ‘RESET’ all control registers except the XFIFO and XS1-16 are initialized to defined
values.
Unused bits have to be set to logical ‘0’.
The status registers are only readable and are updated by the QuadFALC.
Transmit FIFO (WRITE) XFIFO
7
0
XFIFO
XF7
XF0
(x00/x01)
Up to 32 bytes/16 words of received data can be read from the RFIFO
following a RPF or a RME interrupt.
Writing data to XFIFO can be done in 8-bit (byte) or 16-bit (word)
access. The LSB is transmitted first.
Up to 32 bytes/16 words of transmit data can be written to the XFIFO
following a XPR (or ALLS) interrupt.
Command Register (Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
CMDR
RMC
RRES
XREP
XRES
XHF
XTF
XME
SRES
(x02)
RMC…
Receive Message Complete
Confirmation from CPU to QuadFALC that the current frame or data
block has been fetched following a RPF or RME interrupt, thus the
occupied space in the RFIFO can be released.
RRES…
XREP…
Receiver Reset
The receive line interface except the clock and data recovery unit
(DPLL), the receive framer, the one second timer and the receive
signaling controller are reset. However the contents of the control
registers will not be deleted.
Transmission Repeat
If XREP is set to one together with XTF (write 24H to CMDR), the
QuadFALC repeatedly transmits the contents of the XFIFO (1 … 32
bytes) without HDLC framing fully transparently, i.e. without
FLAG,CRC.
The cyclic transmission is stopped with a SRES command or by
resetting XREP.
Semiconductor Group
101
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Note: During cyclic transmission the XREP-bit has to be set with
every write operation to CMDR.
XRES…
Transmitter Reset
The transmit framer and transmit line interface excluding the system
clock generator and the pulse shaper will be reset. However the
contents of the control registers will not be deleted.
XHF…
XTF…
XME…
Transmit HDLC Frame
After having written up to 32 bytes to the XFIFO, this command
initiates the transmission of a HDLC frame.
Transmit Transparent Frame
Initiates the transmission of a transparent frame without HDLC
framing.
Transmit Message End
Indicates that the data block written last to the transmit FIFO
completes the current frame. The QuadFALC can terminate the
transmission operation properly by appending the CRC and the
closing flag sequence to the data.
SRES…
Signaling Transmitter Reset
The transmitter of the signaling controller will be reset. XFIFO is
cleared of any data and an abort sequence (seven 1’s) followed by
interframe time fill is transmitted. In response to XRES a XPR
interrupt is generated.
This command can be used by the CPU to abort a frame currently in
transmission.
Note: The maximum time between writing to the CMDR register and
the execution of the command takes 2.5 periods of the current
system data rate. Therefore, if the CPU operates with a very
high clock rate in comparison with the QuadFALC’s clock, it is
recommended that bit SIS.CEC should be checked before
writing to the CMDR register to avoid any loss of commands.
Semiconductor Group
102
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Mode Register (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
MODE
MDS2
MDS1
MDS0
HRAC
DIV
(x03)
MDS2-0…
Mode Select
The operating mode of the HDLC controller is selected.
000… Reserved
001… Reserved
010… 1 byte address comparison mode (RAL1,2)
011… 2 byte address comparison mode (RAH1,2 and RAL1,2)
100… No address comparison
101… 1 byte address comparison mode (RAH1,2)
110… Reserved
111… No HDLC framing mode
HRAC…
DIV…
HDLC Receiver Active
Switches the HDLC receiver to operational or inoperational state.
0… Receiver inactive
1… Receiver active
Data Inversion
Setting this bit will invert the internal generated HDLC data stream.
0… normal operation, HDLC data stream not inverted
1… HDLC data stream inverted
Semiconductor Group
103
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Receive Address Byte High Register 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: FDH
7
1
0
0
RAH1
(x04)
In operating modes that provide high byte address recognition, the
high byte of the received address is compared with the individually
programmable values in RAH1 and RAH2.
RAH1…
Value of the First Individual High Address Byte
Bit 1 (C/R-bit) is excluded from address comparison.
Receive Address Byte High Register 2 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: FFH
7
0
RAH2
(x05)
RAH2…
Value of Second Individual High Address Byte
Receive Address Byte Low Register 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: FFH
7
0
RAL1
(x06)
RAL1…
Value of First Individual Low Address Byte
Receive Address Byte Low Register 2 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: FFH
7
0
RAL2
(x07)
RAL2...
Value of the second individually programmable low address
byte.
Semiconductor Group
104
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Interrupt Port Configuration (READ/WRITE)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
IPC
SSYF
IC1
IC0
(08)
Note: Unused bits have to be set to logical ‘0’.
SSYF…
Select SYNC Frequency
Only appilcable in master mode (LIM0.MAS = 1) and bit CMR2.DCF
is cleared.
0… Reference clock at port SYNC is 2.048 MHz
1… Reference clock at port SYNC is 8 KHz
IC0, IC1…
Interrupt Port Configuration
These bits define the function of the interrupt output stage (pin INT):
IC1
IC0
Function
X
0
1
0
1
1
Open drain output
Push/pull output, active low
Push/pull output, active high
Common Configuration Register 1 (READ/WRITE)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
CCR1
CASM
EITS
ITF
XMFA
RFT1
RFT0
(x09)
CASM…
CAS Synchronization Mode
Determines the synchronization mode of the channel associated
signaling multiframe alignment.
0… Synchronization is done in accordance to ITU-T G. 732
1… Synchronization is established when two consecutively correct
multiframe alignment pattern are found.
Semiconductor Group
105
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
EITS…
ITF…
Enable Internal Time-Slot 0-31 Signaling
0… Internal signaling in time-slots 0-31 defined via registers RTR1-
4 or TTR1-4 is disabled.
1… Internal signaling in time-slots 0-31 defined via registers RTR1-
4 or TTR1-4 is enabled.
Interframe Time Fill
Determines the idle (= no data to send) state of the transmit data
coming from the signaling controller.
0… Continuous logical ‘1’ is output
1… Continuous FLAG sequences are output (‘01111110’ bit
patterns)
XMFA …
Transmit Multiframe Aligned
Determines the synchronization between the framer and the
corresponding signaling controller.
0… Contents of the XFIFO is transmitted without multiframe
alignment.
1… Contents of the XFIFO is transmitted multiframe aligned.
After receiving a complete multiframe in the time-slot mode
(RTR1-4) an ISR0.RME interrupt is generated, if no HDLC
mode is enabled. In SA4-8 bit access XMFA is not valid.
Note: During the transmission of the XFIFO content, the SYPX or
XMFS interval time should not be changed, otherwise the
XFIFO data has to be retransmitted.
RFT1, RFT0…RFIFO Threshold Level
The size of the accessible part of RFIFO can be determined by
programming these bits. The number of valid bytes after a RPF
interrupt is given in the following table:
RFT1
RFT0
Size of Accessible Part of RFIFO
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
32 bytes (RESET value)
16 bytes
4 bytes
2 bytes
The value of RFT1, 0 can be changed dynamically.
– If reception is not running or
Semiconductor Group
106
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
– after the current data block has been read, but before the
command CMDR.RMC is issued (interrupt controlled data
transfer).
Note: It is seen that changing the value of RFT1, 0 is possible even
during the reception of one frame. The total length of the
received frame can be always read directly in RBCL, RBCH
after a RPF interrupt, except when the threshold is increased
during reception of that frame. The real length can then be
inferred by noting which bit positions in RBCL are reset by a
RMC command (see table below):
RFT1
RFT0
Bit Positions in RBCL Reset by a
CMDR.RMC Command
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
RBC4 .… 0
RBC3 … 0
RBC1,0
RBC0
Common Configuration Register 2 (READ/WRITE)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
CCR2
RADD
RCRC
XCRC
(x0A)
Note: Unused bits have to be set to logical ‘0’.
RADD…
RCRC…
Receive Address Pushed to RFIFO
If this bit is set to ‘1’, the received HDLC address information (1 or 2
bytes, depending on the address mode selected via MODE.MDS0) is
pushed to RFIFO. This function is applicable in non-auto mode.
Receive CRC ON/OFF
Only applicable in non-auto mode.
If this bit is set to ‘1’, the received CRC checksum will be written to
RFIFO (CRC-ITU-T: 2 bytes). The checksum, consisting of the 2 last
bytes in the received frame, is followed in the RFIFO by the status
information byte (contents of register RSIS). The received CRC
checksum will additionally be checked for correctness. If non-auto
Semiconductor Group
107
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
mode is selected, the limits for “Valid Frame” check are modified
(refer to RSIS.VFR).
XCRC…
Transmit CRC ON/OFF
If this bit is set to ‘1’, the CRC checksum will not be generated
internally. It has to be written as the last two bytes in the transmit FIFO
(XFIFO). The transmitted frame will be closed automatically with a
closing flag.
Note: The QuadFALC does not check whether the length of the
frame, i.e. the number of bytes to be transmitted makes sense
or not.
Receive Timeslot Register 1-4 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H, 00H, 00H, 00H
7
0
RTR1
RTR2
RTR3
RTR4
TS0
TS8
TS1
TS9
TS2
TS10
TS18
TS26
TS3
TS11
TS19
TS27
TS4
TS12
TS20
TS28
TS5
TS13
TS21
TS29
TS6
TS14
TS22
TS30
TS7
TS15
TS23
TS31
(x0C)
(x0D)
(x0E)
(x0F)
TS16
TS24
TS17
TS25
TS0…TS31…
Timeslot Register
These bits define the received time-slots on the system highway port
RDO to be extracted to RFIFO and marked. Additionally these
registers will control the RSIGM marker which can be forced high
during the respective time-slots independenltly of bit CCR1.EITS.
A one in the RTR1-4 bits will sample the corresponding time-slots and
send their data to the RFIFO of the signaling controller if bit
CCR1.EITS is set.
Assignments:
TS0 → time-slot 0
.
.
.
TS31→ time-slot 31
0 …The corresponding time-slot is not extracted and stored into the
RFIFO.
Semiconductor Group
108
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
1…The contents of the selected time-slot will be stored in the RFIFO.
Although the idle time-slots can be selected. This function will only
become active if bits CCR1.EITS is set.
The corresponding time-slot will be forced high on marker pin RSIGM.
Transmit Timeslot Register 1-4 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H, 00H, 00H, 00H
7
0
TTR1
TTR2
TTR3
TTR4
TS0
TS8
TS1
TS9
TS2
TS10
TS18
TS26
TS3
TS11
TS19
TS27
TS4
TS12
TS20
TS28
TS5
TS13
TS21
TS29
TS6
TS14
TS22
TS30
TS7
TS15
TS23
TS31
(x10)
(x11)
(x12)
(x13)
TS16
TS24
TS17
TS25
TS0…TS31…
Transmit Timeslot Register
These bits define the transmit time-slots on the system highway to be
inserted. Additionally these registers will control the XSIGM marker
which can be forced high during the respective time-slots
independently of bit CCR1.EITS.
A one in the TTR1-4 bits will insert the corresponding time-slot
sourced by the XFIFO in the data received on pin XDI, if bit
CCR1.EITS is set. If SIC3.TTRF is set and CCR1.EITS is cleared
insertion of data received on port XSIG is controlled by this registers.
Assignments:
TS0 → time-slot 0
.
.
.
TS31 → time-slot 31
0 …The selected time-slot will not be inserted into the outgoing data
stream.
1…The contents of the selected time-slot will be inserted in the
outgoing data stream from XFIFO. This function will only become
active if bits CCR1.EITS is set.
The corresponding time-slot will be forced high on marker pin XSIGM.
Semiconductor Group
109
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Interrupt Mask Register 0 ... 4 (READ/WRITE)
Value after RESET: FFH, FFH, FFH, FFH, FFH
7
0
IMR0
IMR1
IMR2
IMR3
IMR4
RME
LLBSC
FAR
RFS
RDO
LFA
T8MS
ALLS
RMB
XDU
CASC
XMB
AIS
CRC4 SA6SC
XLSC
RPF
XPR
RA
(x14)
(x15)
(x16)
(x17)
(x18)
MFAR T400MS
LMFA16 AIS16
LOS
RAR
RSN
ES
SEC
XSN
RA16
RSP
XSP
IMR0...IMR4...
Interrupt Mask Register
Each interrupt source can generate an interrupt signal on port INT
(characteristics of the output stage are defined via register IPC). A ‘1’
in a bit position of IMR0 ... 4sets the mask active for the interrupt
status in ISR0 ... 4. Masked interrupt statuses neither generate a
signal on INT, nor are they visible in registers GIS or CIS . Moreover,
they will
– not be displayed in the Interrupt Status Register if bit GCR.VIS is
set to ‘0’
– be displayed in the Interrupt Status Register if bit GCR.VIS is set to
‘1’.
Note: After RESET, all interrupts are disabled.
Semiconductor Group
110
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Framer Mode Register 0 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
FMR0
XC1
XC0
RC1
RC0
EXTD
ALM
FRS
SIM
(x1C)
XC1... XC0…
RC1... RC0…
EXTD…
Transmit Code
Serial code transmitter is independent to the receiver.
00... NRZ (optical interface)
01... CMI (1T2B + HDB3), (optical interface)
10... AMI (ternary or digital dual rail interface)
11... HDB3 Code (ternary or digital dual rail interface)
Receive Code
Serial code receiver is independent to the transmitter.
00... NRZ (optical interface)
01... CMI (1T2B+HDB3), (optical interface)
10... AMI (ternary or digital dual rail interface)
11... HDB3 Code (ternary or digital dual rail interface)
Extended HDB3 Error Detection
Selects error detection mode.
0… Only double violations are detected.
1… Extended code violation detection: 0000 strings are detected
additionally. Thereafter, incrementation of Code Violation
Counter CVC is first done after receiving an additional four
zeros.
ALM…
Alarm Mode
Selects the AIS alarm detection mode.
0 ... The AIS alarm will be detected according to ETS300233.
Detection: An AIS alarm will be detected if the incoming data
stream contains less than 3 zeros within a period of 512 bits
and a Loss of Frame Alignment is indicated.
Recovery: The alarm will be cleared if 3 or more zeros within
512 bits will be detected or the FAS word is found.
1 ... The AIS alarm will be detected according to ITU-T G.775
Detection: An AIS alarm will be detected if the incoming data
stream contains for two consecutive doubleframe periods
Semiconductor Group
111
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
(1024 bits) less than 3 zeros for each doubleframe period (512
bits).
Recovery: The alarm will be cleared if within two consecutive
doubleframe periods 3 or more zeros for each period of 512 bits
will be detected.
FRS…
SIM…
Force Resynchronization
A transition from low to high will initiate a resynchronization procedure
of the pulse frame and the CRC-multiframe (if enabled via bit
FMR2.RFS1) starting directly after the old framing candidate.
Alarm Simulation
0… Normal operation.
1… Initiates internal error simulation of AIS, loss of signal, loss of
synchronization, remote alarm, slip, framing errors, CRC
errors, and code violations. The error counters FEC, CVC,
CEC1 will be incremented.
Framer Mode Register 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
FMR1
MFCS
AFR
ENSA
PMOD
XFS
ECM
SSD0
XAIS
(x1D)
MFCS…
Multiframe Force Resynchronization
Only valid if CRC multiframe format is selected (FMR2.RFS1/0=10).
A transition from low to high will initiate the resynchronization
procedure for CRC-multiframe alignment without influencing
doubleframe synchronous state. In case, “Automatic Force
Resynchronization” (FMR1.AFR) is enabled and multiframe
alignment can not be regained, a new search of doubleframe (and
CRC multiframe) is automatically initiated.
AFR…
Automatic Force Resynchronization
Only valid if CRC multiframe format is selected (FMR2.RFS1/0=10).
If this bit is set, a search of doubleframe alignment is automatically
initiated if two multiframe patterns with a distance of n × 2 ms have
not been found within a time interval of 8 ms after doubleframe
alignment has been regained or command FMR1.MFCS has been
issued.
Semiconductor Group
112
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
ENSA…
Enable Sa-Bit Access via Register XSA4-8
Only applicable if FMR1.XFS is set to one.
0… Normal operation. The Sa-bit information will be taken from bits
XSW.XY0…4 and written to bits RSW.RY0…4.
1… Sa-bit register access. The Sa-bit information will be taken from
the registers XSA4-8. In addition, the received information will
be written to registers RSA4-8. Transmitting contents of
registers XSA4-8 will be disabled if one of time-slot 0
transparent modes is enabled (XSP.TT0 or TSWM.SA4-8).
PMOD…
PCM Mode
For E1 application this bit must be set low. Switching from E1 to T1 or
vv the device needs up to 10 µsec to settle up to the internal clocking.
FMR1.PMOD of all 4 channels has to be set equally.
0… PCM 30 or E1 mode.
1… PCM 24 or T1 mode.
XFS…
ECM…
Transmit Framing Select
Selection of the transmit framing format could be done independent
of the receive framing format.
0… Doubleframe format enabled.
1… CRC4-multiframe format enabled.
Error Counter Mode
The function of the error counters will be determined by this bit.
0… Before reading an error counter the corresponding bit in the
Disable Error Counter register (DEC) has to be set. In 8 bit
access the low byte of the error counter should always be read
before the high byte. The error counters will be reset with the
rising edge of the corresponding bits in the DEC register.
1… Every second the error counter will be latched and then
automatically be reset. The latched error counter state should
be read within the next second. Reading the error counter
during updating should be avoided.
SSD0…
Select System Data Rate 0
FMR1.SSD0 and SIC1.SD1 define the data rate on the system
highway. Programming is done with SSD1/SSD0 in the following
table.
00…2.048 MBit/s
Semiconductor Group
113
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
01…4.096 MBit/s
10…8.192 MBit/s
11…16.384 MBit/s
XAIS…
Transmit AIS Towards Remote End
Sends AIS via ports XL1, XL2, XOID towards the remote end. The
outgoing data stream which could be looped back via the Local Loop
to the system interface will not be affected.
Framer Mode Register 2 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
FMR2
RFS1
RFS0
RTM
DAIS
SAIS
PLB
AXRA
ALMF
(x1E)
RFS1... RFS0... Receive Framing Select
00 ... Doubleframe format
01 ... Doubleframe format
10 ... CRC4 Multiframe format
11 ... CRC4 Multiframe format with modified CRC4 Multiframe
alignment algorithm (Interworking according to ITU-T G.706
Annex B). Setting of FMR3.EXTIW changes the reaction after
the 400 msec timeout.
RTM…
Receive Transparent Mode
Setting this bit disconnects control of the internal elastic store from the
receiver. The elastic store is now in a “free running” mode without any
possibility to actualize the time slot assignment to a new frame
position in case of re-synchronization of the receiver. This function
can be used in conjunction with the “disable AIS to system interface”
feature (FMR2.DAIS) to realize undisturbed transparent reception.
This bit should be enabled in case of unframed data reception mode.
DAIS…
Disable AIS to System Interface
0… AIS is automatically inserted into the data stream to RDO if
QuadFALC is in asynchronous state.
1… Automatic AIS insertion is disabled. Furthermore, AIS insertion
can be initiated by programming bit FMR2.SAIS.
Semiconductor Group
114
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
SAIS…
PLB…
Send AIS Towards System Interface
Sends AIS via output RDO towards system interface. This function is
not influenced by bit FMR2.DAIS.
Payload Loopback
0… Normal operation. Payload loop is disabled.
1... The payload loopback will loop the data stream from the
receiver section back to transmitter section. Looped data is
output on pin RDO. Data received at port XDI, XSIG, SYPX and
XMFS will be ignored. With XSP.TT0=1 timeslot 0 will also be
looped. If XSP.TT0=0 timeslot 0 will be generated internally.
AIS is sent immediately on port RDO by setting the FMR2.SAIS
bit. During payload loop is active a write access to register XC1
will set the read/write pointer of the transmit elastic buffer into
its optimal position to ensure a maximum wander
compensation.
AXRA…
Automatic Transmit Remote Alarm
0 ... Normal operation
1 ... The Remote Alarm bit will be automatically set in the outgoing
data stream if the receiver is in asynchronous state (FRS0.LFA
bit is set). In synchronous state the remote alarm bit will be
reset. Additionally in multiframe format FMR2.RFS1=1 and
FMR3.EXTIW =1 and the 400 msec timeout has elapsed, the
remote alarm bit will be active in the outgoing data stream. In
multiframe synchronous state the outgoing remote alarm bit is
cleared.
ALMF…
Automatic Loss of Multiframe
0 ... Normal operation
1 ... The receiver will search a new basic- and multiframing if more
than 914 CRC errors have been detected in a time interval of
one second. The internal 914 CRC error counter will be reset if
the multiframe synchronization is found. Incrementing the
counter is only enabled in the multiframe synchronous state.
Semiconductor Group
115
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Channel Loop Back (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
LOOP
ECLB
CLA4
CLA0
(x1F)
ECLB…
Enable Channel Loop Back
0 ... Disables the channel loop back.
1 ... Enables the channel loop back selected by this register.
CLA4…CLA0… Channel Address For Loop Back
CLA = 0…31 selects the channel.
During looped back the contents of the assigned outgoing channel on
ports XL1/XDOP/XOID and XL2/XDON is equal to the idle channel
code programmed at register IDLE.
Transmit Service Word Pulseframe (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
XSW
XSIS
XTM
XRA
XY0
XY1
XY2
XY3
XY4
(x20)
XSIS…
Spare Bit For International Use
First bit of the service word. Only significant in doubleframe format. If
not used, this bit should be fixed to ‘1’. If one of the time-slot 0
transparent modes is enabled (bit XSP.TT0, or TSWM.TSIS), bit
XSW.XSIS will be ignored.
XTM…
Transmit Transparent Mode
0…Ports SYPX / XMFS define the frame / multiframe begin on the
transmit system highway. The transmitter is usually synchronized on
this externally sourced frame boundary and generates the FAS bits
according to this framing. Any change of the transmit time-slot
assignment will subsequently produce a change of the FAS bit
positions.
1… Disconnects the control of the transmit system interface from the
transmitter. The transmitter is now in a free running mode without any
possibility to actualize the multiframe position. The framing (FAS bits)
generated by the transmitter will not be „disturbed“ (in case of
Semiconductor Group
116
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
changing the transmit time-slot assignment) by the transmit system
highway unless register XC1 is written. Useful in loop-timed
applications. For proper operation the transmit elastic buffer (2
frames, SIC1.XBS1/0= 10) has to be enabled.
XRA…
Transmit Remote Alarm
0… Normal operation.
1… Sends remote alarm towards remote end by setting bit 3 of the
service word. If time-slot 0 transparent mode is enabled via bit
XSP.TT0 or TSWM.TRA bit is set, bit XSW.XRA will be ignored.
XY0…XY4…
Spare Bits For National Use (Y-Bits, Sn-Bits, Sa-Bits)
These bits are inserted in the service word of every other pulseframe
if Sa-bit register access is disabled (FMR1.ENSA = 0). If not used,
they should be fixed to ‘1’.
If one of the time-slot 0 transparent modes is enabled (bit XSP.TT0 or
TSWM.TSA4-8), bits XSW.XY0…4 will be ignored.
Transmit Spare Bits (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
XSP
CASEN
TT0
EBP
AXS
XSIF
XS13
XS15
(x21)
CASEN…
Channel Associated Signaling Enable
0… Normal operation.
1… A one in this bit position will cause the transmitter to send the
CAS information stored in the XS1-16 registers in the
corresponding time slots.
TT0…
Time-Slot 0 Transparent Mode
0… Normal operation.
1… All information for time-slot 0 at port XDI will be inserted in the
outgoing pulseframe. All internal information of the QuadFALC
(framing, CRC, Sa/Si bit signaling, remote alarm) will be
ignored. This function is mainly useful for system test
applications (test loops). Priority sequence of transparent
modes: XSP.TTO > TSWM.
Semiconductor Group
117
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
EBP…
E- Bit Polarity
0… In the basic - or multiframe asynchronous state the E-bit will be
set to zero.
1… In the basic - or multiframe asynchronous state the E-bit will be
set to one.
If automatic transmission of sub-multiframe status is enabled by
setting bit XSP.AXS and the receiver has been lost multiframe
synchronization, the E bit with the programmed polarity will be
inserted automatically in Si-bit position of every outgoing CRC
multiframe (under the condition that time-slot 0 transparent mode and
transparent Si bit in Service word are both disabled).
AXS…
Automatic Transmission of Submultiframe Status
Only applicable to CRC multiframe.
0… Normal operation.
1… Information of submultiframe status bits RSP.SI1 and RSP.SI2
will be automatically inserted in Si -bit positions of the outgoing
CRC multiframe (RSP.SI1 → Si -bit of frame 13; RSP.SI2 →
Si-bit of frame 15). Contents of XSP.XS13 and XSP.XS15 will
be ignored. If one of the time-slot 0 transparent modes
XSP.TT0 or TSWM.TSIS is enabled, bit XSP.AXS has no
function.
XSIF…
XS13…
Transmit Spare Bit For International Use (FAS Word)
First bit in the FAS word. Only significant in doubleframe format. If not
used, this bit should be fixed to ‘1’. If one of the time-slot 0 transparent
modes is enabled (bits XSP.TT0, or TSWM.TSIF), bit XSP.XSIF will
be ignored.
Transmit Spare Bit (Frame 13, CRC-Multiframe)
First bit in the service word of frame 13 for international use. Only
significant in CRC-multiframe format. If not used, this bit should be
fixed to ‘1’. The information of XSP.XS13 will be shifted into internal
transmission buffer with beginning of the next following transmitted
CRC multiframe.
If automatic transmission of submultiframe status is enabled via bit
XSP.AXS, or, if one of the time-slot 0 transparent modes XSP.TT0 or
TSWM.TSIS is enabled, bit XSP.XS13 will be ignored.
Semiconductor Group
118
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
XS15…
Transmit Spare Bit (Frame 15, CRC-Multiframe)
First bit in the service word of frame 15 for international use. Only
significant in CRC-multiframe format. If not used, this bit should be
fixed to ‘1’. The information of XSP.XS15 will be shifted into internal
transmission buffer with beginning of the next following transmitted
CRC multiframe.
If automatic transmission of submultiframe status is enabled via bit
XSP.AXS, or, if one of the time-slot 0 transparent modes XSP.TT0 or
TSWM.TSIF is enabled, bit XSP.XS15 will be ignored.
Transmit Control 0 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
XC0
SA8E
SA7E
SA6E
SA5E
SA4E
XCO10 XCO9
XCO8
(x22)
SA8E…SA4E
SA Bit Signaling Enable
0… Standard operation.
1… Setting this bit it will be possible to send / receive a LAPD
protocol in any combination of the SA8- SA4 bit positions in the
outgoing / incoming data stream. The on chip signaling
controller has to be configured in the HDLC/LAPD mode. In
transmit direction together with these bits the TSWM.TSA8-4
bits must be set to enable transmission to the remote end
transparently through the FALC.
XCO10…XCO8… Transmit Offset
Initial value loaded into the transmit bit counter at the trigger edge of
SCLKX when the synchronous pulse at port SYPX / XMFS is active
Refer to register XC1.
Semiconductor Group
119
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Transmit Control 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 9CH
7
0
XCO7
XC1
XCO0
(x23)
A write access to this address resets the transmit elastic buffer to its
basic starting position. Therefore, updating the value should only be
done when the QuadFALC is initialized or when the buffer should be
centered. As a consequence a transmit slip may occur.
XCO7…XCO0… Transmit Offset
Calculation of delay time T (SCLKX cycles) depends on the value X
of the „Transmit Offset“ register XC1/0:
0 ≤ T ≤ 3 + SC/SD :
X = 3 + SC/SD - T
4+ SC/SD ≤ T ≤ max. delay :X = 2051 - T + SC/SD
Delay time T = time between beginning of time-slot 0 ( bit 0 , channel
phase 0) at XDI / XSIG and the initial edge of SCLKX after SYPX /
XMFS goes active. See figure 20 + 21.
with max. delay = (256 * SC/SD) -1
with SC = System clock defined by SIC1.SSC1/0
with SD = system data rate
Receive Control 0 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
RC0
SWD
ASY4
CRCI
XCRCI
RDIS
RCO10 RCO9
RCO8
(x24)
SWD …
Service Word Condition Disable
0… Standard operation. Three or four consecutive incorrect service
words (depending on bit RC1.ASY4) will cause loss of
synchronization.
1… Errors in service words have no influence when in synchronous
state. However, they are used for the resynchronization
procedure.
Semiconductor Group
120
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
ASY4 …
Select Loss of Sync Condition
0… Standard operation. Three consecutive incorrect FAS words or
three consecutive incorrect service words will cause loss of
synchronization.
1… Four consecutive incorrect FAS words or four consecutive
incorrect service words will cause loss of synchronization. The
service word condition may be disabled via bit RC1.SWD.
CRCI …
Automatic CRC4 Bit Inversion
If set, all CRC bits of one outgoing submultiframe are inverted in case
a CRC error is flagged for the previous received submultiframe. This
function is logically ORed with RC0.XCRCI.
XCRCI…
RDIS…
Transmit CRC4 Bit Inversion
If set, the CRC bits in the outgoing data stream are inverted before
transmission. This function is logically ORed with RC0.CRCI.
Receive Data Input Sense
0… Inputs: RDIP, RDIN active low, input ROID is active high
1… Inputs: RDIP, RDIN active high, input ROID is active low
RCO10…RCO8…Receive Offset / Receive Frame Marker Offset
Depending on the RP(A-D) pin function different offsets could be
programmed. The SYPR and the RFM pin function could not be
selected in parallel.
Receive Offset (PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 000)
Initial value loaded into the receive bit counter at the trigger edge of
SCLKR when the synchronous pulse at port SYPR is active (see
figure ).
Calculation of delay time T (SCLKR cycles) depends on the value X
of the „Receive Offset“ register RC1/0. For programing refer to
register RC1.
Receive Frame Marker Offset (PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 001)
Offset programming of the receive frame marker which is output on
port SYPR. The receive frame marker could be activated during any
bit position of the current frame.
Calculation of the value X of the „Receive Offset“ register RC1/0
depends on the bit position BP which should be marked and SCLKR.
Refer to register RC1.
Semiconductor Group
121
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Receive Control 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 9CH
7
0
RC1
RCO7
RCO0
(x25)
RCO7…RCO0… Receive Offset / Receive Frame Marker Offset
Depending on the RP(A-D) pin function different offsets could be
programmed. The SYPR and the RFM pin function could not be
selected in parallel.
Receive Offset (PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 000)
Initial value loaded into the receive bit counter at the trigger edge of
SCLKR when the synchronous pulse at port SYPR is active (see
figure 17 ).
Calculation of delay time T (SCLKR cycles) depends on the value X
of the „Receive Offset“ register RC1/0:
0 ≤ T ≤ 4 :
X= 4- T
5≤ T ≤ max. delay : X= 2052 - T
with max. delay = (256*SC/SD) -1
with SC = System clock defined by SIC1.SSC1/0
with SD = 2.048 MHz
Delay time T = time between beginning of time-slot 0 at RDO and the
initial edge of SCLKR after SYPR goes active.
Receive Frame Marker Offset (PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 001)
Offset programming of the receive frame marker which is output on
multifunction port RFM. The receive frame marker could be activated
during any bit position of the entire frame and depends on the
selected system clock rate.
Calculation of the value X of the „Receive Offset“ register RC1/0
depends on the bit position BP which should be marked :
0 ≤ BP ≤ 2045 :
X = BP + 2
2046 ≤ BP ≤2047 : X= BP - 2046 )
e.g: 2.048 MBit/s: BP = 0-255; .... 16.384 MBit/s: BP = 0-2047
Semiconductor Group
122
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Transmit Pulse-Mask 0...2 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 7BH, 03H, 00H
7
0
X P M 0
XPM1
XPM2
X P 1 2
XP30
XLLP
X P 1 1
XP24
XLT
XP10
XP23
XP04
XP22
XP03
XP21
XP34
XP02
XP20
XP33
XP01
XP14
XP32
XP00
XP13
XP31
(x26)
(x27)
(x28)
DAXLT
The transmit pulse shape which is defined in ITU-T G.703 will be output on pins XL1 and
XL2. The level of the pulse shape can be programmed via registers XPM2-0 to create a
custom waveform. In order to get an optimized pulse shape for the external transformers
each pulse shape will be internally devided into four sub pulse shapes. In each sub pulse
shape a programmed 5 bit value will define the level of the analog voltage on pins XL1/2.
Together four 5 bit values have to be programmed to form one complete transmit pulse
shape. The four 5 bit values will be sent in the following sequence:
XP04-00: First pulse shape level
XP14-10: Second pulse shape level
XP24-20: Third pulse shape level
XP34-30: Fourth pulse shape level
Changing the LSB of each subpulse in registers XPM2-0 will change the amplitude of the
differential voltage on XL1/2 by approximately 80 mV.
Example: 120 Ω interface and wired as shown in figure 22.
XPM04-00: 1BH or 27 decimal
XPM14-10: 1BH or 27 decimal
XPM24-20: 00H
XPM34-30: 00H
Programming values for XPM0-2: 7BH, 03H, 00H
XLT…
Transmit Line Tri-state
0… Normal operation
1… Transmit line XL1/XL2 or XDOP/XDON are switched into high
impedance state. If this bit is set the transmit line monitor status
information will be frozen.
DAXLT...
Disable Automatic Tristating of XL1/2
0... Normal operation. If a short is detected on pins XL1/2 the
transmit line monitor will set the XL1/2 outputs into a high
impedance state.
Semiconductor Group
123
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
1... If a short is detected on XL1/2 pins automatic setting these pins
into a high impedance (by the XL-monitor) state will be
disabled.
XLLP…
Reserved
0… Normal operation
1… Reserved ( not to be used)
Transparent Service Word Mask (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
TSWM
TSIS
TSIF
TRA
TSA4
TSA5
TSA6
TSA7
TSA8
(x29)
TSWM7…TSWM0…Transparent Service Word Mask
TSIS…
TSIF…
TRA…
Transparent Si Bit in Service Word
0… The SI Bit will be generated internally.
1… The SI Bit in the service word will be taken from port XDI and
transparently passed through the QuadFALC without any
changes. The internal information of the QuadFALC (register
XSW) will be ignored.
Transparent Si Bit in FAS Word
0… The SI Bit will be generated internally.
1… The SI Bit in the FAS word will be taken from port XDI and
routed transparently through the QuadFALC without any
changes. The internal information of the QuadFALC (register
XSW) will be ignored.
Transparent Remote Alarm
0… The Remote Alarm Bit will be generated internally.
1… The A Bit will be taken from port XDI and routed transparently
through the QuadFALC without any changes. The internal
information of the QuadFALC (register XSW) will be ignored.
TSA4…TSA8... Transparent SA4...8 Bit
0… The SA4-8 bit will be generated internally.
1… The SA4-8 bit will be taken from port XDI or from the internal
signaling controller if enabled and transparently passed
Semiconductor Group
124
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
through the QuadFALC without any changes. The internal
information of the QuadFALC (registers XSW and XSA4-8) will
be ignored.
Idle Channel Code Register (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
IDLE
IDL7
IDL0
(x2B)
IDL7…IDL0…
Idle Channel Code
If channel loop back is enabled by programming LOOP.ECLB=1, the
contents of the assigned outgoing channel on ports XL1/XL2 resp.
XDOP/XDON is set equal to the idle channel code selected by this
register.
Additionally, the specified pattern overwrites the contents of all
channels selected via the idle channel registers ICB1…ICB4. IDL7
will be transmitted first.
Transmit SA4-8 Register (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H, 00H, 00H, 00H, 00H
7
0
XSA4
XSA5
XSA6
XSA7
XSA8
XS47
XS57
XS67
XS77
XS87
XS46
XS56
XS66
XS76
XS86
XS45
XS55
XS65
XS75
XS85
XS44
XS54
XS64
XS74
XS84
XS43
XS53
XS63
XS73
XS83
XS42
XS52
XS62
XS72
XS82
XS41
XS51
XS61
XS71
XS81
XS40
XS50
XS60
XS70
XS80
(x2C)
(x2D)
(x2E)
(x2F)
(x30)
XSA8…XSA4… Transmit Sa-Bit Data
The Sa-bit register access is enabled by setting bit FMR1.ENSA = 1.
With the transmit multiframe begin an interrupt ISR1.XMB is
generated and the contents of these registers XSA4-8 will be copied
into a shadow register. The contents will subsequently sent out in the
service words of the next outgoing CRC multiframe (or doubleframes)
if none of the time-slot 0 transparent modes is enabled. XS40 will be
sent out in bit position 4 in frame 1, XS47 in frame 15. The transmit
Semiconductor Group
125
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
multiframe begin interrupt XMB request that these registers should be
serviced. If requests for new information are ignored, current contents
will be repeated.
Framer Mode Register 3 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
FMR3
XLD
XLU
CMI
SA6SY
EXTIW
(x31)
XLD…
XLU…
Transmit LLB Down Code
0… Normal operation.
1… A one in this bit position will cause the transmitter to replace
normal transmit data with the LLB Down (Deactuate) Code
continuously until this bit is reset. The LLB Down Code will be
optionally overwritten by the timeslot 0 depending on bit
LCR1.LLBF.
Transmit LLB UP Code
0… Normal operation.
1… A one in this bit position will cause the transmitter to replace
normal transmit data with the LLB UP Code continuously until
this bit is reset. The LLB UP Code will be overwritten by the
timeslot 0 depending on bit LCR1.LLBF. For proper operation
bit FMR3.XLD must be cleared.
CMI…
Select CMI Precoding
Only valid if CMI code (FMR0.XC1/0=01) is selected. This bit defines
the CMI precoding and influences only the transmit data and not the
receive data.
0… CMI with HDB3 precoding
1… CMI without HDB3 precoding
SA6SY…
Receive SA6 Access Synchron Mode
Only valid if multiframe format (FMR2.RFS1/0=1x) is selected.
0… The detection of the predefined SA6 bit pattern (refer to chapter
SA6 Bit Detection according to ETS 300233) is done
independently of the multiframe synchronous state.
Semiconductor Group
126
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
1… The detection of the SA6 bit pattern is done synchronously to
the multiframe.
EXTIW…
Extended CRC4 to Non CRC4 Interworking
Only valid in multiframe format. This bit selects the reaction of the
synchronizer after the 400 msec timeout has been elapsed and starts
transmitting a remote alarm if FMR2.AXRA is set.
0… The CRC4 to Non CRC4 interworking is done as described in
ITU-T G. 706 Annex B.
1… The interworking is done according to ITU-T G. 706 with the
exception that the synchronizer will still search the
multiframing even if the 400 msec timer is expired. Switching
into doubleframe format is disabled. If FMR2.AXRA is set the
remote alarm bit will be active in the outgoing data stream until
the multiframe is found.
Idle Channel Register (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H, 00H, 00H, 00H
7
0
ICB1
ICB2
ICB3
ICB4
IC0
IC8
IC1
IC9
IC2
IC3
IC4
IC5
IC6
IC7
(x32)
(x33)
(x34)
(x35)
IC10
IC18
IC26
IC11
IC19
IC27
IC12
IC20
IC28
IC13
IC21
IC29
IC14
IC22
IC30
IC15
IC23
IC31
IC16
IC24
IC17
IC25
IC0…IC31…
Idle Channel Selection Bits
These bits define the channels (time-slots) of the outgoing PCM
frame to be altered.
Assignments:
IC0 → time-slot 0
IC1 → time-slot 1
IC31 → time-slot 31
0… Normal operation.
1… Idle channel mode. The contents of the selected time-slot is
overwritten by the idle channel code defined via register IDLE.
Semiconductor Group
127
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Note: Although time-slot 0 can be selected via bit IC0, its contents is
only altered if the transparent mode is selected (XSP.TT0).
Line Interface Mode 0 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
LIM0
XFB
XDOS
EQON
LL
MAS
(x36)
XFB…
Transmit Full Bauded Mode
Only applicable for dual rail mode (bit LIM1.DRS = 1).
0…Output signals XDOP/XDON are half bauded (normal operation).
1…Output signals XDOP/XDON are full bauded.
Note: If CMI coding is selected (FMR0.XC1/0=01) this bit has to be
cleared.
XDOS…
Transmit Data Out Sense
0… Output signals XDOP/XDON are active low. Output XOID is
active high (normal operation).
1… Output signals XDOP/XDON are active high. Output XOID is
active low.
Note: If CMI coding is selected (FMR0.XC1/0=01) this bit has to be
cleared.
The transmit frame marker XFM is independent of this bit.
EQON…
LL…
Receive Equalizer On
0… -10 dB Receiver: short haul mode
1… -34 dB Receiver, long haul mode
Local Loop
0… Normal operation
1… Local loop active. The local loopback mode disconnects the
receive lines RL1/RL2 resp. RDIP/RDIN from the receiver.
Instead of the signals coming from the line the data provided by
system interface are routed through the analog receiver back to
the system interface. The unipolar bit stream will be
undisturbed transmitted on the line. Receiver and transmitter
coding must be identical. Operates in analog and digital line
Semiconductor Group
128
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
interface mode. In analog line interface mode data is transfered
through the complete analog receiver.
MAS…
Master Mode
0… Slave mode
1 … Master mode on. Setting this bit the DCO-R circuitry is
frequency synchronized to the clock (2.048 MHz) supplied by
SYNC. If this pin is connected to VSS or VDD the DCO-R
circuitry is centered and no receive jitter attenuation is
performed. The generated clocks are stable.
Line Interface Mode 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
LIM1
RIL2
RIL1
RIL0
JATT
RL
DRS
(x37)
RIL2…RIL0…
Receive Input Threshold
Only valid if analog line interface is selected (LIM1.DRS=0.
No signal will be declared if the voltage between pins RL1 and RL2
drops below the limits programmed via bits RIL2-0 and the received
data stream has no transition for a period defined in the PCD register.
The threshold where no signal will be declared is programmable via
the RIL2-0 bits depending of bit LIM0.EQON.
LIM0.EQON = 0 (short haul mode):
000 = 0.9 V
001 = 0.7 V
010 = 0.6 V
011 = 0.4 V
100 = 0.3 V
101 = 0.2 V
110 = 0.07 V
111 = 0.05 V
LIM0.EQON = 1 (long haul mode):
000 = 1.7 V
001 = 0.8 V
010 = 0.8 V
011 = 0.5 V
100 = 0.5 V
101 = 0.2 V
Semiconductor Group
129
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
110 = 0.1 V
111 = not assigned
JATT…RL...
Transmit Jitter Attenuator / Remote Loop
00 ... Normal operation. The transmit jitter attenuator is disabled.
Transmit data will bypass the buffer.
01 ... Remote Loop active without transmit jitter attenuator enabled.
Transmit data will bypass the buffer.
10 ... not defined
11 ... Remote Loop and jitter attenuator active. Received data from
pins RL1/2 or RDIP/N or ROID will be sent jitter free on ports
XL1/2 or XDOP/N or XOID. The dejittered clock is generated by
the DCO-X circuitry.
DRS…
Dual Rail Select
0 ... The ternary interface is selected. Multifunction ports RL1/2 and
XL1/2 become analog in/outputs.
1 ... The digital dual rail interface is selected. Received data is
latched on multifunction ports RDIP/RDIN while transmit data is
output on pins XDOP/XDON.
Semiconductor Group
130
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Pulse Count Detection Register (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
PCD
PCD7
PCD0
(x38)
PCD7…PCD0… Pulse Count Detection
A LOS alarm will be detected if the incoming data stream has no
transitions for a programmable number T consecutive pulse
positions. The number T is programmable via the PCD register and
can be calculated as follows:
T= 16(N+1) ; with 0 =< N =< 255.
The maximum time is: 256 x 16 x 488 ns = 2 ms. Every detected pulse
will reset the internal pulse counter. The counter will be clocked with
the receive clock RCLK.
Pulse Count Recovery (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
PCR
PCR7
PCR0
(x39)
PCR7…PCR0… Pulse Count Recovery
A LOS alarm will be cleared if a pulse density is detected in the
received bit stream. The number of pulses M which must occur in the
predefined PCD time interval is programmable via the PCR register
and can be calculated as follows:
M = N+1 ; with 0 =< N =< 255.
The time interval starts with the first detected pulse transition. With
every received pulse a counter will be incremented and the actual
counter is compared with the contents of PCR register. If the pulse
number >= the PCR value the LOS alarm will be reset otherwise the
alarm will still be active. In this case the next detected pulse transition
will start a new time interval.
Semiconductor Group
131
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Line Interface Mode 2 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
LIM2
LBO1
SCF
ELT
(x3A)
LBO1 …
Line Build-Out
In long haul applications LIM0.EQON = 1 a transmit filter can be
optionally placed on the transmit path to attenuate the data on pins
XL1/2. To meet the line build-out defined by FTZ221 registers
XPM2-0 should be programmed as follows:
0… 0 dB
1… FTZ221 template --> XPM2-0 = tbd.
SCF…
ELT…
Select Corner Frequency of DCO-R
Setting this bit will reduce the corner frequency of the DCO-R circuit
by the factor of ten to 0.2 Hz.
Note: Reducing the corner frequency of the DCO-R circuitry will
increase the synchronization time before the frequencies are
synchronized.
Enable Loop-Timed
0… normal operation
1… Transmit clock is generated from the clock supplied by MCLK
which is synchronized to the extracted receive route clock. In
this configuration the transmit elastic buffer has to be enabled.
Refer to register XSW.XTM. For correct operation of loop timed
the remote loop (bit LIM1.RL = 0) must be inactive and bit
CMR1.DXSS must be cleared.
Loop Code Register 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
LCR1
EPRM XPRBS LDC1
LDC0
LAC1
LAC0
FLLB
LLBP
(x3B)
EPRM…
Enable Pseudo Random Bit Sequence Monitor
0… Pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS) monitor is disabled.
Semiconductor Group
132
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
1… PRBS is enabled. Setting this bit enables incrementing the
CEC2 error counter with each detected PRBS bit error. With
any change of state of the PRBS internal synchronization
status an interrupt ISR1.LLBSC is generated. The current
status of the PRBS synchronizer is indicated by bit
RSP.LLBAD.
XPRBS…
Transmit Pseudo Random Bit Sequence
A one in this bit position enables transmitting of a pseudo random bit
sequence to the remote end. Depending on pit LLBP the PRBS is
generated according to 215 -1 or 220-1 ( ITU-T O. 151).
LDC1…0...
Length Deactuate (Down) Code
These bits defines the length of the LLB deactuate code which is
programmable in register LCR2.
00… length: 5 bit
01… length: 6 bit, 2 bit, 3 bit
10… length: 7 bit
11… length: 8 bit, 2 bit, 4bit
LAC1…0...
Length Actuate (Up) Code
These bits defines the length of the LLB actuate code which is
programmable in register LCR3.
00… length: 5 bit
01… length: 6 bit, 2 bit, 3 bit
10… length: 7 bit
11… length: 8 bit, 2 bit, 4 bit
FLLB…
Framed Line Loopback / Invert PRBS
Depending on bit LCR1.XPRBS this bit enables different functions:
LCR1.XPRBS=0:
0… The line loopback code is transmitted including framing bits.
1… The line loopback code is transmitted unframed.
Semiconductor Group
133
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Invert PRBS
LCR1.XPRBS=1:
0… The generated PRBS is transmitted not inverted.
1… The PRBS is transmitted inverted.
LLBP…
Line Loopback Pattern
LCR1.XPRBS=0
0… Fixed line loopback code : 001 or 00001.
1… Enable user programmable line loopback code via register
LCR2/3.
LCR1.XPRBS=1 or LCR1.EPRM = 1
0… 215 -1
1… 220 -1
Loop Code Register 2 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
LCR2
LDC7
LDC0
(x3C)
LDC7…LDC0… Line Loopback Deactuate Code
If enabled by bit FMR3.XLD the LLB deactuate code will automatically
repeat until the LLB generator is stopped. Transmit data is overwritten
by the LLB code. LDC0 is transmittted last. For correct operations bit
LCR1.XPRBS has to cleared.
Loop Code Register 3 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
LCR3
LAC7
LAC0
(x3D)
LAC7…LAC0… Line Loopback Actuate Code
If enabled by bit FMR3.XLU the LLB actuate code will automatically
repeat until the LLB generator is stopped. Transmit data is overwritten
by the LLB code. LAC0 is transmittted last. For correct operations bit
LCR1.XPRBS has to cleared.
Semiconductor Group
134
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
System Interface Control 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
SIC1
SSC1
SSD1
RBS1
RBS0
SSC0
BIM
XBS1
XBS0
(x3E)
SSC1...0…
Select System Clock
SIC1.SSC1/0 define the clocking rate on the system highway.
00…2.048 MHz
01…4.096 MHz
10…8.192 MHz
11…16.384 MHz
SSD1 …
Select System Data Rate 1
SIC1.SSD1 and FMR1.SSD0 define the data rate on the system
highway. Programming SSD1/SSD0 and corresponding data rate is
shown below.
00…2.048 MBit/s
01…4.096 MBit/s
10…8.192 MBit/s
11…16.384 MBit/s
RBS1...0…
Receive Buffer Size
00… buffer size : 2 frames
01… buffer size : 1 frame
10… buffer size : 96 bits
11… By-pass of receive elastic store
BIM …
Bit Interleaved Mode
0…byte interleaved mode
1…bit interleaved mode
XBS1...0…
Transmit Buffer Size
00… By-pass of transmit elastic store
01… buffer size : 1 frame
10… buffer size : 2 frames
11… buffer size : 96 bits
Semiconductor Group
135
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
System Interface Control 2 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
SIC2
FFS
SSF
CRB
SICS2
SICS1
SICS0
(x3F)
FFS …
Force Freeze Signaling
Setting this bit disables updating of the receive signaling buffer and
current signaling information is frozen. After resetting this bit and
receiving a complete superframe updating of the signaling buffer is
started again. The freeze signaling status could be also automatically
generated by detecting the Loss of Signal alarm or a Loss of CAS
Frame Alignment or a receive slip (only if external register access via
RSIG is enabled). This automatic freeze signaling function is logically
ored with this bit.
The current internal freeze signaling status is output on pin RP(A-D)
/ pin function FREEZ which is selected by PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 110.
Additionally this status is also available in register SIS.SFS.
SSF …
CRB …
Serial Signaling Format
Only applicable if pin function R/XSIG is selected.
0… Bits 1-4 in all time-slots except time-slots 0 +16 are cleared.
1… Bits 1-4 in all time-slots except time-slots 0 +16 are set high.
Center Receive Elastic Buffer
Only applicable if the time-slot assigner is disabled ( PC1-4.RPC2-0
= 001 ) , no external or internal synchronous pulse receive is
generated.
A transition from low to high will force a receive slip and the read-
pointer of the receive elastic buffer is centered. The delay through the
buffer is set to one half of the current buffer size. It should be hold high
for at least two 2.048 MHz periods before it is cleared.
SICS2 …0
System Interface Channel Select
Only applicable if the system clock rate is greater than 2.048 MHz .
Received data is transmitted on pin RDO / RSIG or received on XDI
/ XSIG with the selected system data rate. If the data rate is greater
than 2.048 MBit/s the data is output or sampled in half , a quarter or
a 1/8 of the 125 µsec. They will not be repeated. The time where the
data is active during a 488 nsec time-slot is called in the following a
channel phase. RDO / RSIG are cleared while XDI / XSIG are
Semiconductor Group
136
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
ignored for the remaining time of the 488 nsec or for the remaining
channel phases. The channel phases are selectable with these bits.
000 …data active in channel phase 1, valid if system data rate is
16 / 8 / 4 MBit/s
001 …data active in channel phase 2, valid if system data rate is
16 / 8 / 4 MBit/s
010 …data active in channel phase 3, valid if data rate is 16 / 8 MBit/s
011 …data active in channel phase 4, valid if data rate is 16 / 8 MBit/s
100 …data active in channel phase 5 , valid if data rate is 16 MBit/s
101 …data active in channel phase 6 , valid if data rate is 16 MBit/s
110 …data active in channel phase 7, valid if data rate is 16 MBit/s
111 …data active in channel phase 8 , valid if data rate is 16 MBit/s
System Interface Control 3 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
SIC3
CASMF
RESX
RESR
TTRF
DAF
(x40)
CASMF…
CAS Multiframe Begin Marker
0…The time-slot 0 multiframe begin is asserted on pin RP(A-D) / pin
function RMFB.
1…The time-slot 16 CAS multiframe begin is asserted on pin RP(A-
D) / pin function RMFB.
RESX…
Rising Edge Synchronous Pulse Transmit
Depending on this bit all transmit system interface data and marker
are clocked off or sampled with the selected active edge.
0… SYPX is latched with the first falling (active) edge of the SCLKX
clock.
1… SYPX is latched with the first rising (active) edge of the SCLKX
clock.
The SYPX pin function is selected by PC(1-4).XC(2-0) = 0000.
RESR…
Rising Edge Synchronous Pulse Receive
Depending on this bit all receive system interface data and marker are
clocked off with the selected active edge.
Semiconductor Group
137
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
0… SYPR is latched with the first falling edge of the SCLKR clock.
1… SYPR is latched with the first rising edge of the SCLKR clock.
The SYPR pin function is selected by PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 000.
TTR Register Function
TTRF…
DAF…
Setting this bit the function of the TTR1-4 registers are changed. A
one in each TTR register will force the XSIGM marker high for the
respective time-slot and controls sampling of the time-slots provided
on pin XSIG. XSIG is selected by PC(1-4).XPC(2-0).
Disable Automatic Freeze
0… Signaling is automaticly frozen if one of the following alarms
occured: Loss of Signal (FRS0.LOS), Loss of CAS Frame
Alignment (FRS1.TS16LFA) , or receive slips (ISR3.RSP/N).
1… Automatic freezing of signaling data is disabled. Updating of the
signaling buffer is also done if one of the above described alarm
conditions is active. However, updating of the signaling buffer is
stopped if SIC2.FFS is set. Significant only if the serial signaling
access is enabled.
Clock Mode Register 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
CMR1
DRSS1 DRSS0
RS1
RS0
DCS
STF
DXJA
DXSS
(x44)
DRSS1 ... 0 …
DCO-R Synchronization Clock Source
These bits select the reference clock source for the DCO-R circuitry.
00… receive reference clock generated by the DPLL of channel 1
01… receive reference clock generated by the DPLL of channel 2
10… receive reference clock generated by the DPLL of channel 3
11… receive reference clock generated by the DPLL of channel 4
Note: After Reset all DCO-R circuitries will synchronize on the clock
sourced by the DPLL of channel 1 . Each channel have to be
configured individually.
If LIM0.MAS is set the DCO-R circuitry will synchronize on the
clock applied to port SYNC.
Semiconductor Group
138
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
RS1 ... 0 …
Select RCLK Source
These bits select the source of RCLK.
00… extracted receive clock, generated by the DPLL
01… extracted receive clock with the option in case of an active LOS
alarm this pin is set high.
10… dejittered 2.048 MHz clock generated by the internal DCO-R
circuitry.
11… dejittered 8.192 MHz clock generated by the internal DCO-R
circuitry.
DCS …
STF …
Disable Clock Switching
In Slave mode (LIM0.MAS = 0) the DCO-R is synchronized on the
recovered route clock. In case of loss of signal LOS the DCO-R
switches automatically to the clock sourced by port SYNC. Setting
this bit automatic switching from RCLK to SYNC is disabled.
Select TCLK Frequency
Only applicable if the pin function TCLK port XP(A-D) is selected by
PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 011. Data on XL1/2 (XDOP/N / XOID) are
clocked off with TCLK.
0… 2.048 MHz
1… 8.192 MHz
DXJA…
DXSS …
Disable Internal Transmit Jitter Attenuation
Setting this bit disables the transmit jitter attenuation. Reading the
data out of the transmit elastic buffer and transmitting on XL1/2
(XDOP/N / XOID) is done with the clock provided on pin TCLK. In
transmit elastic buffer bypass mode the transmit clock is taken from
SCLKX, independent of this bit.
DCO-X Synchronization Clock Source
0… The DCO-X circuitry of each channel will synchronize to the
internal reference clock which is sourced by SCLKX/R or
RCLK. Since there are many reference clock opportunities the
following internal priorization in descenting order from left to
right is realized: LIM1.RL > CMR2.DXSS > LIM2.ELT > current
working clock of transmit system interface.
If one of these bits is set the corresponding reference clock is
taken.
Semiconductor Group
139
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
1… DCO-X synchronizes to an external reference clock provided by
pin XP(A-D) pin function TCLK, if no remote loop is active.
TCLK is selected by PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 011.
Clock Mode Register 2 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
CMR2
DCF
IRSP
IRSC
IXSP
IXSC
(x45)
DCF …
DCO-R Center- Frequency Disabled
0… The DCO-R circuitry may be frequency centered
- in master mode if no reference clock on pin SYNC is provided
or
- in slave mode if a loss of signal occurs in combination with no
clock on pin SYNC or
- a gapped clock is provided at pin RCLKI and this clock is
inactive or stopped.
1… The center function of the DCO-R circuitry is disabled. The
generated clock (DCO-R) is frequency frozen in that moment
when no clock is available at pin SYNC or pin RCLKI. The
DCO-R circuitry will starts synchronization as soon as a clock at
pins SYNC or RCLKI appears.
IRSP …
Internal Receive System Frame Sync Pulse
0… The frame sync pulse for the receive system interface is
sourced by SYPR.
1… The frame sync pulse for the receive system interface is
internally sourced by the DCO-R circuitry of each channel. This
internally generated frame sync could be output active low on
pin RP(A-D). RPC(2-0) = 001. Programming the receive time-
slot offset is also done in the same way as it is done for the
external SYPR. For correct operation bit IRSC must be set.
SYPR is ignored.
IRSC …
Internal Receive System Clock
Only applicable if bit GPC1.SMM is cleared. If GPC1.SMM is set
SCLKR1 of channel 1 provides the working clock for all four channels.
Semiconductor Group
140
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
0… The working clock for the receive system interface is sourced by
SCLKR of each channel or in receive elastic buffer bypass
mode from the corresponding extracted receive clock RCLK.
1… The working clock for the receive system interface is sourced
internally by DCO-R or in bypass mode by the extracted receive
clock of each channel. SCLKR is ignored.
IXSP …
Internal Transmit System Frame Sync Pulse
0… The frame sync pulse for the transmit system interface is
sourced by SYPX.
1… The frame sync pulse for the transmit system interface is
internally sourced by the DCO-R circuitry of each channel.
Additionally, the external XMFS signal defines the transmit
multiframe begin. XMFS is enabled or disabled via the
multifunction ports. For correct operation bits CMR2.IXSC /
IRSC must be set. SYPX is ignored.
IXSC …
Internal Transmit System Clock
Only applicable if bit GPC1.SMM is cleared. If GPC1.SMM is set
SCLKX1 of channel 1 provides the working clock for all four channels.
0… The working clock for the transmit system interface is sourced
by SCLKX of each channel.
1… The working clock for the transmit system interface is sourced
internally by the working clock of the receive system interface.
SCLKX is ignored.
Global Configuration Register (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
GCR
VIS
SCI
SES
ECMC
PD
(x46)
VIS…
Masked Interrupts Visible
0… Masked interrupt status bits are not visible in registers ISR0-4.
1… Masked interrupt status bits are visible in ISR0-4, but they are
not visible in registers GIS and CIS.
SCI…
Status Change Interrupt
Semiconductor Group
141
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
0… Interrupts will be generated either on coming or going of the
internal interrupt source.
1… The following interrupts will be activated if enabled with
detecting and recovering of the internal interrupt source:
ISR2.LOS , ISR2.AIS, ISR3.LMFA16
SES…
Select External Second Timer
0… internal second timer selected
1… external second timer selected
Error Counter Mode COFA
ECMC…
0… The SA6 bit error indications are accumulated in the error
counter CEC3L/H.
1… A Change of Frame or Multiframe Alignment COFA is detected
since the last re-synchronization. The events are accumulated
in the error counter CEC3L.1-0.
Multiframe periods received in the asynchronous state are
accumulated in the error counter CEC3L.7-2.
An overflow of each counter is disabled.
PD…
Power Down
Switches the appropriate single FALC(1-4) between power up and
power down mode.
0… Power Up
1… Power Down
All outputs are driven inactive, except the multifunction ports,
which are driven high.
Errored Second Mask (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: FFH
7
0
ESM
LFA
FER
CER
AIS
LOS
CVE
SLIP
EBE
(x47)
ESM
Errored Second Mask
This register functions as an additional mask register for the interrupt
status bit Errored Second (ISR3.ES). A ‘1’ in a bit position of ESM sets
the mask active for the interrupt status.
Semiconductor Group
142
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Disable Error Counter (Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
DEC
DRBD
DCEC3 DCEC2 DCEC1 DEBC
DCVC
DFEC
(x60)
DRBD
Disable Receive Buffer Delay
This bit has to be set before reading the register RBD. It will be
automatically reset if RBD has been read.
DCEC3…
DCEC2…
DCEC1…
DEBC …
DCVC…
DFEC…
Disable CRC Error Counter 3
Disable CRC Error Counter 2
Disable CRC Error Counter
Disable Errored Block Counter
Disable Code Violation Counter
Disable Framing Error Counter
These bits are only valid if FMR1.ECM is cleared. They have to be set
before reading the error counters. They will be automatically reset if
the corresponding error counter high byte has been read. With the
rising edge of these bits the error counters are latched and then
cleared.
Semiconductor Group
143
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Transmit CAS Register (Write)
Value after RESET: not defined
7
0
XS1
0
0
0
0
X
Y
X
X
(x70)
(x71)
(x72)
(x73)
(x74)
(x75)
(x76)
(x77)
(x78)
(x79)
(x7A)
(x7B)
(x7C)
(x7D)
(x7E)
(x7F)
XS2
A1
B1
C1
D1
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
XS3
A2
B2
C2
D2
XS4
A3
B3
C3
D3
XS5
A4
B4
C4
D4
XS6
A5
B5
C5
D5
XS7
A6
B6
C6
D6
XS8
A7
B7
C7
D7
XS9
A8
B8
C8
D8
XS10
XS11
XS12
XS13
XS14
XS15
XS16
A9
B9
C9
D9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
Transmit CAS Register 1-16
The transmit CAS register access is enabled by setting bit XSP.CASEN = 1. Each
register except XS1 contains the CAS bits for two timeslots. With the transmit multiframe
begin ISR1.XMB the contents of these registers will be copied into a shadow register.
The contents will subsequently sent out in the timeslots 16 of the outgoing data stream.
If ISR1.XMB is not used and the write access to these registers is done exact in that
moment when this interrupt is generated, data may be lost.
XS1.7 will be sent out first and XS16.0 will be sent last. The transmit multiframe begin
interrupt (XMB) requests that these registers should be serviced. If requests for new
information are ignored, current contents will be repeated. XS1 has to be programmed
with the multiframe pattern. This pattern should always stay low otherwise the remote
end will lose its synchronization. With setting the Y-bit a remote alarm will be transmitted
to the far end. The X bits (Spare bits) should be set to one if they are not used.
If access to these registers is done without control of the interrupt ISR1.XMB the
registers should be write twice to avoid a internally data transfer error.
Semiconductor Group
144
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Note: A software reset (CMDR.XRES) will reset these registers.
Port Configuration 1-4 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
PC1
PC2
PC3
PC4
RPC2
RPC2
RPC2
RPC2
RPC1
RPC1
RPC1
RPC1
RPC0
RPC0
RPC0
RPC0
XPC2
XPC2
XPC2
XPC2
XPC1
XPC1
XPC1
XPC1
XPC0
XPC0
XPC0
XPC0
(x80)
(x81)
(x82)
(x83)
RPC2 ...0…
Receive multifunction port configuration
The multifunction ports RP(A-D) are bidirectional. After Reset these
ports are configured as inputs. With the selection of the pin function
the In/Output configuration is also achieved. The input function SYPR
may only be selected once, it should not be selected twice or more.
Register PC1 configures port RPA,while PC2 --> port RPB,
PC3 --> port RPC and PC4 --> port RPD.
000…SYPR: Synchronous Pulse Receive (Input)
Together with register RC1/0 SYPR defines the frame begin on
the receive system interface. Because of the offset
programming the SYPR and the RFM pin function could not be
selected in parallel.
001…RFM : Receive Frame Sync (Output)
CMR2.IRSP = 0: This receive frame marker could be active
high for a 2.048 MHz period during any bit position of the
current frame. Programming is done with registers RC1/0. The
internal time-slot assigner is disabled.
CMR2.IRSP = 1: Internal generated frame synchronization
pulse generated by the DCO-R circuitry. Together with
registers RC1/0 the frame begin on the receive system
interface is defined. This frame synchronization pulse is active
low 2.048 MHz period.
010…RMFB : Receive Multiframe Begin (Output)
Marks the beginning of every received multiframe or optionally
the begin of every CAS multiframe begin (active high).
011…RSIGM : Receive Signaling Marker (Output)
Marks the time-slots which are defined by register RTR1-4 of
every frame at port RDO.
Semiconductor Group
145
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
100…RSIG : Receive Signaling Data (Output)
The received CAS multiframe is transmitted on this pin. Time-
slots on RSIG correlates directly to the time-slot assignment on
RDO. In system interface multiplex mode all four received
signaling data streams are merged into a single rail data stream
byte or bit interleaved on RSIG1.
101…DLR : Data Link Bit Receive (Output)
Marks the SA8-4 bits within the data stream on RDO.
110…FREEZ : Freeze Signaling (Output)
The freeze signaling status is active high by detecting a Loss of
Signal alarm, or a Loss of CAS Frame Alignment or a receive
slip (pos. or neg.). It will hold high for at least one complete
multiframe after the alarm disappears. Setting SIC2.FFS
enforces a high on pin FREEZ.
111…RFSP : Receive Frame Synchronous Pulse (Output)
Marks the frame begin in the receivers synchrounous state.
This marker is active low for 488 ns with a frequency of 8 kHz.
XPC2 ...0…
Transmit multifunction Port Configuration
The multifunction ports XP(A-D) are bidirectional. After Reset these
ports are configured as inputs. With the selection of the pin function
the In/Output configuration is also achieved. Each of the four different
input functions ( SYPX, XMFS, XSIG, TCLK ) may only be selected
once. No input function should be selected twice or more. SYPX and
XMFS should not be selected in parallel. Register PC1 configures
port XPA,while PC2 --> port XPB, PC3 --> port XPC and PC4 --> port
XPD.
000…SYPX: Synchronous Pulse Transmit (Input)
Together with register XC1/0 SYPX defines the frame begin on
the transmit system interface ports XDI and XSIG.
001…XMFS : Transmit Multiframe Synchronization (Input)
Together with register XC1/0 XMFS defines the frame and
multiframe begin on the transmit system interface ports XDI
and XSIG. Depending on PC5.CXMFS the signal on XMFS is
active high or low.
010…XSIG : Transmit Signaling Data (Input)
Input for transmit signaling data received from the signaling
highway. In system interface multiplex mode latching of the
data stream containing the 4 signaling multiframes is done byte
or bit interleaved on port XDI1. Optionally sampling of XSIG
data is controlled by the active high XSIGM marker.
Semiconductor Group
146
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
011…TCLK : Transmit Clock (Input)
A 2.048 / 8.192 MHz clock has to be sourced by the system if
the internal generated transmit clock (DCO-X) should not be
used. Optionally this input functions as a synchronization clock
for the DCO-X circuitry with a frequencyof 2.048 MHz.
100…XMFB : Transmit Multiframe Begin (Output)
Marks the beginning of every transmit multiframe.
101…XSIGM : Transmit Signaling Marker (Output)
Marks the time-slots which are defined by register TTR1-4 of
every frame at port XDI.
110…DLX : Data Link Bit Transmit (Output)
Marks the SA8-4 bits within the data stream on XDI.
111…XCLK : Transmit Line Clock (Output)
Frequency: 2.048 MHz
Port Configuration 5 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
PC5
CXMFS CSXP
CSRP
CRP
(x84)
CXMFS …
CSXP …
CSRP …
CRP …
Configure XMFS Port
0… Port XMFS is active low.
1… Port XMFS is active high.
Configure SCLKX Port
0… SCLKX : Input
1… SCLKX : Output
Configure SCLKR Port
0… SCLKR : Input
1… SCLKR : Output
Configure RCLK Port
0… RCLK : Input
1… RCLK : Output
Semiconductor Group
147
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Global Port Configuration 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
GPC1
SMM
CSFP1 CSFP0
FSS1
FSS0
R1S1
R1S0
(85)
SMM …
System Interface Multiplex Mode
Setting this bit enables a single rail data stream of 16.384 or 8.192
MBit/s containg all four E1 frames. The receive system interface for
all four channels is running with the clock provided on SCLKR1 and
the frame sync pulse provided on SYPR1. The transmit system
interface is running with SCLKX1 and SYPX1. Data will be
transmitted / accepted in a byte or bit interleaved format. In the
system interface multiplex mode the following pin configuration has to
be fulfilled and must be identically for all for 4 channels:
- SYPR1 has to be provided on pin RPA1
- SYPX1 has to be provided on pin XPA1 or
- XMFS has to be provided on pin XPB1
- XSIG has to be provided on pin XPC1
- RSIG will be output on pin RPB1
Each of the four channels have to be configured equally:
- clocking rate : 16.384 or 8.192 MHz , SIC1.SSC1/0
- data rate : 16.384 or 8.192 MBit/s, SIC1.SSD, FMR1.SSD0
- time-slot offset programming : RC1/0 , XC1/0
- receive buffer size : SIC1.RBS1/0 = 00 (2 frames)
e.g. : system clock rate = 8.192 MHz : SIC1.SSC1/0 = 10 and system
data rate = 8.192 MBit/s : SIC1.SSD1 = 1 , FMR1.SSD0 = 0
The multiplexed data stream is internal logically ored. Therefore the
selection of the active channel phase have to be configured different
for each single channel FALC(1-4). Programming is done with
SIC2.SICS2-0.
for FALC1: SIC2.SICS2-0 = 000, selects the first channel phase
for FALC2: SIC2.SICS2-0 = 001, selects the second channel phase
for FALC3: SIC2.SICS2-0 = 010, selects the third channel phase
for FALC4: SIC2.SICS2-0 = 011, selects the fourth channel phase
byte interleaved data format: SIC1.BIM = 0
XDI/RDO: F1-TS0, F2-TS0, F3-TS0, F4-TS0, F1-TS1, ... F4-TS31
X/RSIG: F1-STS0, F2-STS0, F3-STS0, F4-STS0, F1-... F4-STS31
Semiconductor Group
148
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
or : bit interleaved data format: SIC1.BIM = 1
XDI/RDO: F1-TS0-B1, F2-TS0-B1, F3-TS0-B1, F4-TS0-B1, F1-TS0-
B2, ... F4-TS31-B8
X/RSIG: F1-STS0-B1, F2-STS0-B1, F3-STS0-B1, F4-STS0-B1, F1-
STS0-B2, ... F4-STS31-B8
with : F = Framer, TS = Time-Slot, STS = Signaling Time-Slot, B = Bit
In system interface multiplex mode signals on RDO2-4 and RSIG2-4
are undefined, while signals on SCLKR2-4, SYPR2-4, SCLKX2-4,
SYPX2-4, XDI2-4 and XSIG2-4 are ignored.
CSFP1 ... 0 …
Configure SEC / FSC Port
The FSC pulse is generated if the DCO-R circuitry of the selected
channel is active (CMR2.IRSC = 1 or CMR1.RS1/0 = 10 or 11).
00 … SEC : Input , active high
01 … SEC : Output, active high
10 … FSC: Output , active high
11 … FSC: Output, active low
SEC / FSC Source
FSS1 ... 0 …
One of the four internal generated dejittered 8 kHz clocks or second
timers (SEC) are output on port SEC / FSC.
GPC1.CSFP1 = 1:
00 … FSC : 8 kHz sourced by channel 1
01 … FSC : 8 kHz sourced by channel 2
10 … FSC : 8 kHz sourced by channel 3
11 … FSC : 8 kHz sourced by channel 4
GPC1.CSFP1 = 0:
00 … SEC : second timer sourced by channel 1
01 … SEC: second timer sourced by channel 2
10 … SEC: second timer sourced by channel 3
11 … SEC: second timer sourced by channel 4
Semiconductor Group
149
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
R1S1 ... 0 …
RCLK1 Source
One of the four internal generated receive route clocks are output on
port RCLK1. Outputs RCLK2-4 are valid independent of these bits.
Refer to bit CMR1.RS1/0.
00 … extracted receive clock of channel 1
01 … extracted receive clock of channel 2
10… extracted receive clock of channel 3
11… extracted receive clock of channel 4
Semiconductor Group
150
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
4.5
Status Register Description
Table 12
Status RegisterAddress Arrangement
Address
Register Type Comment
00
49
100
200
249
300
349
RFIFO
RBD
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Receive FIFO
149
Receive Buffer Delay
4A
VSTR
RES
Version Status
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
62
63
14B
14C
14D
14E
14F
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
15A
15B
15C
15D
15E
15F
160
161
162
163
24B
24C
24D
24E
24F
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
25A
25B
25C
25D
25E
25F
260
261
262
263
34B
34C
34D
34E
34F
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
35A
35B
35C
35D
35E
35F
360
361
362
363
Receive Equalizer Status
Framer Receive Status 0
Framer Receive Status 1
Receive Service Word
FRS0
FRS1
RSW
RSP
Receive Spare Bits
FECL
FECH
CVCL
CVCH
CEC1L
CEC1H
EBCL
EBCH
CEC2L
CEC2H
CEC3L
CEC3H
RSA4
RSA5
RSA6
RSA7
RSA8
RSA6S
RSP1
RSP2
Framing Error Counter Low
Framing Error Counter High
Code Violation Counter Low
Code Violation Counter High
CRC Error Counter 1 Low
CRC Error Counter 1 High
E-Bit Error Counter Low
E-Bit Error Counter High
CRC Error Counter 2 Low
CRC Error Counter 2 High
CRC Error Counter 3 Low
CRC Error Counter 3 High
Receive SA4 Bit Register
Receive SA5 Bit Register
Receive SA6 Bit Register
Receive SA7 Bit Register
Receive SA8 Bit Register
Receive SA6 Bit Status Register
R/W Receive Signaling Pointer 1
R/W Receive Signaling Pointer 2
Semiconductor Group
151
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Table 12
Status RegisterAddress Arrangement
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
164
165
166
167
168
169
16A
16B
16C
16D
16E
264
265
266
267
268
269
26A
26B
26C
26D
26E
364
365
366
367
368
369
36A
36B
36C
36D
36E
SIS
RSIS
RBCL
RBCH
ISR0
ISR1
ISR2
ISR3
ISR4
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Signaling Status Register
Receive Signaling Status Register
Receive Byte Control Low
Receive Byte Control High
Interrupt Status Register 0
Interrupt Status Register 1
Interrupt Status Register 2
Interrupt Status Register 3
Interrupt Status Register 4
GIS
CIS
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Global Interrupt Status
Channel Interrupt Status
Receive CAS Register 1
Receive CAS Register 2
Receive CAS Register 3
Receive CAS Register 4
Receive CAS Register 5
Receive CAS Register 6
Receive CAS Register 7
Receive CAS Register 8
Receive CAS Register 9
Receive CAS Register 10
Receive CAS Register 11
Receive CAS Register 12
Receive CAS Register 13
Receive CAS Register 14
Receive CAS Register 15
Receive CAS Register 16
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
17A
17B
17C
17D
17E
17F
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
27A
27B
27C
27D
27E
27F
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
37A
37B
37C
37D
37E
37F
RS1
RS2
RS3
RS4
RS5
RS6
RS7
RS8
RS9
RS10
RS11
RS12
RS13
RS14
RS15
RS16
Semiconductor Group
152
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Receive FIFO (Read) RFIFO
7
0
RFIFO
RF7
RF0 (x00/x01)
Reading data from RFIFO can be done in an 8-bit (byte) or 16-bit (word) access
depending on the selected bus interface mode. The LSB is received first from the serial
interface.
The size of the accessible part of RFIFO is determined by programming the bits
CCR1.RFT 1 … 0 (RFIFO threshold level). It can be reduced from 32 bytes (RESET
value) down to 2 bytes (four values: 32, 16, 4, 2 bytes).
Data Transfer
Up to 32 bytes/16 words of received data can be read from the RFIFO following an RPF
or an RME interrupt.
RPF Interrupt: A fixed number of bytes/words to be read (32, 16, 4, 2 bytes). The
message is not yet complete.
RME Interrupt: The message is completely received. The number of valid bytes is
determined by reading the RBCL, RBCH registers.
RFIFO is released by issuing the “Receive Message Complete” command (RMC).
Receive Buffer Delay (Read)
7
0
RBD
RBD5
RBD4
RBD3
RBD2
RBD1
RBD0
(x49)
RBD5…RBD0... Receive Elastic Buffer Delay
These bits informs the user about the current delay (in time-slots)
through the receive elastic buffer. The delay is updated every 512 or
256 bits (SIC1.RBS1/0). Before reding this register the user has to set
bit DEC.DRBD in order to halt the current value of this register. After
reading RBD updating of this register is enabled. Not valid if the
receive buffer is bypassed.
000000 = delay < 1 time-slot
:
:
111111 = delay >63 time-slots
Semiconductor Group
153
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Version Status Register (Read)
7
0
VSTR
VN7
VN0
(4A)
VN7 – VN0…
Version Number of Chip
00H…Version 1.1
Receive Equalizer Status (Read)
7
0
RES
EV1
EV0
RES4
RES3
RES2
RES1
RES0
(x4B)
EV1…EV0...
Equalizer Status Valid
These bits informs the user about the current state of the receive
equalization network. Only valid if LIM1.EQON is set.
00… equalizer status not valid, still adapting
01… equalizer status valid
10… equalizer status not valid
11… equalizer status valid but high noise floor
RES4…RES0... Receive Equalizer Status
The current line attenuation status in steps of nearly 1.7 dB are
displayed in these bits. Only valid if bits EV1/0 = 01. Accuracy: +/- 2
digit, based on temperature influence and noise amplitude variations.
00000… attenuation: 0 dB
...
11001… max. attenuation: -34 dB
Framer Receive Status Register 0 (Read)
7
0
FRS0
LOS
AIS
LFA
RRA
NMF
LMFA
(x4C)
LOS…
Loss of Signal
Detection:
This bit is set when the incoming signal has “no transitions” (analog
Semiconductor Group
154
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
interface) or logical zeros (dig. interface) in a time interval of T
consecutive pulses, where T is programmable via PCD register.
Total account of consecutive pulses: 16 < T < 4096.
Analog interface: The receive signal level where “no transition” will be
declared is defined by the programmed value of LIM1.RIL2-0.
Recovery:
Analog interface: The bit will be reset in short haul mode when the
incoming signal has transitions with signal levels greater than the
programmed receive input level (LIM1.RIL2-0) for at least M pulse
periods defined by register PCR in the PCD time interval. In long haul
mode addtionally bit RES.6 must be set for at least 250µsec.
Digital interface: The bit will be reset when the incoming data stream
contains at least M ones defined by register PCR in the PCD time
interval.
With the rising edge of this bit an interrupt status bit (ISR2.LOS) will
be set..
The bit will also be set during alarm simulation and reset if FMR0.SIM
is cleared and no alarm condition exists.
AIS…
Alarm Indication Signal
The function of this bit is determined by FMR0.ALM.
FMR0.ALM = 0: This bit is set when two or less zeros in the
received bit stream are detected in a time interval
of 250 µs and the QuadFALC is in the
asynchronous state (FRS0.LFA = 1). The bit will
be reset when no alarm condition is detected
(ETSI).
FMR0.ALM = 1: This bit is set when the incoming signal has two or
less Zeros in each of two consecutive double
frame period (512 bits). This bit will be cleared
when each of two consecutive doubleframe
periods contain three or more zeros or when the
frame alignment signal FAS has been found.
(ITU-T: G.775)
The bit will also be set during alarm simulation and reset if FMR0.SIM
is cleared and no alarm condition exists.
With the rising edge of this bit an interrupt status bit (ISR2.AIS) will be
set.
LFA…
Loss of Frame Alignment
Semiconductor Group
155
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
This bit is set after detecting 3 or 4 consecutive incorrect FAS words
or 3 or 4 consecutive incorrect service words (can be disabled). With
the rising edge of this bit an interrupt status bit (ISR2.LFA) will be set.
The specification of the loss of sync conditions is done via bits
RC1.SWD and RC1.ASY4. After loss of synchronization, the frame
aligner will resynchronize automatically.
The following conditions have to be detected to regain synchronous
state:
– The presence of the correct FAS word in frame n.
– The presence of the correct service word (bit 2 = 1) in frame n + 1.
– For a second time the presence of a correct FAS word in frame
n + 2.
The bit is cleared when synchronization has been regained (directly
after the second correct FAS word of the procedure described above
has been received).
If the CRC-multiframe structure is enabled by setting bit FMR2.RFS1,
multiframe alignment is assumed to be lost if pulse-frame
synchronization has been lost. The resynchronization procedure for
multiframe alignment starts after the bit FRS0.LFA has been cleared.
Multiframe alignment has been regained if two consecutive CRC-
multiframes have been received without a framing error (refer to
FRS0.LMFA).
The bit will be set during alarm simulation and reset if FMR0.SIM is
cleared and no alarm condition exists.
If bit FRS0.LFA is cleared a loss of frame alignment recovery interrupt
status ISR2.FAR will be generated.
RRA…
Receive Remote Alarm
Set if bit 3 of the received service word is set. An alarm interrupt status
ISR2.RA can be generated if the alarm condition is detected.
FRS0.RRA will be cleared when no alarm is detected. At the same
time a remote alarm recovery interrupt status ISR2.RAR will be
generated.
The bit RSW.RRA has the same function.
Both status and interrupt status bits will be set during alarm
simulation.
Semiconductor Group
156
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
NMF…
No Multiframe Alignment Found
This bit is only valid if the CRC4 interworking is selected
(FMR2.RFS1/0 = 11). Set if the multiframe pattern could not be
detected in a time interval of 400 msec after the framer has reached
the doubleframe synchronous state. The receiver is then
automatically switched to doubleframe format.
This bit is reset if the basic framing has been lost.
LMFA…
Loss of Multiframe Alignment
Not used in doubleframe format (FMR2.RFS1 = 0). In this case, set to
logical ‘1’.
In CRC-multiframe mode (FMR2.RFS1 = 1), this bit is set
– if force resynchronization is initiated by setting bit FMR0.FRS, or
– if multiframe force resynchronization is initiated by setting bit
FMR1.MFCS, or
– if pulseframe alignment has been lost (FRS0.LFA).
It is reset if two CRC-multiframes have been received at an interval of
n × 2 ms (n = 1, 2, 3…) without a framing error.
If bit FRS0.LMFA is cleared a loss of multiframe alignment recovery
interrupt status ISR2.MFAR will be generated.
Framer Receive Status Register 1 (Read)
7
0
FRS1
TS16RA TS16LOS TS16AIS TS16LFA
XLS
XLO
(x4D)
TS16RA…
Receive Timeslot 16 Remote Alarm
This bit contains the actual information of the received remote alarm
bit RS1.2 in time-slot 16. Setting and resetting of this bit will cause an
interrupt status change ISR3.RA16.
TS16LOS…
Receive Timeslot 16 Loss of Signal
This bit is set if the incoming TS16 data stream contains always zeros
for at least 16 contiguously received time-slots. A one in a time-slot
16 will reset this bit.
Semiconductor Group
157
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
TS16AIS…
Receive Timeslot 16 Alarm Indication Signal
The detection of the alarm indication signal in timeslot 16 is according
to ITU-T G.775.
This bit is set if the incoming TS16 contains less than 4 zeros in each
of two consecutive TS16 multiframe periods. This bit will be cleared if
two consecutive received CAS multiframe periods contains more than
3 zeros or the multiframe pattern was found in each of them. This bit
will be cleared if TS0 synchronization is lost.
TS16LFA…
Receive Timeslot 16 Loss of Multiframe Alignment
0 ... The CAS controller is in synchronous state after frame
alignment is accomplished.
1 ... This bit is set if the framing pattern ‘0000’ in 2 consecutive CAS
multiframes were not found or in all TS16 of the preceding
multiframe all bits were reset. An interrupt ISR3.LMFA16 will be
generated.
XLS…
Transmit Line Short
Significant only if the ternary line interface is selected by
LIM1.DRS=0.
0… Normal operation. No short is detected.
1… The XL1 and XL2 are shortend for at least 3 pulses. As a
reaction of the short the pins XL1 and XL2 are automatically
forced into a high impedance state if bit XPM2.DAXLT is reset.
After 128 consecutive pulse periods the outputs XL1/2 are
activated again and the internal transmit current limiter is
checked. If a short between XL1/2 is still further active the
outputs XL1/2 are in high impedance state again. When the
short disappears pins XL1/2 are activated automatically and
this bit will be reset. With any change of this bit an interrupt
ISR1.XLSC will be generated. In case of XPM2.XLT is set this
bit will be frozen.
XLO…
Transmit Line Open
0… Normal operation
1… This bit will be set if at least 32 consecutive zeros were sent via
pins XL1/XL2 resp. XDOP/XDON. This bit is reset with the first
transmitted pulse. With the rising edge of this bit an interrupt
ISR1.XLSC will be set. In case of XPM2.XLT is set this bit will
be frozen.
Semiconductor Group
158
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Receive Service Word Pulseframe (Read)
7
0
RSW
RSI
RRA
RYO
RY1
RY2
RY3
RY4
(x4E)
RSI…
Receive Spare Bit for International Use
First bit of the received service word. It is fixed to one if CRC-
multiframe mode is enabled.
RRA…
Receive Remote Alarm
Equivalent to bit FRS0.RRA.
RY0…RY4…
Receive Spare Bits for National Use (Y-Bits, Sn-Bits, Sa-Bits)
Receive Spare Bits/Additional Status (Read)
7
0
RSP
SI1
SI2
LLBDD LLBAD
RSIF
RS13
RS15
(x4F)
SI1…SI2…
Submultiframe Error Indication 1, 2
Not valid if doubleframe format is enabled. In this case, both bits are
set to logical ‘1’.
When using CRC-multiframe format these bits are set to
0… If multiframe alignment has been lost, or
if the last multiframe has been received with CRC error(s). SI1
flags a CRC error in last sub-multiframe 1, SI2 flags a CRC
error in last sub-multiframe 2.
1 ... If at multiframe synchronous state last assigned sub-multiframe
has been received without a CRC error.
Both flags will be actualized with beginning of every received CRC
multiframe.
If automatic transmission of sub-multiframe status is enabled by
setting bit XSP.AXS, above status information will be inserted
automatically in Si -bit position of every outgoing CRC multiframe
(under the condition that time-slot 0 transparent modes are both
disabled):
SI1 → Si -bit of frame 13, SI2 → Si -bit of frame 15.
Semiconductor Group
159
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
LLBDD…
Line Loop Back Deactuation Signal Detected
This bit is set to one in case the LLB deactuate signal is detected and
then received over a period of more than 25 msec with a bit error rate
less than 1/100. The bit remains set as long as the bit error rate does
not exceed 1/100.
If framing is aligned, the timeslot 0 is not taken into account for the
error rate calculation.
Any change of this bit will cause a LLBSC interrupt.
LLBAD…
Line Loop Back Actuation Signal Detected
Depending on bit LCR1.EPRM the source of this status bit changed.
LCR1.EPRM=0: This bit is set to one in case the LLB actuate signal
is detected and then received over a period of more than 25 msec with
a bit error rate less than 1/100. The bit remains set as long as the bit
error rate does not exceed 1/100.
If framing is aligned, the timeslot 0 is not taken into account for the
error rate calculation.
Any change of this bit will cause a LLBSC interrupt.
PRBS Status
LCR1.EPRM=1: The current status of the PRBS synchronizer is
indicated in this bit. It is set high if the synchronous state is reached
even in the presence of a BER 1/10. A data stream containing all
zeros with / without framing bits is also a valid pseudo random bit
sequence.
RSIF…
RS13…
Receive Spare Bit for International Use (FAS Word)
First bit in FAS-word. Used only in doubleframe format, otherwise
fixed to ‘1’.
Receive Spare Bit (Frame 13, CRC Multiframe)
First bit in service word of frame 13. Significant only in CRC-
multiframe format, otherwise fixed to ‘0’. This bit is updated with
beginning of every received CRC multiframe.
RS15…
Receive Spare Bit (Frame 15, CRC Multiframe)
First bit in service word of frame 15. Significant only in CRC-
multiframe format, otherwise fixed to ‘0’. This bit is updated with
beginning of every received CRC multiframe.
Semiconductor Group
160
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Framing Error Counter (Read)
7
0
FECL
FE7
FE0
FE8
(x50)
(x51)
7
0
FECH
FE15
FE15…FE0…
Framing Errors
This 16-bit counter will be incremented when a FAS word has been
received with an error.
Framing errors will not be counted during asynchronous state. During
alarm simulation, the counter is incremented every 250 µs up to its
saturation. The error counter will not roll over.
Clearing and updating the counter is done according to bit
FMR1.ECM.
If this bit is reset the error counter is permanently updated in the
buffer. For correct read access of the error counter bit DEC.DFEC has
to be set. With the rising edge of this bit updating the buffer will be
stopped and the error counter will be reset. Bit DEC.DFEC will
automatically be reset with reading the error counter high byte.
If FMR1.ECM is set every second (interrupt ISR3.SEC) the error
counter will be latched and then automatically reset. The latched error
counter state should be read within the next second.
Semiconductor Group
161
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Code Violation Counter (Read)
7
0
CVCL
CV7
CV0
CV8
(x52)
(x53)
7
0
CVCH
CV15
CV15…CV0…
Code Violations
No function if NRZ code has been enabled.
If the HDB3 or the CMI code is selected, the 16-bit counter will be
incremented when violations of the HDB3 code are detected. The
error detection mode is determined by programming the bit
FMR0.EXTD.
If simple AMI coding is enabled (FMR0.RC0/1 = 10) all bipolar
violations are counted. The error counter will not roll over.
During alarm simulation, the counter is incremented every four bits
received up to its saturation.
Clearing and updating the counter is done according to bit
FMR1.ECM.
If this bit is reset the error counter is permanently updated in the
buffer. For correct read access of the error counter bit DEC.DCVC
has to be set. With the rising edge of this bit updating the buffer will
be stopped and the error counter will be reset. Bit DEC.DCVC will
automatically be reset with reading the error counter high byte.
If FMR1.ECM is set every second (interrupt ISR3.SEC) the error
counter will be latched and then automatically reset. The latched error
counter state should be read within the next second.
Semiconductor Group
162
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
CRC Error Counter 1 (Read)
7
0
CEC1L
CR7
CR0
CR8
(x54)
(x55)
7
0
CEC1H
CR15
CR15…CR0…
CRC Errors
No function if doubleframe format is selected.
In CRC-multiframe mode, the 16-bit counter will be incremented when
a CRC-submultiframe has been received with a CRC error. CRC
errors will not be counted during asynchronous state. The error
counter will not roll over.
During alarm simulation, the counter is incremented once per
submultiframe up to its saturation.
Clearing and updating the counter is done according to bit
FMR1.ECM.
If this bit is reset the error counter is permanently updated in the
buffer. For correct read access of the error counter bit DEC.DCEC1
has to be set. With the rising edge of this bit updating the buffer will
be stopped and the error counter will be reset. Bit DEC.DCEC1 will
automatically be reset with reading the error counter high byte.
If FMR1.ECM is set every second (interrupt ISR3.SEC) the error
counter will be latched and then automatically reset. The latched error
counter state should be read within the next second.
Semiconductor Group
163
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
E Bit Error Counter (Read)
7
0
EBCL
EB7
EB0
EB8
(x56)
(x57)
7
0
EBCH
EB15
EB15…EB0…
E-Bit Errors
If doubleframe format is selected, FEBEH/L has no function. If CRC-
multiframe mode is enabled, FEBEH/L works as submultiframe error
indication counter (16 bits) which counts zeros in Si-bit position of
frame 13 and 15 of every received CRC multiframe. The error counter
will not roll over.
During alarm simulation, the counter is incremented once per
submultiframe up to its saturation.
Clearing and updating the counter is done according to bit
FMR1.ECM.
If this bit is reset the error counter is permanently updated in the
buffer. For correct read access of the error counter bit DEC.DEBC
has to be set. With the rising edge of this bit updating the buffer will
be stopped and the error counter will be reset. Bit DEC.DEBC will
automatically be reset with reading the error counter high byte.
If FMR1.ECM is set every second (interrupt ISR3.SEC) the error
counter will be latched and then automatically reset. The latched error
counter state should be read within the next second.
Semiconductor Group
164
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
CRC Error Counter 2 (Read)
7
0
CEC2L
CC7
CC0
CC8
(x58)
(x59)
7
0
CEC2H
CC15
CC15…CC0…
CRC Error Counter (Reported from TE via Sa6 -Bit)
Depending of bit LCR1.EPRM the error counter increment is selected:
LCR1.EPRM=0:
If doubleframe format is selected, CEC2H/L has no function. If CRC-
multiframe mode is enabled, CEC2H/L works as SA6 Bit error
indication counter (16 bits) which counts the SA6 Bit sequence 0001
and 0011in every received CRC submultiframe.
Incrementing the counter is only possible in the multiframe
synchronous state FRS0.LMFA = 0.
SA6 Bit sequence: SA61, SA62, SA63, SA64 = 0001 or 0011 where
SA61 is received in frame 1 or 9 in every multiframe.
Pseudo Random Bit Sequence Error Counter
LCR1.EPRM=1:
This 16-bit counter will be incremented with every received PRBS bit
error in the PRBS synchronous state FRS1.LLBAD = 1. The error
counter will not roll over.
During alarm simulation, the counter is incremented once per
submultiframe up to its saturation.
Clearing and updating the counter is done according to bit
FMR1.ECM.
If this bit is reset the error counter is permanently updated in the
buffer. For correct read access of the error counter bit DEC.DCEC2
has to be set. With the rising edge of this bit updating the buffer will
be stopped and the error counter will be reset. Bit DEC.DCEC2 will
automatically be reset with reading the error counter high byte.
If FMR1.ECM is set every second (interrupt ISR3.SEC) the error
counter will be latched and then automatically reset. The latched error
counter state should be read within the next second.
Semiconductor Group
165
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
CRC Error Counter 3 (Read)
7
0
CEC3L
CE7
CE0
CE8
(x5A)
(x5B)
7
0
CEC3H
CE15
CE15…CE0…
CRC Error Counter (detected at T Ref. Point via Sa6 -Bit)
GCR.ECMC = 0 : If doubleframe format is selected, CEC3H/L has no
function. If CRC-multiframe mode is enabled, CEC3H/L works as SA6
Bit error indication counter (16 bits) which counts the SA6 Bit
sequence 0010 and 0011in every received CRC submultiframe.
Incrementing the counter is only possible in the multiframe
synchronous state FRS0.LMFA = 0.
SA6 Bit sequence: SA61, SA62, SA63, SA64 = 0010 or 0011 where
SA61 is received in frame 1 or 9 in every multiframe. The error
counter will not roll over.
During alarm simulation, the counter is incremented once per
submultiframe up to its saturation.
CE7…CE2…
CE1…CE0…
Multiframe Counter
GCR.ECMC = 1 : This 6 bit counter increments with each multiframe
period in the asynchronous state FRS0.LFA/LMFA =1.
During alarm simulation, the counter is incremented once per
multiframe up to its saturation.
Change of Frame Alignment Counter
GCR.ECMC = 1 : This 2 bit counter increments with each detected
change of frame / multiframe alignment. The error counter will not roll
over.
During alarm simulation, the counter is incremented once per
multiframe up to its saturation.
Clearing and updating the counter is done according to bit
FMR1.ECM.
If this bit is reset the error counter is permanently updated in the
buffer. For correct read access of the error counter bit DEC.DCEC3
has to be set. With the rising edge of this bit updating the buffer will
be stopped and the error counter will be reset. Bit DEC.DCEC3 will
automatically be reset with reading the error counter high byte.
Semiconductor Group
166
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
If FMR1.ECM is set every second (interrupt ISR3.SEC) the error
counter will be latched and then automatically reset. The latched error
counter state should be read within the next second.
Receive Sa4-Bit Register (Read)
7
0
RSA4
RSA5
RSA6
RSA7
RSA8
RS47
RS57
RS67
RS77
RS87
RS40
RS50
RS60
RS70
RS80
(x5C)
(x5D)
(x5E)
(x5F)
(x60)
RS47…RS40… Receive Sa4-Bit Data (Y-Bits)
RS57…RS50… Receive Sa5-Bit Data
RS67…RS60… Receive Sa6-Bit Data
RS77…RS70… Receive Sa7-Bit Data
RS87…RS80… Receive Sa8-Bit Data
This register contains the information of the eight SAx bits (x = 4 - 8)
of the previously received CRC multiframe. These registers will be
updated with every multiframe begin interrupt ISR0.RMB.
RS40 is received in bit-slot 4 of every service word in frame 1, RS47
in frame 15
RS50 is received in bit-slot 5, time-slot 0, frame 1, RS57 in frame 15
RS60 is received in bit-slot 6, time-slot 0, frame 1, RS67 in frame 15
RS70 is received in bit-slot 7, time-slot 0, frame 1, RS77 in frame 15
RS80 is received in bit-slot 8, time-slot 0, frame 1, RS87 in frame 15
Valid if CRC multiframe format is enabled by setting bits
FMR2.RFS1 = 1 or FMR2.RFS1/0 = 01 (Doubleframe format).
Semiconductor Group
167
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Receive Sa6-Bit Status (Read)
7
0
RSA6S
S_X
S_F
S_E
S_C
S_A
S_8
(x61)
Four consecutive received SA6-bits are checked on the by ETS
300233 defined SA6-bit combinations. The QuadFALC will detect the
following “fixed” SA6-bit combinations:
SA61,SA62,SA63,SA64=1000; 1010; 1100; 1110; 1111. All other
possible 4 bit combinations are grouped to status “X”.
A valid SA6-bit combination must occur three times in a row. The
corresponding status bit in this register will be set. Even if the
detected status will be active for a short time the status bit remains
active until this register is read. Reading the register will reset all
pending status information.
With any change of state of the SA6-bit combinations an interrupt
status ISR0.SA6SC will be generated.
During the basicframe asynchronous state updating of this register
and interrupt status ISR0.SA6SC is disabled. In multiframe format the
detection of the SA6-bit combinations can be done either
synchronous or asynchronous to the submultiframe (FMR3.SA6SY).
In synchronous detection mode updating of register RSA6S is done
in the multiframe synch. state (FRS0.LMFA=0). In asynchr. detection
mode updating is independent to the multiframe synchronous state.
S_X…
S_F…
S_E…
S_C…
S_A…
Receive Sa6-Bit Status_X
If none of the fixed SA6-bit combinations are detected this bit will be
set.
Receive Sa6-Bit Status: “1111”
Receive SA6-bit status “1111” is detected for three times in a row in
the SA6-bit positions.
Receive Sa6-Bit Status: “1110”
Receive SA6-bit status “1110” is detected for three times in a row in
the SA6-bit positions.
Receive Sa6-Bit Status: “1100”
Receive SA6-bit status “1100” is detected for three times in a row in
the SA6-bit positions.
Receive Sa6-Bit Status: “1010”
Semiconductor Group
168
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Receive SA6-bit status “1010” is detected for three times in a row in
the SA6-bit positions.
S_8…
Receive Sa6-Bit Status: “1000”
Receive SA6-bit status “1000” is detected for three times in a row in
the SA6-bit positions.
Receive Signaling Pointer 1 (Read)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
RSP1
RS8C
RS7C
RS6C
RS5C
RS4C
RS3C
RS2C
RS1C
(x62)
RS8C…RS1C
Receive Signaling Register RS1-8 Changed
A one in each bit position indicates that the received signaling data in
the corresponding RS1-8 registers are updated. Bit RS1C is the
pointer for register RS1,... while RS8C points to RS8.
Receive Signaling Pointer 2 (Read)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
RSP2
RS16C RS15C RS14C RS13C RS12C RS11C RS10C RS9C
(x63)
RS16C…RS9C Receive Signaling Register RS9-16 Changed
A one in each bit position indicates that the received signaling data in
the corresponding RS9-16 registers are updated. Bit RS9C is the
pointer for register RS9,... while RS16C points to RS16.
Signaling Status Register (Read)
7
0
SIS
XDOV
XFW
XREP
RLI
CEC
SFS
(x64)
XDOV…
Transmit Data Overflow
More than 32 bytes have been written to the XFIFO.
This bit is reset by:
– a transmitter reset command XRES
Semiconductor Group
169
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
– or when all bytes in the accessible half of the XFIFO have been
moved in the inaccessible half.
XFW…
XREP…
RLI…
Transmit FIFO Write Enable
Data can be written to the XFIFO.
Transmission Repeat
Status indication of CMDR.XREP.
Receive Line Inactive
Neither FLAGs as Interframe Time Fill nor frames are received via the
signaling timeslot.
CEC…
Command Executing
0… No command is currently executed, the CMDR register can be
written to.
1… A command (written previously to CMDR) is currently executed,
no further command can be temporarily written in CMDR
register.
Note: CEC will be active at most 2.5 periods of the current system
data rate.
SFS…
Status Freeze Signaling
0… freeze signaling status inactive.
1… freeze signaling status active
Receive Signaling Status Register (Read)
7
0
RSIS
VFR
RDO
CRC16
RAB
HA1
HA0
LA
(x65)
RSIS relates to the last received HDLC frame; it is copied into RFIFO when end-of-frame
is recognized (last byte of each stored frame).
VFR…
Valid Frame
Determines whether a valid frame has been received.
1… valid
0… invalid
An invalid frame is either
– a frame which is not an integer number of 8 bits (n × 8 bits) in length
(e.g. 25 bits), or
Semiconductor Group
170
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
– a frame which is too short taking into account the operation mode
selected via MODE (MDS2-0) and the selection of receive CRC
ON/OFF (CCR2.RCRC) as follows:
• MDS2-0 = 011 (16 bit Address),
RCRC = 0 : 4 bytes; RCRC = 1 : 3-4 bytes
• MDS2-0 = 010 (8 bit Address),
RCRC = 0 : 3 bytes; RCRC = 1 : 2-3 bytes
Note: Shorter frames are not reported.
RDO…
Receive Data Overflow
A RFIFO data overflow has occurred during reception of the frame.
Additionally, an interrupt can be generated (refer to
ISR1.RDO/IMR1.RDO).
CRC16…
RAB…
CRC16 Compare/Check
0… CRC check failed; received frame contains errors.
1… CRC check o.k.; received frame is error-free.
Receive Message Aborted
The received frame was aborted from the transmitting station.
According to the HDLC protocol, this frame must be discarded by the
receiver station.
HA1, HA0…
High Byte Address Compare
Significant only if 2-byte address mode has been selected.
In operating modes which provide high byte address recognition, the
QuadFALC compares the high byte of a 2-byte address with the
contents of two individually programmable registers (RAH1, RAH2)
and the fixed values FEH and FCH (broadcast address).
Dependent on the result of this comparison, the following bit
combinations are possible:
00… RAH2 has been recognized
01… Broadcast address has been recognized
10… RAH1 has been recognized C/R = 0 (bit 1)
11… RAH1 has been recognized C/R = 1 (bit 1)
Note: If RAH1, RAH2 contain identical values, a match is indicated
by ‘10’ or ‘11’.
Semiconductor Group
171
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
LA…
Low Byte Address Compare
Significant in HDLC modes only.
The low byte address of a 2-byte address field, or the single address
byte of a 1-byte address field is compared with two registers. (RAL1,
RAL2).
0… RAL2 has been recognized
1… RAL1 has been recognized
Receive Byte Count Low (Read)
7
0
RBCL
RBC7
RBC0
(x66)
Together with RBCH (bits RBC11 - RBC8), indicates the length of a
received frame (1…4095 bytes). Bits RBC4-0 indicate the number of
valid bytes currently in RFIFO. These registers must be read by the
CPU following a RME interrupt.
Received Byte Count High (Read)
Value after RESET: 000xxxxx
7
0
RBCH
OV
RBC11
RBC8
(x67)
OV…
Counter Overflow
More than 4095 bytes received.
RBC11 – RBC8…Receive Byte Count (most significant bits)
Together with RBCL (bits RBC7…RBC0) indicate the length of the
received frame.
Semiconductor Group
172
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Interrupt Status Register 0 (Read)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
ISR0
RME
RFS
T8MS
RMB
CASC
CRC4 SA6SC
RPF
(x68)
All bits are reset when ISR0 is read.
If bit GCR.VIS is set to ‘1’, interrupt statuses in ISR0 may be flagged although they are
masked via register IMR0. However, these masked interrupt statuses neither generate a
signal on INT, nor are visible in register GIS.
RME…
Receive Message End
One complete message of length less than 32 bytes, or the last part
of a frame at least 32 bytes long is stored in the receive FIFO,
including the status byte.
The complete message length can be determined reading the RBCH,
RBCL registers, the number of bytes currently stored in RFIFO is
given by RBC4–0. Additional information is available in the RSIS
register.
RFS…
Receive Frame Start
This is an early receiver interrupt activated after the start of a valid
frame has been detected, i.e. after an address match (in operation
modes providing address recognition), or after the opening flag
(transparent mode 0) is detected, delayed by two bytes. After an RFS
interrupt, the contents of
• RAL1
• RSIS - bits 3-1
are valid and can be read by the CPU.
T8MS…
Receive Time Out 8 msec
Only active if multiframing is enabled.
The framer has found the doubleframing (basic framing)
FRS0.LFA = 0 and is searching for the multiframing. This interrupt will
be set to indicate that no multiframing could be found within a time
window of 8 msec. In multiframe synchronous state this interrupt will
be not generated. Refer also to Floating multiframe alignment
window.
Semiconductor Group
173
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
RMB…
Receive Multiframe Begin
This bit is set with the beginning of a received CRC multiframe related
to the internal receive line timing.
In CRC multiframe format FMR2.RFS1 = 1 or in doubleframe format
FMR2.RFS1/0 = 01 this interrupt occurs every 2 msec. If
FMR2.RFS1/0 = 00 this interrupt will be generated every
doubleframe (512 bits).
CASC…
CRC4…
Received CAS Information Changed
This bit is set with the updating of a received CAS multiframe
information in the registers RS1-16. If the last received CAS
information changed from the previous received updating is started.
This interrupt will only occur in the TS0 and TS16 synchronous state.
The registers RS1-16 should be read within the next 2 ms otherwise
the contents may be lost.
Receive CRC4 Error
0... No CRC4 error occurs.
1... The CRC4 check of the last received submultiframe failed.
SA6SC…
RPF…
Receive SA6-Bit Status Changed
With every change of state of the received SA6-bit combinations this
interrupt will be set.
Receive Pool Full
32 bytes of a frame have arrived in the receive FIFO. The frame is not
yet completely received.
Interrupt Status Register 1 (Read)
7
0
ISR1
LLBSC
RDO
ALLS
XDU
XMB
XLSC
XPR
(x69)
All bits are reset when ISR1 is read.
If bit GCR.VIS is set to ‘1’, interrupt statuses in ISR1 may be flagged although they are
masked via register IMR1. However, these masked interrupt statuses neither generate a
signal on INT, nor are visible in register GIS.
LLBSC…
Line Loop Back Status Change
Depending on bit LCR1.EPRM the source of this interrupt status
changed:
Semiconductor Group
174
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
LCR1.EPRM=0: This bit is set to one, if the LLB actuate signal or the
LLB deactuate signal, resp., is detected over a period of 25 msec with
a bit error rate less than 1/100.
The LLBSC bit is also set to one, if the current detection status is left,
i.e., if the bit error rate exceeds 1/100.
The actual detection status can be read from the RSP.LLBAD and
RSP.LLBDD, resp.
PRBS Status Change
LCR1.EPRM=1: With any change of state of the PRBS synchronizer
this bit will be set. The current status of the PRBS synchronizer is
indicated in RSP.LLBAD.
RDO…
Receive Data Overflow
This interrupt status indicates that the CPU does not respond quickly
enough to an RPF or RME interrupt and that data in RFIFO has been
lost. Even when this interrupt status is generated, the frame continues
to be received when space in the RFIFO is available again.
Note: Whereas the bit RSIS.RDO in the frame status byte indicates
whether an overflow occurred when receiving the frame
currently accessed in the RFIFO, the ISR1.RDO interrupt
status is generated as soon as an overflow occurs and does
not necessarily pertain to the frame currently accessed by the
processor.
ALLS…
XDU…
All Sent
This bit is set if the last bit of the current frame is completely sent out
and XFIFO is empty.
Transmit Data Underrun
Transmitted frame was terminated with an abort sequence because
no data was available for transmission in XFIFO and no XME was
issued.
Note: Transmitter and XFIFO are reset and deactivated if this
condition occurs. They are re-activated not before this
interrupt status register has been read. Thus, XDU should not
be masked via register IMR1.
XMB…
Transmit Multiframe Begin
This bit is set every 2 ms with the beginning of a transmitted
multiframe related to the internal transmit line interface timing.
Just before setting this bit registers XS1-16 are copied in the transmit
Semiconductor Group
175
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
shift registers. The registers XS1-16 are empty and has to be updated
otherwise the contents will be retransmitted.
XLSC…
XPR…
Transmit Line Status Change
XLSC is set to one with the rising edge of the bit FRS1.XLO or with
any change of bit FRS1.XLS.
The actual status of the transmit line monitor can be read from the
FRS1.XLS and FRS1.XLO.
Transmit Pool Ready
A data block of up to 32 bytes can be written to the transmit FIFO.
XPR enables the fastest access to XFIFO. It has to be used for
transmission of long frames, back-to-back frames or frames with
shared flags.
Interrupt Status Register 2 (Read)
7
0
ISR2
FAR
LFA
MFAR T400MS
AIS
LOS
RAR
RA
(x6A)
All bits are reset when ISR2 is read.
If bit GCR.VIS is set to ‘1’, interrupt statuses in ISR2 may be flagged although they are
masked via register IMR2. However, these masked interrupt statuses neither generate a
signal on INT, nor are visible in register GIS.
FAR…
Frame Alignment Recovery
The framer has reached doubleframe synchronization. Set when bit
FSR0.LFA is reset. It is set also after alarm simulation is finished and
the receiver is still synchron.
LFA…
Loss of Frame Alignment
The framer has lost synchronization and bit FRS0.LFA is set. It will be
set during alarm simulation.
MFAR…
Multiframe Alignment Recovery
Set when the framer has found two CRC-multiframes at an interval of
n x 2 ms (n = 1, 2, 3, …) without a framing error. At the same time bit
FRS0.LMFA is reset.
Semiconductor Group
176
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
It is set also after alarm simulation is finished and the receiver is still
synchron. Only active if CRC-multiframe format is selected.
T400MS…
Receive Time Out 400 msec
Only active if multiframing is enabled.
The framer has found the doubleframing (basic framing)
FRS0.LFA = 0 and is searching for the multiframing. This interrupt will
be set to indicate that no multiframing could be found within a time
window of 400 msec after basic framing has been achieved. In
multiframe synchronous state this interrupt will not be generated.
AIS…
Alarm Indication Signal
This bit is set when an alarm indication signal is detected and bit
FRS0.AIS is set. It will be set during alarm simulation.
If GCR.SCI is set high this interrupt status bit will be set with every
change of state of FRS0.AIS.
LOS…
Loss of Signal
This bit is set when a loss of signal alarm is detected in the received
bitstream and FRS0.LOS is set. It will be set during alarm simulation.
If GCR.SCI is set high this interrupt status bit will be set with every
change of state of FRS0.LOS.
RAR…
RA…
Remote Alarm Recovery
Set if a remote alarm in TS0 is cleared and bit FRS0.RA is reset. It is
set also after alarm simulation is finished and no remote alarm is
detected.
Remote Alarm
Set if a remote alarm in TS0 is detected and bit FRS0.RA is set. It will
be set during alarm simulation.
Semiconductor Group
177
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Interrupt Status Register 3 (Read)
7
0
ISR3
ES
SEC
LMFA16 AIS16
RA16
RSN
RSP
(x6B)
All bits are reset when ISR3 is read.
If bit GCR.VIS is set to ‘1’, interrupt statuses in ISR3 may be flagged although they are
masked via register IMR3. However, these masked interrupt statuses neither generate a
signal on INT, nor are visible in register GIS.
ES…
Errored Second
This bit is set if at least one enabled interrupt source via ESM is set
during the time interval of one second. Interrupt sources of ESM
register:
LFA = Loss of frame alignment detected (FRS0.LFA)
FER = Framing error received
CER= CRC error received
AIS = Alarm indication signal (FRS0.AIS)
LOS = Loss of signal (FRS0.LOS)
CVE= Code violation detected
SLIP= Receive Slip positive/negative detected
EBE = E- Bit error detected (RSP.RS13/15)
SEC…
Second Timer
The internal one second timer has expired. The timer is derived from
clock RCLK.
LMFA16…
Loss of Multiframe Alignment TS 16
Multiframe alignment of timeslot 16 has been lost if two consecutive
multiframe pattern are not detected or if in 16 consecutive timeslot 16
all bits are reset.
If register GCR.SCI is high this interrupt status bit will be set with
every change of state of FRS1.TS16LFA.
AIS16…
Alarm Indication Signal TS 16 Status Change
The alarm indication signal AIS in timeslot 16 for the 64 kbit/s channel
associated signaling is detected or cleared. A change in bit
FRS1.TS16AIS will set this interrupt. (This bit is set if the incoming TS
16 signal contains less than 4 zeros in each of two consecutive TS16-
multiframe periods.)
Semiconductor Group
178
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
RA16…
RSN…
Remote Alarm TS 16 Status Change
A change in the remote alarm bit in CAS multiframe alignment word
is detected.
Receive Slip Negative
The frequency of the receive route clock is greater than the frequency
of the receive system interface working clock based on 2.048 MHz. A
frame will be skipped. It will be set during alarm simulation.
RSP…
Receive Slip Positive
The frequency of the receive route clock is less than the frequency of
the receive system interface working clock based on 2.048 MHz. A
frame will be repeated. It will be set during alarm simulation.
Interrupt Status Register 4 (Read)
7
0
ISR4
XSP
XSN
(x6C)
All bits are reset when ISR4 is read.
If bit GCR.VIS is set to ‘1’, interrupt statuses in ISR4 may be flagged although they are
masked via register IMR4. However, these masked interrupt statuses neither generate a
signal on INT, nor are visible in register GIS.
XSP…
Transmit Slip Positive
The frequency of the transmit clock is less than the frequency of the
transmit system interface working clock based on 2.048 MHz. A frame
will be repeated.
XSN…
Transmit Slip Negative
The frequency of the transmit clock is greater than the frequency of
the transmit system interface working clock based on 2.048 MHz. A
frame will be skipped.
Semiconductor Group
179
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Global Interrupt Status Register (Read)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
GIS
ISR4
ISR3
ISR2
ISR1
ISR0
(x6E)
This status register points to pending interrupts sourced by
ISR4 ... ISR0.
Channel Interrupt Status Register (Read)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
CIS
GIS4
GIS3
GIS2
GIS1
(6F)
This status register points to pending interrupts sourced by the GIS
registers of each channel.
GIS4 ... register GIS of FALC4
GIS3 ... register GIS of FALC3
GIS2 ... register GIS of FALC2
GIS1 ... register GIS of FALC1
Semiconductor Group
180
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description E1
Receive CAS Register (Read)
Value after RESET: not defined
7
0
RS1
0
0
0
0
X
Y
X
X
(x70)
(x71)
(x72)
(x73)
(x74)
(x75)
(x76)
(x77)
(x78)
(x79)
(x7A)
(x7B)
(x7C)
(x7D)
(x7E)
(x7F)
RS2
A1
B1
C1
D1
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
RS3
A2
B2
C2
D2
RS4
A3
B3
C3
D3
RS5
A4
B4
C4
D4
RS6
A5
B5
C5
D5
RS7
A6
B6
C6
D6
RS8
A7
B7
C7
D7
RS9
A8
B8
C8
D8
RS10
RS11
RS12
RS13
RS14
RS15
RS16
A9
B9
C9
D9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
Receive CAS Register 1-16
Each register except RS1 contains the received CAS bits for two timeslots. The received
CAS multiframe will be compared with the previously received one. If the contents
changed a CAS multiframe changed interrupt (ISR0.CASC) is generated and informs the
user that a new multiframe has to be read within the next 2 ms. If requests for reading the
RS1-16 register are ignored, the received data may be lost. RS1 contains frame 0 of the
CAS multiframe. MSB is received first.
Additionally a receive signaling data change pointer indicates an update of register RS1-
16 . Refer also to register RSP1/2.
Access to RS1-16 registers is only valid if the serial receive signaling access on the
system highway is disabled.
Semiconductor Group
181
09.98
Quad Framing and Line Interface Component for E1/T1
QuadFALC
PEB 22554
CMOS
QuadFALC in T1 / J1 Mode
5
Features T1 / J1
Quad Line Interface
• High density, generic interface for all E1 / DS1 / DSX-1
/ J1 applications
• Analog receive and transmit circuitry for long / short
haul applications
P-TQFP-144
• Data and clock recovery using an integrated
digital phase locked loop
• Maximum line attenuation up to -36 dB at 772 kHz
adaptively controlled receive equalization network adjusts up to 6200 feet (pulp
22AWG) in length, noise - and crosstalk -filter, line attenuation status
• Programmable Line Build-Out for CSU signals according to ANSI T1. 403+ FCC68
0dB, -7.5dB, -15dB, -22.5 dB
• Low transmitter output impedance for high transmit return loss
• Tri-state function of the analog Transmit Line Outputs
• Programmable transmit pulse shape
• Transmit line monitor protecting the device from damage
• Jitter specifications of ITU-T I.431, G.703 and AT&T TR 62411 met
• Crystal-less wander and jitter attenuation/compensation
• Low frequency reference clock: 1.544 MHz
• Power down function per channel
• Dual rail or single rail digital inputs and outputs
• Unipolar NRZ for interfacing fibre optical transmission routes
• Selectable line codes (B8ZS, AMI with ZCS)
• Loss of signal indication with programmable thresholds according to ITU-T G.775 and
ANSI T1. 403
• Clock generator for jitter free system / transmit clocks per channel
• Local loop and remote loop for diagnostic purposes
• Low power device , single power supply: 3.3 V
Type
Version
Ordering Code
Package
PEB 22554-H
V1.1
P-TQFP-144(SMD)
Semiconductor Group
182
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
Quad Frame Aligner
• Frame alignment/synthesis for 1.544 MBit/s according to ITU-T G.704 and JT G.704
• Programmable formats : 4-Frame Multiframe (F4, FT), 12-Frame Multiframe (F12,
D3/4), Extended Superframe (ESF), Remote Switch Mode (F72, SLC96)
• Selectable conditions for recover and loss of frame alignment
• Performs synchronization in ESF format acc. to NTT requirements
• Error checking via CRC6 procedures according to ITU-T G. 706 and JT G. 706
• Supports the alternate CRC6 algorithm acc. to the ’japanese standard’ JT G. 706
• Alarm and performance monitoring per second
16 bit counter for CRC-, framing errors, code violations, Errored blocks, PRBS bit
errors
• Insertion and extraction of alarms (AIS, Remote (Yellow) Alarm, …)
• Yellow Alarm generation/checking according to ’japanese standard ’ JT-G.704
• IDLE code insertion for selectable channels
• Flexible system clock frequency different for receiver and transmitter
• Supports programmable system data rates: 2.048 , 4.096, 8.192, 16.384 MBit/s and
1.544, 3.088, 6.176, 12.352 MBit/s with independent receive / transmit shifts
• Mux of 4 channels into a single rail 8.192 or 6.176 MBit/s data bus and v.v.
with byte - or bitinterleaved formats
• Supports fractional T1 access
• Elastic store for receive and transmit route clock wander and jitter compensation;
controlled slip capability and slip indication;
• Programmable elastic buffer size: 2 frames / 1 frame / short buffer / bypass
• Provides different time-slot mapping modes
• Flexible transparent modes
• Programmable In-Band Loop Code detection / generation according to TR 62411
• Channel loop back , line loop back or Payload loop back capabilities (AT&T TR 54016)
• Pseudo random signal generator and monitor
• Support for different data link schemes
• Clear channel capabilities
Quad Signaling Controller
• HDLC controller
Bit stuffing, CRC check and generation, flag generation, flag and address recognition,
handling of bit oriented functions
• DL-channel protocol for ESF format according to ANSI T1.403 specification or
according to AT&T TR54016.
• Robbed-bit signaling with last look capability, enhanced CAS-BR register access and
freeze signaling indication
• Provides access to serial signaling data streams
Semiconductor Group
183
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
• DL-access for F72 (SLC96) format
• CAS controller
• Transparent Mode
• FIFO buffers (64 bytes deep) for efficient transfer of data packets.
• Time-slot assignment
Any combination of time slots selectable for data transfer independent of signaling
mode. Useful for fractional T1 applications.
MP Interface
• 8/16 bit microprocessor bus interface (Intel or Motorola type)
• All registers directly accessible (byte or word access)
• Multiplexed and non-multiplexed address bus operations
• Hard / software reset options
• Extended interrupt capabilities
• One second timer (internal /external access)
General
• Boundary scan standard IEEE 1149.1
• P-TQFP-144 package (body size 20*20)
• 3.3 V power supply
• Typical power consumption 700 mW
Semiconductor Group
184
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
5.1
Logic Symboly
VDDR(1-4)
SSR(1-4)
V
SCLKR(1-4)
Receive
Line
Interface
RDO(1-4)
RPA(1-4)
RPB(1-4)
RPC(1-4)
RPD(1-4)
RL1/RDIP/ROID(1-4)
RL2/RDIN/RCLKI(1-4)
Receive
System
Interface
TDI
TMS
TCK
TRS
TDO
Boundary
Scan
QuadFALCTM
PEB 22554
SCLKX(1-4)
XDI(1-4)
Transmit
System
Interface
V
DDX(1-4)
SSX(1-4)
XPA(1-4)
XPB(1-4)
XPC(1-4)
XPD(1-4)
V
Transmit
Line
Interface
XL1/XDOP/XOID(1-4)
XL2/XDON/XFM(1-4)
V
V
ITL10297
Microprocessor Interface
Figure 34
QuadFALC Logic Symbol
Semiconductor Group
185
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
5.2
Typical Applications
The figures below show multiple link applications realized with the QuadFALC.
MTSL
PEB 2047
Memory Time Switch
QuadFALCTM
PEB 22554
4 x E1/T1
M 128X
PEB 20324
MUNICH128
PCI/Generic
System Bus
CPU
MEM
ITS10302
Figure 35
4 Channel E1 Interface for Frame Relay Applications
Semiconductor Group
186
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
RAM
QuadFALCTM
PEB 22554
4
4
4 x E1/T1
PCM-Highway
UTOPIA
IWE8TM
PXB 4220
ATM
Layer
QuadFALCTM
PEB 22554
AAL1 or ATM-Mode
4 x E1/T1
ITS10303
Figure 36
8 Channel E1 Interface to the ATM Layer
Semiconductor Group
187
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
6
Pin Descriptions T1
Pin Diagram
6.1
P-TQFP-144
V
V
V
V
V
V
XL1_1/XDOP1/XOID1
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
XL1_4/XDOP4/XOID4
VDDX
XL2_4/XDON4/XFM4
SEC/FSC
IM
VDDR
RL1_4/RDIP4/ROID4
RL2_4/RDIN4/RCLKI4
VSSR
N.C.
ALE
VDDX
XL2_1/XDON1/XFM1
TDI
TDO
VDDR
RL1_1/RDIP1/ROID1
RL2_1/RDIN1/RCLKI1
VSSR
N.C.
RCLK1
XPA1
XPB1
XPC1
XPD1
VDD
RCLK4
XPD4
XPC4
XPB4
XPA4
VSS
VSS
XPA2
XPB2
XPC2
XPD2
RCLK2
TRS
QuadFALCTM
PEB 22554
VDD
XPD3
XPC3
XPB3
XPA3
SCLKX4
XDI4
VDD
MCLK
N.C.
VSS
SYNC
RCLK3
RES
VSSR
VSSR
RL2_2/RDIN2/RCLKI2
RL1_2/RDIP2/ROID2
VDDR
RL2_3/RDIN3/RCLKI3
RL1_3/RDIP3/ROID3
VDDR
INT
DBW
TCK
TMS
XL2_2/XDON2/XFM2
VDDX
XL1_2/XDOP2/XOID2
XL2_3/XDON3/XFM3
VDDX
XL1_3/XDOP3/XOID3
ITP10391
V
V
V
V
V
V
Figure 37
Pin Configuration of QuadFALC
Semiconductor Group
188
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
6.2
Pin Definitions and Function
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
83 - 74
A9 … A0
I
Address Bus
Address bus selects one of the internal registers
for read or write.
107 -103 D15 … D11 I/O
100 - 93 D10 … D3
Data Bus
Bi-directional three-state data lines which interface
with the system’s data bus. Their configuration is
controlled by the level of pin DBW:
90 - 88
D2 … D0
– 8-bit mode (DBW = 0): D0 … D7 are active.
D8 … D15 are in high impedance and have to
be connected to VDD or VSS.
– 16-bit mode (DBW = 1): D0 … D15 are active.
In case of byte transfers, the active half of the bus
is determined by A0 and BHE/BLE and the
selected bus interface mode (via pin IM). The
unused half is in high impedance.
For detailed information, refer to chapter 7.2.
62
ALE
I
Address Latch Enable
A high on this line indicates an address on the
external address/data bus. The address
information provided on lines A0 … A9 is internally
latched with the falling edge of ALE. This function
allows the QuadFALC to be directly connected to
a multiplexed address/data bus. In this case, pins
A0 … A9 must be externally connected to the Data
Bus pins.In case of demultiplexed mode this pin
has to be connected directly to ground or VDD. For
detailed information, refer to chapter 7.2.
Note: All unused input pins have to be connected to a defined level VDD or VSS.
Note: PU = If not connected an internal pull-up transistor ensure high input level.
Semiconductor Group
189
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
85
RD/DS
I
Read Enable (Siemens/Intel bus mode)
This signal indicates a read operation. When the
QuadFALC is selected via CS the RD signal
enables the bus drivers to output data from an
internal register addressed via A0 … A9 on to
Data Bus. For more information about
control/status register and FIFO access in the
different bus interface modes refer to chapter 7.2.
Data Strobe (Motorola bus mode)
This pin serves as input to control read/write
operations.
84
WR/RW
I
Write Enable (Siemens/Intel bus mode)
This signal indicates a write operation. When CS
is active the QuadFALC loads an internal register
with data provided via the Data Bus. For more
information about control/status register and FIFO
access in the different bus interface modes refer
to chapter 7.2.
Read/Write Enable (Motorola bus mode)
This signal distinguishes between read and write
operation.
86
46
CS
I
I
Chip Select
A low signal selects the QuadFALC for read/write
operations.
RES
Reset
A low signal on this pin forces the QuadFALC into
reset state. During Reset the QuadFALC needs an
active clock on pin MCLK.
During Rese all bi-directional output stages (data
bus) are in high-impedance state if signal RD is
“high”.
Semiconductor Group
190
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
87
BHE/BLE
I
Bus High Enable (Siemens/Intel bus mode)
If 16-bit bus interface mode is enabled, this signal
indicates a data transfer on the upper byte of the
data bus (D8 … D15). In 8-bit bus interface mode
this signal has no function and should be tied to
VDD. Refer to chapter 7.2 for detailed information.
Bus Low Enable (Motorola bus mode)
If 16-bit bus interface mode is enabled, this signal
indicates a data transfer on the lower byte of the
data bus (D0 … D7). In 8-bit bus interface mode
this signal has no function and should be tied to
VDD. Refer to chapter 7.2 for detailed information.
40
41
DBW
I
Data Bus Width (Bus Interface Mode)
A low signal on this input selects the 8-bit bus
interface mode. A high signal on this input selects
the 16-bit bus interface mode. In this case word
transfer to/from the internal registers is enabled.
Byte transfers are implemented by using A0 and
BHE/BLE.
INT
O/oD
Interrupt Request
INT serves as general interrupt request which may
include all interrupt sources. These interrupt
sources can be masked via registers IMR0 … 5.
Interrupt status is reported via registers GIS
(Global Interrupt Status) and ISR0 … 5.
Output characteristics (push-pull active low/high,
open drain) are determined by programming the
IPC register.
68
IM
I
Interface Mode
The level at this pin defines the bus interface
mode:
A low signal on this input selects the INTEL
interface mode. A high signal on this input selects
the Motorola interface mode.
Semiconductor Group
191
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
115, 138, RL1(1-4)
43, 66
I
Line Receiver 1
Analog Input from the external transformer.
Selected if LIM1.DRS = 0.
RDIP(1-4)
I
Receive Data Input Positive
Digital input for received dual rail PCM(+) route
signal which will be latched with the internal
generated Receive Route Clock. An internal DPLL
will extract the Receive Route Clock from the
incoming data pulse. The duty cycle of the
receiving signal has to be closely to 50 %.
The Dual Rail mode is selected if LIM1.DRS = 1
and FMR0.RC1 = 1. Input sense is selected by bit
RC0.RDIS (after Reset: active low).
ROID(1-4)
I
Receive Optical Interface Data
Unipolar data received from fibre optical interface
with 1.544 MBit/s. Latching of data is done with
the falling edge of RCLKI. Input sense is selected
by bit RC0.RDIS.
The Single Rail mode is selected if LIM1.DRS = 1
and FMR0.RC1 = 0.
116, 137, RL2(1-4)
44, 65
I
I
Line Receiver 2
Analog Input from the external transformer.
Selected if LIM1.DRS = 0.
RDIN(1-4)
Receive Data Input Negative
Input for received dual rail PCM(-) route signal
which will be latched with the internal generated
Receive Route Clock. An internal DPLL will
extract the Receive Route Clock from the
incoming data pulse. The duty cycle of the
receiving signal has to be closely to 50 %.
The dual rail mode is selected if LIM1.DRS = 1
and FMR0.RC1 = 1. Input sense is selected by bit
RC0.RDIS (after Reset: active low).
Receive Clock Input
RCLKI(1-4) I
Receive clock input for the optical interface if
LIM1.DRS = 1 and FMR0.RC1/0 = 00.
Clock frequency: 1544 kHz
Semiconductor Group
192
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
42, 67,
114, 132,
139
VDDR
I
Positive Power Supply for the analog receiver
Power Supply Ground for the analog receiver
45, 64,
117,135,
136
VSSR
I
111, 142, XL2(1-4)
39, 70
O
Transmit Line 2
Analog output for the external transformer.
Selected if LIM1.DRS = 0. After Reset this pin is in
a high impedance state until register FMR0.XC1 is
set to one.
XDON(1-4) O
Transmit Data Output Negative
This digital output for transmitted dual rail PCM(-)
route signals can provide
– half bauded signals with 50% duty cycle
(LIM0.XFB = 0) or
– full bauded signals with 100% duty cycle
(LIM0.XFB = 1)
The data will be clocked off on the positive
transitions of XCLK in both cases. Output sense is
selected by bit LIM0.XDOS (after Reset: active
low).
The dual rail mode is selected if LIM1.DRS = 1
and FMR0.XC1 = 1. After Reset this pin is in a
high impedance state until register LIM1.DRS is
set to one.
XFM(1-4)
O
Transmit Frame Marker
This digital output marks the first bit of every
frame. This function is only available in the optical
interface mode LIM1.DRS=1 and FMR0.XC1 = 0.
The data will be clocked off on the positive
transitions of XCLK. After Reset this pin is in a
high impedance state until register LIM1.DRS is
set to one.
In remote loop configuration the XFM marker is
not valid.
Semiconductor Group
193
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
109, 144, XL1(1-4)
37, 72
O
Transmit Line 1
Analog output for the external transformer.
Selected if LIM1.DRS = 0. After Reset this pin is in
a high impedance state until register FMR0.XC1 is
set to one.
XDOP(1-4) O
Transmit Data Output Positive
This digital output for transmitted dual rail PCM(+)
route signals can provide
– half bauded signals with 50% duty cycle
(LIM0.XFB = 0) or
– full bauded signals with 100% duty cycle
(LIM0.XFB = 1)
The data will be clocked off on the positive
transitions of XCLK in both cases. Output sense
is selected by bit LIM0.XDOS (after Reset: active
low). The dual rail mode is selected if
LIM1.DRS = 1 and FMR0.XC1 = 1. After Reset
this pin is in a high impedance state until register
LIM1.DRS is set to one.
XOID(1-4)
O
Transmit Optical Interface Data
Unipolar data sent to fibre optical interface with
1.544 MBit/s which will be clocked off on the
positive transitions of XCLK. Clocking off data in
NRZ code is done with 100 % duty cycle. Data in
CMI code are shifted out with 50 % or 100 % duty
cycle according to the CMI coding. Output sense
is selected by bit LIM0.XDOS (after Reset: data is
sent active high).
The single rail mode is selected if LIM1.DRS = 1
and FMR0.XC1 = 0. After Reset this pin is in a
high impedance state until register LIM1.DRS is
set to one.
38, 71,
110, 143
VDDX
I
I
Positive Power Supply for analog transmitter
1, 36, 73, VSSX
Power Supply Ground for analog transmitter
108
Semiconductor Group
194
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
133
MCLK
I
Reference Clock 1.544 MHz
A reference clock of 1.544 MHz +/- 50 ppm must
be provided to this pin.
134
48
NC
Not connected
SYNC
I + PU
Clock Synchronization
If a clock is detected at the SYNC pin the
DCO-Rs of the QuadFALC synchronizes to this
clock 1.544 MHz or 2.048 MHz (if
LIM1.DCOC = 1). This pin has an integrated pull
up resistor.
69
SEC
FSC
SEC
I +PU
Second Timer Input
A pulse with logical one for at least two
1.544 MHz cycles will trigger the internal second
timer.
O
Enabled with GPC1.FSS2-0 an 8-kHz Frame
Synchronization Pulse is output via this pin. The
synchronization pulse is active high / low for one
1.544 / 2.048 MHz cycle (pulse width = 648 / 488
ns).
O
Second Timer Output
Activated high every second for two 1.544 MHz
clock cycles. Enabled with GPC1.CSFP1-0.
119, 130, RCLK(1-4) I/O+PU
47, 61
Receive Clock
After Reset this port is configured to an input.
Setting of bit PC5.CRPwill switch this port to an
output. Input function not defined.
Output function:
CMR1.RS1/0 = 00: Receive Clock extracted from
the incoming data pulses. Frequency: 1544 kHz
CMR1.RS1/0 = 01: RCLK is set high in case of
loss of signal (FRS0.LOS=1).
Optional one of the dejittered system clocks
sourced by DCO-R is clocked out. Clock
frequency: 1544 / 6176 or 2048 / 8192 kHz.
Selected by CMR1.RS1/0=11.
Wih GPC1.R1S1/0 one of the four RCLK(1-4) is
output on RCLK1.
Semiconductor Group
195
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
8, 13, 26, SCLKR
31 (1-4)
I/O + PU
System Clock Receive
Working clock for the receive system interface
with a frequency of 16.384 / 8.192 / 4.096 / 2.048
or 12.352 /6.176 / 3.088 / 1.544 MHz. If the
receive elastic store is bypassed SIC1.RBS1/0 the
clock supplied on this pin is ignored.
If SCLKR is configured to an output, the internal
working clock of the receive system interface
sourced by DCO-R or RCLK is output.
In system interface multiplex mode a 16.384 /
12.352 or 8.192 / 6.176 MHz clock has to be
provided on SCLKR1, which is a common clock
for all 4 rec. system interfaces.
9, 12, 27, RDO(1-4)
30
O
Receive Data Out
Received data which is sent to the system
highway. Clocking off data is done with the rising
or falling edge (SIC3.RESR) of SCLKR(1-4) or
RCLK(1-4), if the receive elastic store is
bypassed. The delay between the beginning of
time-slot 0 and the initial edge of SCLKR(1-4)
(after SYPR goes active) is determined by the
values of registers RC1 and RC0.
If received data is shifted out with higher data, the
active channel phase is defined by bits
SIC2.SICS2-0. In system interface multiplex mode
all 4 received datastreams are merged into a
single datastream byte or bit interleaved on
RDO1.
Semiconductor Group
196
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
4 -7,
RP(A-D)1
RP(A-D)2
RP(A-D)3
RP(A-D)4
I/O + PU
Receive Multifunction Port A-D
Depending on programming of bits
14 -17,
22 - 25,
32 - 35
PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) this multifunction ports carries
information to the system interface or from the
system to the QuadFALC. After Reset these ports
are configured to be inputs. With the selection of
the pinfunction the in/output configuration is also
achieved. Depending on bit SIC3.RESR all
outputs / inputs of the receive system interface are
updated / sampled with the rising or falling edge of
SCLKR.
I + PU
Synchronous Pulse Receive (SYPR)
Enabled with PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 000 (reset
configuration).
Defines the beginning of time-slot 0 at system
highway port RDO in conjunction with the values
of registers RC0/1. In system interface multiplex
mode SYPR has to be provided at port RPA1 for
all 4 channels and defines the beginning of
time-slot 0 on port RDO1/RSIG1.
Pulse Cycle: Integer multiple of 125 µs.
Receive Frame Marker (RFM)
O
Enabled with PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 001.
CMR2.IRSP = 0: The receive frame marker could
be active high for a 1.544 / 2.048 MHz period
during any bit position of the current frame.
IProgramming is done with registers RC1/0.
CMR2.IRSP = 1: Internal generated frame
synchronization pulse generated by the DCO-R
circuitry. Together with registers RC1/0 the frame
begin on the receive system interface is defined.
This frame synchronization pulse is active low
1.544 / 2.048 MHz period.
Semiconductor Group
197
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
4 -7,
RP(A-D)1
RP(A-D)2
RP(A-D)3
RP(A-D)4
O
O
O
Receive Multiframe Begin (RMFB)
Enabled with PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 010.
The function depends on programming bit
XC0.MFBS:
MFBS = 1: RMFB marks the beginning of every
received multiframe (RDO).
MFBS = 0: Marks the beginning of every received
superframe. Additional pulses every 12 frames are
provided when using ESF or F72 format.
14 -17,
22 - 25,
32 - 35
Receive Signaling Marker (RSIGM)
Enabled with PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 011.
– Marks the time-slots which are defined by
register RTR1-4 of every received frame on port
RDO.
– When using the CAS-BR signaling scheme (bit
XC0.BRM = 1), the robbed bit of each channel
every six frames is marked, if it is enabled via
register XC0.BRM = 1.
Receive Signaling Data (RSIG)
Enabled with PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 100.
The received CAS signaling data is sourced by this
pin. Time-slots on RSIG correlates directly to the
time-slot assignment on RDO. In system interface
multiplex mode all four received signaling
datastreams are merged into a single datastream
byte or bit interleaved and is transmitted on port
RPB1.
O
O
Data Link Bit Receive (DLR)
Enabled with PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 101.
Marks the DL-bit position within the data stream on
RDO.
Freeze Signaling (FREEZE)
Enabled with PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 110.
The freeze signaling status is active high by
detecting a Loss of Signal alarm, or a Loss of
Frame Alignment or a receive slip (pos. or neg.). It
will hold high for at least one complete multiframe
after the alarm disappears. Setting SIC2.FFS
enforces a high on pin FREEZE.
Semiconductor Group
198
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
4 -7,
RP(A-D)1
RP(A-D)2
RP(A-D)3
RP(A-D)4
O
Receive Frame Synchronous Pulse (RFSP)
Enabled with PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 111.
Active low framing pulse derived from the received
PCM route signal. During loss of synchronization
(bit FRS0.LFA), this pulse is suppressed (not
influenced during alarm simulation).
14 -17,
22 - 25,
32 - 35
Pulse frequency: 8 kHz, Pulse width: 648 ns
3, 19, 21, SCLKX
50 (1-4)
I/O + PU
System Clock Transmit
Working clock for the transmit system interface
with a frequency of 16.384 / 8.192 / 4.096 / 2.048
or 12.352 /6.176 / 3.088 / 1.544 MHz.
In system interface multiplex mode a 16.384
/12.352 or 8.192 / 6.176 MHz clock has to be
provided on SCLKX1, which is a common clock for
all 4 transmit system interfaces.
2, 18, 20, XDI(1-4)
49
I
Transmit Data In
Transmit data received from the system highway.
Latching of data is done with rising or falling
transitions of SCLKX according to bit SIC3.RESX.
The delay between the beginning of time-slot 0
and the initial edge of SCLKX (after SYPX goes
active) is determined by the registers XC1/0.
In system interface multiplex mode latching of
datastream containing the 4 frames is done byte
or bit interleaved on port XDI1. In higher data
rates sampling of data is defined by bits
SIC2.SICS2-0.
Semiconductor Group
199
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
120 - 123 XP(A-D)1
126 - 129 XP(A-D)2
I/O + PU
Transmit Multifunction Port A-D
Depending on programming of bits
51 - 54
57 - 60
XP(A-D)3
XP(A-D)4
PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) this multifunction ports carries
information to the system interface or from the
system to the QuadFALC. After Reset these ports
are configured to inputs. With the selection of the
pinfunction the in/output configuration is also
achieved. Depending on bit SIC3.RESX all
outputs / inputs of the transmit system interface
are updated / sampled with the rising or falling
edge of SCLKX.
I + PU
Synchronous Pulse Transmit (SYPX)
Defines the beginning of time-slot 0 at system
highway port XDI in conjunction with the values of
registers XC0/1. In system interface multiplex
mode SYPX has to be provided at port XPA1 for
all 4 channels and defines the beginning of
time-slot 0 on port XDI1/XSIG1. Enabled with
PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 000 (reset configuration).
Pulse Cycle: Integer multiple of 125 µs.
I + PU
Transmit Multiframe Synchronization (XMFS)
Enabled with PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 001 this port
defines the frame and multiframe begin on the
transmit system interface ports XDI and XSIG.
Depending on PC5.CXMFS the signal on XMFS is
active high or low. For correct operation of XMFS
no SYPX pin function should be selected for the
remaining multifunction ports of the same channel.
In system interface multiplex mode XMFS has to
be provided at port XPB1 for all 4 channels.
Note: A new multiframe position has been settled
at least one multiframe after pulse XMFS has
been supplied.
Semiconductor Group
200
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
120 - 123 XP(A-D)1
126 - 129 XP(A-D)2
I + PU
Transmit Signaling Data (XSIG)
Enabled with PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 010.
Input for transmit signaling data received from the
signaling highway. Optionally (SIC3.TTRF)
sampling of XSIG data is controlled by the active
high XSIGM marker. In higher data rates sampling
of data is defined by bits SIC2.SICS2-0. In system
interface multiplex mode latching of the
datastream containing the 4 signaling multiframes
is done byte or bit interleaved on port XPC1.
Transmit Clock (TCLK)
51 - 54
57 - 60
XP(A-D)3
XP(A-D)4
I +PU
Enabled with PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 011.
A 1.544 / 6.176 MHz clock has to be sourced by
the system if the internal generated transmit clock
(DCO-X) should not be used.
Optional this input functions as a clock
synchronization for the DCO-X circuitry with a
frequency of 1.544 MHz.
O
Transmit Multiframe Begin (XMFB)
Enabled with PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 100.
The function depends on programming bit
XC0.MFBS
MFBS = 1: XMFB marks the beginning of every
transmitted multiframe (XDI).
MFBS = 0: Marks the beginning of every
transmitted superframe. Additional pulses every
12 frames are provided when using ESF or F72
format.
XMFB is active high for one 2.048 or 1.544 MBit/s
period.
O
Transmit Signaling Marker (XSIGM)
Enabled with PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 101.
– Marks the transmit time-slots which are
defined by register TTR1-4 of every frame
transmitted via port XDI.
– When using the CAS-BR signaling scheme,
the robbed bit of each channel every six
frames is marked, if it is enabled via register
XC0.BRM = 1.
Semiconductor Group
201
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
Pin Definitions and Function (cont’d)
Pin No.
Symbol
Input (I)
Function
Output (O)
120 - 123 XP(A-D)1
126 - 129 XP(A-D)2
O
Data Link Bit Transmit (DLX)
Enabled with PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 110.
This output provides a 4 kHz signal which marks
the DL-bit position within the data stream on XDI.
51 - 54
57 - 60
XP(A-D)3
XP(A-D)4
O
Transmit Clock (XCLK)
Enabled with PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 111.
Transmit line clock, frequency: 1.544 MHz.
Derived from SCLKX/R, RCLK or internally
generated by the DCO-X circuitry.
11, 29,
56, 92,
102, 125,
VSS
VDD
TDI
I
Power Ground
Supply for digital subcircuits (0 V)
For correct operation, all six pins have to be
connected to ground.
10, 28,
55, 91,
101, 124,
I
Positive Power Supply
for the digital subcircuits (3.3 V)
For correct operation, all six pins have to be
connected to positive power supply.
112
I + PU
Test Data Input for JTAG Boundary Scan
acc. to IEEE Std. 1149.1
113
141
140
131
TDO
TMS
TCK
TRS
O
Test Data Output for Boundary Scan
Test Mode Select for Boundary Scan
Test Clock for Boundary Scan
I + PU
I + PU
I + PU
Test Reset for Boundary Scan
(active low)
If the JTAG Boundary Scan is not used this pin
can be connected to pin RES or VSS.
63, 118 RSVD
I/O + PU
Reserved
Semiconductor Group
202
09.98
PEB 22554
General Features T1
Semiconductor Group
203
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
7
Functional Description T1 / J1
Functional Block Diagram
7.1
RCLK(1-4)
FALC 4
FALC 3
FALC 2
FALC 1
Receive Jitter
Attenuator
SCLKR(1-4)
RDO(1-4)
RPA(1-4)
RPB(1-4)
RPC(1-4)
RPD(1-4)
Receive Framer
Alarm Detector
PRBS Monitor
Line Decoder
RL1/RDIP/
ROID(1-4)
Long+Short
Haul Line
Interface
Receive Elastic
Buffer
Receive
Backplane
Interface
RL2/RDIN/
RCLKI(1-4)
or
Bypass
Perform. Monitor.
Clock/Data
Recovery
Signaling
Controller
CAS-CC
CAS-BR
HDLC/BOM
Controller
XDI(1-4)
XPA(1-4)
XPB(1-4)
XPC(1-4)
XPD(1-4)
XL1/XDOP/
XOID(1-4)
Transmit Elastic
Frame Gen.
Alarm Gen.
PRBS Generator
Line Coding
Long + Short
Haul Transmit
Line Interface
Transmit
Backplane
Interface
Buffer
or
Bypass
XL2/XDON/
XFM(1-4)
SCLKX(1-4)
Transmit Jitter
Attenuator
TCLK
RCLK
RCLK
(1-4)
TCLK SCLKX
(1-4) (1-4)
Boundary Scan
JTAG 1149
Microprocessor Interface
Intel/Motorola
Clocking Unit
TDI TMS TCK TRS TDO
D0...15 A0...9
WR/RW
ALE
BHE/BLE
IM
DBW INT
MCLK SYNC SEC/FSC
ITS10300
CS
RD/DS
RES
Figure 38 Functional Block Diagram PEB 22554
Semiconductor Group
204
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
7.2
Microprocessor Interface
The communication between the CPU and the QuadFALC is done via a set of directly
accessible registers. The interface may be configured as Siemens/Intel or Motorola type
with a selectable data bus width of 8 or 16 bits.
The CPU transfers data to/from the QuadFALC (via 64 byte deep FIFOs per direction
and channel), sets the operating modes, controls function sequences, and gets status
information by writing or reading control/status registers. All accesses can be done as
byte or word accesses if enabled. If 16-bit bus width is selected, access to lower/upper
part of the data bus is determined by address line A0 and signal BHE/BLE as shown in
table 13 and 14.
In table chapter Table 15 is shown how the ALE (address latch enable) line is used to
control the bus structure and interface type. The switching of ALE allows the QuadFALC
to be directly connected to a multiplexed address/data bus.
Mixed Byte/Word Access to the FIFOs
Reading from or writing to the internal FIFOs (RFIFO and XFIFO of each channel) can be
done using a 8-bit (byte) or 16-bit (word) access depending on the selected bus interface
mode. Randomly mixed byte/word access to the FIFOs is allowed without any
restrictions.
Table 13
Data Bus Access (16-Bit Intel Mode)
BHE
A0
Register Access
QuadFALC Data Pins
Used
0
0
FIFO word access
D0 – D15
Register word access (even addresses)
0
1
1
1
0
1
Register byte access (odd addresses)
D8 – D15
Register byte access (even addresses) D0 – D7
No transfer performed None
Semiconductor Group
205
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Table 14
Data Bus Access (16-Bit Motorola Mode)
BLE
A0
Register Access
QuadFALC Data Pins
Used
0
0
FIFO word access
D0 – D15
Register word access (even addresses)
0
1
1
1
0
1
Register byte access (odd addresses)
Register byte access (even addresses)
No transfer performed
D0 – D7
D8 – D15
None
Table 15
Selectable Bus and Microprocessor Interface Configuration
ALE
IM
1
Microprocessor Interface
Bus Structure
demultiplexed
demultiplexed
multiplexed
GND/VDD
GND/VDD
switching
Motorola
Intel
0
0
Intel
The assignment of registers with even/odd addresses to the data lines in case of 16-bit
register access depends on the selected microprocessor interface mode:
Siemens/Intel
Motorola
(Adr. n + 1)
(Adr. n)
(Adr. n)
(Adr. n + 1)
↑
↓
↑
↓
Data Lines
D15
D8
D7
D0
n: even address
Complete information concerning register functions is provided in – Detailed Register
Description.
Semiconductor Group
206
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
FIFO Structure
In transmit and receive direction of the signaling controller 64-byte deep FIFOs for each
channel are provided for the intermediate storage of data between the system internal
highway and the CPU interface. The FIFOs are divided into two halves of 32-bytes. Only
one half is accessible to the CPU at any time.
In case 16-bit data bus width is selected by fixing pin DBW to logical ‘1’ word access to
the FIFOs is enabled. Data output to bus lines D0-D15 as a function of the selected
interface mode is shown in figure 39 and 40. Of course, byte access is also allowed.The
effective length of the accessible part of RFIFO may be changed from 32 bytes (RESET
value) down to 2 bytes independent for each channel.
RFIFO
XFIFO
32
32
1
32
1
32
4
3
2
1
Byte 4
Byte 3
Byte 2
Byte 1
4
3
2
1
Byte 4
Byte 3
Byte 2
Byte 1
D15
D8 D7
D0
D15
D8 D7
D0
ITD01798
Figure 39
FIFO Word Access (Intel Mode)
Semiconductor Group
207
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
RFIFO
XFIFO
32
32
1
32
1
32
4
3
2
1
Byte 4
Byte 3
Byte 2
Byte 1
4
3
2
1
Byte 4
Byte 3
Byte 2
Byte 1
D15
D8 D7
D0
D15
D8 D7
D0
ITD01799
Figure 40
FIFO Word Access (Motorola Mode)
Semiconductor Group
208
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Interrupt Interface
Special events in the QuadFALC are indicated by means of a single interrupt output with
programmable characteristics (open drain, push-pull; IPC register), which requests the
CPU to read status information from the QuadFALC, or to transfer data from/to
QuadFALC.
Since only one INT request output is provided, the cause of an interrupt must be
determined by the CPU by reading the QuadFALC’s interrupt status registers (CIS, GIS,
ISR0-4) that means the interrupt on pin INT and the interrupt status bits are reset by
reading the interrupt status registers. Register ISR0-4 are from type “Clear on Read“.
The structure of the interrupt status registers is shown in figure 41.
Channel Interrupt Status
CIS
C4
C3
C2
C1
Global Interrupt Status
(Per Channel)
GIS
ISR4 ISR3 ISR2 ISR1 ISR0
ISR4
IMR4
ISR3
IMR3
ISR0
IMR0
ISR2
IMR2
ISR1
IMR1
ITS10309
Figure 41
QuadFALC Interrupt Status Register Structure
Each interrupt indication of registers ISR0-4 can be selectively masked by setting the
corresponding bit in the corresponding mask registers IMR0-4. If the interrupt status bits
are masked, they neither generate an interrupt at INT nor are they visible in ISR0-4.
CIS, the non-maskable Channel Interrupt Status Register, serves as a pointer to pending
channel related global interrupt status registers. After the QuadFALC has requested an
interrupt by activating its INT pin, the CPU should first read the Channel Interrupt Status
Semiconductor Group
209
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
register CIS to identify the requesting channel. The global interrupt status register serves
itself as a pointer to pending interrupt status registers ISR0 -4 for each channel. After
reading the assigned global interrupt status register and the assigned interrupt status
registers ISR0- 4, the pointer in the GIS and CIS registers are cleared or updated if
another interrupt requires service.
If all pending interrupts are acknowledged by reading (CIS and GIS are reset), pin INT
goes inactive.
Updating of interrupt status registers ISR0…4 , GIS and CIS is only prohibited during
read access.
Masked Interrupts Visible in Status Registers
The channel and global interrupt status registers indicates those interrupt status
registers with active interrupt indications.
An additional mode may be selected via bit GCR.VIS.
In this mode, masked interrupt status bits neither generate an interrupt on pin INT nor are
they visible in CIS and GIS, but are displayed in the respective interrupt status
register(s) ISR0..4.
This mode is useful when some interrupt status bits are to be polled in the individual
interrupt status registers.
Notes:
• In the visible mode, all active interrupt status bits, whether the corresponding actual
interrupt is masked or not, are reset when the interrupt status register is read. Thus,
when polling of some interrupt status bits is desired, care must be taken that
unmasked interrupts are not lost in the process.
• All unmasked interrupt statuses are treated as before.
Please note that whenever polling is used, all interrupt status registers concerned have
to be polled individually (no “hierarchical” polling possible), since GIS only contains
information on actually generated - i.e. unmasked-interrupts.
7.3
Boundary Scan Interface
Identification Register: 32 bit
Version:
1 H
Part Number:
Manufacturer:
004D H
083 H
In QuadFALC a Test Access Port (TAP) controller is implemented. The essential part of
the TAP is a finite state machine (16 states) controlling the different operational modes
Semiconductor Group
210
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
of the boundary scan. Both, TAP controller and boundary scan, meet the requirements
given by the JTAG standard: IEEE 1149.1. Figure 42 gives an overview.
TRS
TAP Controller Reset
Test Access Port
Pins
TCK
1
2
CLOCK
Clock
Generation
Reset
CLOCK
Reset
TMS
TDI
Test
BS Data IN
Control Bus
Control
TAP Controller
-Finite State Machine
-Instruction Register (3 bits)
-Test Signal Generator
Data IN
6
ID Data OUT
TDO
Enable
SS Data OUT
n
Data OUT
ITB10938
Figure 42
Block Diagram of Test Access Port and Boundary Scan
Test handling is performed via the pins TCK (Test Clock), TMS (Test Mode Select), TDI
(Test Data Input) and TDO (Test Data Output). Test data at TDI are loaded with a 4-MHz
clock signal connected to TCK. ‘1’ or ‘0’ on TMS causes a transition from one controller
state to an other; constant ’1’ on TMS leads to normal operation of the chip.
If no boundary scan testing is planned TMS and TDI do not need to be connected since
pull-up transistors ensure high input levels in this case. Nevertheless it would be a good
practice to put the unused inputs to defined levels. In this case, if the JTAG is not used:
TMS = TCK = ‘1’.
After switching on the device (VDD = 0 to 3.3 V) pin TRS has to reset which forces the
TAP controller into test logic reset state.
Semiconductor Group
211
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
7.4
Receive Path
LIM1.DRS
Peak
Detector
RL1/
RDIP/
ROID
Clock-Data
Recovery
Line
Decoder
Equalizer
RDATA
RL2/
DPLL
RDIN/
RCLKI
RCLK(N)
Analog-
LOS
Detector
Alarm
Detector
RCLK
DCO-R
Receive
System
Interface
SYNC
1.5 MHz/
2 MHz
Receive
Jitter
Attenuator
FSC
Clocking
Unit
MCLK
ITS10313
Figure 43
Receive Clock System
Receive Line Interface
For data input, three different data types are supported:
• Ternary coded signals received at multifunction ports RL1 and RL2 from a -36 dB
ternary interface. The ternary interface is selected if LIM1.DRS is reset.
• Digital dual rail signals received at ports RDIP and RDIN. The dual rail interface is
selected if LIM1.DRS and FMR0.RC1 is set.
• Unipolar data at port ROID received from a fibre optical interface. The optical interface
is selected if LIM1.DRS is set and FMR0.RC1 is reset.
Receive Short and Long Haul Interface
The QuadFALC has now an integrated short- and long- haul line interface, comprising a
receive equalization network, noise filtering and programmable line build-outs (LBO).
Semiconductor Group
212
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Receive Equalization Network
The QuadFALC automatically recovers the signals received on pins RL1/2 in a range of
up to -36 dB. The maximum reachable length with a 22 AWG twisted-pair cable is 2000
m. After Reset the QuadFALC is in „Short Haul“ mode, received signals are recovered up
to -10 dB of cable attenuation. Switching in „Long Haul“ mode is done by setting of
register LIM0.EQON.
The integrated receive equalization network recovers signals with up to -36 dB of cable
attenuation. Noise filters eliminate the higher frequency part of the received signals. The
incoming data is peak detected and sliced at 55% of the peak value to produce the
digital data stream. The received data is then forwarded to the clock & data recovery unit.
Receive Line Attenuation Indication
Status register RES reports the current receive line attenuation in a range from 0 to -36
dB in 25 steps of approximately 1.4 dB each. The least significant 5 bits of this register
indicate the cable attenuation in dB. These 5 bits are only valid in conjunction with the
most significant two bits (RES.EV1/0 = 01) .
Receive Clock and Data Recovery
The analog received signal at port RL1/2 is equalized and then peak-detected to produce
a digital signal. The digital received signal at port RDIP/N is directly forwarded to the
DPLL. The receive clock and data recovery extracts the route clock RCLK from the data
stream received at the RL1/2, RDIP/RDIN or ROID lines and converts the data stream
into a single rail, unipolar bit stream. The clock and data recovery works with the
internally generated high frequency clock based on MCLK. Normally the clock that is
output via pin RCLK is the recovered clock from the signal provided by RL1/2 or RDIP/N
has a duty cycle close to 50 %. The free run frequency is defined by MCLK = 1.544 MHz
in periods with no signal. The intrinsic jitter generated in the absence of any input jitter is
not more than 0.035 UI. In digital bipolar line interface mode the clock and data recovery
will accept only HDB3 coded signals with 50 % duty cycle.
Receive Line Coding
The B8ZS line code or the AMI (ZCS) coding is provided for the data received from the
ternary or the dual rail interface. All code violations that do not correspond to zero
substitution rules will be detected. The detected errors increment the code violation
counter (16 bits length). In case of the optical interface a selection between the NRZ
code and the CMI Code (1T2B) with B8ZS postprocessing is provided. If CMI code
(1T2B) is selected the receive route clock will be recovered from the data stream. The
1T2B decoder does not correct any errors. In case of NRZ coding data will be latched
with the falling edge of pin RCLKI.
The detected errors increment the code violation counter (16 bits length).
Semiconductor Group
213
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
When using the optical interface with NRZ coding, the decoder is by-passed and no code
violations will be detected.
Additionally, the receive line interface contains the alarm detection for Alarm Indication
Signal AIS (Blue Alarm) and the Loss of Signal LOS (Red Alarm).
The signal at the ternary interface is received at both ends of a transformer.
RL1
Line
FALC R
t2
t1
R2
RL2
ITS10967
Figure 44
Receiver Configuration
Table 16
Recommended Receiver Configuration Values
Parameter
Characteristic Impedance 100 Ω
DS1
100
1 : 1
R1 (± 1 %) [Ω]
t2 : t1
Loss of Signal Detection
There are different definitions for detecting Loss of Signal alarms (LOS) in the ITU-T
G.775 and AT&T TR 54016. The QuadFALC covers all these standards. The LOS
indication is performed by generating an interrupt (if not masked) and activating a status
bit. Additionally a LOS status change interrupt is programmable via register GCR.SCI.
• Detection:
An alarm will be generated if the incoming data stream has no pulses (no transitions)
for a certain number (N) of consecutive pulse periods. “No pulse” in the digital receive
interface means a logical zero on pins RDIP/RDIN/ROID. A pulse with an amplitude
less than Q dB below nominal is the criteria for “no pulse” in the analog receive
interface (LIM1.DRS=0). The receive signal level Q is programmable via three control
bits LIM1.RIL2-0 in a range of about 900 to 50 mV differential voltage between pins
RL1/2. The number N may be set via a 8 bit register PCD. The contents of the PCD
register will be multiplied by 16, which results in the number of pulse periods, or better,
Semiconductor Group
214
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
the time which has to suspend until the alarm has to be detected. The range results
therefore from 16 to 4096 pulse periods.
• Recovery:
In general the recovery procedure starts after detecting a logical ‘one’ (digital receive
interface) or a pulse (analog receive interface) with an amplitude more than Q dB
(defined by LIM1.RIL2-0) of the nominal pulse. The value in the 8 bit register PCR
defines the number of pulses (1 to 255) to clear the LOS alarm. Additional recovery
conditions may be programmed by register LIM2.
Receive Jitter Attenuator
The receive jitter attenuator is placed for each channel in the receive path. The working
clock is an internally generated high frequency clock based on the clock provided on pin
MCLK (1.544 MHz). The jitter attenuator meets the requirements of PUB 62411,
PUB 43802, TR-TSY 009,TR-TSY 253, TR-TSY 499 and Rec. I.431, G.703 and G. 824.
The internal PLL circuitry DCO-R generates an „jitterfree“ output clock which is directly
dependent on the phase difference of the incoming clock and the jitter attenuated
clock.The receive jitter attenuator could be either synchronized to the extracted receive
clock RCLK or to a 1.544 or 2.048 MHz clock provided on pin SYNC. The received data
is written into the receive elastic buffer with RCLK and are read out with the dejittered
clock sourced by DCO-R. The jitter attenuated clock could be output via pins RCLK or
SCLKR. Optionally a 8 kHz clock is provided on pin SEC/FSC.
The DCO-R circuitry attenuates the incoming jittered clock starting at 6 Hz jitter
frequency with 20 dB per decade fall off. Wander with a jitter frequency below 6 Hz will
be passed unattenuated. The intrinsic jitter in the absence of any input jitter is < 0.02UI.
For some applications it might be useful starting of jitter attenuation at lower frequencies.
Therefore the corner frequency is switchable by the factor of ten downto 0.6 Hz
(LIM2.SCF).
The DCO-R circuitry is automatically centered to the nominal bit rate if the reference
clock on pin SYNC / RCLK is missed for two 2.048 or 1.544 MHz clock periods. This
center function of DCO-R may be optionally disabled (CMR2.DCF = 1) in order to accept
a gapped reference clock.
In analog line interface mode the RCLK is always running. Only in digital line interface
mode with single rail data (NRZ) a gapped clock on pin RCLK may occur.
Semiconductor Group
215
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
The receive jitter attenuator works in two different modes:
• Slave mode
In Slave mode (LIM0.MAS = 0) the DCO1 will be synchronized to the recovered route
clock. In case of LOS the DCO-R switches automatically to Master mode. If bit
CMR1.DCS is set automatic switching from RCLK to SYNC is disabled.
• Master mode
In Master mode (LIM0.MAS = 1) the jitter attenuator is in free running mode if on pin
SYNC no clock is supplied. If a clock with a frequency of 1.544 MHz (LIM1.DCOC = 0)
or 2.048 MHz (LIM1.DCOC = 1) is applied at the SYNC input the DCO-R will
synchronize to this input.
The following table shows the clock modes with the corresponding synchronization
sources.
Mode
Internal
SYNC
System Clocks
LOS Active Input
Master
Master
independent Fixed to
VDD
DCO-R centered, if CMR2.DCF =0.
(CMR2.DCF should not be set)
independent 1.544 or
Synchronized on SYNC input (external 1.544 or
2.048 MHz 2.048MHz)
Slave
Slave
Slave
no
Fixed to
VDD
Synchronized on Line RCLK1-4 , selected by
CMR1.DRSS1/0
no
1.544 or
2.048 MHz CMR1.DRSS1/0
Synchronized on Line RCLK1-4 , selected by
yes
Fixed to
VDD
CMR1.DCS = 0:
DCO-R is centered, if CMR2.DCF = 0.
(CMR2.DCF should not be set)
CMR1.DCS = 1:
Synchronized on Line RCLK1-4, selected by
CMR1.DRSS1/0
Slave
yes
1.544 or
CMR1.DCS = 0:
2.048 MHz Synchronized on SYNC input (external 1.544 or
2.048 MHz)
CMR1.DCS = 1:
Synchronized on Line RCLK1-4, selected by
CMR1.DRSS1/0
Semiconductor Group
216
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
The jitter attenuator meets the jitter transfer requirements of the PUB 62411,
PUB 43802, TR-TSY 009,TR-TSY 253, TR-TSY 499 and Rec. I.431 and G. 703.(refer to
figure 45).
ITD10314
10
dB
PUB 62411_H
PUB 62411_L
FALC R
0
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
Slope - 20 dB/Decade
Slope - 40 dB/Decade
1
10
100
1000
10000
Hz 100000
Frequency
Figure 45
Jitter Attenuation Performance
Semiconductor Group
217
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Jitter Tolerance
The QuadFALC receiver’s tolerance to input jitter complies to ITU and Bellcore
requirements for T1 applications.
Figure 46 shows the curves of different input jitter specifications stated below as well as
the QuadFALC performance.
ITD10308
1000
PUB 62411
UI
TR-NWT 000499 Cat II
CCITT G.823
ITU-T I.431
FALC R
100
10
1
0.1
1
10
100
1000
10000
Hz 100000
Jitter Frequency
Figure 46
Jitter Tolerance
Output Jitter
According to the input jitter defined by PUB62411 the QuadFALC generates the output
jitter, which is specified in table below.
Specification
Measurement Filter Bandwidth
Output Jitter
(UI peak to peak)
Lower Cutoff
Upper Cutoff
8 kHz
PUB 62411
10 Hz
8 kHz
10 Hz
< 0.015
< 0.015
< 0.015
< 0.02
40 kHz
40 kHz
Broadband
Semiconductor Group
218
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Transmit jitter attenuator
The transmit jitter attenuator DCO-X circuitry generates a „jitterfree“ transmit clock for
each channel and meets the following requirements: PUB 62411, PUB 43802,
TR-TSY 009,TR-TSY 253, TR-TSY 499 and Rec. I.431 and G.703. The DCO-X circuitry
works internally with the same high frequency clock as the receive jitter attenuator it
does. It synchronizes either to the working clock of the transmit backplane interface or
the clock provided by pin TCLK or the receive clock RCLK (remote loop / loop-timed).
The DCO-X attenuates the incoming jitter starting at 6 Hz with 20 dB per decade fall off.
With the jitter attenuated clock, which is directly dependent on the phase difference of
the incoming clock and the jitter attenuated clock, data is read from the transmit elastic
buffer (2 frames) or from the JATT buffer (2 frames, remote loop) Wander with a jitter
frequency below 6 Hz are passed transparentely.
The DCO-X accepts gapped clocks which are used in ATM or SDH/SONET applications.
The jitter attenuated clock is output on pin XCLK.
The transmit jitter attenuator could be disabled. In that case data is read from the
transmit elastic buffer with the clock sourced by pin TCLK (1.544 or 6.176 MHz).
Synchronization between SCLKX and TCLK has to done externally.
In the loop-timed clock configuration (LIM2.ELT) the DCO-X circuitry generates a
transmit clock which is frequency synchronized to RCLK. In this configuration the
transmit elastic buffer has to be enabled.
RCLK
RL1/2
RDIP/N
ROID
Line
Decoder
Receive
Data
Equalizer
DPLL
DRS
JATT
Buffer
XL1/2
XDOP/N
XOID
DRS
Line
Driver
Pulse
Shaper
Line
Encoder
Transmit
Data
RCLK
Transmit
Jitter
Attenuator
Clock
Unit
RCLK
MCLK
ITS10299
Figure 47
Clocking in Remote Loop Configuration
Semiconductor Group
219
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
XL1/
XDOP/
XOID
DR
Transmit
Elastic
Store
D
DR
Framer
XDI
A
XL2/
XDON
Pulse Shaper
XCLK
TCLK
(E1: 8MHz)
(T1: 6MHz)
SCLKR
÷ 4
Internal Clock of
Receive System
Interface
E1: 8MHz
T1: 6MHz
DCO-X
SCLKX
TCLK
RCLK
Transmit
Jitter
Attenuator
Clocking
Unit
MCLK
ITS10305
Figure 48
Transmit Clock System
Note: DR = Dual Rail Interface
DCO-X Digital Controlled Oscillator Transmit
Framer/Synchronizer
The following functions are performed:
• Synchronization on pulse frame
• Synchronization on multiframe
• Error indication when synchronization is lost. In this case, AIS is automatically sent to
the system side and Remote Alarm to the remote end if en/disabled.
• Initiating and controlling of resynchronization after reaching the asynchronous state.
This may be automatically done by the QuadFALC or user controlled via the
microprocessor interface.
• Detection of remote alarm (yellow alarm) indication from the incoming data stream.
• Separation of service bits and data link bits. This information is stored in special status
registers.
• Detection of framed or unframed in band Loop Up/Down Code
• Generation of various maskable interrupt statuses of the receiver functions.
Semiconductor Group
220
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
• Generation of control signals to synchronize the CRC checker, and the receive elastic
buffer.
If programmed and applicable to the selected multiframe format, CRC checking of the
incoming data stream is done by generating check bits for a CRC multiframe according
to the CRC 6 procedure (refer to ITU-T Rec. G.704). These bits are compared with those
check bits that are received during the next CRC multiframe. If there is at least one
mismatch, the CRC error counter (16 bit) will be incremented.
Receive Elastic Buffer
The received bit stream is stored in the receive elastic buffer. The memory is organized
as a two-frame elastic buffer with a maximum size of 2 × 193 bit. The size of the elastic
buffer may be independently configured for the receive and transmit direction.
Programming of the receive buffer size is done by SIC1.RBS1/0 :
• RBS1/0 = 00 : two frame buffer or 386 bits
Maximum of wander amplitude (peak-to-peak): (1 UI = 648 ns )
System interface clocking rate: modulo 2.048 MHz:
142 UI in channel translation mode 0
78 UI in channel translation mode 1
System interface clocking rate: modulo 1.544 MHz:
max. wander: 126 UI
average delay after performing a slip: 1 frame or 193 bits
• RBS1/0 = 01 : one frame buffer or 193 bits
System interface clocking rate: modulo 2.048 MHz:
Max. wander : 80 UI in channel translation mode 0
Max. wander : 50 UI in channel translation mode 1
System interface clocking rate: modulo 1.544 MHz:
max. wander: 74 UI
average delay after performing a slip: 96 bits
• RBS1/0 = 10 : short buffer or 96 bits :
System interface clocking rate: modulo 2.048 MHz:
Max. wander : 28 UI in channel translation mode 0; channel translation mode 1 not
supported
System interface clocking rate: modulo 1.544 MHz:
max. wander: 38 UI
average delay after performing a slip: 48 bits
• RBS1/0 = 11 : Bypass of the receive elastic buffer
The functions are:
• Clock adaption between system clock (SCLKR) and internally generated route clock
(RCLK).
• Compensation of input wander and jitter.
Semiconductor Group
221
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
• Frame alignment between system frame and receive route frame
• Reporting and controlling of slips
Controlled by special signals generated by the receiver, the unipolar bit stream is
converted into bit-parallel, time-slot-serial data which is circularly written to the elastic
buffer using internally generated Receive Route Clock (RCLK).
Reading of stored data is controlled by the System Clock sourced by SCLKR or by the
receive jitter attenuator and the Synchronous Pulse (SYPR) in conjunction with the
programmed offset values for the receive time-slot/clock-slot counters. After conversion
into a serial data stream, the data is given out via port RDO. If the receive buffer is
bypassed programming of the time-slot offset is disabled and data is clocked off with
RCLK instead of SCLKR.
The 24 received time-slots are translated into the 32 system time-slots in two different
channel translation modes (FMR1.CTM). Unequipped time-slots will be set to ‘FFH’.
Refer to table 17.
In one frame or short buffer mode the delay through the receive buffer is reduced to an
average delay of 96 or 48 bits. In bypass mode the time-slot assigner is disabled. In this
case SYPR programmed as input is ignored. Slips will be performed in all buffer modes
except the bypass mode. After a slip is detected the read pointer is adjusted to one half
of the current buffer size.
The following table gives an overview of the receive buffer operating mode .
Buffer Size
TS Offset program.
Slip perform.
(SIC1.RBS1/0)
(RC1/0) + SYPR = input
bypass1)
disabled
no
short buffer
not recommended,
yes
recom. SYPR = output
1 frame
not recommended,
recom. SYPR = output
yes
yes
2 frames
enabled
1) In bypass mode the clock provided on pin SCLKR is ignored. Clocking is done with RCLK.
Figure 49 gives an idea of operation of the receive elastic buffer:
A slip condition is detected when the write pointer (W) and the read pointer (R) of the
memory are nearly coincident, i.e. the read pointer is within the slip limits (S +, S –). If a
slip condition is detected, a negative slip (one frame or one half of the current buffer size
Semiconductor Group
222
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
is skipped) or a positive slip (one frame or one half of the current buffer size is read out
twice) is performed at the system interface, depending on the difference between RCLK
and the current working clock of the receive backplane interface. i.e. on the position of
pointer R and W within the memory. A positive / negative slip is indicated in the interrupt
status bits ISR3.RSP and ISR3.RSN.
Frame 2 Time Slots
R’
R
Slip
S-
S+
W
Frame 1 Time Slots
Moment of Slip Detection
W : Write Pointer (Route Clock controlled)
R : Read Pointer (System Clock controlled)
S+, S- : Limits for Slip Detection (mode dependent)
ITD10952
Figure 49
The Receive Elastic Buffer as Circularly Organized Memory
Semiconductor Group
223
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Speech Channels
Time-Slots
C. Translation Mode 0
C. Translation Mode 1
FS/DL
1
FS/DL
1
0
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
–
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
–
8
8
7
9
9
8
9
–
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
–
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
10
11
12
–
13
14
15
–
16
17
18
–
19
20
21
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
22
23
24
Table 17
Channel Translation Modes
- : FFH
Semiconductor Group
224
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Receive Signaling Controller
Each of the four signaling controller may be programmed to operate in various signaling
modes. The QuadFALC will perform the following signaling and data link methods:
• HDLC/SDLC or LAPD Access
In case of common channel signaling the signaling procedure HDLC/SDLC or LAPD
according to Q.921 will be supported. The signaling controller of the QuadFALC
performs the FLAG detection , CRC checking, address comparisson and zero
bit-removing. The received data flow and the address recognition features may be
performed in very flexible way, to satisfy almost any practical requirements.
Depending on the selected address mode, the QuadFALC may perform a 1 or 2 byte
address recognition. If a 2-byte address field is selected, the high address byte is
compared with the fixed value FEH or FCH (group address) as well as with two
individually programmable values in RAH1 and RAH2 registers. According to the
ISDN LAPD protocol, bit 1 of the high byte address will be interpreted as
COMMAND/RESPONSE bit (C/R) and will be excluded from the address comparison.
Buffering of receive data is done in a 64 byte deep RFIFO. Refer also to chapter 8.1.
In signaling controller transparent mode, fully transparent data reception without
HDLC framing is performed, i.e. without FLAG recognition, CRC checking or
bit-stuffing. This allows user specific protocol variations.
The QuadFALC offers the flexibility to extract data during certain time-slots. Any
combination of time-slots may be programmed independently for the receive and
transmit direction.
• CAS-Bit Robbing
The signaling information is carried in the LSB of every sixth frame for each time-slot.
The signaling controller samples the bit stream either on the receive line side or if
external signaling is enabled on the receive system side via port RSIG. Receive
signaling data is stored in the registers RS1-12.
Optionally the complete CAS multiframe may be transmitted on pin RSIG. The
signaling data is clocked out with the working clock of the receive highway (SCLKR)
in conjunction with the rec. synchron. pulse (SYPR). Data on RSIG will be transmitted
in the last 4 bits per time-slot and are time-slot aligned to the data on RDO. In ESF
format the A,B,C,D bits are placed in the bit positions 5-8 per time-slot. In F12/72
format the A and B bits are repeated in the C and D bit positions. The first 4 bits per
time-slot could be optionally fixed high or low. The FS/DL time-slot is transmitted on
RDO and RSIG. During IDLE time-slots no signaling information is transmitted. Data
on RSIG are only valid if the freeze signaling status is inactive. With FMR1.SAIS an all
ones may be transmitted on RDO and RSIG.
Updating of the received signaling information is controlled by the freeze signaling
status. The freeze signaling status is automatically activated if a Loss of Signal, or a
Loss of Frame Alignment or a receive slip occures. The current freeze status is output
Semiconductor Group
225
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
on port FREEZ (RPA-D) and indicated by register SIS.SFS. If SIS.SFS is active
updating of the registers RS1-12 is disabled. Optionally automatic freeze signaling
may be disabled by setting bit SIC3.DAF.
To relieve the µP load from always reading the complete RS1-12 buffer every 3 msec
the QuadFALC notifies the µP via interrupt ISR0.RSC only when signaling changes
from one multiframe to the next. Additionally the QuadFALC generates a receive
signaling data change pointer (RSP1/2) which directly points to the updated RS1-12
register. .
• Bit Oriented Messages in ESF-DL Channel
The QuadFALC supports the DL-channel protocol for ESF format according to ANSI
T1.403 specification or according to AT&T TR54016. The HDLC- and Bit Oriented
Message (BOM) -Receiver may be switched ON/OFF independently. If the
QuadFALC is used for HDLC formats only, the BOM receiver has to be switched off.
If HDLC- and BOM-receiver has been switched on (MODE.HRAC/BRAC), an
automatic switching between HDLC and BOM mode is enabled. If eight or more
consecutive ones are detected, the BOM mode is entered. Upon detection of a flag in
the data stream, the QuadFALC switches back to HDLC-mode. In BOM-mode, the
following byte format is assumed (the left most bit is received first).
111111110xxxxxx0
Three different BOM reception modes may be programmed (CCR1.BRM+
CCR2.RBFE). If CCR2.RFBE is set, the BOM-receiver will only accept BOM frames
after detecting 7 out of 10 equal BOM pattern. Buffering of receive data is done in a 64
byte deep RFIFO. Refer also to chapter 8.1.4
• 4 kbit/s Data Link Access in F72 Format
The DL-channel protocol is supported as follows:
- access is done on a multiframe basis via registers RDL1-3,
- the DL bit information from frame 26 to 72 is stored in the Receive FIFO of the
signaling controller.
7.5
System Interface
The QuadFALC offers a flexible feature for system designers where for transmit and
receive direction different system clocks and system pulses are necessary. The interface
to the receive system highway is realized by two data buses, one for the data RDO and
one for the signaling data RSIG. The receive highway is clocked via pin SCLKR, while
the interface to the transmit system highway is independently clocked via pin SCLKX.
The
frequency
of
these
working
clocks
and
the
data
rate
of
2.048 / 4.096 / 8.192 / 16.384 / 1.544 / 3.088 / 6.192 / 12.352 MBit/s for the receive and
transmit system interface is programmable by SIC1.SSC1/0, SIC2.SSC2 and
SIC1.SSD1, FMR1.SSD0. Selectable system clock and data rates and their valid
combinations are shown in the table below.
Semiconductor Group
226
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Table 18
System Clocking and Data Rates
System Data Rate Clock Rate
Clock Rate
Clock Rate
Clock Rate
1.544 / 2.048 3.088 / 4.096 6.176 / 8.192 12.352 /
MHz
MHz
MHz
16.384 MHz
1.544/ 2.048 MBit/s x
x
x
x
x
--
x
x
x
x
3.088/ 4.096 MBit/s --
6.176/ 8.192 MBit/s --
x
--
--
12.352 /
--
16.384 MBit/s
x = valid , -- = invalid
Generally the data or marker on the system interface are clocked off or latched on the
rising or falling edge (SIC3.RESR/X) of the SCLKR/X clock. Some clocking rates allow
transmitting of time-slots in different channel- phases. Each channel-phase which should
be active on ports RDO, XDI, RP(A-D) and XP(A-D) is programmable by bit
SIC2.SICS2-0, the remaining channel-phases are cleared or ignored.
The signals on pin SYPR in conjunction with the assigned timeslot offset in register RC0
and RC1 will define the beginning of a frame on the receive system highway.The signal
on pin SYPX in conjunction with the assigned timeslot offset in register XC0 and XC1 will
define the beginning of a frame on the transmit system highway.
Adjusting the frame begin (time-slot 0, bit 0) relative to SYPR/X is possible in the range
of 0 - 125 µsec. The minimum shift of varying the time-slot 0 begin could be programmed
between 1 bit and 1/8 bit depending of the system clocking and data rate. e.g. with a
clocking / data rate of 2.048 MHz shifting is done bitwise, while running the QuadFALC
with 16.384 MHz and 2.048 MBit/s data rate it is done by 1/8 bit.
A receive frame marker RFM could be activated during any bit position of the entire
frame. Programming is done with registers RC1/0. The pin function RFM is selected by
PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 001. The RFM selection disables the internal time-slot assigner, no
offset programming is performed. The receive frame marker is active high for one 1.544
/ 2.048 MHz cycle and is clocked off with the rising or falling edge of the clock which is
in/output on port SCLKR.
Semiconductor Group
227
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
SCLKR
DCO-R
RSIGM
RSIG
RMFB
RFM
DLR
Receive
Signaling
Buffer
RP(A-D)
Receive
Backplane
Receive
Elastic
Buffer
FREEZ
RFSPQ
SYRPQ
DCO-R
RDO
BYP.
Receive
Data
Receive
Jitter
Attenuator
Receive
Clock
SCLKX
DCO-R
XSIG
SYPXQ
XMFS
TCLK
Transmit
Signaling
Buffer
XP(A-D)
Transmit
XSIGM
XMFB
DLX
Backplane
Transmit
Elastic
Buffer
XCLK
BYP.
PLB
Transmit
Data
XDI
Transmit
Jitter
Attenuator
Transmit
Clock
TCLK
RCLK
ITS10298
Figure 50
System Interface
System Interface Multiplex Mode
Setting this bit enables a single rail data stream of 16.384 or 8.192 or 12.352 or 6.176
MBit/s containg all four T1 frames. The receive system interface for all four channels is
running with the clock provided on SCLKR1 and the frame sync pulse provided on
SYPR1. The transmit system interface is running with SCLKX1 and SYPX1. Data will be
transmitted / accepted in a byte or bit interleaved format. Bit interleaving is valid with the
16.384 / 8.192 / 12.352 or 6.176 MHz clocking rates. However byte interleaving is only
Semiconductor Group
228
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
applicable with the 16.384 or 8.192 MHz clock. All four channels have to be configured
equally with the following parameters:
• clocking rate : 16.384 / 8.192 / 12.352 / 6.176 MHz ,
SIC1.SSC1/0 and SIC2.SSC2
• data rate : 16.384 / 8.192 / 12.352 / 6.176 MBit/s, SIC1.SSD1, FMR1.SSD0
• time-slot offset programming : RC1/0 , XC1/0
• receive buffer size : SIC1.RBS1/0 = 00 (2 frames)
The multiplexed data stream is internal logically ored. Therefore the selection of the
active channel phase have to be configured different for each single channel FALC.
Programming is done with SIC2.SICS2-0.
In system interface multiplex mode signals on RDO2-4 and RSIG2-4 are undefined,
while signals on SCLKR2-4, SYPR2-4, SCLKX2-4, SYPX2-4, XDI2-4 and XSIG2-4 are
ignored.
Semiconductor Group
229
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
(e.g. F12 Frame Format)
FRAME 11 FRAME 12 FRAME 1 FRAME 2
RDO
FRAME 1 FRAME 2 FRAME 3
RMFB
SYPR
SYPR
Trigger
Edge1)
Sample
Edge
SCLKR
8.192 MHz
T
Programmable via RC0/1
SCLKR
1.544 MHz
TS0
RDO/RSIG
2 Mbit/s Data Rate
Bit 255 Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 0
RDO/RSIG
4 Mbit/s Data Rate
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
(SCLKR = 8.192 MHz)
Bit 255
RDO/RSIG
4 Mbit/s Data Rate
(SCLKR = 8.192 MHz)
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
marks any
4 Mbit Interface
2 Mbit Interface
4 Mbit Interface
RFM
Receive Frame Marker
RCO/1
bit position
2 Mbit Interface
RSIGM
Time-Slot Marker
RTR1...4
marks any
Time-Slot
Sample Edge
Programmable via RC0/1
T
RDO
1.544 Mbit/s Data Rate
(SCLKR = 1.544 MHz)
Bit 192
FDL
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
DLR
DL Bit Marker
1.544 Mbit Interface
1)
only falling trigger edge shown, depending on Bit SIC3.RESR
ITD10949
Figure 51
Receive System Interface Clocking
Semiconductor Group
230
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
SYPR
SCLKR
T
TS31
TS0
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
3 4 5 6 7
F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2
RDO
FS/DL-Channel
IDLE-Channel
RSIG
A B C D
F
A B C D
A B C D
A B C D
T
F
= Time-Slot Offset
= FS/DL-Bit
ABCD = Signaling Bits for Time-Slot 1-24
Time-Slot Mapping acc. Channel Translation Mode 0
ITT10519
Figure 52
2.048 MHz Receive Signaling Highway
125
µ
s
SYPR
SCLKR
T
TS0
TS1
TS23
F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F
RDO
A B C D F
A B C D
A B C D
A B C D F
RSIG
T
F
= Time-Slot Offset
= FS/DL-Bit
ABCD = Signaling Bits for Time-Slot 1-24
ITT10521
Figure 53
1.544 MHz Receive Signaling Highway
Semiconductor Group
231
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Time-Slot Assigner
The QuadFALC offers the flexibility to connect data during certain time-slots, as defined
by registers RTR1-4 and TTR1-4, to the RFIFO and XFIFO, respectively. Any
combinations of time-slots can be programmed for the receive and transmit directions. If
CCR1.EITS = 1 the selected time-slots (RTR1-4) will be stored in the RFIFO of the
signaling controller and the XFIFO contents will be inserted into the transmit path as
controlled by registers TTR1-4.
Table 19
Time-Slot Assigner
Time-Slots
Receive Time-Slot
Register
Transmit Time-Slot
Register
RTR1.7
RTR1.6
RTR1.5
RTR1.4
RTR1.3
RTR1.2
RTR1.1
RTR1.0
RTR2.7
RTR2.6
RTR2.5
RTR2.4
RTR2.3
RTR2.2
RTR2.1
RTR2.0
RTR3.7
RTR3.6
RTR3.5
RTR3.4
RTR3.3
RTR3.2
RTR3.1
TTR1.7
TTR1.6
TTR1.5
TTR1.4
TTR1.3
TTR1.2
TTR1.1
TTR1.0
TTR2.7
TTR2.6
TTR2.5
TTR2.4
TTR2.3
TTR2.2
TTR2.1
TTR2.0
TTR3.7
TTR3.6
TTR3.5
TTR3.4
TTR3.3
TTR3.2
TTR3.1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Semiconductor Group
232
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Table 19
Time-Slot Assigner <NotBold> (cont’d)
Time-Slots
Receive Time-Slot
Register
Transmit Time-Slot
Register
TTR3.0
TTR4.7
TTR4.6
TTR4.5
TTR4.4
TTR4.3
TTR4.2
TTR4.1
TTR4.0
RTR3.0
RTR4.7
RTR4.6
RTR4.5
RTR4.4
RTR4.3
RTR4.2
RTR4.1
RTR4.0
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
The format for receive FS/DL data transmission in time-slot 0 via the system interface is
as shown in figure below. In order to get an undisturbed receiption even in the
asynchronous state bit FMR2.DAIS has to be set.
FS/DL Time-Slot
MSB
1
LSB
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
FS/DL
FS/DL Data Bit
ITD06460
Figure 54
Receive FS/DL Bits in Time-Slot 0 on RDO
Semiconductor Group
233
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
7.6
Transmit Path
Compared to the receive paths the inverse functions are performed for the transmit
direction.
The interface to the transmit system highway is realized by two data buses, one for the
data XDI and one for the signaling data XSIG. The time-slot assignment is equivalent to
the receive direction. All unequipped (idle) time-slots will be ignored.
Latching of data is controlled by the System Clock (SCLKX or SCLKR) and the
Synchronous Pulse (SYPX / XMFS) in conjunction with the programmed offset values for
the Transmit Time-slot/Clock-slot Counters XC1/0. The frequency of the working clock
2.048 / 4.096 / 8.192 / 16.384 MHz or 1.544 / 3.088 / 6.176 / 12.352 MHz for the transmit
system interface is programmable by SIC1.SSC1/0 and SIC2.SSC2. Refer also table 18
The received bit stream on ports XDI and XSIG could be multiplexed internally on a
time-slot basis, if enabled by SIC3.TTRF = 1. The data received at port XSIG could be
sampled if the transmit signaling marker XSIGM is active high. Data at port XDI will be
sampled if XSIGM is low for the respective time-slot. Programming the XSIGM marker is
done with registers TTR1-4.
Semiconductor Group
234
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
FRAME1
FRAME2
FRAME3
FRAME12
FRAME1
FRAME2
FRAME3
XDI
XMFB
XMFS
SYPX
Bit 0 Sample Edge 1)
Trigger Edge 1)
SYPX
T 2)
SCLKX
XSIGM
Time Slot Marker
FDL
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
XDI
DLX
DL Bit Marker
1) only falling edge mode shown
2) delay T is programmable by XC0/1;
Transmit Clocking T1 1.5 MHz Rev.1.0
Figure 55
Transmit System Interface Clocking: 1.544 MHz
Semiconductor Group
235
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
FRAME1
FRAME2
FRAME3
FRAME12
FRAME1
FRAME2
FRAME3
XDI
XMFS
SYPX
Bit 0 Sample Edge 1)
Trigger Edge 1)
SYPX
T 2)
SCLKX
XSIGM
Time-Slot Marker
XTR1...4
SIC2.SICS2-0=000(001)
XDI/XSIG
SIC2.SICS2-0=000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
XDI/XSIG
SIC2.SICS2-0=001
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DLX
DL-Bit Marker
SIC2.SICS2-0=000
DLX
DL-Bit Marker
SIC2.SICS2-0=001
1) only falling edge mode shown
2) delay T is programmable by XC0/1;
Transmit Clocking T1 8MHz Rev.1.0
Figure 56
Transmit System Interface Clocking: 8.192 MHz and 4.096 MBit/s
Semiconductor Group
236
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
SYPX
SCLKX
T
TS31
TS0
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
3 4 5 6 7
F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2
XDI
FS/DL-Channel
IDLE-Channel
XSIG
A B C D
F
A B C D
A B C D
A B C D
T
F
= Time-Slot Offset
= FS/DL-Bit
ABCD = Signaling Bits for Time-Slot 1-24
Time-Slot Mapping acc. Channel Translation Mode 0
ITT10520
Figure 57
2.048 MHz Transmit Signaling Clocking
125
µ
s
SYPX
SCLKX
T
TS0
TS1
TS23
F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F
XDI
A B C D F
A B C D
A B C D
A B C D F
XSIG
T
= Time-Slot Offset
F
= FS/DL-Bit
ABCD = Signaling Bits for Time-Slot 1-24
ITT10522
Figure 58
1.544 MHz Transmit Signaling Highway
Semiconductor Group
237
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Multiframe n (e.g. F12)
Frame 3
Frame 1
Frame 2
Frame 12
RD0
XDI
RMFB
XMFB
Signals in channel translation mode 0
FS/
DL
FS/
DL
RD0
XDI
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19 20
21
22
23
24
RSIGM1)
XSIGM
Signals in channel translation mode 1
FS/
DL
FS/
DL
RD0
XDI
1
2
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1
RSIGM1)
XSIGM
1)
RSIGM and XSIGM are programed via registers RTR1... 4 / TTR1... 4 to mark only
channel 24
ITD06462
Figure 59
Signaling Marker for CCS/CAS-CC Applications
Semiconductor Group
238
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Multiframe n (e.g.F12)
Frame 6
Frame 1
Frame 2
Frame 12
RD0
XDI
RMFB
XMFB
Signals in channel translation mode 0
FS/
DL
FS/
DL
RD0
XDI
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19 20
21
22
23
24
Signals in frames 6 and 12 of each multiframe
RSIGM1)
XSIGM
Signals in channel translation mode 1
FS/
DL
FS/
DL
RD0
XDI
1
2
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1
Signals in frames 6 and 12 of each multiframe
RSIGM1)
XSIGM
1)
RSIGM and XSIGM will mark the robbed bit positions if XCO.BRM is set high
ITD06463
Figure 60
Signaling Marker for CAS-BR Applications
Semiconductor Group
239
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Transmit Direction
FS/DL data on system transmit highway (XDI), time-slot 0.
FS/DL Time-Slot
MSB
LSB
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
FS/DL
FS/DL Data Bit
ITD06460
Figure 61
Transmit FS/DL Bits on XDI
Transmit Signaling Controller
Similar to the receive signaling controller the same signaling methods and the same
time-slot assignment are provided. The QuadFALC will perform the following signaling
and data link methods:
• HDLC or LAPD access
The transmit signaling controller of the QuadFALC performs the FLAG generation,
CRC generation, zero bit-stuffing and programmable IDLE code generation. Buffering
of transmit data is done in the 64 byte deep XFIFO. The signaling information will be
internally multiplexed with the data applied to port XDI or XSIG.
In signaling controller transparent mode, fully transparent data transmission without
HDLC framing is performed. Optionally the QuadFALC supports the continuous
transmission of the XFIFO contents.
Operating in HDLC or BOM mode “flags” or “idle” may be transmitted as interframe
timefill. The QuadFALC offers the flexibility to insert data during certain time-slots. Any
combinations of time-slots may be programmed separately for the receive and
transmit directions.
• CAS Bit Robbing
The signaling controller inserts the bit stream either on the transmit line side or if
external signaling is enabled on the transmit system side. Signaling data may be
sourced internally from registers XS1-12 or externally at port XSIG, which is selected
by register PC1-4.
In external signaling mode the signaling data is sampled with the working clock of the
transmit system interface (SCLKX) in conjunction with the transmit synchronous pulse
(SYPX). Data on XSIG will be latched in the bit positions 5-8 per time-slot, bits 1-4 will
Semiconductor Group
240
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
be ignored. The FS/DL bit is sampled on port XSIG and inserted in the outgoing data
stream. The received CAS multiframe will be inserted frame aligned into the data
stream on XDI. Data sourced by the internal signaling controller will overwrite the
external signaling data.
Internal multiplexing of data and signaling data may be disabled on a per time-slot
basis (Clear Channel Capability). This is also valid when using the internal and
external signaling mode.
• Data Link Access in ESF and F72 Format
The DL-channel protocol is supported as follows:
- access is done on a multiframe basis via registers XDL1-3 or
- HDLC access or transparent transmission (non HDLC mode) from XFIFO
the signaling information stored in the XFIFO will inserted in the DL bits of frame 26 to
72 in F72 format or in every other frame in ESF format. Transmitting may be done on
a multiframe boundary. Operating in HDLC or BOM mode “flags” or “idle” may be
transmitted as interframe timefill.
Transmit Elastic Buffer
The transmit elastic store with a size of max. 2 × 193 bit (two -frames) serves as a
temporary store for the PCM data to adapt the system clock (SCLKX) to the internally
generated clock for the transmit data, and to re-translate time-slot structure used in the
system to that of the line side. Its optimal start position is initiated when programming the
transmit time-slot offset values. A difference in the effective data rates of system side
and transmit side may lead to an overflow/underflow of the transmit memory: thus, errors
in data transmission to the remote end may occur. This error condition (transmit slip) is
reported to the microprocessor via interrupt status registers.
The received bit stream from pin XDI is optionally stored in the transmit elastic buffer.
The memory is organized as the receive elastic buffer. Programming of the transmit
buffer size is done by SIC1.XBS1/0 :
• XBS1/0 = 00 : bypass of the transmit elastic buffer
• XBS1/0 = 01 : one frame buffer or 193 bits
Maximum of wander amplitude (peak-to-peak): (1 UI = 648 ns )
System interface clocking rate: modulo 2.048 MHz:
Max. wander : 80 UI in channel translation mode 0
Max. wander : 50 UI in channel translation mode 1
System interface clocking rate: modulo 1.544 MHz:
max. wander: 74 UI
average delay after performing a slip: 96 bits
• XBS1/0 = 10 : two frame buffer or 386 bits
System interface clocking rate: modulo 2.048 MHz:
142 UI in channel translation mode 0
78 UI in channel translation mode 1
Semiconductor Group
241
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
System interface clocking rate: modulo 1.544 MHz:
max. wander: 126 UI
average delay after performing a slip: 193 bits
• XBS1/0 = 11 : short buffer or 96 bits :
System interface clocking rate: modulo 2.048 MHz:
Max. wander : 28 UI in channel translation mode 0; channel translation mode 1 not
supported
System interface clocking rate: modulo 1.544 MHz:
max. wander: 38 UI
average delay after performing a slip: 48 bits
The functions of the transmit buffer are:
• Clock adaption between system clock (SCLKX/R) and internally generated transmit
route clock (XCLK) or externally sourced TCLK.
• Compensation of input wander and jitter.
• Frame alignment between system frame and transmit route frame
• Reporting and controlling of slips
Writing of received data from XDI is controlled by SCLKX/R and SYPX / XMFS in
conjunction with the programmed offset values for the transmit time-slot/clock-slot
counters. Reading of stored data is controlled by the clock generated by DCO-X
circuitry or the externally generated TCLK and the transmit framer. With the dejittered
clock data is read from the transmit elastic buffer and are forwarded to the transmitter.
Reporting and controlling of slips is automatically done according to the receive
direction. Positive / negative slips are reported in interrupt status bits ISR4.XSP and
ISR4.XSN.
A re-initialization of the transmit memory is done by re-programming the transmit
time-slot counter XC1 and with the next SYPX pulse. After that, this memory has its
optimal start position.
The frequency of the working clock for the transmit system interface is programmable by
SIC1.SSC1/0 and SIC2.SSC2 in a range of 1.544 ... 12.352 MHz / 2.048 ... 16.384 MHz.
Generally the data or marker on the system interface are clocked off or latched on the
rising or falling edge (SIC3.SPS) of the SCLKX clock. Some clocking rates allow
transmitting of time-slots / marker in different channel- phases. Each channel-phase
which should be latched on ports XDI and XP(A-D) is programmable by bits
SIC2.SICS2-0 , the remaining channel-phases are cleared resp. ignored
The following table gives an overview of the transmit buffer operating modes.
Buffer Size
TS Offset program.
Slip perform.
bypass
enabled
no
Semiconductor Group
242
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Buffer Size
short buffer
1 frame
TS Offset program.
disabled
Slip perform.
yes
yes
yes
enabled
2 frames
enabled
Transmitter
The serial bit stream is then processed by the transmitter which has the following
functions:
• Frame/multiframe synthesis of one of the four selectable framing formats
• Insertion of service and data link information
• AIS generation (Blue Alarm)
• Remote alarm (yellow alarm) generation
• CRC generation and insertion of CRC bits
CRC bits inversion in case of a previously received CRC error or in case of activating
per control bit
• Generation of Loop Up/Down code
• IDLE code generation per DS0
The frame / multiframe boundries of the transmitter may be externally synchronized by
using the SYPX / XMFS pin. Any change of the transmit time-slot assignment will
subsequently produce a change of the framing bit positions on the line side. This feature
is required if signaling- and data link - bits are routed through the switching network and
are inserted in transmit direction via the system interface.
In loop-timed configuration (LIM2.ELT) disconnecting the control of the transmit system
highway from the transmitter is done by setting FMR5.XTM. The transmitter is now in a
free running mode without any possibility to actualize the multiframe position in case of
changing the transmit time-slot assignment. The FS/DL bits are generated independent
of the transmit system interface. For proper operation the transmit elastic buffer size
should be programmed to 2 frames.
The contents of selectable time-slots may be overwritten by the pattern defined via
register IDLE. The selection of “idle channels” is done by programming the three-byte
registers ICB1 … ICB3.
If AMI coding with zero code suppression (B7-stuffing) is selected, “clear channels”
without B7-stuffing can be defined by programming registers CCB1 … CCB3.
Semiconductor Group
243
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Transmit Line Interface
The analog transmitter transforms the unipolar bit stream to ternary (alternate bipolar)
return to zero signals of the appropriate programmable shape. The unipolar data is
provided by pin XDI and the digital transmitter.
Similar to the receive line interface three different data types are supported:
R1
XL1
FALC R
t1
t2
Line
R1
XL2
ITS10968
Figure 62
Transmitter Configuration
Table 20
Recommended Transmitter Configuration Values
Parameter
Characteristic Impedance 100 Ω
DS1
R1 (± 1 %) [Ω]
2
t2 : t1
1 : 2.4
• Ternary Signal
Single rail data is converted into a ternary signal which is output on pins XL1 and XL2.
Selection between B8ZS or simple AMI coding with zero code suppression (B7
stuffing) is provided. B7 stuffing may be disabled on a per time-slot basis (clear
channel capability). Selected by FMR0.XC1/0 and LIM1.DRS = 0.
• Dual rail data PCM(+), PCM(-) at multifunction ports XDOP and XDON with 50 % or
100 % duty cycle and with programmable polarity. Line coding is done in the same
way as in the ternary interface. Selected by FMR0.XC1=1 and LIM1.DRS = 1.
• Unipolar data on port XOID will be transmitted in NRZ (Non Return to Zero) with 100 %
duty cycle or in CMI code with or without (SIC3.CMI) preprocessed by B8ZS coding to
a fibre optical interface. Clocking off data is done with the rising edge of the transmit
clock XCLK (1544 kHz) and with a programmable polarity. Selection is done by
FMR0.XC1 = 0 and LIM1.DRS = 1.
Semiconductor Group
244
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Programmable Pulse Shaper and Line Build-Out
In long haul applications the transmit pulse masks are optionally generated according to
FCC68 and ANSI T1. 403. To reduce the crosstalk on the received signals the
QuadFALC offers the ability to place a transmit attenuator in the data path. Transmit
attenuation is selectable from 0 , -7.5, -15 or -22.5 dB (register LIM2.LBO2/1).
ANSI T1. 403 defines only 0 -15 dB.
The QuadFALC includes a programmable pulse shaper to satisfy the requirements of
ANSI T1. 102 , also various DS1, DSX-1 specifications are met. The amplitude of the
pulse shaper is individually programmable via the microprocessor interface to allow a
maximum of different pulse templates. The line length is selected by programming the
registers XPM2-0 as shown for typical values in the table below. The values with
transformer ratio: 1:2.4; cable: PULP 22AWG (100 Ω); serial resistors: 2 Ω. The XPM
register values are given in decimal.
Range in m
XP04-XP00
XP14-XP10
XP24-XP20
decimal
XP34-XP30
0 - 35
29
29
31
31
31
31
31
27
28
28
27
26
26
25
10
10
10
13
13
13
14
3
3
2
2
2
3
3
25 - 65
55 - 95
85 - 125
115 - 155
145 - 185
175 - 210
The transmitter requires an external step up transformer to drive the line.
Transmit Line Monitor
The transmit line monitor compares the transmit line current on XL1 and XL2 with an
on-chip transmit line current limiter. The monitor detects faults on the primary side of the
transformer indicated by a highly increased transmit line current (more than 120 mA for
at least 3 pulses) and protects the device from damage by setting the transmit line driver
XL1/2 automatically in a high impedance state. Two conditions will be detected by the
monitor: transmit line ones density (more than 31 consecutive zeros) indicated by
FRS1.XLO and transmit line high currrent indicated by FRS1.XLS. In both cases a
transmit line monitor status change interrupt will be provided.
Semiconductor Group
245
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Line
Monitor
TRI
XL1
XL2
Pulse
Shaper
XDATA
ITS10936
Figure 63
Transmit Line Monitor Configuration
Semiconductor Group
246
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
7.7
Framer Operating Modes T1 / J1
General
Activated with bit FMR1.PMOD = 1.
PCM line bit rate
Single frame length
Framing frequency
Organization
:
:
:
:
1.544 MBit/s
193 bit, No. 1 … 193
8 kHz
24 time-slots, No. 1 … 24
with 8 bits each, No. 1 … 8 and one preceding F bit
Selection of one of the four permissible framing formats is performed by bits
FMR4.FM1/0 . These formats are:
F4
:
:
:
:
4-frame multiframe
F12
ESF
F72
12-frame multiframe (D4)
Extended Superframe
72-frame multiframe (SLC96)
The operating mode of the QuadFALC is selected by programming the carrier data rate
and characteristics, line code, multiframe structure, and signaling scheme.
The QuadFALC implements all of the standard and/or common framing structures PCM
24 (T1, 1.544 MBit/s) carriers. The internal HDLC-Controller supports all signaling
procedures including signaling frame synchronization / synthesis in all framing formats.
After RESET, the QuadFALC must be programmed with FMR1.PMOD = 1 to enable the
T1(PCM24) mode. Switching between the framing formats is done via bit FMR4.FM1/0
for the receiver and for the transmitter.
General Aspects of Synchronization
Synchronization status is reported via bit FRS0.LFA (Loss Of Frame Alignment).
Framing errors (pulse frame and multiframe) are counted by the Framing Error Counter
FEC.
Asynchronous state is reached if
2 out of 4 (bit FMR4.SSC1/0 = 00), or
2 out of 5 (bit FMR4.SSC1/0 = 01), or
2 out of 6 (bit FMR4.SSC1/0 = 10), or
4 consecutive multiframe pattern in ESF format are incorrect (bit FMR4.SSC1/0 = 11).
framing bits (terminal framing or multiframing) are incorrect. If auto-mode is enabled,
counting of framing errors is interrupted.
The resynchronization procedure may be controlled by either one of the following
procedure:
Semiconductor Group
247
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
• Automatically (FMR4.AUTO = 1). Additionally, it may be triggered by the user by
setting/resetting one of the bits FMR0.FRS (Force Resynchronization) or FMR0.EXLS
(External Loss of Frame).
• User controlled, exclusively, via above control bits in the non-auto-mode
(FMR4.AUTO = 0).
Addition for F12 and F72 Format
FT and FS bit conditions, i.e. pulse frame alignment and multiframe alignment can be
handled separately if programmed via bit FMR2.SSP. Thus, a multiframe
re-synchronization can be automatically initiated after detecting 2 errors out of 4/5/6
consecutive multiframing bits without influencing the state of the terminal framing.
In the synchronous state, the setting of FMR0.FRS or FMR0.EXLS resets the
synchronizer and initiates a new frame search. The synchronous state is reached if there
is only one definite framing candidate. In the case of repeated apparent simulated
candidates, the synchronizer remains in the asynchronous state.
In asynchronous state, the function of FMR0.EXLS is the same as above. Setting bit
FMR0.FRS induces the synchronizer to lock onto the next available framing candidate if
there is one. Otherwise, a new frame search is started. This is useful in case the framing
pattern that defines the pulseframe position is imitated periodically by a pattern in one of
the speech/data channels.
The control bit FMR0.EXLS should be used first because it starts the synchronizer to
search for a definite framing candidate.
To observe actions of the synchronizer, the Frame Search Restart Flag FRS0.FSRF is
implemented. It toggles at the start of a new frame search if no candidate has been found
at previous attempt.
When resynchronization is initiated, the following values apply for the time required to
achieve the synchronous state in case there is one definite framing candidate within the
data stream:
Table 21
Resynchronization Timing
Frame Mode
Avg.
Max.
Units
F4
1.0
3.5
3.4
13.0
1.5
4.5
6.125
17.75
ms
F12
ESF
F72
Semiconductor Group
248
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Auto-Mode
Non-Auto-Mode
Definite Candidate
Definite Candidate
EXLS
EXLS, FRS
FRS
DON
DON
DOFF
DOFF
EXLS, FRS
Multiple Candidates
EXLS, FRS
FRS
Multiple Candidates
EXLS, FRS
FRS
DON
DON
DOFF
DOFF
1)
EXLS
FRS
EXLS
FRS
1)
: Depends on the Disturbance
ITD03574
D : One Disturbance
Figure 64
Influences on Synchronization Status
Semiconductor Group
249
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Figure 64 gives an overview of influences on synchronization status for the case of
different external actions. Activation of auto-mode and non-auto mode is performed via
bit FMR4.AUTO. Generally, for initiating resynchronization it is recommended to use bit:
FMR0.EXLS first. In case where the synchronizer remains in the asynchronous state, bit
FMR0.FRS may be used to enforce it to lock onto the next framing candidate, although
it might be a simulated one.
7.7.1
4-Frame Multiframe
The allocation of the FT bits (bit 1 of frames 1 and 3) for frame alignment signal is shown
in table 22.
The FS bit may be used for signaling.
Remote alarm (yellow alarm) is indicated by setting bit 2 to ‘0’ in each time-slot.
Table 22
4-Frame Multiframe Structure
Frame Number
FT
FS
1
2
3
4
1
–
0
–
Service bit
Service bit
Synchronization Procedure
For multiframe synchronization, the terminal framing bits (FT bits) are observed. The
synchronous state is reached if at least one terminal framing candidate is definitely
found, or the synchronizer is forced to lock onto the next available candidate
(FMR0.FRS).
7.7.2
12-Frame Multiframe (D4 or SF Format)
Normally, this kind of multiframe structure only makes sense when using the
CAS Robbed Bit Signaling. The multiframe alignment signal is located at the FS-bit
position of every other frame (refer to table 23).
There are two possibilities of remote alarm (yellow alarm) indication:
• Bit 2 = 0 in each time-slot of a frame, selected with bit FMR0.SRAF = 0
• The last bit of the multiframe alignment signal (bit 1 of frame 12) changes from ‘0’ to
‘1’, selected with bit FMR0.SRAF = 1.
Synchronization Procedure
In the synchronous state terminal framing (FT bits) and multiframing (FS bits) are
observed, independently. Further reaction on framing errors depends on the selected
sync/resync procedure (via bit FMR2.SSP):
Semiconductor Group
250
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
• FMR2.SSP = ‘0’: terminal frame and multiframe synchronization are combined.
Two errors within 4/5/6 framing bits (via bits FMR4.SSC1/0) of one of the above will
lead to the asynchronous state for terminal framing and multiframing. Additionally to
the bit FRS0.LFA, loss of multiframe alignment is reported via bit FRS0.LMFA.
The resynchronization procedure starts with synchronizing upon the terminal framing.
If the pulseframing has been regained, the search for multiframe alignment is initiated.
Multiframe synchronization has been regained after two consecutive correct
multiframe patterns have been received.
• FMR2.SSP = ‘1’: terminal frame and multiframe synchronization are separated
Two errors within 4/5/6 terminal framing bits will lead to the same reaction as
described above for the “combined” mode.
Two errors within 4/5/6 multiframing bits will lead to the asynchronous state only for
the multiframing. Loss of multiframe alignment is reported via bit FRS0.LMFA. The
state of terminal framing is not influenced.
Now, the resynchronization procedure includes only the search for multiframe
alignment. Multiframe synchronization has been regained after two consecutive
correct multiframe patterns have been received.
Table 23
12-Frame Multiframe Structure
Frame Number
FT
FS
Signaling Channel
Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
–
0
–
1
–
0
–
1
–
0
–
–
0
–
0
–
1
–
1
–
1
–
0
A
B
9
10
11
12
Semiconductor Group
251
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
7.7.3
Extended Superframe ( F24, ESF Format)
The use of the first bit of each frame for the multiframe alignment word, the data link bits,
and the CRC bits is shown in table 24.
Table 24
Extended Superframe Structure
Multiframe
Frame Number
F Bits
Assignments
Signaling
Channel
Designation
Multiframe
Bit Number
FAS
DL
CRC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
193
386
579
772
965
–
–
–
0
–
–
–
0
–
–
–
1
–
–
–
0
–
–
–
1
–
–
–
1
m
–
m
–
m
–
m
–
m
–
m
–
m
–
m
–
m
–
m
–
m
–
m
–
–
e1
–
–
–
e2
–
–
–
e3
–
–
–
e4
–
–
–
e5
–
–
–
A
B
C
D
1158
1351
1544
1737
1930
2123
2316
2509
2702
2895
3088
3231
3474
3667
3860
4053
4246
4439
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
e6
–
–
Synchronization Procedures
For multiframe synchronization the FAS bits are observed. Synchronous state is reached
if at least one framing candidate is definitely found, or the synchronizer is forced to lock
onto the next available candidate (FMR0.FRS).
In the synchronous state the framing bits (FAS bits) are observed. The following
conditions selected by FMR4.SSC1/0 will lead to the asynchronous state:
Semiconductor Group
252
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
• two errors within 4/5/6 framing bits
• two or more erroneous framing bits within one ESF multiframe
• more than 320 CRC6 errors per second interval (FMR5.SSC2)
• 4 incorrect (1 out of 6) consecutive multiframes independent of CRC6 errors.
There are four multiframe synchronization modes selectable via FMR2.MCSP and
FMR2.SSP.
• FMR2.MCSP/SSP = 00 : In the synchronous state, the setting of FMR0.FRS or
FMR0.EXLS resets the synchronizer and initiates a new frame search. The
synchronous state will be reached again, if there is only one definite framing
candidate. In the case of repeated apparent simulated candidates, the synchronizer
remains in the asynchronous state.
In asynchronous state, setting bit FMR0.FRS induces the synchronizer to lock onto
the next available framing candidate if there is one. At the same time the internal
framing pattern memory will be cleared and other possible framing candidates are
lost.
• FMR2.MCSP/SSP = 01: Synchronization is achieved when 3 consecutive multiframe
pattern are correctly found independent of the occurence of CRC6 errors. If only one
or two consecutive multiframe pattern were detected the QuadFALC will stay in the
asynchronous state, searching for a possible additionally available framing pattern.
This procedure will be repeated until the framer has found three consecutive
multiframe pattern in a row.
• FMR2.MCSP/SSP = 10: This mode has been added in order to be able to choose
multiple framing pattern candidates step by step. I.e. if in synchronous state the CRC
error counter indicates that the synchronization might have been based on an alias
framing pattern, setting of FMR0.FRS will lead to synchronization on the next
candidate available. However, only the previously assumed candidate will discarded
in the internal framing pattern memory. The latter procedure can be repeated until the
framer has locked on the right pattern (no extensive CRC errors).
The synchronizer will be completely reset and initiates a new frame search, if there is
no multiframing found. In this case bit FSR0.FSRF toggles.
• FMR2.MCSP/SSP = 11: Synchronization including automatic CRC6 checking
Synchronization is achieved when framing pattern are correctly found and the CRC6
checksum is received without an error. If the CRC6 check failed on the assumed
framing pattern the QuadFALC will stay in the asynchronous state, searching for a
possible available framing pattern. This procedure will be repeated until the framer
has locked on the right pattern. This automatic synchronization mode has been added
in order to reduce the microprocessor load.
Semiconductor Group
253
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Remote Alarm (yellow alarm) Generation / Detection
Remote alarm (yellow alarm) is indicated by the periodical pattern ‘1111 1111 0000
0000 …’ in the DL bits. Remote alarm will be declared even in the presence of BER
1/1000. The alarm will be reset when the ‘yellow alarm pattern’ no longer is detected .
Depending on bit RC1.SJR the QuadFALC will generate and detect the Remote Alarm
according to JT G. 704. In the DL-bit position 16 continous „1“ are transmitted if
FMR0.SRAF=0 and FMR4.XRA=1.
CRC6 Generation and Checking
Generation and checking of CRC6 bits transmitted/received in the e1-e6 bit positions is
done according to ITU-T G.706. The CRC6 checking algorithm is enabled via bit
FMR1.CRC. If not enabled, all check bits in the transmit direction are set to ‘1’. In the
synchronous state received CRC6 errors are accumulated in a 16 bit error counter and
are additionally indicated by an interrupt status.
– CRC6 Inversion
If enabled by bit RC0.CRCI, all CRC bits of one outgoing extended multiframe are
automatically inverted in case a CRC error is flagged for the previous received
multiframe. Setting the bit RC0.XCRCI will invert the CRC bits before transmitted to the
distant end. This function is logically ored with RC0.CRCI.
– CRC6 Generation / Checking According to JT G. 706
Setting of RC1.SJR the QuadFALC will generate and check the CRC6 bits according to
JT G. 706. The CRC6 checksum is calculated including the FS/DL bits. In synchronous
state CRC6 errors will increment an error counter.
7.7.4
72-Frame Multiframe (SLC96 )
The 72-multiframe is an alternate use of the FS-bit pattern and is used for carrying data
link information. This is done by stealing some of redundant multiframing bits after the
transmission of the 12-bit framing header (refer to table 25). The position of A and B
signaling channels (robbed bit signaling) is defined by zero-to-one and one-to-zero
transitions of the FS bits and is continued when the FS bits are replaced by the data link
bits.
Remote Alarm (Yellow Alarm) is indicated by setting bit 2 to zero in each time-slot. An
additional use of the D bits for alarm indication is user defined and must be done
externally.
Semiconductor Group
254
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Synchronization Procedure
In the synchronous state terminal framing (FT bits) and multiframing (FS bits of the
framing header) are observed independently. Further reaction on framing errors
depends on the selected sync/resync procedure (via bit FMR2.SSP):
• FMR2.SSP = ‘0’: terminal frame and multiframe synchronization are combined
Two errors within 4/5/6 framing bits (via bits FMR4.SSC1/0) of one of the above will
lead to the asynchronous state for terminal framing and multiframing. Additionally to
the bit FRS0.LFA, loss of multiframe alignment is reported via bit FRS0.LMFA.
The resynchronization procedure starts with synchronizing upon the terminal framing.
If the pulseframing has been regained, the search for multiframe alignment is initiated.
Multiframe synchronization has been regained after two consecutive correct
multiframe patterns have been received.
• FMR2.SSP = ‘1’: terminal frame and multiframe synchronization are separated
Two errors within 4/5/6 terminal framing bits will lead to the same reaction as
described above for the “combined” mode.
Two errors within 4/5/6 multiframing bits will lead to the asynchronous state only for
the multiframing. Loss of multiframe alignment is reported via bit FRS0.LMFA. The
state of terminal framing is not influenced.
Now, the resynchronization procedure includes only the search for multiframe
alignment. Multiframe synchronization has been regained after two consecutive
correct multiframe patterns have been received.
Semiconductor Group
255
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Table 25
72-Frame Multiframe Structure
Frame Number
FT
FS
Signaling Channel
Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
–
0
–
1
–
0
–
1
–
0
–
–
0
–
0
–
1
–
1
–
1
–
0
A
B
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
–
0
–
1
–
0
–
1
–
0
–
–
0
–
0
–
1
–
1
–
1
–
D
A
B
25
26
27
28
·
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
1
–
·
–
D
·
·
·
1
–
0
–
1
–
0
–
–
D
–
D
–
D
–
0
A
B
Semiconductor Group
256
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Table 26
Summary Frame Recover / Out of Frame Conditions
Format
Frame Recover Condition
Out of Frame Condition
F4
only one FT pattern found, optional 2 out of 4/5/6 incorrect FT bits
forcing on next available FT framing
candidate
F12 (D4)
and
FMR2.SSP = 0:
Combined FT + FS framing search: incorrect FT or FS bits
First searching for FT pattern with FMR2.SSP= 1 :
FMR2.SSP=0 : 2 out of 4/5/6
optional forcing on next available fr. 2 out of 4/5/6 incorrect FT bits will
F72 (SLC96)
candidates and then for 2
search FT and FS framing bits,
2 out of 4/5/6 incorrect FS bits
will search only the FS framing.
consecutive correct FS pattern1).
FMR2.SSP = 1:
Separated FT + FS pattern search:
Loss of FT framing will start first
searching for FT and then for 2
consecutive correct FS pattern1).
Loss of FS framing will start only the
FS pattern1). search.
F24 (ESF)
FMR2.MCSP/SSP = 00:
2 out of 4/5 incorrect FAS bits
only one FAS pattern found,
optional forcing on next available
FAS framing candidate with
or
2 out of 6 incorrect FAS bits per
multiframe
discarding of all remaining fr. cand. or
FMR2.MCSP/SSP = 01:
4 consecutive incorrect
3 consecutive correct multiframing multiframing pattern
found independent of CRC6 errors. or
FMR2.MCSP/SSP = 10:
more than 320 CRC6 errors per
second interval
choosing multiple framing pattern
step by step, optional forcing on
next available FAS framing pattern
with discarding only of the previous
assumed framing candidate.
FMR2.MCSP/SSP = 11:
FAS framing correctly found and
CRC6 check error free.
1) In F12 (D4) format bit 1 in frame 12 is excluded fromthe synchronization process.
Semiconductor Group
257
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
7.7.5
Additional Functions
Error performance monitoring and alarm handling
• Alarm detection and generation
Alarm Indication Signal: Detection and recovery is flagged by bit FRS0.AIS and
ISR2.AIS. Transmission is enabled via bit FMR1.XAIS.
Loss of Signal: Detection and recovery is flagged by bit FRS0.LOS and ISR2.LOS.
Remote Alarm Indication: Detection and release is flagged by bit FRS0.RRA and
ISR2.RA/RAR. Transmission is enabled via bit FMR4.XRA.
Excessive Zeros: Detection is flagged by bit FRS1.EXZD.
Pulse Density Violation: Detection is flagged by bit FRS1.PDEN and ISR0.PDEN.
Transmit Line Shorted: Detection and release is flagged by bit FRS1.XLS and
ISR1.XLSC.
Transmit Ones Density: Detection and release is flagged by bit FRS1.XLO and
ISR1.XLSC.
Table 27
Summary of Alarm Detection and Release
Alarm
Detection Condition
Clear Condition
Red Alarm or
Loss of Signal
(LOS)
no transitions (logical zeros) in a programmable number of ones
programmable time interval of 16 (1-256) in a programmble time
- 4096 consecutive pulse
interval of 16 - 4096 consecutive
periods. Programmable receive pulse periods. A one is a signal
input signal threshold
with a level above the
programmed threshold.
or
the pulse density is fulfilled and
no more than 15 contiguous
zeros during the recovery
interval are detected.
Blue Alarm or
FMR4.AIS3 = 0:
active for at least one multiframe.
Alarm Indication less than 3 zeros in 12 frames or FMR4.AIS3 = 0:
Signal (AIS)
24 frames (ESF),
more than 2 zeros in 12 or 24
frames (ESF),
FMR4.AIS3 = 1:
FMR4.AIS3 = 1:
less than 4 zeros in 12 frames or more than 3 zeros in 12 frames
less than 6 zeros in 24 frames
(ESF)
or more than 5 zeros in 24
frames (ESF)
Semiconductor Group
258
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Clear Condition
Alarm
Detection Condition
Yellow Alarm or
Remote Alarm
(RRA)
RC1.RRAM = 0:
bit 2 = 0 in 255 consecutive
time-slots or
RC1.RRAM = 0:
set conditions no longer
detected.
FS bit = 1 of frame12 in F12 (D4)
format or
RC1.RRAM = 1:
8x1,8x0 in the DL channel (ESF ) bit 2 = 0 not detected in 3
RC1.RRAM = 1:
bit 2 = 0 in every time-slot per
frame or
consecutive frames or
FS bit not detected in 3
consecutive mulitframes or
FS bit = 1 of frame12 in F12 (D4) 8x1,8x0 not detected for 3 times
format or
in a row (ESF).
8x1,8x0 in the DL channel (ESF )
Excessive Zeros more than 7 (B8ZS code) or
Latched Status: cleared on read
(EXZD)
more than 15 (AMI code)
contiguous zeros
Pulse Density
Violation
(PDEN)
less than 23 ones received in a Latched Status: cleared on read
floating time window of 192 bits
or
more than 14 consecutive zeros
Transmit Line
Short
(XLS)
more than 32 pulse periods with no transmit line current limiter
highly increased transmit line
current on XL1/2
active
Transmit Ones
Density
32 consecutive zeros in the
transmit data stream on XL1/2
Cleared with each transmitted
pulse
(XLO)
RRA detection operates in the presence of 10exp(-3) bit error rate.
– Auto modes
- Automatic remote alarm (Yellow Alarm) access
If the receiver has lost its synchronization (FRS0.LFA) a remote alarm (yellow
alarm) could be sent automatically, if enabled by bit FMR2.AXRA to the distant end.
In synchronous state the remote alarm bit will be removed.
- Automatic AIS to system interface
In asynchronous state the synchronizer enforces automatically an AIS to the
receive system interface. However, received data may be transparently switched
through if bit FMR2.DAIS is set.
- Automatic clock source switching
In Slave mode (LIM0.MAS = 0) the DCO-R will synchronize to the recovered route
Semiconductor Group
259
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
clock. In case of Loss of Signal LOS the DCO-R switches automatically to Master
mode. If bit CMR1.DCS is set automatic switching from RCLK to SYNC can be
disabled.
- Automatic freeze signaling:
Updating of the received signaling information is controlled by the freeze signaling
status. The freeze signaling status is automatically activated if a Loss of Signal, or
a Loss of Multiframe Alignment or a receive slip occures. The internal signaling
buffer RS1-12 is froozen. Optionally automatic freeze signaling may be disabled by
setting bit SIC3.DAF.
• Error counter
The QuadFALC offers six error counters each of them has a length of 16 bit. They
record code violations, framing bit errors, CRC6 bit errors, errored blocks and the
number of received multiframes in the asynchronous state or the changes of frame
alignment (COFA). Counting of the multiframes in the asyn. state and the COFA
parameter is done in a 6 / 2 bit counter. Each of the error counter is buffered. Updating
the buffer is done in two modes:
- one second accumulation
- on demand via handshake with writing to the DEC register
In the one second mode an internal/external one second timer will update these
buffers and reset the counter to accumulate the error events in the next one second
period. The error counter can not overflow. Error events occuring during reset will not
lost.
• Status : errored second
The QuadFALC supports the error performance monitoring by detecting the following
alarms or error events in the received data:
framing errors , CRC errors , code violations , loss of frame alignment , loss of signal,
alarm indication signal , receive and transmit slips.
With a programmable interrupt mask register ESM all these alarms or error events
could generate an Errored Second interrupt (ISR3.ES) if enabled.
• Second timer
Additionally per channel a one second timer interrupt could be internally generated to
indicate that the enabled alarm status bits or the error counters have to be checked.
Enabled by GPC1.FSS2-0 the one second timer of the selected channel may be
output on port SEC/FSC (GPC1.CSFP1/0). Optionally if all four channels of the
QuadFALC should synchronized to an external second timer an appropriate clock has
to be provided to pin SEC/FSC. Selecting the external second timer is done with
GCR.SES. Refer also to register GPC1.
Clear Channel Capability
For support of common T1 applications, clear channels can be specified via the 3-byte
register bank CCB1 … CCB3. In this mode the contents of selected transmit time-slots
Semiconductor Group
260
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
will not be overwritten by internal or external sourced bit robbing and Zero Code
Suppression (B7 stuffing) information.
In-Band Loop Generation and Detection
The QuadFALC generates and detects a framed or unframed in-band loop up/actuate
(00001) - and down/deactuate (001) pattern according to ANSI T1. 403 with bit error
rates as high as 1/100. Framed or unframed in-band loop code is selected by
LCR1.FLLB . Replacing the in-band loop codes with transmit data is done by FMR5.XLD
/ XLU.
The QuadFALC also offers the ability generating and detecting of a flexible in-band loop
up - and down pattern (LCR1.LLBP = 1). The loop up and loop down pattern is individual
programmable from 2 to 8 bit in length (LCR1.LAC1/0 and LCR1.LDC1/0). Programming
of loop codes is done in registers LCR2 and LCR3.
Status and interrupt-status bits will inform the user whether loop up - or loop down code
was detected.
Transparent Mode
The transparent modes are useful for loopbacks or for routing data unchanged through
the QuadFALC.
In receive direction, transparency for ternary or dual / single rail unipolar data is always
achieved if the receiver is in the synchronous state. All bits in F-bit position of the
incoming multiframe are forwarded to RDO and inserted in the FS/DL time-slot or in the
F-bit position. In asynchronous state the received data may be transparently switched
through if bit FMR2.DAIS is set. Setting of bit FMR2.RTM disconnects control of the
elastic buffer from the receiver. The elastic buffer is now in a “free running” mode without
any possibility to actualize the time slot assignment to a new frame position in case of
re-synchronization of the receiver. Together with FMR2.DAIS this function may be used
to realize undisturbed transparent reception.
Setting bit FMR4.TM switches the QuadFALC in transmit transparent mode:
In transmit direction bit 8 of the FS/DL time-slot from the system highway (XDI) is
inserted in the F-bit position of the outgoing frame. For complete transparency the
internal signaling controller, IDLE code generation, AIS alarm generation, single channel
and payload loop back has to be disabled and “Clear Channels” have to be defined via
registers CCB1…3.
Pulse Density Detection
The QuadFALC examines the receive data stream on the pulse density requirement
which is defined by ANSI T1. 403. More than 14 consecutive zeros or less than N ones
in each and every time window of 8(N+1) data bits where N=23 will be detected.
Semiconductor Group
261
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Violations of these rules are indicated by setting the status bit FRS1.PDEN and the
interrupt status bit ISR0.PDEN. Generation of the interrupt status may be programmed
either with the detection or with any change of state of the pulse density alarm
(GCR.SCI).
Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence Generation and Monitor
The QuadFALC has the added ability to generate and monitor a 215-1 and 220-1 pseudo-
random bit sequences (PRBS). The generated PRBS pattern will be transmitted
optionally inverted or not to the remote end via pins XL1/2 resp. XDOP/N. Generating
and monitoring of PRBS pattern is done according to ITU-T O. 151 and TR62411 with
maximum 14 consecutive zero restriction.
The PRBS monitor senses the PRBS pattern in the incoming data stream.
Synchronization is done on the inverted and non inverted PRBS pattern. The current
synchronization status is reported in status and interrupt status registers. Enabled by bit
LCR1.EPRM each PRBS bit error will increment an error counter (BEC).
Synchronization will be reached within 400 msec with a probability of 99.9% and a BER
of 1/10 (pattern defined by ITU-T O.151).
Semiconductor Group
262
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Payload Loopback
To perform an effective circuit test a line loop is implemented.
If the payload loopback (FMR2.PLB) is activated the received 192 bits of payload data
will be looped back to the transmit direction. The framing bits, CRC6 and DL bits are not
looped, if FMR4.TM = 0. They are originated by the QuadFALC transmitter. If the PLB is
enabled the transmitter and the data on pins XL1/XDOP and XL2/XDON are clocked with
the working clock of the receive system interface (SCLKR). If FMR4.TM= 1 the received
FS/DL bit is sent transparently back to the line interface. Following pins are ignored: XDI,
XSIG, TCLK, SCLKX, SYPX and XMFS. All the received data is processed normally.
With bit FMR2.SAIS an AIS could be sent to the system interface via pin RDO.
RCLK
AIS-GEN
MUX
Clock +
Data
Recovery
RL1
RL2
RDO
Rec.
Framer
Elast.
Store
SCLKR
XL1
XL2
XDI
Trans.
Framer
Elast.
Store
SCLKX
ITS09748
Figure 65
Payload Loop
Semiconductor Group
263
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Remote Loop
In the remote loopback mode the clock and data recovered from the line inputs RL1/2 or
RDIP/RDIN are routed back to the line outputs XL1/2 or XDOP/XDON via the analog or
digital transmitter. As in normal mode they are also processed by the synchronizer and
then sent to the system interface.The remote loopback mode is selected by setting the
respective control bits LIM1.RL+JATT. Received data may be looped with or without the
transmit jitter attenuator (FIFO).
RCLK
Clock +
Data
Recovery
RL1
RL2
Rec.
Framer
Elast.
Store
RDO
FIFO
MUX
MUX
XL1
XL2
Trans.
Framer
Elast.
Store
XDI
RCLK
XCLK
DCO1/2
ITS09750
Figure 66
Remote Loop
Semiconductor Group
264
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Local Loop
The local loopback mode, selected by LIM0.LL = 1, disconnects the receive lines RL1/2
or RDIP/RDIN from the receiver. Instead of the signals coming from the line the data
provided by system interface are routed through the analog receiver back to the system
interface. However, the bit stream will be undisturbed transmitted on the line. However
an AIS to the distant end could be enabled by setting FMR1.XAIS without influencing the
data looped back to the system interface.
Note that enabling the local loop will usually invoke an out of frame error until the receiver
can resync to the new framing. The serial code from the transmitter and receiver has to
be programmed identically.
RCLK
Clock +
Data
Recovery
RL1
RL2
Rec.
Framer
Elast.
Store
RDO
Trans.
Framer
Elast.
Store
MUX
XL1
XL2
XDI
AIS-GEN
ITS09749
Figure 67
Local Loop
Semiconductor Group
265
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Single Channel Loop (loopback of time-slots)
The channel loopback is selected via LOOP.ECLB = 1.
Each of the 24 time-slots may be selected for loopback from the system PCM input (XDI)
to the system PCM output (RDO). This loopback is programmed for one time-slot at a
time selected by register LOOP. During loopback, an idle channel code programmed in
register IDLE is transmitted to the remote end in the corresponding PCM route time-slot.
For the time-slot test, sending sequences of test patterns like a 1 kHz check signal
should be avoided. Otherwise, an increased occurrence of slips in the tested time-slot
will disturb testing. These slips do not influence the other time-slots and the function of
the receive memory. The usage of a quasi-static test pattern is recommended.
RCLK
Clock +
Data
Recovery
MUX
RL1
RL2
Rec.
Framer
Elast.
Store
RDO
MUX
XL1
XL2
Trans.
Framer
Elast.
Store
XDI
IDLE Code
ITS09747
Figure 68
Channel Loopback
Semiconductor Group
266
09.98
PEB 22554
Functional Description T1 / J1
Alarm Simulation
Alarm simulation does not affect the normal operation of the device, i.e. all time-slots
remain available for transmission. However, possible ‘real’ alarm conditions are not
reported to the processor or to the remote end when the device is in the alarm simulation
mode.
The alarm simulation is initiated by setting the bit FMR0.SIM. The following alarms are
simulated:
• Loss of Signal (red alarm)
• Alarm Indication Signal AIS (blue alarm)
• Loss of pulse frame
• Remote alarm (yellow alarm) indication
• Receive and transmit slip indication
• Framing error counter
• Code violation counter
• CRC6 error counter
Some of the above indications are only simulated if the QuadFALC is configured in a
mode where the alarm is applicable.
The alarm simulation is controlled by the value of the Alarm Simulation Counter:
FRS2.ESC which is incremented by setting bit: FMR0.SIM.
Clearing of alarm indications:
– Automatically for LOS, remote (yellow) alarm, AIS, and loss of synchronization and
– User controlled for slips by reading the corresponding interrupt status register ISR3.
– Error counter have to be cleared by reading the corresponding counter registers.
is only possible at defined counter steps of FRS2.ESC. For complete simulation
(FRS2.ESC = 0), eight simulation steps are necessary.
Semiconductor Group
267
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
8
Operational Description T1 / J1
8.1
Signaling Controller Operating Modes
The HDLC controller can be programmed to operate in various modes, which are
different in the treatment of the HDLC frame in receive direction. Thus, the receive data
flow and the address recognition features can be performed in a very flexible way, to
satisfy almost any practical requirements.
There are 4 different operating modes which can be set via the MODE register.
8.1.1
HDLC Mode
All frames with valid addresses are forwarded directly via the RFIFO to the system
memory.
Depending on the selected address mode, the QuadFALC can perform a 1 or 2 byte
address recognition (MODE.MDS0).
If a 2-byte address field is selected, the high address byte is compared with the fixed
value FEH or FCH (group address) as well as with two individually programmable values
in RAH1 and RAH2 registers. According to the ISDN LAPD protocol, bit 1 of the high byte
address will be interpreted as COMMAND/RESPONSE bit (C/R) and will be excluded
from the address comparison.
Similarly, two compare values can be programmed in special registers (RAL1, RAL2) for
the low address byte. A valid address will be recognized in case the high and low byte of
the address field correspond to one of the compare values. Thus, the QuadFALC can be
called (addressed) with 6 different address combinations. HDLC frames with address
fields that do not match any of the address combinations, are ignored by the FALC.
In case of a 1-byte address, RAL1 and RAL2 will be used as compare registers. The
HDLC control field, data in the I-field and an additional status byte are temporarily stored
in the RFIFO. Additional information can also be read from a special register (RSIS).
As defined by the HDLC protocol, the QuadFALC perform the zero bit insertion/deletion
(bit-stuffing) in the transmit/receive data stream automatically. That means, it is
guaranteed that at least after 5 consecutive “1”-s a “0” will appear.
Non-Auto-Mode (MODE.MDS2-1=01)
Characteristics: address recognition, FLAG - and CRC generation/check, bit-stuffing
All frames with valid addresses are forwarded directly via the RFIFO to the system
memory.
Transparent Mode 1 (MODE.MDS2-0=101)
Characteristics: address recognition, FLAG - and CRC generation/check, bit-stuffing
Semiconductor Group
268
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Only the high byte of a 2-byte address field will be compared with registers RAH1/2. The
whole frame excluding the first address byte will be stored in RFIFO.
Transparent Mode 0 (MODE.MDS2-0=100)
Characteristics: FLAG - and CRC generation/check, bit-stuffing
No address recognition is performed and each frame will be stored in the RFIFO.
Receive Data Flow
The following figure gives an overview of the management of the received HDLC frames
in the different operating modes.
Ι
FLAG
ADDR
CTRL
CRC
FLAG
1)
1)
RAH1, 2
RAL1, 2
2)
MODE
0
.MDS2 - 0
RFIFO
RFIFO
RFIFO
RFIFO
Non
Auto/16
2)
1
1
0
1
0
RSIS
RSIS
RSIS
RSIS
X
RAL1, 2
2)
Non
Auto/8
0
1
1
1
RAH1, 2
2)
0
0
Transparent 1
Transparent 0
1)
ITD06455
Description of Symbols:
Compared with (register)
Note: In case of on 8 Bit Address,
the Control Field starts here!
Processed autonomously
1)
CRC optionally stored in RFIFO
if CCR3 RCRC = "1".
.
Stored (FIFO, register)
2)
Address optionally stored in RFIFO
if CCR3.RADD = "1".
Figure 69
Receive Data Flow of QuadFALC
Semiconductor Group
269
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Transmit Data Flow
The frames can be transmitted as shown below.
Ι
FLAG
ADDR
CTRL
CRC
FLAG
ADDRESS
CONTROL
DATA
CHECKRAM
Transmit
HDLC
XFIFO
Frame
(XHF)
ITD06456
Figure 70
Transmit Data Flow of QuadFALC
Transmitting a HDLC frame via register CMDR.XTF, the address, the control fields and
the data field have to be entered in the XFIFO.
If CCR3.XCRC is set, the CRC checksum will not be generated internally. The checksum
has to be provided via the transmit FIFO (XFIFO) as the last two bytes. The transmitted
frame will be closed automatically only with a (closing) flag.
The QuadFALC does not check whether the length of the frame, i.e. the number of bytes
to be transmitted makes sense or not.
8.1.2
Extended Transparent Mode
Characteristics: fully transparent
In no HDLC mode, fully transparent data transmission/reception without HDLC framing
is performed, i.e. without FLAG generation/recognition, CRC generation/check, or
bit-stuffing. This feature can be profitably used e.g for:
• Specific protocol variations
• Transmission of a BOM frame
• Test purposes
Data transmission is always performed out of the XFIFO. In transparent mode, the
receive data is shifted into the RFIFO.
Semiconductor Group
270
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
8.1.3
Signaling Controller Functions
Shared Flags
The closing Flag of a previously transmitted frame simultaneously becomes the opening
Flag of the following frame if there is one to be transmitted. The Shared Flag feature is
enabled by setting bit SFLG in control register CCR1.
Transparent Transmission and Reception
When programmed in the extended transparent mode via the MODE register
(MDS2-0 = 111), the QuadFALC performs fully transparent data transmission and
reception without HDLC framing, i.e. without
• FLAG insertion and deletion
• CRC generation and checking
• Bit-stuffing
In order to enable fully transparent data transfer, bit MODE.HRAC has to be set.
Received data is always shifted into RFIFO.
Data transmission is always performed out of XFIFO by directly shifting the contents of
XFIFO in the outgoing datastream. Transmission is initiated by setting CMDR.XTF (04H).
A synch-byte FFH is automatically sent before the first byte of the XFIFO will be
transmitted.
Cyclic Transmission (fully transparent)
If the extended transparent mode is selected, the QuadFALC supports the continuous
transmission of the contents of the transmit FIFO.
After having written 1 to 32 bytes to XFIFO, the command XREP.XTF via the CMDR
register (bit 7 … 0 = ‘00100100’ = 24H) forces the QuadFALC to transmit the data stored
in XFIFO repeatedly to the remote end.
Note: The cyclic transmission continues until a reset command (CMDR: SRES) is issued
or with resetting CMDR.XREP, after which continuous ‘1’-s are transmitted.
During cyclic transmission the XREP-bit has to be set with every write operation to
CMDR.
CRC ON/OFF Features
As an option in HDLC mode the internal handling of received and transmitted CRC
checksum can be influenced via control bits CCR3.RCRC and CCR3.XCRC.
• Receive Direction
The received CRC checksum is always assumed to be in the 2 (CRC-ITU) last bytes
of a frame, immediately preceding a closing flag. If CCR3.RCRC is set, the received
CRC checksum will be written to RFIFO where it precedes the frame status byte
(contents of register RSIS). The received CRC checksum is additionally checked for
Semiconductor Group
271
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
correctness. If HDLC mode is selected, the limits for ‘Valid Frame’ check are modified
(refer to description of bit RSIS.VFR).
• Transmit Direction
If CCR3.XCRC is set, the CRC checksum is not generated internally. The checksum
has to be provided via the transmit FIFO (XFIFO) as the last two bytes. The
transmitted frame will only be closed automatically with a (closing) flag.
The QuadFALC does not check whether the length of the frame, i.e. the number of
bytes to be transmitted makes sense or not.
8.1.3.1 HDLC Data Transmission
In transmit direction 2x32 byte FIFO buffers are provided. After checking the XFIFO
status by polling the bit SIS.XFW or after an interrupt ISR1.XPR (Transmit Pool Ready),
up to 32 bytes may be entered by the CPU to the XFIFO.
The transmission of a frame can be started by issuing a XTF or XHF command via the
command register. If the transmit command does not include an end of message
indication (CMDR.XME), the QuadFALC will repeatedly request for the next data block
by means of a XPR interrupt as soon as no more than 32 bytes are stored in the XFIFO,
i.e. a 32-byte pool is accessible to the CPU.
This process will be repeated until the CPU indicates the end of message per XME
command, after which frame transmission is finished correctly by appending the CRC
and closing flag sequence. Consecutive frames may be share a flag, or may be
transmitted as back-to-back frames, if service of XFIFO is quick enough.
In case no more data is available in the XFIFO prior to the arrival of XME, the
transmission of the frame is terminated with an abort sequence and the CPU is notified
per interrupt ISR1.XDU. The frame may be aborted per software CMDR.SRES.
Semiconductor Group
272
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
The data transmission sequence, from the CPU’s point of view, is outlined in figure 71.
START
N
Transmit
Pool Ready
?
XPR Interrupt, or
XFW Bit in SIS Register = 1
Y
Write Data
(up to 32 bytes)
to XFIFO
Command
XTF/XHF
End of
Message
?
N
Y
Command
+
XTF/XHF XME
END
ITD08565
Figure 71
Interrupt Driven Data Transmission (flow diagram)
The activities at both serial and CPU interface during frame transmission (supposed
frame length = 70 bytes) is shown in figure 72.
Transmit Frame (70 bytes)
32
32
6
System
Interface
FALC R
CPU
Interface
XPR
XHF
Command
XHF
XPR
XHF + XME XPR
WR XFIFO
32 bytes
WR XFIFO
32 bytes
WR XFIFO
6 bytes
ALLS
ITD10971
Semiconductor Group
273
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Figure 72
Interrupt Driven Transmission Example
8.1.3.2 HDLC Data Reception
Also 2 × 32 byte FIFO buffers are provided in receive direction. There are different
interrupt indications concerned with the reception of data:
RPF (Receive Pool Full) interrupt, indicating that a 32-byte-block of data can be read
from RFIFO and the received message is not yet complete.
RME (Receive Message End) interrupt, indicating that the reception of one message is
completed.
The following figure 73 gives an example of a reception sequence, assuming that a
“long” frame (66 bytes) followed by two short frames (6 bytes each) are received.
Receive Frame 1 (66 bytes) RF2 RF3
2
6
6
32
32
System
Interface
FALC R
CPU
Interface
RD RFIFO
32 bytes
RD RFIFO
32 bytes
RMC
RPF
RMC
RME
RMC
RME
RMC
RME
RMC
RPF
ITD10972
Figure 73
Interrupt Driven Reception Sequence Example
8.1.4 Bit Oriented Message Mode
The QuadFALC supports signaling and maintenance functions for T1 - Primary Rate
Interfaces using the Extended Super Frame format. The device supports the DL-channel
protocol for ESF format according to T1.403-1989 ANSI or to AT&T TR54016
specification. The HDLC- and Bit Oriented Message (BOM) -Receiver can be switched
ON/OFF independently. If the QuadFALC is used for HDLC formats only, the BOM
receiver has to be switched off. If HDLC- and BOM-receiver has been switched on
Semiconductor Group
274
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
(MODE.HRAC/BRAC), an automatic switching between HDLC and BOM mode is
enabled. Storing of received DL bit information in the RFIFO of the signaling controller
and transmitting the XFIFO contents in the DL bit positions is enabled by
CCR1.EDLX/EITS = 10. After Reset or software-reset (CMDR.RRES) the QuadFALC
operates in HDLC mode. If eight or more consecutive ones are detected, the BOM mode
is entered. Upon detection of a flag in the data stream, the QuadFALC switches back to
HDLC-mode. Operating in BOM-mode, the QuadFALC may receive an HDLC frame
immediately, i.e. without any preceding flags.
In BOM-mode, the following byte format is assumed (the left most bit is received first).
111111110xxxxxx0
The QuadFALC uses the FFH byte for synchronization, the next byte is stored in RFIFO
(first bit received: LSB) if it starts and ends with a ‘0’. Bytes starting and ending with a ‘1’
are not stored. If there are no 8 consecutive one’s detected within 32 bits, an interrupt is
generated. However, byte sampling is not stopped.
Byte sampling in BOM Mode
a)
1111
1111 1111 0011 0100 1111 1111 0011 0100 1110 1111 0011 0100 1101 1111
sync
not stored
new sync
1.byte
stored
1.corrupted
sync
2.byte
stored
2.corrupted
sync
corrupted
sync
b)
1111
1111 0111 0110 1101 1111 0111 0110 1111 1111 0111 0110 0111 1111
sync
1.byte
stored
1.corrupted
byte
2.byte
stored
2.sync
3.byte
stored
3.corrupted
sync
Three different BOM reception modes may be programmed (CCR1.BRM, CCR2.RBFE).
10 byte packets: CCR1.BRM = 0
After storing 10 bytes in RFIFO the receive status byte marking a BOM frame
(RSIS.HFR) is added as the eleventh byte and an interrupt (ISR0.RME) is generated.
The sampling of data bytes continues and interrupts are generated every 10 bytes until
an HDLC flag is detected.
Semiconductor Group
275
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Continuous reception: CCR1.BRM = 1
Interrupts are generated every 32 (16, 4, 2) bytes. After detecting an HDLC flag, byte
sampling is stopped, the receive status byte is stored in RFIFO and an RME interrupt is
generated.
Receiption with enabled BOM filter: CCR2.RBFE = 1
The BOM-receiver will only accept BOM frames after detecting 7 out of 10 equal BOM
pattern. The BOM pattern is stored in the RFIFO adding a receive status byte, marking
a BOM frame (RSIS.HFR) and generating an interrupt status ISR0.RME. The current
state of the BOM receiver is indicated in register SIS.IVB. When the valid BOM pattern
disappears an interrupt ISR0.BIV is generated.
The user may switch between these modes at any time. Byte sampling may be stopped
by deactivating the BOM receiver (MODE.BRAC). In this case the receive status byte is
added, an interrupt is generated and HDLC-mode is entered. Whether the QuadFALC
operates in HDLC or BOM mode may be checked by reading the Signaling Status
Register (SIS.BOM).
8.1.5
4 Kbit/s Data Link Access in F72 Format
The QuadFALC supports the DL-channel protocol using the F72 (SLC96) format as
follows:
• Sampling of DL bits is done on a multiframe basis and stored in the registers RDL1-3.
A receive multiframe begin interrupt is provided to read the received data DL bits. The
contents of registers XDL1-3 is subsequently sent out on the transmit multiframe basis
if it is enabled via FMR1.EDL. A transmit multiframe begin interrupt requests for
writing new information to the DL-bit registers.
• If enabled via CCR1.EDLX/EITS=10 , the DL bit information from frame 26 to 72 is
stored in the Receive FIFO of the signaling controller.The DL bits stored in the XFIFO
are inserted in the outgoing datastream. If CCR1.EDLX is cleared, a HDLC- or a
transparent- frame could be sent or received via the RFIFO / XFIFO.
Semiconductor Group
276
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
8.2
Operational Phase
The QuadFALC is programmable via a microprocessor interface which enables byte or
word access to all control and status registers.
After RESET the QuadFALC has to be first initialized. General guidelines for initialization
are described in section Initialization.
The status registers are read-only and are continuously updated. Normally, the
processor periodically reads the status registers to analyze the alarm status and
signaling data.
Reset
The QuadFALC is forced to the reset state if a high signal is input at port RES for a
minimum period of 10 µs. During RESET the QuadFALC needs an active clock on pin
MCLK. All output stages are tri-stated, all internal flip-flops are reset and most of the
control registers are initialized with default values.
After Reset bit FMR1.PMOD has to be set high and the device needs up to 20 µsec to
settle up to the internal clocking. After FMR1.PMOD has been set the configuration
shown in table 28 is initialized.
Table 28
Configuration if Initialized after RESET
Register
Initiated
Value
Meaning
FMR0
00H
NRZ Coding, No alarm simulation.
FMR1
FMR2
00H
00H
PCM 24 mode, 2.048 MBit/s system data rate, no AIS
transmission to remote end or system interface, Payload
Loop off, Channel translation mode 0
SIC1
SIC2,
SIC3
00H
00H
00H
2.048 MHz system clocking rate, Rec. Buffer 2 Frames,
Transmit Buffer bypass, Data sampled or transmitted on
the falling edge of SCLKR/X, Automatic freeze signaling,
data is active in the first channel phase,
LOOP
00H
Channel loop back are disabled.
FMR4
FMR5
00H
00H
Remote alarm indication towards remote end disabled.
LFA condition: 2 out of 4/5/6 framing bits,
Non-auto-synchronization mode, F12 multiframing,
internal Bit Robbing Access disabled
XC0
XC1
00H
00H
The transmit clock-slot offset is cleared.
The transmit time-slot Offset is cleared.
Semiconductor Group
277
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Table 28
Configuration if Initialized after RESET (cont’d)
Register
Initiated
Value
Meaning
RC0
RC1
00H
00H
The receive clock slot offset is cleared.
The receive time-slot offset is cleared.
IDLE
ICB 1 … 3
00H
00H
Idle channel code is cleared.
Normal operation (no “Idle Channels” selected).
CCB 1 … 3
00H
Normal operation (no clear channel operation).
LIM0
LIM1
PCD
PCR
00H
00H
00H
00H
Slave Mode, Local Loop off,
Analog interface selected, Remote Loop off
Pulse Count for LOS Detection cleared
Pulse Count for LOS Recovery cleared
XPM2-0
IMR1-4
GCR
00,03,9cH
FFH
Transmit Pulse Mask
All interrupts are disabled
00H
Internal second timer, Power on of all 4 single FALC
channels,
CMR1
CMR2
GPC1
00H
00H
00H
DCO-R reference clock: channel 1, RCLK output: DPLL
clock, DCO-X enabled, DCO-X internal reference clock
SCLKR selected, SCLKX selected, Rec. synchr. pulse
sourced by SYPR, Tr. synchr. pulse sourced by SYPX,
system multiplex mode disabled, SEC port input active
high, FSC is sourced by channel 1, RCLK1 clock source:
channel 1,
PC1-4
PC5
00H , 00H
00H , 00H
Input function of ports RP(A-D) : SYPR,
Input function of ports XP(A-D) : SYPX
00H
00H
00H
SCLKR, SCLKX, RCLK configured to inputs,
XMFS active low
RTR1-4
TTR1-4
No time-slots selected
MODE
Signaling controller disabled
RAH1/2
RAL1/2
FDH,FFH
FFH,FFH
Compare register for receive address cleared
Semiconductor Group
278
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Initialization
For a correct start up of the Primary Access Interface a set of parameters specific to the
system and hardware environment must be programmed after RESET goes inactive.
Both the basic and the operational parameters must be programmed before the
activation procedure of the PCM line starts. Such procedures are specified in ITU-T and
DMI recommendations (e.g. Fault conditions and consequent actions). Setting optional
parameters primarily makes sense when basic operation via the PCM line is guaranteed.
Table 29 gives an overview of the most important parameters in terms of signals and
control bits which are to be programmed in one of the above steps. The sequence is
recommended but not mandatory. Accordingly, parameters for the basic and operational
set up, for example, may be programmed simultaneously. The bit FMR1.PMOD should
always be kept high.
Features like channel loop back, idle channel activation, clear channel activation,
extensions for signaling support, alarm simulation, … may be activated later.
Transmission of alarms (e.g. AIS, remote alarm) and control of synchronization in
connection with consequent actions to remote end and internal system depend on the
activation procedure selected.
Table 29
Initialization Parameters
Basic Set Up
T1
Mode Select
FMR1.PMOD = 1
Specification of Line interface and clock
generation
LIM0, LIM1, XPM2-0
Line interface coding
Loss of Signal detection/recovery
conditions
FMR0.XC1/0, FMR0.RC1/0
PCD, PCR, LIM1, LIM2
System clocking and data rate
SIC1.SSC1/0, SIC1.SSD1, FMR1.SSD0
CMR1.IRSP/IRSC/ IXSP/IXSC
FMR1.CTM
XC0.XCO, XC1.XTO
RC0.RCO, RC1.RTO
channel translation mode
Transmit offset counters
Receive offset counters
AIS to system interface
FMR2.DAIS/SAIS
Operational Set Up
T1
Select framing
FMR4.FM1/0
Framing additions
Synchronization mode
FMR1.CRC, FMR0.SRAF
FMR4.AUTO, FMR4.SSC1/0,
FMR2.MCSP, FMR2.SSP
FMR5.EIBR, XC0.BRM, MODE, CCR1,
CCR2, RAH1/2, RAL1/2
Signaling mode
Semiconductor Group
279
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Note: Read access to unused register addresses: value should be ignored.
Write access to unused register addresses: should be avoided, or set to ‘00’hex.
All control registers (except XFIFO, XS1-12, CMDR, DEC) are of type: Read/Write
8.3
Specific T1 Initialization
The following is a suggestion for a basic initialization to meet most of the T1
requirements. Depending on different applications and requirements any other
initialization can be used.
LIU Initialization
FMR0.XC0/1
FMR0.RC0/1
LIM1.DRS
CCB1-3
The QuadFALC supports requirements for the analog line
interface as well as the digital line interface. For the analog line
interface the codes AMI (with and without bit 7stuffing) and B8ZS
are supported. For the digital line interface modes (dual or single
rail) the QuadFALC supports AMI (with and without bit 7 stuffing)
and B8ZS.
PCD = 0x0A
LOS detection after 176 consecutive “zeros” (fulfills G.775 spec,
Bellcore/AT&T)
PCR = 0x15
LOS recovery after 22 “ones” in the PCD intervall. (fulfills G.775,
Bellcore/AT&T)
LIM1.RIL2-0 = 0x0 LOS threshold of 0.6 V (fulfills G.775).
2
GCR.SCI = 1
Additional Recovery Interrupts. Help to meet alarm activation and
deactivation conditions in time.
LIM2.LOS2/1 = 01 Automatic pulse densitiy check on 15 consecutive zeros for LOS
recovery condition (Bellcore requirement)
Framer Initialization
FMR4.SSC1/0
FMR4.FM1/0
Selection of framing sync conditions
Select framing format
Semiconductor Group
280
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
FMR2.AXRA = 1
FMR4.AUTO = 1
The transmission of RAI via the line interface is done automatically
by the QuadFALC in case of Loss of Frame Alignment
(FRS0.LFA = 1). If framing has been reinstalled RAI is
automatically reset
Automatic synchronization in case of definite framing candidate
(FRS0.FSRF).
In case of multiple framing candidates and CRC6 errors different
resynchronization conditions can be programmed via
FMR2.MCSP/SSP.
Signaling Controller Initialization
Initialization of the HDLC controller:
MODE = 0x88
CCR1 = 0x18
HDLC Receiver active, No address comparison
Enable Signaling via time-slot 0-31, Interframe Time Fill with
continous FLAGs
IMR0.RME = 0
IMR0.RPF = 0
IMR1.XPR = 0
Select interrupts for HDLC processor requests
RTR4.0 = 1
XTR4.0 = 1
Select time-slot 24 for HDLC data reception and transmission
Initialization of the CAS-BR Controller
FMR5.EIBR = 1
Enable CAS-BR Mode
Send CAS-BR information stored in XS1-12
IMR1.CASE = 0
IMR0.RSC = 0
Enable interrupts which indicate the access to the XS1-12
CAS-BR registers and any data change in RS1-12
After the device initialization a software reset should be executed by setting of bits
CMDR.XRES/RRES.
Semiconductor Group
281
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
8.4
Control Register Description
Table 30
Control Register Address Arrangement
Address Register Type Comment
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
100
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
XFIFO
XFIFO
CMDR
MODE
RAH1
RAH2
RAL1
RAL2
IPC
W
W
W
Transmit FIFO
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
Transmit FIFO
Command Register
R/W Mode Register
R/W Receive Address High 1
R/W Receive Address High 2
R/W Receive Address Low 1
R/W Receive Address Low 2
R/W Interrupt Port Configuration
R/W Common Configuration Register 1
R/W Common Configuration Register 2
R/W Receive Timeslot Register 1
R/W Receive Timeslot Register 2
R/W Receive Timeslot Register 3
R/W Receive Timeslot Register 4
R/W Transmit Timeslot Register 1
R/W Transmit Timeslot Register 2
R/W Transmit Timeslot Register 3
R/W Transmit Timeslot Register 4
R/W Interrupt Mask Register 0
R/W Interrupt Mask Register 1
R/W Interrupt Mask Register 2
R/W Interrupt Mask Register 3
R/W Interrupt Mask Register 4
R/W Framer Mode Register 0
R/W Framer Mode Register 1
R/W Framer Mode Register 2
R/W Channel Loop Back
08
09
0A
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1C
1D
1E
1F
109
10A
10C
10D
10E
10F
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
11C
11D
11E
11F
209
20A
20C
20D
20E
20F
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
21C
21D
21E
21F
309
30A
30C
30D
30E
30F
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
31C
31D
31E
31F
CCR1
CCR2
RTR1
RTR2
RTR3
RTR4
TTR1
TTR2
TTR3
TTR4
IMR0
IMR1
IMR2
IMR3
IMR4
FMR0
FMR1
FMR2
LOOP
Semiconductor Group
282
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Table 30
Control Register Address Arrangement
Address
120
Register Type Comment
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
22B
22C
22D
22E
22F
230
231
232
233
234
236
237
238
239
23A
23B
23C
23D
23E
23F
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
32B
32C
32D
32E
32F
330
331
332
333
334
336
337
338
339
33A
33B
33C
33D
33E
33F
FMR4
FMR5
XC0
R/W Framer Mode Register 4
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
12B
12C
12D
12E
12F
130
131
132
133
134
136
137
318
139
13A
13B
13C
13D
13E
13F
R/W Framer Mode Register 5
R/W Transmit Control 0
XC1
R/W Transmit Control 1
RC0
R/W Receive Control 0
RC1
R/W Receive Control 1
XPM0
XPM1
XPM2
IDLE
XDL1
XDL2
XDL3
CCB1
CCB2
CCB3
ICB1
ICB2
ICB3
LIM0
LIM1
PCD
R/W Transmit Pulse Mask 0
R/W Transmit Pulse Mask 1
R/W Transmit Pulse Mask 2
R/W Idle Channel Code
R/W Transmit DL-Bit Register 1
R/W Transmit DL-Bit Register 2
R/W Transmit DL-Bit Register 3
R/W Clear Channel Register 1
R/W Clear Channel Register 2
R/W Clear Channel Register 3
R/W Idle Channel Register 1
R/W Idle Channel Register 2
R/W Idle Channel Register 3
R/W Line Interface Mode 0
R/W Line Interface Mode 1
R/W Pulse Count Detection
R/W Pulse Count Recovery
R/W Line Interface Register 2
R/W Loop Code Register 1
R/W Loop Code Register 2
R/W Loop Code Register 3
R/W System Interface Control 1
R/W System Interface Control 2
PCR
LIM2
LCR1
LCR2
LCR3
SIC1
SIC2
Semiconductor Group
283
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Table 30
Control Register Address Arrangement
Address
140
Register Type Comment
40
44
45
46
47
60
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
80
81
82
83
84
240
244
245
246
247
260
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
27A
27B
280
281
282
283
284
340
344
345
346
347
360
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
37A
37B
380
381
382
383
384
SIC3
CMR1
CMR2
GCR1
ESM
DEC
XS1
R/W System Interface Control 3
144
145
146
147
160
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
17A
17B
180
181
182
183
184
R/W Clock Mode Register 1
R/W Clock Mode Register 2
R/W Global Configuration Register 1
R/W Errored Second Mask
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Disable Error Counter
Transmit Signaling Register 1
Transmit Signaling Register 2
Transmit Signaling Register 3
Transmit Signaling Register 4
Transmit Signaling Register 5
Transmit Signaling Register 6
Transmit Signaling Register 7
Transmit Signaling Register 8
Transmit Signaling Register 9
Transmit Signaling Register 10
Transmit Signaling Register 11
Transmit Signaling Register 12
XS2
XS3
XS4
XS5
XS6
XS7
XS8
XS9
XS10
XS11
XS12
PC1
R/W Port Configuration 1
R/W Port Configuration 2
R/W Port Configuration 3
R/W Port Configuration 4
R/W Port Configuration 5
R/W Global Port Configuration 1
PC2
PC3
PC4
PC5
85
GPC1
After ‘RESET’ all control registers except the XFIFO and XS1-12 are initialized to defined
values.
Unused bits have to be set to logical ‘0’.
The status registers are only readable and are updated by the QuadFALC.
Semiconductor Group
284
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Transmit FIFO (WRITE) XFIFO
7
0
XFIFO
XF7
XF0 (x00/x01)
Up to 32 bytes/16 words of received data can be read from the RFIFO following an RPF
or an RME interrupt.
Writing data to XFIFO can be done in 8-bit (byte) or 16-bit (word) access. The LSB is
transmitted first.
Up to 32 bytes/16 words of transmit data can be written to the XFIFO following an XPR
(or ALLS) interrupt.
Command Register (Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
CMDR
RMC
RRES
XREP
XRES
XHF
XTF
XME
SRES
(x02)
RMC…
Receive Message Complete
Confirmation from CPU to QuadFALC that the current frame or data
block has been fetched following an RPF or RME interrupt, thus the
occupied space in the RFIFO can be released.
RRES…
XREP…
Receiver Reset
The receive line interface except the clock and data recovery unit
(DPLL), the receive framer, the one second timer and the receive
signaling controller are reset. However the contents of the control
registers will not be deleted.
Transmission Repeat
If XREP is set to one together with XTF (write 24H to CMDR), the
QuadFALC repeatedly transmits the contents of the XFIFO (1…32
bytes) without HDLC framing fully transparently, i.e. without
FLAG,CRC.
The cyclic transmission is stopped with an SRES command or by
resetting XREP.
Note: During cyclic transmission the XREP- bit has to be set with
every write operation to CMDR.
Semiconductor Group
285
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
XRES…
Transmitter Reset
The transmit framer and transmit line interface excluding the system
clock generator and the pulse shaper will be reset. However the
contents of the control registers will not be deleted.
XHF…
XTF…
XME…
Transmit HDLC Frame
After having written up to 32 bytes to the XFIFO, this command
initiates the transmission of a HDLC frame.
Transmit Transparent Frame
Initiates the transmission of a transparent frame without HDLC
framing.
Transmit Message End
Indicates that the data block written last to the transmit FIFO
completes the current frame. The QuadFALC can terminate the
transmission operation properly by appending the CRC and the
closing flag sequence to the data.
SRES…
Signaling Transmitter Reset
The transmitter of the signaling controller will be reset. XFIFO is
cleared of any data and an abort sequence (seven 1’s) followed by
interframe time fill is transmitted. In response to XRES an XPR
interrupt is generated.
This command can be used by the CPU to abort a frame currently in
transmission.
Note: The maximum time between writing to the CMDR register and
the execution of the command takes 2.5 periods of the current
system data rate. Therefore, if the CPU operates with a very
high clock rate in comparison with the QuadFALC’s clock, it is
recommended that bit SIS.CEC should be checked before
writing to the CMDR register to avoid any loss of commands.
Mode Register (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
MODE
MDS2
MDS1
MDS0
BRAC
HRAC
DIV
(x03)
Semiconductor Group
286
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
MDS2-0…
Mode Select
The operating mode of the HDLC controller is selected.
000… Reserved
001… Reserved
010… 1 byte address comparison mode (RAL1, 2)
011… 2 byte address comparison mode (RAH1, 2 and RAL1, 2)
100… No address comparison
101… 1 byte address comparison mode (RAH1, 2)
110… Reserved
111… No HDLC framing mode 1
BRAC…
BOM Receiver Active
Switches the BOM receiver to operational or inoperational state.
0… Receiver inactive
1… Receiver active
HRAC…
DIV…
HDLC Receiver Active
Switches the HDLC receiver to operational or inoperational state.
0… Receiver inactive
1… Receiver active
Data Inversion
Setting this bit will invert the internal generated HDLC data stream.
0… normal operation, HDLC data stream not inverted
1… HDLC data stream inverted
Receive Address Byte High Register 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: FDH
7
1
0
0
RAH1
(x04)
In operating modes that provide high byte address recognition, the high byte of the
received address is compared with the individually programmable values in RAH1 and
RAH2.
RAH1…
Value of the First Individual High Address Byte
Bit 1 (C/R-bit) is excluded from address comparison.
Semiconductor Group
287
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Receive Address Byte High Register 2 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: FFH
7
0
RAH2
(x05)
RAH2…
Value of Second Individual High Address Byte
Receive Address Byte Low Register 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: FFH
7
0
RAL1
(x06)
RAL1…
Value of First Individual Low Address Byte
Receive Address Byte Low Register 2 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: FFH
7
0
RAL2
(x07)
RAL2...
Value of the second individually programmable low address
byte.
Interrupt Port Configuration (READ/WRITE)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
IPC
SSYF
IC1
IC0
(08)
Unused bits have to be set to logical ‘0’.
SSYF…
Select SYNC Frequency
Only appilcable in master mode (LIM0.MAS = 1) and bit CMR2.DCF
is cleared.
Semiconductor Group
288
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
0… Reference clock at port SYNC is 1.544 / 2.048 MHz
1… Reference clock at port SYNC is 8 KHz
IC0, IC1…
Interrupt Port Configuration
These bits define the function of the interrupt output stage (pin INT):
IOC1
IOC0
Function
X
0
1
0
1
1
Open drain output
Push/pull output, active low
Push/pull output, active high
Common Configuration Register 1 (READ/WRITE)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
CCR1
BRM
EDLX
EITS
ITF
XMFA
RFT1
RFT0
(x09)
BRM…
BOM Receive Mode (significant in BOM mode only)
0…
1…
10 byte packets
Continuous reception
EDLX…
EITS…
Enable DL Bit Access via the Transmit FIFO
A one in this bit position enables the internal DL- bit access via the
receive / transmit FIFO of the signaling controller. FMR1.EDL has to
be cleared switching the DL bits, stored in the XFIFO transparently
through the QuadFALC.
Enable Internal Time-Slot 0-31 Signaling
0… Internal signaling in time-slots 0-31 defined via registers
RTR1-4 or TTR1-4 is disabled.
1… Internal signaling in time-slots 0-31 defined via registers
RTR1-4 or TTR1-4 is enabled.
ITF…
Interframe Time Fill
Determines the idle (= no data to send) state of the transmit data
coming from the signaling controller.
0…
1…
Continuous logical ‘1’ is output
Continuous FLAG sequences are output (‘01111110’ bit
patterns)
Semiconductor Group
289
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
XMFA …
Transmit Multiframe Aligned
Determines the synchronization between the framer and the
corresponding signaling controller.
0… Contents of the XFIFO is transmitted without multiframe
alignment.
1… Contents of the XFIFO is transmitted multiframe aligned. If
CCR1.EDLXis set, transmitting of DL bits is started in F72
format with frame 26.
After receiving a complete multiframe in the time-slot mode
(RTR1-4) an ISR0.RME interrupt is generated, if no HDLC or
BOM mode is enabled. In DL bit access (CCR1.EDLX/EITS =
10) XMFA is not valid.
Note: During the transmission of the XFIFO content, the SYPX or
XMFS interval time should not be changed, otherwise the
XFIFO data has to be retransmitted.
RFT1, RFT0…
RFIFO Threshold Level
The size of the accessible part of RFIFO can be determined by
programming these bits. The number of valid bytes after an RPF
interrupt is given in the following table:
RFT1
RFT0
Size of Accessible Part of RFIFO
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
32 bytes (RESET value)
16 bytes
4 bytes
2 bytes
The value of RFT 1,0 can be changed dynamically
– If reception is not running or
– after the current data block has been read, but before the command
CMDR.RMC is issued (interrupt controlled data transfer).
Note: It is seen that changing the value of RFT1,0 is possible even
during the reception of one frame. The total length of the
received frame can be always read directly in RBCL, RBCH
after an RPF interrupt, except when the threshold is increased
during reception of that frame. The real length can then be
inferred by noting which bit positions in RBCL are reset by an
RMC command (see table below):
Semiconductor Group
290
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
RFT1 RFT0
Bit Positions in RBCL Reset by a
CMDR.RMC Command
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
RBC4 .… 0
RBC3 … 0
RBC1,0
RBC0
Common Configuration Register 2 (READ/WRITE)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
CCR2
RADD
RBFE
RCRC
XCRC
(x0A)
Unused bits have to be set to logical ‘0’.
RADD…
RBFE…
Receive Address Pushed to RFIFO
If this bit is set to ‘1’, the received HDLC address information (1 or 2
bytes, depending on the address mode selected via MODE.MDS0) is
pushed to RFIFO. This function is applicable in non-auto mode.
Receive BOM Filter Enable
Setting this bit the Bit Oriented Message (BOM) -receiver will only
accept BOM frames after detecting 7 out of 10 equal BOM pattern.
The BOM pattern is stored in the RFIFO adding a receive status byte
marking a BOM frame (RSIS.HFR) and an interrupt ISR0.RME is
generated. The current state of the BOM receiver is indicated in
register SIS.IVB. When the valid BOM pattern disappears an interrupt
ISR0.BIV is generated.
RCRC…
Receive CRC ON/OFF
Only applicable in non-auto mode.
If this bit is set to ‘1’, the received CRC checksum will be written to
RFIFO (CRC-ITU-T: 2 bytes). The checksum, consisting of the 2 last
bytes in the received frame, is followed in the RFIFO by the status
information byte (contents of register RSIS). The received CRC
checksum will additionally be checked for correctness. If non-auto
mode is selected, the limits for “Valid Frame” check are modified
(refer to RSIS.VFR).
Semiconductor Group
291
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
XCRC…
Transmit CRC ON/OFF
If this bit is set to ‘1’, the CRC checksum will not be generated
internally. It has to be written as the last two bytes in the transmit FIFO
(XFIFO). The transmitted frame will be closed automatically with a
closing flag.
Note: The QuadFALC does not check whether the length of the
frame, i.e. the number of bytes to be transmitted makes sense
or not.
Receive Timeslot Register 1-4 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H, 00H, 00H, 00H
7
0
RTR1
RTR2
RTR3
RTR4
TS0
TS8
TS1
TS9
TS2
TS10
TS18
TS26
TS3
TS11
TS19
TS27
TS4
TS12
TS20
TS28
TS5
TS13
TS21
TS29
TS6
TS14
TS22
TS30
TS7
TS15
TS23
TS31
(x0C)
(x0D)
(x0E)
(x0F)
TS16
TS24
TS17
TS25
TS0…TS31…
Timeslot Register
These bits define the received time-slots on the system highway port
RDO to be extracted. Additionally these registers will control the
RSIGM marker which can be forced high during the respective
time-slots independently of bit CCR1.EITS.
A one in the RTR1-4 bits will sample the corresponding time-slot in
the RFIFO of the signaling controller, if bit CCR1.EITS is set.
Assignments:
SIC2.SSC2 = 0 : ( 32 time-slots / frame )
TS0 → time-slot 0, . . . TS31→ time-slot 31
SIC2.SSC2 = 1 : ( 24 time-slots / frame )
TS0 → time-slot 0, . . . TS23→ time-slot 23
0 … The corresponding time-slot is not extracted and stored in the
RFIFO.
1… The contents of the selected time-slot will be stored in the
RFIFO. Although the idle time-slots can be selected. This function will
only become active, if bits CCR1.EITS is set.
The corresponding time-slot will be forced high on pin RSIGM.
Semiconductor Group
292
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Transmit Timeslot Register 1-4 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H, 00H, 00H, 00H
7
0
TTR1
TTR2
TTR3
TTR4
TS0
TS8
TS1
TS9
TS2
TS10
TS18
TS26
TS3
TS11
TS19
TS27
TS4
TS12
TS20
TS28
TS5
TS13
TS21
TS29
TS6
TS14
TS22
TS30
TS7
TS15
TS23
TS31
(x10)
(x11)
(x12)
(x13)
TS16
TS24
TS17
TS25
TS0…TS31…
Transmit Timeslot Register
These bits define the transmit time-slots on the system highway to be
inserted. Additionally these registers will control the XSIGM marker
which can be forced high during the respective time-slots
independently of bit CCR1.EITS.
A one in the TTR1-4 bits will insert the corresponding time-slot
sourced by the XFIFO in the data received on pin XDI, if bit
CCR1.EITS is set. If SIC3.TTRF is set and CCR1.EDLX/EITS=00,
insertion of data received on port XSIG is controlled by this registers.
Assignments:
SIC2.SSC2 = 0 : ( 32 time-slots / frame )
TS0 → time-slot 0, . . . TS31→ time-slot 31
SIC2.SSC2 = 1 : ( 24 time-slots / frame )
TS0 → time-slot 0, . . . TS23→ time-slot 23
0 … The selected time-slot will not be inserted into the outgoing data
stream.
1…The contents of the selected time-slot will be inserted in the
outgoing data stream from XFIFO. This function will only become
active, if bits CCR1.EITS is set.
The corresponding time-slot will be forced high on marker pin XSIGM.
Semiconductor Group
293
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Interrupt Mask Register 0…4
Value after RESET: FFH, FFH, FFH, FFH,FFH
7
0
IMR0
IMR1
IMR2
IMR3
IMR4
RME
CASE
FAR
ES
RFS
RDO
LFA
ISF
RMB
XDU
RSC
XMB
CRC6
LOS
PDEN
XLSC
RAR
RPF
XPR
RA
(x14)
(x15)
(x16)
(x17)
(x18)
ALLS
MFAR
LMFA
AIS
SEC
XSN
LLBSC
RSN
RSP
XSP
IMR0...IMR4...
Interrupt Mask Register
Each interrupt source can generate an interrupt signal at port INT
(characteristics of the output stage are defined via register IPC). A ‘1’
in a bit position of IMR0…4 sets the mask active for the interrupt
status in ISR0…4. Masked interrupt statuses neither generate a
signal on INT, nor are they visible in register GIS. Moreover, they will
– not be displayed in the Interrupt Status Register if bit GCR.VIS is
set to ‘0’
– be displayed in the Interrupt Status Register if bit GCR.VIS is set to
‘1’.
After RESET, all interrupts are disabled.
Semiconductor Group
294
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Framer Mode Register 0 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
FMR0
XC1
XC0
RC1
RC0
FRS
SRAF
EXLS
SIM
(x1C)
XC1…XC0…
Transmit Code
Serial code transmitter is independent to the receiver.
00… NRZ (optical interface)
01… CMI (1T2B + B8ZS), (optical interface)
10… AMI coding with Zero Code Suppression (ZCS, B7 - Stuffing).
Disabling of the ZCS is done by activating the clear channel mode via
register CCB1-3. (ternary or digital interface)
11… B8ZS Code (ternary or digital dual rail interface)
RC1…RC0…
Receive Code
Serial code receiver is independent to the transmitter.
00… NRZ (optical interface)
01… CMI (1T2B + B8ZS), (optical interface)
10… AMI coding with Zero Code Suppression (ZCS, B7 - Stuffing),
(ternary or digital dual rail interface)
11… B8ZS Code (ternary or digital dual rail interface)
FRS…
Force Resynchronization
A transition from low to high will force the frame aligner to execute a
resynchronization of the pulse frame. In the asynchronous state, a
new frame position is assumed at the next candidate if there is one.
Otherwise, a new frame search with the meaning of a general reset is
started. In the synchronous state this bit will have the same meaning
as bit FMR0.EXLS except if FMR2.MCSP=1.
SRAF…
EXLS…
Select Remote (Yellow) Alarm Format for F12 and ESF Format
0… F12: bit2 = 0 in every channel. ESF: pattern
‘1111 1111 0000 0000…’ in data link channel.
1… F12: FS bit of frame 12. ESF: bit2 = 0 in every channel
External Loss Of Frame
With a low to high transition a new frame search will be started. This
has the meaning of a general reset of the internal frame alignment
unit. Synchronous state is reached only if there is one definite framing
candidate. In the case of multiple candidates, the setting of the bit
Semiconductor Group
295
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
FMR0.FRS forces the receiver to lock onto the next available framing
position.
SIM…
Alarm Simulation
Setting/resetting this bit initiates internal error simulation of: AIS (blue
alarm), loss of signal (red alarm), loss of frame alignment, remote
(yellow) alarm, slip, framing errors, CRC errors, code violations. The
error counters FEC, CVC, CEC, EBC will be incremented.
The selection of simulated alarms is done via the error simulation
counter: FRS2.ESC2-0 which will be incremented with each setting of
bit FMR0.SIM. For complete checking of the alarm indications eight
simulation steps are necessary (FRS2.ESC2-0 = 0 after a complete
simulation).
Framer Mode Register 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
FMR1
CTM
EDL
PMOD
CRC
ECM
SSD0
XAIS
(x1D)
CTM…
Channel Translation Mode
0… Channel translation mode 0
1… Channel translation mode 1
EDL…
Enable DL-Bit Access via Register XDL1-3
Only applicable in F4, F24 or F72 frame format.
0… Normal operation. The DL-bits will be taken from system
highway or if enabled via CCR1.EDLX from the XFIFO of the
signaling controller.
1… DL-bit register access. The DL-bit information will be taken from
the registers XDL1-3 and will overwrite the DL-bits received at
the system highway (pin XDI) or the internal XFIFO of the
signaling controller. However, transmitting contents of registers
XDL1-3 will be disabled if transparent mode is enabled
(FMR4.TM).
PMOD…
PCM Mode
For T1 application this bit must be set high. Switching into T1 mode
the device needs up to 10 µsec to settle up to the internal clocking.
FMR1.PMOD of all 4 channels has to be set equally.
Semiconductor Group
296
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
0… PCM 30 or E1 mode.
1… PCM 24 or T1 mode.
CRC…
ECM…
Enable CRC6
This bit is only significant when using the ESF format.
0… CRC6 check/generation disabled. For transmit direction, all
CRC bit positions are set to ‘1’.
1… CRC6 check/generation enabled.
Error Counter Mode
The function of the error counters (FEC,CEC,CVC,EBC) will be
determined by this bit.
0… Before reading an error counter the corresponding bit in the
Disable Error Counter register (DEC) has to be set. In 8 bit
access the low byte of the error counter should always be read
before the high byte. The error counters will be reset with the
rising edge of the corresponding bits in the DEC register.
1… Every second the error counter will be latched and then
automatically be reset. The latched error counter state should
be read within the next second. Reading the error counter
during updating should be avoided.
SSD0…
Select System Date Rate 0
SIC1.SSD1, FMR1.SSD0 and SIC2.SSC2 define the data rate on the
system highway. Programming SSD1/SSD0 and corresponding data
rate is shown below.
SIC2.SSC2 = 0:
00…2.048 MBit/s
01…4.096 MBit/s
10…8.192 MBit/s
11…16.384 MBit/s
SIC2.SSC2 = 1:
00…1.544 MBit/s
01…3.088 MBit/s
10…6.176 MBit/s
11…12.352 MBit/s
Semiconductor Group
297
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
XAIS…
Transmit AIS Towards Remote End
Sends AIS (blue alarm) via ports: XL1, XL2 towards the remote end.
If Local Loop Mode is enabled the transmitted data is looped back to
the system internal highway without any changes.
Framer Mode Register 2 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
FMR2
MCSP
SSP
DAIS
SAIS
PLB
AXRA
EXZE
(x1E)
MCSP…
SSP…
Multiple Candidates Synchronization Procedure
Select Sync/Resync Procedure
Together with bit FMR2.SSP the synchronization mode of the receive
framer is defined:
MCSP/SSP:
00… F12/72 format:
Specified number of errors in both FT framing and FS framing
lead to loss of sync (FRS0.LFA is set). In the case of FS bit
framing errors, bit FRS0.LMFA is set additionally. A complete
new synchronization procedure is initiated to regain pulseframe
alignment and then multiframe alignment.
F24:
normal operation: synchronization is achieved only on
verification the framing pattern.
01… F12/72:
Specified number of errors in FT framing has the same effect
as above. Specified number of errors in FS framing only
initiates a new search for multiframe alignment without
influencing pulseframe synchronous state (FRS0.LMFA is set).
F24:
Synchronous state is reached when three consecutive
multiframe pattern are correctly found independent of the
occurence of CRC6 errors.
10…
A one will enable a synchronization mode which is able to
choose multiple framing pattern candidates step by step. I.e. if
in synchronous state the CRC error counter indicates that the
Semiconductor Group
298
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
synchronization might have been based on an alias framing
pattern, setting of FMR0.FRS will lead to synchronization on
the next candidate available. However, only the previously
assumed candidate will be discarded in the internal framing
pattern memory. The latter procedure can be repeated until the
framer has locked on the right pattern (no extensive CRC
errors). Therefor bit FMR1.CRC must be set.
11… F24:
Synchronization is achieved on verification the framing pattern
and the CRC6 bits. Synchronous state is reached when
framing pattern and CRC6 checksum are correctly found. For
correct operation the CRC check must be enabled by setting bit
FMR1.CRC6.
DAIS…
Disable AIS to System Interface
0… AIS is automatically inserted into the data stream to RDO if
QuadFALC is in asynchronous state.
1… Automatic AIS insertion is disabled. Furthermore, AIS insertion
can be initiated by programming bit FMR2.SAIS.
SAIS…
PLB…
Send AIS Towards System Interface
Sends AIS (blue alarm) via output RDO towards system interface.
This function is not influenced by bit FMR2.DAIS.
Payload Loop Back
0 … Normal operation. Payload loop is disabled.
1… The payload loopback will loop the data stream from the
receiver section back to transmitter section. Looped data is
output on pin RDO. Data received at port XDI, XSIG, SYPX and
XMFS will be ignored. With FMR4.TM=1 all 193 bits per frame
will be looped back. If FMR4.TM=0 the DL- or FS- or CRC- bits
will be generated internally. AIS is sent immediately on port
RDO by setting the FMR2.SAIS bit. During payload loop is
active the receive time-slot offset (registers RC1/0) should not
be changed. A write access to register XC1 will set the
read/write pointer of the transmit elastic buffer into its optimal
position to ensure a maximum wander compensation.
AXRA…
Automatic Transmit Remote Alarm
0 … Normal operation
1… The Remote Alarm (yellow alarm) bit will be automatically set in
the outgoing data stream if the receiver is in asynchronous
Semiconductor Group
299
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
state (FRS0.LFA bit is set). In synchronous state the remote
alarm bit will be reset.
EXZE…
Excessive Zeros Detection Enable
Selects error detection mode in the bipolar receive bit stream.
0… Only bipolar violations are detected.
1… Bipolar violations and zero strings of 8 or more contiguous
zeros in B8ZS code or more than 15 contiguous zeros in AMI
code are detected additionally and counted in the code violation
counter CVC.
LOOP (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
LOOP
RTM
ECLB
CLA4
CLA0
(x1F)
RTM…
Receive Transparent Mode
Setting this bit disconnects control of the internal elastic store from the
receiver. The elastic store is now in a “free running” mode without any
possibility to actualize the time slot assignment to a new frame
position in case of re-synchronization of the receiver. This function
can be used in conjunction with the “disable AIS to system interface”
feature (FMR2.DAIS) to realize undisturbed transparent reception.
This bit should be enabled in case of unframed data reception mode.
ECLB…
Enable Channel Loop Back
0… Disables the channel loop back.
1… Enables the channel loop back selected by this register.
CLA4…CLA0… Channel Address For Loop Back
CLA = 1…24 selects the channel.
During loop back, the contents of the associated outgoing channel at
ports XL1/XDOP/XOID and XL2/XDON is equal to the idle channel
code programmed in register IDLE.
Semiconductor Group
300
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Framer Mode Register 4 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
FMR4
AIS3
TM
XRA
SSC1
SSC0
AUTO
FM1
FM0
(x20)
AIS3…
Select AIS Condition
0… AIS (blue alarm) is indicated (FRS0.AIS) when two or less
zeros in the received bit stream are detected in a time interval
of 12 frames (F4, F12, F72) or 24 frames (ESF).
1… AIS (blue alarm) detection is only enabled when QuadFALC is
in asynchronous state. The alarm is indicated (FRS0.AIS) when
– three or less zeros within a time interval of 12 frames (F4,
F12, F72), or
– five or less zeros within a time interval of 24 frames (ESF)
are detected in the received bit stream.
TM…
Transparent Mode
Setting this bit enables the transparent mode:
In transmit direction bit 8 of every FS/DL time-slot from the system
internal highway (XDI) is inserted in the F-bit position of the outgoing
frame. Internal framing generation, insertion of CRC and DL data is
disabled.
XRA…
Transmit Remote Alarm (Yellow Alarm)
If high, remote alarm is sent via PCM route. Clearing the bit will
remove the remote alarm pattern. Remote alarm indication depends
on the multiframe structure as follows:
F4: bit2 = 0 in every speech channel
F12: – FMR0.SRAF = 0: bit2 = 0 in every speech channel
– FMR0.SRAF = 1: FS-bit of frame 12 is forced to ‘1’
ESF: –
FMR0.SRAF
=
0:
pattern
‘1111111100000000
11111111000…’ in data link channel
– FMR0.SRAF = 1: bit2 = 0 in every speech channel
F72: bit2 = 0 in every speech channel
SSC1/0…
Select Sync Conditions
Loss of Frame Alignment (FRS0.LFA or opt. FRS0.LMFA) is declared
if
00 = 2 out of 4 framing bits
Semiconductor Group
301
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
01 = 2 out of 5 framing bits
10 = 2 out of 6 framing bits in F4/12/72 format
10 = 2 out of 6 framing bits per multiframe period in ESF format
11 = 4 consecutive multiframe pattern in ESF format
are incorrect.
are incorrect. It depends on the selected multiframe format and
optionally on bit FMR2.SSP which framing bits are observed:
F4:
FT bits → FRS0.LFA
F12, F72: SSP = 0: FT bits → FRS0.LFA: FS bits → FRS0.LFA
and FRS0.LMFA SSP = 1:FT → FRS0.LFA
FS → FRS0.LMFA
ESF:
ESF framing bits → FRS0.LFA
AUTO…
Enable Auto Resynchronization
0… The receiver will not resynchronize automatically. Starting a
new synchronization procedure is possible via the bits:
FMR0.EXLS or FMR0.FRS.
1… Auto-resynchronization is enabled.
FM1…FM0…
Select Frame Mode
FM = 0: 12-frame multiframe format (F12, D3/4)
FM = 1: 4-frame multiframe format (F4)
FM = 2: 24-frame multiframe format (ESF)
FM = 3: 72-frame multiframe format (F72, remote switch mode)
Framer Mode Register 5 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
FMR5
EIBR
XLD
XLU
XTM
SSC2
(x21)
EIBR…
Enable Internal Bit Robbing Access
0… Normal operation.
1… A one in this bit position will cause the transmitter to send the
bit robbing signaling information stored in the XS1-12 (ESF,
F12, 72) registers in the corresponding time slots.
XLD…
Transmit Line Loopback (LLB) Down Code
0… Normal operation.
1… A one in this bit position will cause the transmitter to replace
normal transmit data with the LLB Down (Deactuate) Code
Semiconductor Group
302
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
continuously until this bit is reset. The LLB Down Code will be
optionally overwritten by the framing/DL/CRC bits.
XLU…
Transmit LLB UP Code
0… Normal operation.
1… A one in this bit position will cause the transmitter to replace
normal transmit data with the LLB UP (actuate) Code
continuously until this bit is reset. The LLB UP Code will be
optionally overwritten by the framing/DL/CRC bits. For proper
operation bit FMR5.XLD must be cleared.
XTM…
Transmit Transparent Mode
0…Ports SYPX / XMFS define the frame / multiframe begin on the
transmit system highway. The transmitter is usually synchronized on
this externally sourced frame boundary and generates the FS/DL bits
according to this framing. Any change of the transmit time-slot
assignment will subsequently produce a change of the FS/DL bit
positions.
1… Disconnects the control of the transmit system interface from the
transmitter. The transmitter is now in a free running mode without any
possibility to actualize the multiframe position. The framing (FS/DL
bits) generated by the transmitter will not be „disturbed“ (in case of
changing the transmit time-slot assignment) by the transmit system
highway unless register XC1 is written. This bit should be set if
loop-timed application is selected. For proper operation the transmit
elastic buffer (2 frames, SIC1.XBS1/0= 10) has to be enabled.
SSC2…
Select Sync Conditions
Only valid in ESF framing format.
Loss of Frame Alignment FRS0.LFA is declared if more than 320
CRC6 errors per second interval are detected.
Semiconductor Group
303
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Transmit Control 0 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
XC0
BRM
MFBS
BRFO XCO10
XCO8
(x22)
BRM…
Enable Bit Robbing Marker
A one in this bit will mark the robbed bit positions on the system
highway. RSIGM marks the receive and XSIGM marks the transmit
robbed bits.
MFBS…
BRFO…
Enable pure Multiframe Begin Signals
Only valid if ESF or F72 format is selected.
If set, signals RMFB and XMFB indicate only the multiframe begin.
Additional pulses (every 12 frames) are disabled.
Bit Robbing Force One
Setting this bit forces the robbed bits high transmitted on port RDO.
The received signaling data stream for the signaling controller is not
influenced by this bit.
XCO10…XCO8… Transmit Offset
Initial value loaded into the transmit bit counter at the trigger edge of
SCLKX when the synchronous pulse at port SYPX or XMFS is active
Refer to register XC1.
Transmit Control 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 9CH
7
0
XC1
XTO7
XTO0
(x23)
A write access to this address resets the transmit elastic buffer to its
basic starting position. Therefore, updating the value should only be
done when the QuadFALC is initialized or when the buffer should be
centered. As a consequence a transmit slip may occur.
XTO7…XTO0… Transmit Offset
Initial value loaded into the transmit bit counter at the trigger edge of
SCLKX when the synchronous pulse at port SYPX / XMFS is active
(see figure 55+56).
Semiconductor Group
304
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Calculation of delay time T (SCLKX cycles) depends on the value X
of the „Transmit Offset“ register XC1/0:
system clocking rate: modulo 2.048 MHz (SIC2.SSC2 = 0)
0 ≤ T ≤ 3 + (SC/SD) :
X = 3 - T + (SC/SD)
4+ (SC/SD) ≤ T ≤ max. delay : X = 2051 - T + (SC/SD)
with max. delay = (256 * SC/SD) -1
with SC = System clock defined by SIC1.SSC1/0 + SIC2.SSC2
with SD = system data rate
or
system clocking rate: modulo 1.544 MHz (SIC2.SSC2 = 1)
0 ≤ T ≤ 3 + (7*SC/BF) + (SC/SD): -->
X = 3 - T + (7*SC/BF) + ( SC/SD)
4 + (7*SC/BF) + (SC/SD) ≤ T ≤ max. delay : -->
X = 3 - T + (200 * SC/BF) + (SC/SD)
with max. delay = (200 * SC/SD) - (7*SC/SD) -1
with SC = System clock defined by SIC1.SSC1/0 + SIC2.SSC2
with SD = system data rate
with BF = Basic Frequency = 1.544 MHz
Delay time T = time between beginning of time-slot 0 ( bit 0 , channel
phase 0) at XDI / XSIG and the initial edge of SCLKX after SYPX /
XMFS goes active.
Receive Control 0 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
RCO
SJR
RRAM
CRCI
XCRCI
RDIS
RCO10 RCO9
RCO8
(x24)
SJR…
Select Japanese ITU-T Requirements
0… Alarm handling is done according ITU-T G. 704+706
1… Alarm handling is done according ITU-T JG. 704 + 706
RRAM…
Receive Remote Alarm Mode
The conditions for remote (yellow) alarm (FRS0.RRA) detection can
be selected via this bit to allow detection even in the presence of
BER 10**-3:
RRAM = 0
Detection
F4: bit2 = 0 in every speech channel per frame.
F12: – FMR0.SRAF = 0: bit2 = 0 in every speech channel per frame.
Semiconductor Group
305
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
– FMR0.SRAF = 1: S-bit of frame 12 is forced to ‘1’
ESF: – FMR0.SRAF = 0: pattern ‘1111 1111 0000 0000…’ in data
link channel
– FMR0.SRAF = 1: bit2 = 0 in every speech channel
F72: bit2 = 0 in every speech channel per frame.
Release: The alarm will be reset when above conditions are no longer
detected.
RRAM = 1 (BER 10**-3 )
Detection
F4: bit2 = 0 in 255 consecutive speech channels.
F12: – FMR0.SRAF = 0: bit 2 = 0 in 255 consecutive speech
channels.
– FMR0.SRAF = 1: S-bit of frame 12 is forced to ‘1’
ESF: – FMR0.SRAF = 0: pattern ‘1111 1111 0000 0000…’ in data
link channel
– FMR0.SRAF = 1: bit 2 = 0 in 255 consecutive speech
channels
F72: bit 2 = 0 in 255 consecutive speech channels.
Release
Depending on the selected multiframe format the alarm will be reset
when QuadFALC does not detect
– the ‘bit 2 = 0’ condition for three consecutive pulseframes
(all formats if selected),
– the ‘FS bit’ condition for three consecutive multiframes (F12),
– the ‘DL pattern’ for three times in a row (ESF).
CRCI…
Automatic CRC6 Bit Inversion
If set, all CRC bits of one outgoing extended multiframe are inverted
in case a CRC error is flagged for the previous received multiframe.
This function is logically ORed with RC0.XCRCI.
XCRCI…
RDIS…
Transmit CRC6 Bit Inversion
If set, the CRC bits in the outgoing data stream are inverted before
transmission. This function is logically ORed with RC0.CRCI.
Receive Data Input Sense
0… Inputs: RDIP, RDIN active low, input ROID is active high
1… Inputs: RDIP, RDIN active high, input ROID is active low
Semiconductor Group
306
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
RCO10…RCO8…Receive Offset / Receive Frame Marker Offset
Depending on the RP(A-D) pin function different offsets could be
programmed. The SYPR and the RFM pin function could not be
selected in parallel.
Receive Offset (PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 000)
Initial value loaded into the receive bit counter at the trigger edge of
SCLKR when the synchronous pulse at port SYPR is active (see
figure 51).
Calculation of delay time T (SCLKR cycles) depends on the value X
of the „Receive Offset“ register RC1/0. Refer to register RC1.
Receive Control 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 9CH
7
0
RC1
RTO7
RTO0
(x25)
RTO7…RTO0… Receive Offset / Receive Frame Marker Offset
Depending on the RP(A-D) pin function different offsets could be
programmed. The SYPR and the RFM pin function could not be
selected in parallel.
Receive Offset (PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 000)
Initial value loaded into the receive bit counter at the trigger edge of
SCLKR when the synchronous pulse at port SYPR is active (see
figure 51).
Calculation of delay time T (SCLKR cycles) depends on the value X
of the „Receive Offset“ register RC1/0:
system clocking rate: modulo 2.048 MHz (SIC2.SSC2 = 0)
0 ≤ T ≤ 4 :
X= 4- T
5 ≤ T ≤ max. delay : X= 2052 - T
with max. delay = (256*SC/SD) -1
with SC = System clock defined by SIC1.SSC1/0 + SIC2.SSC2
with SD = 2.048 MHz
or
system clocking rate: modulo 1.544 MHz (SIC2.SSC2 = 1)
0 ≤ T ≤ 4:
X = 4- T + (7* SC/SD)
5 ≤ T ≤ max. delay : X = (200 * SC/SD) + 4 - T
with max. delay = 193*SC/SD - 1
with SC = System clock defined by SIC1.SSC1/0 + SIC2.SSC2
with SD = 1.544 MHz
Semiconductor Group
307
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Delay time T = time between beginning of time-slot 0 at RDO and the
initial edge of SCLKR after SYPR goes active.
Receive Frame Marker Offset (PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 001)
Offset programming of the receive frame marker which is output on
multifunction port RFM. The receive frame marker could be activated
during any bit position of the entire frame and depends on the
selected system clock rate.
Calculation of the value X of the „Receive Offset“ register RC1/0
depends on the bit position BP which should be marked :
system clocking rate: modulo 2.048 MHz (SIC2.SSC2 = 0)
0 ≤ BP ≤ 2045 :
X= BP + 2
2046 ≤ BP ≤2047 : X= BP - 2046 )
e.g: 2.048 MBit/s: BP = 0-255;
4.096 MBit/s: BP = 0-511,
8.192 MBit/s: BP = 0-1023, 16.384 MBit/s: BP = 0-2047
system clocking rate: modulo 1.544 MHz (SIC2.SSC2 = 1)
0 ≤ BP ≤ 193*(SC/SD) -3 :
X = BP + 2 + 7*SC/SD
193*(SC/SD) -2 ≤ BP ≤ max. Delay : X = BP + 2 - 186*SC/SD
with max. delay = 193*SC/SD - 1
with SC = System clock defined by SIC1.SSC1/0 + SIC2.SSC2
with SD = 1.544 MHz
Transmit Pulse-Mask 2…0 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 7BH, 03H, 00H
7
0
X P M 0
XPM1
XPM2
X P 1 2
XP30
XLLP
X P 1 1
XP24
XLT
X P 1 0
XP23
X P 0 4
XP22
X P 0 3
XP21
XP34
X P 0 2
XP20
XP33
X P 0 1
XP14
XP32
X P 0 0
XP13
XP31
( x 2 6 )
(x27)
(x28)
DAXLT
The transmit pulse shape which is defined in ANSI T1. 102 will be output on pins XL1 and
XL2. The level of the pulse shape can be programmed via registers XPM2-0 to create a
custom waveform. In order to get an optimized pulse shape for the external transformers
each pulse shape will be internally devided into four sub pulse shapes. In each sub pulse
shape a programmed 5 bit value will define the level of the analog voltage on pins XL1/2.
Together four 5 bit values have to be programmed to form one complete transmit pulse
shape.The four 5 bit values will be sent in the following sequence:
XP04-00: First pulse shape level
XP14-10: Second pulse shape level
Semiconductor Group
308
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
XP24-20: Third pulse shape level
XP34-30: Fourth pulse shape level
Changing the LSB of each subpulse in registers XPM2-0 will change the amplitude of the
differential voltage on XL1/2 by approximately 80 mV.
The XPM- values in the following table are based on simulations. They are valid for the
following external circuitry: transformer ratio: 1:2.4; cable: PULB 22AWG (100 Ω); serial
resistors: 2 Ω. Adjustment of these coefficients may be necessary for other external
conditions.
DS1: The XPMxx register values shown in the table below are in decimal format.
Range in m
0 - 35
XP04-XP00
XP14-XP10
XP24-XP20
XP34-XP30
27
27
29
29
29
29
29
24
24
25
25
25
26
27
02
02
02
03
04
04
05
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
25 - 65
55 - 95
85 - 125
115 - 155
145 - 185
175 - 210
XLT…
Transmit Line Tri-state
0 … Normal operation
1 … Transmit line XL1/XL2 or XDOP/XDON are switched into high
impedance state. If this bit is set the transmit line monitor status
information will be frozen.
DAXLT...
Disable Automatic Tristating of XL1/2
0... Normal operation. If a short is detected on pins XL1/2 the
transmit line monitor will set the XL1/2 outputs into a high
impedance state.
1... If a short is detected on pins XL1/2 an automatic setting these
pins into a high impedance state (by the XL-monitor) will be
disabled.
XLLP…
Reserved
0… Normal operation
1… Reserved ( not to be used)
Semiconductor Group
309
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Idle Channel Code Register (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
IDLE
IDL7
IDL0
(x2B)
IDL7…IDL0…
Idle Channel Code
If channel loop back is enabled by programming the register
LOOP.ECLB = 1, the contents of the assigned outgoing channel at
ports XL1/XL2 respective XDOP/XDON is set equal to the idle
channel code selected by this register.
Additionally, the specified pattern overwrites the contents of all
channels of the outgoing PCM frame selected via the idle channel
registers ICB1…ICB3. IDL7 will be transmitted first.
Transmit DL-Bit Register 1-3 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H, 00H, 00H
7
0
XDL1
XDL2
XDL3
XDL17 XDL16 XDL15 XDL14 XDL13 XDL12 XDL11 XDL10
(x2C)
(x2D)
(x2E)
XDL27 XDL26 XDL25 XDL24 XDL23 XDL22 XDL21 XDL20
XDL37 XDL36 XDL35 XDL34 XDL33 XDL32 XDL31 XDL30
XDL1…XDL3… Transmit FS/DL-Bit Data
The DL-bit register access is enabled by setting bits FMR1.EDL = 1.
With the transmit multiframe begin an interrupt ISR1.XMB is
generated and the contents of these registers XDL1-3 will be copied
into a shadow register. The contents will subsequently sent out in the
data stream of the next outgoing multiframe if no transparent mode is
enabled. XDL10 will be sent out first.
In F4 frame format only XDL10+XDL11 will be transmitted. In F24
frame format XDL10-XDL23 will be shifted out. In F72 frame format
XDL10-XDL37 will be transmitted.
The transmit multiframe begin interrupt (XMB) requests that these
registers should be serviced. If requests for new information will be
ignored, current contents will be repeated.
Semiconductor Group
310
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Clear Channel Register (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H, 00H, 00H
7
0
CCB1
CCB2
CCB3
CH1
CH9
CH2
CH10
CH18
CH3
CH11
CH19
CH4
CH12
CH20
CH5
CH13
CH21
CH6
CH14
CH22
CH7
CH15
CH23
CH8
CH16
CH24
(x2F)
(x30)
(x31)
CH17
CH1…CH24…
Channel Selection Bits
0… Normal operation. Bit robbing information and Zero Code
Suppression (ZCS, B7 stuffing) may change contents of the
selected speech/data channel if assigned modes are enabled
via bits FMR5.EIBR and FMR0.XC1/0.
1… Clear channel mode. Contents of selected speech/data
channel will not be overwritten by internal or external bit robbing
and ZCS information. Transmission of channel assigned
signaling and control of pulse density is applied by the user.
Idle Channel Register (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H, 00H, 00H, 00H
7
0
ICB1
ICB2
ICB3
IC1
IC9
IC2
IC10
IC18
IC3
IC4
IC12
IC20
IC5
IC6
IC7
IC15
IC23
IC8
(x32)
(x33)
(x34)
IC11
IC19
IC13
IC21
IC14
IC22
IC16
IC24
IC17
IC1…IC24…
Idle Channel Selection Bits
These bits define the channels (time-slots) of the outgoing PCM
frame to be altered.
0… Normal operation.
1… Idle channel mode. The contents of the selected channel is
overwritten by the idle channel code defined via register IDLE.
Semiconductor Group
311
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Line Interface Mode 0 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
LIM0
XFB
XDOS
EQON
LL
MAS
(x36)
XFB…
Transmit Full Bauded Mode
Only applicable for dual rail mode (bit LIM1.DRS = 1).
0…Output signals XDOP/XDON are half bauded (normal operation).
1…Output signals XDOP/XDON are full bauded.
Note: If CMI coding is selected (FMR0.XC1/0=01) this bit has to be
cleared.
XDOS…
Transmit Data Out Sense
0… Output signals XDOP/XDON are active low. Output XOID is
active high (normal operation).
1… Output signals XDOP/XDON are active high. Output XOID is
active low.
Note: If CMI coding is selected (FMR0.XC1/0=01) this bit has to be
cleared.
The transmit frame marker XFM is independent of this bit.
EQON…
LL…
Receive Equalizer On
0… -10 dB Receiver: short haul mode
1… -36 dB Receiver: long haul mode
Local Loop
0 … Normal operation
1 … Local loop active. The local loopback mode disconnects the
receive lines RL1/RL2 respective RDIP/RDIN from the receiver.
Instead of the signals coming from the line the data provided by
system interface are routed through the analog receiver back to
the system interface. The unipolar bit stream will be
undisturbed transmitted on the line. Receiver and transmitter
coding must be identical. Operates in analog and digital line
interface mode. In analog line interface mode data is transfered
through the complete analog receiver.
MAS…
Master Mode
0 … Slave mode
Semiconductor Group
312
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
1 … Master mode on. Setting this bit the DCO-R circuitry is
frequency synchronized to the clock (1.544 or 2.048 MHz)
supplied by SYNC. If this pin is connected to VSS or VDD the
DCO-R circuitry is centered and no receive jitter attenuation is
performed. The generated clocks are stable.
Line Interface Mode 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
LIM1
RIL2
RIL1
RIL0
DCOC
JATT
RL
DRS
(x37)
RIL2…RIL0…
Receive Input Threshold
Only valid if analog line interface is selected (LIM1.DRS=0.
No signal will be declared if the voltage between pins RL1 and RL2
drops below the limits programmed via bits RIL2-0 and the received
data stream has no transition for a period defined in the PCD register.
The threshold where no signal will be declared is programmable via
the RIL2-0 bits depending of bit LIM0.EQON.
LIM0.EQON = 0 (short haul mode):
000 = 0.9 V
001 = 0.7 V
010 = 0.6 V
011 = 0.4 V
100 = 0.3 V
101 = 0.2 V
110 = 0.07 V
111 = 0.05 V
LIM0.EQON = 1 (long haul mode):
000 = 1.7 V
001 = 0.8 V
010 = 0.8 V
011 = 0.5 V
100 = 0.5 V
101 = 0.2 V
110 = 0.1 V
111 = not assigned
Semiconductor Group
313
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
DCOC …
DCO-R Control
0… 1.544 MHz reference clock for the DCO-R circuitry provided on
pin SYNC.
1… 2.048 MHz reference clock for the DCO-R circuitry provided on
pin SYNC.
JATT…RL...
Transmit Jitter Attenuator / Remote Loop
00 = Normal operation. The transmit jitter attenuator is disabled.
Transmit data will bypass the buffer.
01 = Remote Loop active without transmit jitter attenuator enabled.
Transmit data will bypass the buffer.
10 = not assigned
11 = Remote Loop and jitter attenuator active. Received data from
pins RL1/2 or RDIP/N or ROID will be sent jitter free on ports
XL1/2 or XDOP/N or XOID. The dejittered clock is generated by
the DCO-X circuitry.
DRS…
Dual Rail Select
0 = The ternary interface is selected. Multifunction ports RL1/2 and
XL1/2 become analog in/outputs.
1 = The digital dual rail interface is selected. Received data is
latched on multifunction ports RDIP/RDIN while transmit data is
output on pins XDOP/XDON.
Pulse Count Detection Register (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
PCD
PCD7
PCD0
(x38)
PCD7…PCD0… Pulse Count Detection
A LOS alarm (red alarm) will be detected if the incoming data stream
has no transitions for a programmable number T consecutive pulse
positions. The number T is programmable via the PCD register and
can be calculated as follows:
T= 16(N+1) ; with 0 =< N =< 255.
The maximum time is: 256 × 16 × 648 ns = 2.65 ms. Every detected
pulse will reset the internal pulse counter. The counter will be clocked
with the receive clock RCLK.
Semiconductor Group
314
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Pulse Count Recovery (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
PCR
PCR7
PCR0
(x39)
PCR7…PCR0… Pulse Count Recovery
A LOS alarm (red alarm) will be cleared if a pulse density is detected
in the received bit stream.The number of pulses M which must occur
in the predefined PCD time interval is programmable via the PCR
register and can be calculated as follows:
M = N+1 ; with 0 =< N =< 255.
The time interval starts with the first detected pulse transition. With
every received pulse a counter will be incremented and the actual
counter is compared with the contents of PCR register. If the pulse
number >= the PCR value the LOS alarm will be reset otherwise the
alarm will still be active. In this case the next detected pulse transition
will start a new time interval.
An additional Loss of Signal recovery condition may be selected by
register LIM2.LOS1.
Line Interface Mode 2 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
LIM2
LBO2
LBO1
SCF
ELT
LOS1
(x3A)
LBO2...LBO1… Line Build-Out
In long haul applications LIM0.EQON = 1 a transmit filter can be
optionally placed on the transmit path to attenuate the data on pins
XL1/2. Selecting the transmitter attenuation is possible in steps of
7.5 dB @772kHz which is according to FCC 68 or ANSI T1. 403.
To meet the line build-out defined by ANSI T1.403 registers XPM2-0
should be programmed as follows:
00… 0 dB
01… -7.5 dB
10… -15 dB
--> XPM2-0 = 20H , 02H , 51H
--> XPM2-0 = 20H , 01H , 51H
Semiconductor Group
315
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
11… -22.5 dB --> XPM2-0 = 20H , 01H , 50H
SCF…
ELT…
Select Corner Frequency of DCO-R
Setting this bit will reduce the corner frequency of the DCO-R circuit
by the factor of ten to 0.6 Hz.
Note: Reducing the corner frequency of the DCO-R circuitry will
increase the synchronization time before the frequencies are
synchronized.
Enable Loop-Timed
0… normal operation
1… Transmit clock is generated from the clock supplied by MCLK
which is synchronized to the extracted receive route clock. In this
configuration the transmit elastic buffer has to be enabled. Refer to
register FMR5.XTM. For correct operation of loop timed the remote
loop (bit LIM1.RL = 0) must be inactive and bit CMR1.DXSS must be
cleared.
LOS1…
Loss of Signal Recovery condition
0… The LOS alarm will be cleared if the predefined pulse density
(register PCR) is detected during the time interval which is
defined by register PCD.
1… Additionally to the recovery condition described above a LOS
alarm will only be cleared if the pulse density is fulfilled and no
more than 15 contigious zeros are detected during the recovery
interval. (according to TR-NWT 499).
Loop Code Register 1 (Read/Write)
Vaue after RESET: 00H
7
0
LCR1
EPRM XPRBS LDC1
LDC0
LAC1
LAC0
FLLB
(x3B)
LLBP
EPRM…
Enable Pseudo Random Bit Sequence Monitor
0… Pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS) monitor is disabled.
1… PRBS is enabled. Setting this bit enables incrementing the bit
error counter BEC with each detected PRBS bit error. With any
change of state of the PRBS internal synchronization status an
interrupt ISR3.LLBSC is generated. The current status of the
PRBS synchronizer is indicated by bit FRS1.LLBAD.
Semiconductor Group
316
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
XPRBS…
Transmit Pseudo Random Bit Sequence
A one in this bit position enables transmitting of a pseudo random bit
sequence to the remote end. Depending on pit LLBP the PRBS is
generated according to 215 -1 or 220-1 ( ITU-T O. 151).
LDC1…0...
Length Deactuate (Down) Code
These bits defines the length of the LLB deactuate code which is
programmable in register LCR2.
00… length: 5 bit
01… length: 6 bit, 2 bit, 3 bit
10… length : 7 bit
11… length : 8 bit, 2 bit, 4bit
LAC1…0...
Length Actuate (Up) Code
These bits defines the length of the LLB actuate code which is
programmable in register LCR3.
00… length: 5 bit
01… length: 6 bit, 2 bit, 3 bit
10… length : 7 bit
11… length : 8 bit, 2 bit, 4bit
FLLB…
Framed Line Loopback / Invert PRBS
Depending on bit LCR1.XPRBS this bit enables different functions:
LCR1.XPRBS=0:
0… The line loopback code is transmitted including framing bits.
LLB code overwrites the FS/DL bits.
1… The line loopback code is transmitted unframed. LLB code will
not overwrite the FS/DL bits.
Invert PRBS
LCR1.XPRBS=1:
0… The generated PRBS is transmitted not inverted.
1… The PRBS is transmitted inverted.
LLBP…
Line Loopback Pattern
LCR1.XPRBS=0
0… Fixed line loopback code according to ANSI T1. 403 .
1… Enable user programmable line loopback code via register
LCR2/3.
Semiconductor Group
317
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
LCR1.XPRBS=1 or LCR1.EPRM = 1
0… 215 -1
1… 220 -1
Loop Code Register 2 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
LCR2
LDC7
LDC0
(x3C)
LDC7…LDC0… Line Loopback Deactuate Code
If enabled by bit FMR5.XLD the LLB deactuate code will automatically
repeat until the LLB generator is stopped. Transmit data is overwritten
by the LLB code. LDC0 is transmittted last. For correct operations bit
LCR1.XPRBS has to cleared.
Loop Code Register 3 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
LCR3
LAC7
LAC0
(x3D)
LAC7…LAC0… Line Loopback Actuate Code
If enabled by bit FMR5.XLU the LLB actuate code will automatically
repeat until the LLB generator is stopped. Transmit data is overwritten
by the LLB code. LAC0 is transmittted last. For correct operations bit
LCR1.XPRBS has to cleared.
System Interface Control 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
SIC1
SSC1
SSD1
RBS1
RBS0
SSC0
BIM
XBS1
XBS0
(x3E)
SSC1...0…
Select System Clock
SIC1.SSC1/0 and SIC2.SSC2 define the clocking rate on the system
highway.
SIC2.SSC2 = 0:
Semiconductor Group
318
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
00…2.048 MHz
01…4.096 MHz
10…8.192 MHz
11…16.384 MHz
SIC2.SSC2 = 1:
00…1.544 MHz
01…3.088 MHz
10…6.176 MHz
11…12.352 MHz
SSD1 …
Select System Data Rate 1
SIC1.SSD1, FMR1.SSD0 and SIC2.SSC2 define the data rate on the
system highway. Programming SSD1/SSD0 and corresponding data
rate is shown below.
SIC2.SSC2 = 0:
00…2.048 MBit/s
01…4.096 MBit/s
10…8.192 MBit/s
11…16.384 MBit/s
SIC2.SSC2 = 1:
00…1.544 MBit/s
01…3.088 MBit/s
10…6.176 MBit/s
11…12.352 MBit/s
RBS1...0…
Receive Buffer Size
00… buffer size : 2 frames
01… buffer size : 1 frame
10… buffer size : 96 bits
11… By-pass of receive elastic store
BIM …
Bit Interleaved Mode
Only applicable if bit SIC2.SSC2 is cleared. If SIC2.SSC2 is set high,
the bit interleaved mode is automatically performed.
0…byte interleaved mode
1…bit interleaved mode
Semiconductor Group
319
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
XBS1...0…
Transmit Buffer Size
00… By-pass of transmit elastic store
01… buffer size : 1 frame
10… buffer size : 2 frames
11… buffer size : 96 bits
System Interface Control 2 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
SIC2
FFS
SSF
CRB
SSC2
SICS2
SICS1
SICS0
(x3F)
FFS …
Force Freeze Signaling
Setting this bit disables updating of the receive signaling buffer and
current signaling information is frozen. After resetting this bit and
receiving a complete superframe updating of the signaling buffer is
started again. The freeze signaling status could be also automatically
generated by detecting the Loss of Signal alarm or a Loss of Frame
Alignment or a receive slip (only if external register access via RSIG
is enabled). This automatic freeze signaling function is logically ored
with this bit.
The current internal freeze signaling status is output on pin RP(A-D)
/ pin function FREEZ which is selected by PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 110.
Additionally this status is also available in register SIS.SFS.
SSF …
CRB …
Serial Signaling Format
Only applicable if pin function R/XSIG is selected.
0… Bits 1-4 in all time-slots except time-slot 0 are cleared.
1… Bits 1-4 in all time-slots except time-slot 0 are set high.
Center Receive Elastic Buffer
Only applicable if the time-slot assigner is disabled ( PC1-4.RPC2-0
= 001 ) , no external or internal synchronous pulse receive is
generated.
A transition from low to high will force a receive slip and the read-
pointer of the receive elastic buffer is centered. The delay through the
buffer is set to one half of the current buffer size. It should be hold high
for at least two 1.544 MHz periods before it is cleared.
SSC2 …
Select System Clock
Semiconductor Group
320
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Setting this bit together with SIC1.SSC1/0 enables the system
interface running with a clock of 1.544 , 3.088, 6.176 or 12.352 MHz.
Refer also to register SIC1.SSC1/0.
SICS2 …0
System Interface Channel Select
Only applicable if the system clock rate is greater than 1.544 /
2.048MHz .
Received data is transmitted on pin RDO / RSIG or received on XDI
/ XSIG with the selected system data rate. If the data rate is greater
than 1.544 / 2.048 MBit/s the data is output or sampled in half , a
quarter or a 1/8 of the 125 µsec. They will not be repeated. The time
where the data is active during a 488 / 648 nsec time-slot is called in
the following a channel phase. RDO / RSIG are cleared while XDI /
XSIG are ignored for the remaining time of the 488 / 648 nsec or for
the remaining channel phases. The channel phases are selectable
with these bits.
000 …data active in channel phase 1, valid if system data rate is 16 /
8 / 4 or 12 / 6 / 3 MBit/s
001 …data active in channel phase 2, valid if data rate is 16 / 8 / 4 or
12 / 6 / 3 MBit/s
010 …data active in channel phase 3, valid if data rate is 16 / 8 or 12
/ 6 MBit/s
011 …data active in channel phase 4, valid if data rate is 16 / 8 or 12
/ 6 MBit/s
100 …data active in channel phase 5 , valid if data rate is 16 or 12
MBit/s
101 …data active in channel phase 6 , valid if data rate is 16 or 12
MBit/s
110 …data active in channel phase 7, valid if data rate is 16 or 12
MBit/s
111 …data active in channel phase 8 , valid if data rate is 16 or 12
MBit/s
Semiconductor Group
321
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
System Interface Control 3(Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
SIC3
CMI
RESX
RESR
TTRF
DAF
(x40)
CMI…
Select CMI Precoding
Only valid if CMI code (FMR0.XC1/0=01) is selected. This bit defines
the CMI precoding and influences only the transmit data and not the
receive data.
0… CMI with B8ZS precoding
1… CMI without B8ZS precoding
RESX…
Rising Edge Synchronous Pulse Transmit
Depending on this bit all transmit system interface data and marker
are clocked off or sampled with the selected active edge.
0… SYPX is latched with the first falling (active) edge of the SCLKX
clock.
1… SYPX is latched with the first rising (active) edge of the SCLKX
clock.
The SYPX pin function is selected by PC(1-4).XC(2-0) = 0000.
RESR…
Rising Edge Synchronous Pulse Receive
Depending on this bit all receive system interface data and marker are
clocked off with the selected active edge.
0… SYPR is latched with the first falling edge of the SCLKR clock.
1… SYPR is latched with the first rising edge of the SCLKR clock.
The SYPR pin function is selected by PC(1-4).RPC(2-0) = 000.
TTR Register Function
TTRF…
DAF…
Setting this bit the function of the TTR1-4 registers are changed. A
one in each TTR register will force the XSIGM marker high for the
respective time-slot and controls sampling of the time-slots provided
by pin XSIG. XSIG is selected by PC(1-4).XPC(2-0).
Disable Automatic Freeze
0… Signaling is automaticly frozen if one of the following alarms
occured: Loss of Signal (FRS0.LOS), Loss of Frame Alignment
(FRS0.LFA) , or receive slips (ISR3.RSP/N).
Semiconductor Group
322
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
1… Automatic freezing of signaling data is disabled. Updating of the
signaling buffer is also done if one of the above described alarm
conditions is active. However, updating of the signaling buffer is
stopped if SIC2.FFS is set. Significant only if the serial signaling
access is enabled.
Clock Mode Register 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
CMR1
DRSS1 DRSS0
RS1
RS0
DCS
STF
DXJA
DXSS
(x44)
DRSS1 ... 0 …
DCO-R Synchronization Clock Source
These bits select the reference clock source for the DCO-R circuitry.
00… receive reference clock generated by the DPLL of channel 1
01… receive reference clock generated by the DPLL of channel 2
10… receive reference clock generated by the DPLL of channel 3
11… receive reference clock generated by the DPLL of channel 4
Note: After Reset all DCO-R circuitries will synchronize on the clock
sourced by the DPLL of channel 1 . Each channel have to be
configured individually.
If LIM0.MAS is set the DCO-R circuitry will synchronize on the
clock applied to port SYNC.
RS1 ... 0 …
Select RCLK Source
These bits select the source of RCLK.
00… extracted receive clock, generated by the DPLL
01… extracted receive clock with the option in case of an active LOS
alarm this pin is set high.
10… dejittered 1.544 or 2.048 MHz clock generated by the internal
DCO-R circuitry. The frequency depends on SIC2.SSC2.
11… dejittered 6.176 or 8.192 MHz clock generated by the internal
DCO-R circuitry. The frequency depends on SIC2.SSC2.
DCS …
Disable Clock Switching
In Slave mode (LIM0.MAS = 0) the DCO-R is synchronized on the
recovered route clock. In case of loss of signal LOS the DCO-R
Semiconductor Group
323
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
switches automatically to the clock sourced by port SYNC. Setting
this bit automatic switching from RCLK to SYNC is disabled.
STF …
Select TCLK Frequency
Only applicable if the pin function TCLK port XP(A-D) is selected by
PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 011. Data on XL1/2 , XDOP/N, XOID are clocked
off with TCLK.
0… 1.544 MHz
1… 6.176 MHz
DXJA…
DXSS …
Disable Internal Transmit Jitter Attenuation
Setting this bit disables the transmit jitter attenuation. Reading the
data out of the transmit elastic buffer and transmitting on XL1/2
(XDOP/N / XOID) is done with the clock provided on pin TCLK. In
transmit elastic buffer bypass mode the transmit clock is taken from
SCLKX, independent of this bit.
DCO-X Synchronization Clock Source
0… The DCO-X circuitry of each channel will synchronize to the
internal reference clock which is sourced by SCLKX/R or
RCLK. Since there are many reference clock opportunities the
following internal priorization in descenting order from left to
right is realized: LIM1.RL > CMR2.DXSS > LIM2.ELT > current
working clock of transmit system interface.
If one of these bits is set the corresponding reference clock is
taken.
1… DCO-X synchronizes to an external reference clock provided by
pin XP(A-D) pin function TCLK, if no remote loop is active.
TCLK is selected by PC(1-4).XPC(2-0) = 011.
Clock Mode Register 2 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
CMR2
DCF
IRSP
IRSC
IXSP
IXSC
(x45)
DCF …
DCO-R Center- Frequency Disabled
0… The DCO-R circuitry may be frequency centered
- in master mode if no reference clock on pin SYNC is provided
or
- in slave mode if a loss of signal occurs in combination with no
Semiconductor Group
324
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
clock on pin SYNC or
- a gapped clock is provided at pin RCLKI and this clock is
inactive or stopped.
1… The center function of the DCO-R circuitry is disabled. The
generated clock (DCO-R) is frequency frozen in that moment
when no clock is available at pin SYNC or pin RCLKI. The
DCO-R circuitry will starts synchronization as soon as a clock at
pins SYNC or RCLKI appears.
IRSP …
Internal Receive System Frame Sync Pulse
0… The frame sync pulse for the receive system interface is
sourced by SYPR.
1… The frame sync pulse for the receive system interface is
internally sourced by the DCO-R circuitry of each channel. This
internally generated frame sync could be output active low on
pin RP(A-D). RPC(2-0) = 001. Programming the receive
time-slot offset is also done in the same way as it is done for the
external SYPR. For correct operation bit IRSC must be set.
SYPR is ignored.
IRSC …
Internal Receive System Clock
Only applicable if bit GPC1.SMM is cleared. If GPC1.SMM is set
SCLKR1 of channel 1 provides the working clock for all four channels.
0… The working clock for the receive system interface is sourced by
SCLKR of each channel or in receive elastic buffer bypass
mode from the corresponding extracted receive clock RCLK.
1… The working clock for the receive system interface is sourced
internally by DCO-R or in bypass mode by the extracted receive
clock of each channel. SCLKR is ignored.
IXSP …
Internal Transmit System Frame Sync Pulse
0… The frame sync pulse for the transmit system interface is
sourced by SYPX.
1… The frame sync pulse for the transmit system interface is
internally sourced by the DCO-R circuitry of each channel.
Additionally, the external XMFS signal defines the transmit
multiframe begin. XMFS is enabled or disabled via the
multifunction ports. For correct operation bits CMR2.IXSC /
IRSC must be set. SYPX is ignored.
IXSC …
Internal Transmit System Clock
Semiconductor Group
325
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Only applicable if bit GPC1.SMM is cleared. If GPC1.SMM is set
SCLKX1 of channel 1 provides the working clock for all four channels.
0… The working clock for the transmit system interface is sourced
by SCLKX of each channel.
1… The working clock for the transmit system interface is sourced
internally by the working clock of the receive system interface.
SCLKX is ignored.
Global Configuration Register (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
GCR
VIS
SCI
SES
ECMC
PD
(x46)
VIS…
Masked Interrupts Visible
0… Masked interrupt status bits are not visible in registers ISR0-4.
1… Masked interrupt status bits are visible in ISR0-4, but they are
not visible in registers GIS and CIS.
SCI…
Status Change Interrupt
0… Interrupts will be generated either on coming or going of the
internal interrupt source.
1… The following interrupts will be activated if enabled with
detecting and recovering of the internal interrupt source:
ISR2.LOS , ISR2.AIS and ISR0.PDEN
SES…
Select External Second Timer
0… internal second timer selected
1… external second timer selected
Error Counter Mode COFA
ECMC…
0… not defined; reserved for future applications.
1… A Change of Frame or Multiframe Alignment COFA is detected
since the last re-synchronization. The events are accumulated
in the COFA event counter COEC.1-0.
Multiframe periods received in the asynchronous state are
accumulated in the COFA event counter COEC.7-2.
An overflow of each counter is disabled.
Semiconductor Group
326
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
PD…
Power Down
Switches the appropriate single FALC(1-4) between power up and
power down mode.
0… Power Up
1… Power Down
All outputs are driven inactive, except the multifunction ports,
which are driven high.
Errored Second Mask (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: FFH
7
0
ESM
LFA
FER
CER
AIS
LOS
CVE
SLIP
(x47)
ESM
Errored Second Mask
This register functions as an additional mask register for the interrupt
status bit Errored Second (ISR3.ES). A ‘1’ in a bit position of ESM sets
the mask active for the interrupt status.
Disable Error Counter (Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
DEC
DRBD
DCOEC DBEC
DCEC
DEBC
DCVC
DFEC
(x60)
DRBD
Disable Receive Buffer Delay
This bit has to be set before reading the register RBD. It will be
automatically reset if RBD has been read.
DCOEC…
DBEC…
Disable COFA Event Counter
Disable PRBS Bit Error Counter
Only valid if LCR1.EPRM=1 and FMR1.ECM are reset.
Semiconductor Group
327
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
DCEC…
DEBC…
DCVC…
DFEC…
Disable CRC Error Counter
Disable Errored Block Counter
Disable Code Violation Counter
Disable Framing Error Counter
These bits are only valid if FMR1.ECM is cleared. They have to be set
before reading the error counters. They will be automatically reset if
the corresponding error counter high byte has been read. With the
rising edge of these bits the error counters are latched and then
cleared.
Semiconductor Group
328
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Transmit Signaling Register (Write)
Value after RESET: not defined
7
0
XS1
XS2
XS3
XS4
XS5
XS6
XS7
XS8
XS9
XS10
XS11
XS12
A1
B1
C1/A2
C3/A6
D1/B2
D3/B6
A2/A3
A4/A7
B2/B3
B4/B7
C2/A4
C4/A8
D2/B4
D4/B8
(x70)
(x71)
A3/A5
A5/A9
B3/B5
B5/B9
C5/A10 D5/B10 A6/A11 B6/B11 C6/A12 D6/B12 (x72)
A7/A13 B7/B13 C7/A14 D7/B14 A8/A15 B8/B15 C8/A16 D8/B16 (x73)
A9/A17 B9/B17 C9/A18 D9/B18 A10/A19 B10/B19 C10/A20 D10/B20 (x74)
A11/A21 B11/B21 C11/A22 D11/B22 A12/A23 B12/B23 C12/A24 D12/B24 (x75)
A13/A1 B13/B1 C13/A2 D13/B2 A14/A3 B14/B3 C14/A4 D14/B4 (x76)
A15/A5 B15/B5 C15/A6 D15/B6 A16/A7 B16/B7 C16/A8 D16/B8 (x77)
A17/A9 B17/B9 C17/A10 D17/B10 A18/A11 B18/B11 C18/A12 D18/B12 (x78)
A19/A13 B19/B13 C19/A14 D19/B14 A20/A15 B20/B15 C20/A16 D20/B16 (x79)
A21/A17 B21/B17 C21/A18 D21/B18 A22/A19 B22/B19 C22/A20 D22/B20 (x7A)
A23/A21 B23/B21 C23/A22 D23/B22 A24/A23 B24/B23 C24/A24 D24/B24 (x7B)
Transmit Signaling Register 1-12
The transmit signaling register access is enabled by setting bit FMR5.EIBR = 1. Each
register contains the bit robbing information for 8 DS0 channels. With the transmit CAS
empty interrupt ISR1.CASE the contents of these registers will be copied into a shadow
register. The contents will subsequently sent out in the corresponding bit positions of the
next outgoing multiframe. XS1.7 will be sent out first in channel 1 frame 1 and XS12.0
will be sent out last. The transmit CAS empty interrupt ISR1.CASE requests that these
registers should be serviced within the next 3 ms. If requests for new information are
ignored, current contents will be repeated.
If access to XS1-12 registers is done without control of the interrupt ISR1.CASE and the
write access to these registers is done exact in that moment when this interrupt is
generated, data may be lost.
Note: A software reset (CMDR.XRES) will reset these registers.
Semiconductor Group
329
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Port Configuration 1-4 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
PC1
PC2
PC3
PC4
RPC2
RPC2
RPC2
RPC2
RPC1
RPC1
RPC1
RPC1
RPC0
RPC0
RPC0
RPC0
XPC2
XPC2
XPC2
XPC2
XPC1
XPC1
XPC1
XPC1
XPC0
XPC0
XPC0
XPC0
(x80)
(x81)
(x82)
(x83)
RPC2 ...0…
Receive multifunction port configuration
The multifunction ports RP(A-D) are bidirectional. After Reset these
ports are configured as inputs. With the selection of the pin function
the In/Output configuration is also achieved. The input function SYPR
may only be selected once, it should not be selected twice or more.
Register PC1 configures port RPA,while PC2 --> port RPB,
PC3 --> port RPC and PC4 --> port RPD.
000…SYPR: Synchronous Pulse Receive (Input)
Together with register RC1/0 SYPR defines the frame begin on
the receive system interface. Because of the offset
programming the SYPR and the RFM pin function could not be
selected in parallel.
001…RFM : Receive Frame Sync (Output)
CMR2.IRSP = 0: This receive frame marker could be active
high for a 1.544 MHz or 2.048 MHz period during any bit
position of the current frame. Programming is done with
registers RC1/0. The internal time-slot assigner is disabled.
CMR2.IRSP = 1: Internal generated frame synchronization
pulse generated by the DCO-R circuitry. Together with
registers RC1/0 the frame begin on the receive system
interface is defined. This frame synchronization pulse is active
low 1.544 MHz or 2.048 MHz period.
010…RMFB : Receive Multiframe Begin (Output)
Marks the beginning of every received multiframe or optionally
every 12 frames (active high).
011…RSIGM : Receive Signaling Marker (Output)
Marks the time-slots which are defined by register RTR1-4 of
every frame at port RDO. Optionally in CAS-BR applications
the robbed bits are marked every six frames.
Semiconductor Group
330
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
100…RSIG : Receive Signaling Data (Output)
The received CAS multiframe is transmitted on this pin.
Time-slots on RSIG correlates directly to the time-slot
assignment on RDO. In system interface multiplex mode all
four received signaling data streams are merged into a single
rail data stream byte or bit interleaved on RSIG1.
101…DLR : Data Link Bit Receive (Output)
Marks the DL-bit position within the data stream on RDO.
110…FREEZ : Freeze Signaling (Output)
The freeze signaling status is active high by detecting a Loss of
Signal alarm, or a Loss of Frame Alignment or a receive slip
(pos. or neg.). It will hold high for at least one complete
multiframe after the alarm disappears. Setting SIC2.FFS
enforces a high on pin FREEZ.
111…RFSP : Receive Frame Synchronous Pulse (Output)
Marks the frame begin in the receivers synchrounous state.
This marker is active low for 648 ns with a frequency of 8 kHz.
XPC2 ...0…
Transmit multifunction port configuration
The multifunction ports XP(A-D) are bidirectional. After Reset these
ports are configured as inputs. With the selection of the pin function
the In/Output configuration is also achieved. Each of the four different
input functions ( SYPX, XMFS, XSIG, TCLK ) may only be selected
once. No input function should be selected twice or more. SYPX and
XMFS should not be selected in parallel. Register PC1 configures
port XPA,while PC2 --> port XPB, PC3 --> port XPC and PC4 --> port
XPD.
000…SYPX: Synchronous Pulse Transmit (Input)
Together with register XC1/0 SYPX defines the frame begin on
the transmit system interface ports XDI and XSIG.
001…XMFS : Transmit Multiframe Synchronization (Input)
Together with register XC1/0 XMFS defines the frame and
multiframe begin on the transmit system interface ports XDI
and XSIG. Depending on PC5.CXMFS the signal on XMFS is
active high or low.
010…XSIG : Transmit Signaling Data (Input)
Input for transmit signaling data received from the signaling
highway. In system interface multiplex mode latching of the
data stream containing the 4 signaling multiframes is done byte
or bit interleaved on port XDI1. Optionally sampling of XSIG
data is controlled by the active high XSIGM marker.
Semiconductor Group
331
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
011…TCLK : Transmit Clock (Input)
A 1.544 / 6.176 MHz clock has to be sourced by the system if
the internal generated transmit clock (DCO-X) should not be
used. Optionally this input functions as a synchronization clock
for the DCO-X circuitry with a frequencyof 1.544 MHz.
100…XMFB : Transmit Multiframe Begin (Output)
Marks the beginning of every transmit multiframe or optionally
every 12 frames.
101…XSIGM : Transmit Signaling Marker (Output)
Marks the time-slots which are defined by register TTR1-4 of
every frame at port XDI. Optionally in CAS-BR applications the
robbed bits are marked every six frames.
110…DLX : Data Link Bit Transmit (Output)
Marks the DL-bit position within the data stream on XDI.
111…XCLK : Transmit Line Clock (Output)
Frequency: 1.544 MHz
Port Configuration 5 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
PC5
CXMFS CSXP
CSRP
CRP
(x84)
CXMFS …
CSXP …
CSRP …
CRP …
Configure XMFS Port
0… Port XMFS is active low.
1… Port XMFS is active high.
Configure SCLKX Port
0… SCLKX : Input
1… SCLKX : Output
Configure SCLKR Port
0… SCLKR : Input
1… SCLKR : Output
Configure RCLK Port
0… RCLK : Input
1… RCLK : Output
Semiconductor Group
332
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Global Port Configuration 1 (Read/Write)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
GPC1
SMM
CSFP1 CSFP0
FSS1
FSS0
R1S1
R1S0
(85)
SMM …
System Interface Multiplex Mode
Setting this bit enables a single rail data stream of 16.384 / 8.192 /
12.352 or 6.176 MBit/s containg all four T1 frames. The receive
system interface for all four channels is running with the clock
provided on SCLKR1 and the frame sync pulse provided on SYPR1.
The transmit system interface is running with SCLKX1 and SYPX1.
Data will be transmitted / accepted in a byte or bit interleaved format.
Bit interleaving is valid with the 16.384 / 8.192 / 12.352 or 6.176 MHz
clocking rates. However byte interleaving is only applicable with the
16.384 or 8.192 MHz clock. In the system interface multiplex mode
the following pin configuration has to be fulfilled and must be
identically for all for 4 channels:
- SYPR1 has to be provided on pin RPA1
- SYPX1 has to be provided on pin XPA1 or
- XMFS has to be provided on pin XPB1
- XSIG has to be provided on pin XPC1
- RSIG will be output on pin RPB1
Each of the four channels have to be configured equally:
- clocking rate : 16.384 / 8.192 / 12.352 MHz or 6.176 MHz
SIC1.SSC1/0 and SIC2.SSC2
- data rate : 16.384 / 8.192 / 12.352MBit/s or 6.176 MBit/s,
SIC1.SSD1, FMR1.SSD0
- time-slot offset programming : RC1/0 , XC1/0
- receive buffer size : SIC1.RBS1/0 = 00 (2 frames)
e.g. : system clock rate = 8.192 MHz : SIC1.SSC1/0 = 10 and system
data rate = 8.192 MBit/s : SIC1.SSD1 = 1 , FMR1.SSD0 = 0
The multiplexed data stream is internal logically ored. Therefore the
selection of the active channel phase have to be configured different
for each single channel FALC(1-4). Programming is done with
SIC2.SICS2-0.
for FALC1: SIC2.SICS2-0 = 000, selects the first channel phase
for FALC2: SIC2.SICS2-0 = 001, selects the second channel phase
Semiconductor Group
333
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
for FALC3: SIC2.SICS2-0 = 010, selects the third channel phase
for FALC4: SIC2.SICS2-0 = 011, selects the fourth channel phase
byte interleaved data format: SIC1.BIM = 0
XDI/RDO: F1-TS0, F2-TS0, F3-TS0, F4-TS0, F1-TS1, ... F4-TS31
X/RSIG: F1-STS0, F2-STS0, F3-STS0, F4-STS0, F1-... F4-STS31
or : bit interleaved data format: SIC1.BIM = 1
XDI/RDO: F1-TS0-B1, F2-TS0-B1, F3-TS0-B1, F4-TS0-B1,
F1-TS0-B2, ... F4-TS31-B8
X/RSIG: F1-STS0-B1, F2-STS0-B1, F3-STS0-B1, F4-STS0-B1, F1-
STS0-B2, ... F4-STS31-B8
with : F = Framer, TS = Time-Slot, STS = Signaling Time-Slot, B = Bit
In system interface multiplex mode signals on RDO2-4 and RSIG2-4
are undefined, while signals on SCLKR2-4, SYPR2-4, SCLKX2-4,
SYPX2-4, XDI2-4 and XSIG2-4 are ignored.
CSFP1 ... 0 …
Configure SEC / FSC Port
The FSC pulse is generated if the DCO-R circuitry of the selected
channel is active (CMR2.IRSC = 1 or CMR1.RS1/0 = 10 or 11).
00 … SEC : Input , active high
01 … SEC : Output, active high
10 … FSC: Output , active high
11 … FSC: Output, active low
SEC / FSC Source
FSS1 ... 0 …
One of the four internal generated dejittered 8 kHz clocks or second
timers (SEC) are output on port SEC / FSC.
GPC1.CSFP1 = 1:
00 … FSC : 8 kHz sourced by channel 1
01 … FSC : 8 kHz sourced by channel 2
10 … FSC : 8 kHz sourced by channel 3
11 … FSC : 8 kHz sourced by channel 4
GPC1.CSFP1 = 0:
00 … SEC : second timer sourced by channel 1
01 … SEC: second timer sourced by channel 2
10 … SEC: second timer sourced by channel 3
Semiconductor Group
334
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
11 … SEC: second timer sourced by channel 4
R1S1 ... 0 …
RCLK1 Source
One of the four internal generated receive route clocks are output on
port RCLK1. Outputs RCLK2-4 are valid independent of these bits.
Refer to bit CMR1.RS1/0.
00 … extracted receive clock of channel 1
01 … extracted receive clock of channel 2
10… extracted receive clock of channel 3
11… extracted receive clock of channel
Semiconductor Group
335
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
8.5
Status Register Description
Table 31
Status Register Address Arrangement
Address
Register Type Comment
00
49
100
200
249
300
349
RFIFO
RBD
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Receive FIFO
149
Receive Buffer Delay
Version Status
4A
VSTR
RES
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
62
63
14B
14C
14D
14E
14F
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
15A
15B
15C
15D
15E
15F
160
161
162
163
24B
24C
24D
24E
24F
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
25A
25B
25C
25D
25E
25F
260
261
262
263
34B
34C
34D
34E
34F
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
35A
35B
35C
35D
35E
35F
360
361
362
363
Receive Equalizer Status
Framer Receive Status 0
Framer Receive Status 1
Framer Receive Status 2
FRS0
FRS1
FRS2
FECL
FECH
CVCL
CVCH
CECL
CECH
EBCL
EBCH
BECL
BECH
COEC
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Framing Error Counter Low
Framing Error Counter High
Code Violation Counter Low
Code Violation Counter High
CRC Error Counter Low
CRC Error Counter High
Errored Block Counter Low
Errored Block Counter High
Bit Error Counter Low
Bit Error Counter High
COFA Event Counter
RDL1
RDL2
RDL3
R
R
R
Receive DL-Bit Register 1
Receive DL-Bit Register 2
Receive DL-Bit Register 3
RSP1
RSP2
R
R
Receive Signaling Pointer 1
Receive Signaling Pointer 2
Semiconductor Group
336
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
8.5
Status Register Description
Table 31
Status Register Address Arrangement
Address
Register Type Comment
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
164
264
265
266
267
268
269
26A
26B
26C
26D
26E
364
365
366
367
368
369
36A
36B
36C
36D
36E
SIS
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Signaling Status Register
Receive Signaling Status Register
Receive Byte Control Low
Receive Byte Control High
Interrupt Status Register 0
Interrupt Status Register 1
Interrupt Status Register 2
Interrupt Status Register 3
Interrupt Status Register 4
165
166
167
168
169
16A
16B
16C
16D
16E
RSIS
RBCL
RBCH
ISR0
ISR1
ISR2
ISR3
ISR4
GIS
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Global Interrupt Status
6F
CIS
Channel Interrupt Status
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
17A
17B
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
27A
27B
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
37A
37B
RS1
RS2
RS3
RS4
RS5
RS6
RS7
RS8
RS9
RS10
RS11
RS12
Receive Signaling Register 1
Receive Signaling Register 2
Receive Signaling Register 3
Receive Signaling Register 4
Receive Signaling Register 5
Receive Signaling Register 6
Receive Signaling Register 7
Receive Signaling Register 8
Receive Signaling Register 9
Receive Signaling Register 10
Receive Signaling Register 11
Receive Signaling Register 12
Semiconductor Group
337
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Receive FIFO (Read) RFIFO
7
0
RFIFO
RF7
RF0 (x00/x01)
Reading data from RFIFO can be done in an 8-bit (byte) or 16-bit (word) access
depending on the selected bus interface mode. The LSB is received first from the serial
interface.
The size of the accessible part of RFIFO is determined by programming the bits
CCR1.RFT1…0 (RFIFO threshold level). It can be reduced from 32 bytes (RESET value)
down to 2 bytes (four values: 32, 16, 4, 2 bytes).
Data Transfer
Up to 32 bytes/16 words of received data can be read from the RFIFO following a RPF
or a RME interrupt.
RPF Interrupt: A fixed number of bytes/words to be read (32, 16, 4, 2 bytes). The
message is not yet complete.
RME Interrupt: The message is completely received. The number of valid bytes is
determined by reading the RBCL, RBCH registers.
RFIFO is released by issuing the “Receive Message Complete” command (RMC).
Receive Buffer Delay (Read)
7
0
RBD
RBD5
RBD4
RBD3
RBD2
RBD1
RBD0
(x49)
RBD5…RBD0... Receive Elastic Buffer Delay
These bits informs the user about the current delay (in time-slots)
through the receive elastic buffer. The delay is updated every 386 or
193 bits (SIC1.RBS1/0). Before reding this register the user has to set
bit DEC.DRBD in order to halt the current value of this register. After
reading RBD updating of this register is enabled. Not valid if the
receive buffer is bypassed.
000000 = delay < 1 time-slot
:
:
111111 = delay >63 time-slots
Semiconductor Group
338
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Version Status Register (Read)
7
0
VSTR
VN7
VN0
(4A)
VN7 – VN0…
Version Number of Chip
00H…Version 1.1
Receive Equalizer Status (Read)
7
0
RES
EV1
EV0
RES4
RES3
RES2
RES1
RES0
(x4B)
EV1…EV0...
Equalizer Status Valid
These bits informs the user about the current state of the receive
equalization network . Only vaild if LIM1.EQON is set.
00… equalizer status not vaild, still adapting
01… equalizer status vaild
10… equalizer status not vaild
11… equalizer status valid but high noise floor
RES4…RES0... Receive Equalizer Status
The current line attenuation status in steps of nearly 1.4 dB are
displayed in these bits. Only valid if bits EV1/0 = 01.
Accuracy: +/- 2 digit, based on temperature influence and noise
amplitude variations.
00000… attenuation: 0 dB
...
11001… max. attenuation: -36 dB
Semiconductor Group
339
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Framer Receive Status Register 0 (Read)
7
0
FRS0
LOS
AIS
LFA
RRA
LMFA
FSRF
(x4C)
LOS…
Loss of Signal (Red Alarm)
Detection:
This bit is set when the incoming signal has „no transitions“ (analog
interface) or logical zeros (dig. interface) in a time interval of T
consecutive pulses, where T is programmable via PCD register:
Total account of consecutive pulses: 16 < T < 4096.
Analog interface: The receive signal level where “no transition” will be
declared is defined by the programmed value of LIM1.RIL2-0.
Recovery:
Analog interface: The bit will be reset in short haul mode when the
incoming signal has transitions with signal levels greater than the
programmed receive input level (LIM1.RIL2-0) for at least M pulse
periods defined by register PCR in the PCD time interval. In long haul
mode addtionally bit RES.6 must be set for at least 250µsec.
Digital interface: The bit will be reset when the incoming data stream
contains at least M ones defined by register PCR in the PCD time
interval.
With the rising edge of this bit an interrupt status bit (ISR2.LOS) will
be set. For additionally recovery conditions refer also to register
LIM2.LOS1.
The bit will be set during alarm simulation and reset if FRS2.ESC = 0,
3, 4, 6,7 and no alarm condition exists.
AIS…
Alarm Indication Signal (Blue Alarm)
This bit is set when the conditions defined by bit FMR4.AIS3 are
detected. The flag stays active for at least one multiframe.
With the rising edge of this bit an interrupt status bit (ISR2.AIS) will be
set. It will be reset with the beginning of the next following multiframe
if no alarm condition is detected.
The bit will be set during alarm simulation and reset if FRS2.ESC = 0,
3, 4, 7 and no alarm condition exists.
LFA…
Loss of Frame Alignment
The flag is set if pulseframe synchronization has been lost. The
conditions are specified via bit FMR4.SSC1/0. Setting this bit will
cause an interrupt status (ISR2.LFA).
Semiconductor Group
340
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
The flag is cleared when synchronization has been regained.
Additionally interrupt status ISR2.FAR is set with clearing this bit.
RRA…
Receive Remote Alarm (Yellow Alarm)
The flag is set after detecting remote alarm (yellow alarm). Conditions
for setting/resetting are defined by bit RC0.RRAM.
With the rising edge of this bit an interrupt status bit ISR2.RA will be
set.
With the falling edge of this bit an interrupt status bit ISR2.RAR will be
set.
The bit will be set during alarm simulation and reset if FRS2.ESC = 0,
3, 4,5,7 and no alarm condition exists.
LMFA…
FSRF…
Loss Of Multiframe Alignment
Set in F12 or F72 format when 2 out of 4- (or 5 or 6) multiframe
alignment patterns are incorrect.
Additionally the interrupt status bit ISR2.LMFA is set.
Cleared after multiframe synchronization has been regained. With the
falling edge of this bit an interrupt status bit ISR2.MFAR is generated.
Frame Search Restart Flag
Toggles when no framing candidate (pulseframing or multiframing) is
found and a new frame search is started.
Semiconductor Group
341
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Framer Receive Status Register 1 (Read)
7
0
FRS1
EXZD
PDEN
LLBDD LLBAD
XLS
XLO
(x4D)
EXZD…
Excessive Zeros Detected
Significant only if excessive zeros detection is enabled
(FMR2.EXZE=1).
Set after detecting of more than 7 (B8ZS code) or more than 15 (AMI
code) contiguous zeros in the received bit stream. This bit is cleared
when read.
PDEN…
Pulse Density Violation Detected
The pulse density of the received data stream is below the
requirement defined by ANSI T1. 403 or more than 14 consecutive
zeros are detected. With the violation of the pulse density this bit will
be set and will remain active until it is read. Reading the register will
clear this bit. (Clear on Read).
Additionally an interrupt status ISR0.PDEN is generated with the
rising edge of PDEN.
LLBDD…
Line Loop Back Deactuation Signal Detected
This bit is set to one in case the LLB deactuate signal is detected and
then received over a period of more than 33,16 msec with a bit error
rate less than 1/100. The bit remains set as long as the bit error rate
does not exceed 1/100.
If framing is aligned, the first bit position of any frame is not taken into
account for the error rate calculation.
Any change of this bit will cause a LLBSC interrupt.
LLBAD…
Line Loopback Actuation Signal Detected / PRBS Status
Depending on bit LCR1.EPRM the source of this status bit changed.
LCR1.EPRM=0: This bit is set to one in case the LLB actuate signal
is detected and then received over a period of more than 33,16 msec
with a bit error rate less than 1/100. The bit remains set as long as the
bit error rate does not exceed 1/100.
If framing is aligned, the first bit position of any frame is not taken into
account for the error rate calculation.
Any change of this bit will cause a LLBSC interrupt.
Semiconductor Group
342
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
PRBS Status
LCR1.EPRM=1: The current status of the PRBS synchronizer is
indicated in this bit. It is set high if the synchronous state is reached
even in the presence of a BER 1/10. A data stream containing all
zeros with / without framing bits is also a valid pseudo random bit
sequence.
XLS…
Transmit Line Short
Significant only if the ternary line interface is selected by
LIM1.DRS=0.
0… Normal operation. No short is detected.
1… The XL1 and XL2 are shortend for at least 3 pulses. As a
reaction of the short the pins XL1 and XL2 are automatically
forced into a high impedance state if bit XPM2.DAXLT is reset.
After 128 consecutive pulse periods the outputs XL1/2 are
activated again and the internal transmit current limiter is
checked. If a short between XL1/2 is still further active the
outputs XL1/2 are in high impedance state again. When the
short disappears pins XL1/2 are activated automatically and
this bit will be reset. With any change of this bit an interrupt
ISR1.XLSC will be generated. In case of XPM2.XLT is set this
bit will be frozen.
XLO…
Transmit Line Open
0… Normal operation
1… This bit will be set if at least 32 consecutive zeros were sent via
pins XL1/XL2 respective XDOP/XDON. This bit is reset with the
first transmitted pulse. With the rising edge of this bit an
interrupt ISR1.XLSC will be set. In case of XPM2.XLT is set this
bit will be frozen.
Semiconductor Group
343
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Framer Receive Status Register 2 (Read)
7
0
FRS2
ESC2
ESC0
(x4E)
ESC2…ESC0… Error Simulation Counter
This three-bit counter is incremented by setting bit FMR0.SIM. The
state of the counter determines the function to be tested:
For complete checking of the alarm indications, eight simulation steps
are necessary (FRS2.ESC = 0 after a complete simulation).
Tested Alarms ESC2…ESC0 =
0
1
x
x
2
x
x
3
4
5
6
x
x
7
LFA
LMFA
RRA (bit2 =0)
RRA (S-bit fr. 12)
RRA (DL-pattern)
LOS
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
EBC (F12,F72)
EBC (only ESF)
AIS
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
FEC
CVC
x
x
x
x
x
CEC (only ESF)
RSP
x
x
RSN
x
x
XSP
x
x
XSN
x
x
BEC
x
COEC
Some of these alarm indications are simulated only if the QuadFALC is configured in the
appropriate mode. At simulation steps 0, 3, 4, and 7 pending status flags are reset
automatically and clearing of the error counters and interrupt status registers ISR0-3
should be done. Incrementing the simulation counter should not be done at time intervals
Semiconductor Group
344
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
shorter than 1.5 ms (F4, F12, F72) or 3 ms (ESF). Otherwise, reactions of initiated
simulations may occur at later steps.
Framing Error Counter (READ)
7
0
FECL
FE7
FE0
FE8
(x50)
(x51)
7
0
FECH
FE15
FE15…FE0…
Framing Errors
This 16-bit counter will be incremented when incorrect FT and FS bits
in F4, F12 and F72 format or incorrect FAS bits in ESF format are
received.
Framing errors will not be counted during asynchronous state. The
error counter will not roll over.
During alarm simulation, the counter will be incremented twice.
Clearing and updating the counter is done according to bit
FMR1.ECM.
If this bit is reset the error counter is permanently updated in the
buffer. For correct read access of the error counter bit DEC.DFEC has
to be set. With the rising edge of this bit updating the buffer will be
stopped and the error counter will be reset. Bit DEC.DFEC will
automatically be reset with reading the error counter high byte.
If FMR1.ECM is set every second (interrupt ISR3.SEC) the error
counter will be latched and then automatically reset. The latched error
counter state should be read within the next second.
Semiconductor Group
345
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Code Violation Counter (READ)
7
0
CVCL
CV7
CV0
CV8
(x52)
(x53)
7
0
CVCH
CV15
CV15…CV0…
Code Violations
No function if NRZ Code has been enabled.
If the B8ZS code (bit FMR0.RC1/0 = 11) is selected, the 16-bit
counter will be incremented by detecting violations which are not due
to zero substitution. If FMR2.EXZE is set, additionally excessive zero
strings (more than 7 contiguous zeros) are detected and counted.
If simple AMI coding is enabled (FMR0.RC0/1 = 10) all bipolar
violations are counted. If FMR2.EXZE is set, additionally excessive
zero strings (more than 15 contiguous zeros) are detected and
counted. The error counter will not roll over.
During alarm simulation, the counter is incremented continuously with
every second received bit.
Clearing and updating the counter is done according to bit
FMR1.ECM.
If this bit is reset the error counter is permanently updated in the
buffer. For correct read access of the error counter bit DEC.DCVC
has to be set. With the rising edge of this bit updating the buffer will
be stopped and the error counter will be reset. Bit DEC.DCVC will
automatically be reset with reading the error counter high byte.
If FMR1.ECM is set every second (interrupt ISR3.SEC) the error
counter will be latched and then automatically reset. The latched error
counter state should be read within the next second.
Semiconductor Group
346
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
CRC Error Counter (READ)
7
0
CECL
CR7
CR0
CR8
(x54)
(x55)
7
0
CECH
CR15
CR15…CR0…
CRC Errors
No function if CRC6 procedure or ESF format are disabled.
In ESF mode, the 16-bit counter will be incremented when a
multiframe has been received with a CRC error. CRC errors will not
be counted during asynchronous state. The error counter will not roll
over.
During alarm simulation, the counter is incremented once per
multiframe.
Clearing and updating the counter is done according to bit
FMR1.ECM.
If this bit is reset the error counter is permanently updated in the
buffer. For correct read access of the error counter bit DEC.DCEC
has to be set. With the rising edge of this bit updating the buffer will
be stopped and the error counter will be reset. Bit DEC.DCEC will
automatically be reset with reading the error counter high byte.
If FMR1.ECM is set every second (interrupt ISR3.SEC) the error
counter will be latched and then automatically reset. The latched error
counter state should be read within the next second.
Semiconductor Group
347
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Errored Block Counter (READ)
7
0
EBCL
EBC7
EBC0
EBC8
(x56)
(x57)
7
0
EBCH
EBC15
EBC15…EBC0… Errored Block Counter
In ESF format this 16-bit counter will be incremented once per
multiframe if a multiframe has been received with a CRC error or an
errored frame alignment has been detected. CRC and framing errors
will not be counted during asynchronous state. The error counter will
not roll over.
In F4/12/72 format an errored block contain 4/12 or 72 frames.
Incrementing is done once per multiframe if framing errors has been
detected.
During alarm simulation, the counter is incremented in ESF format
once per multiframe and in F4/12/72 format only one time.
Clearing and updating the counter is done according to bit
FMR1.ECM.
If this bit is reset the error counter is permanently updated in the
buffer. For correct read access of the error counter bit DEC.DEBC
has to be set. With the rising edge of this bit updating the buffer will
be stopped and the error counter will be reset. Bit DEC.DEBC will
automatically be reset with reading the error counter high byte.
If FMR1.ECM is set every second (interrupt ISR3.SEC) the error
counter will be latched and then automatically reset. The latched error
counter state should be read within the next second.
Semiconductor Group
348
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Bit Error Counter (READ)
7
0
BECL
BEC7
BEC0
BEC8
(x58)
(x59)
7
0
BECH
BEC15
BEC15…BEC0… Bit Error Counter
If the PRBS monitor is enabled by LCR1.EPRM= 1 this 16-bit counter
will be incremented with every received PRBS bit error in the PRBS
synchronous state FRS1.LLBAD=1. The error counter will not roll
over.
During alarm simulation, the counter will be incremented continuously
with every second received bit.
Clearing and updating the counter is done according to bit
FMR1.ECM.
If this bit is reset the error counter is permanently updated in the
buffer. For correct read access of the PRBS bit error counter bit
DEC.DBEC has to be set. With the rising edge of this bit updating the
buffer will be stopped and the error counter will be reset. Bit
DEC.DBEC will automatically be reset with reading the error counter
high byte.
If FMR1.ECM is set every second (interrupt ISR3.SEC) the error
counter will be latched and then automatically reset. The latched error
counter state should be read within the next second.
Semiconductor Group
349
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
COFA Event Counter (READ)
7
0
COEC
COE7
COE2
COE1
COE0
(x5A)
COE7…COE2… Multiframe Counter
If GCR.ECMC = 1 this 6 bit counter increments with each multiframe
period in the asynchronous state FRS0.LFA/LMFA =1. The error
counter will not roll over.
COE1…COE0… Change of Frame Alignment Counter
If GCR.ECMC = 1 this 2 bit counter increments with each detected
change of frame / multiframe alignment. The error counter will not roll
over.
During alarm simulation, the counter is incremented once per
multiframe.
Clearing and updating the counter is done according to bit
FMR1.ECM.
If this bit is reset the error counter is permanently updated in the
buffer. For correct read access of the event counter bit DEC.DCOEC
has to be set. With the rising edge of this bit updating the buffer will
be stopped and the error counter will be reset. Bit DEC.DCOEC will
automatically be reset with reading the error counter high byte on
address 5BH . Data read on 5BH is not defined.
If FMR1.ECM is set every second (interrupt ISR3.SEC) the error
counter will be latched and then automatically reset. The latched error
counter state should be read within the next second.
Semiconductor Group
350
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Receive DL-Bit Register 1 (Read)
7
0
RDL1
RDL17 RDL16 RDL15 RDL14 RDL13 RDL12 RDL11 RDL10
(x5C)
RDL17…RDL10…Receive DL-Bit
Only valid if F12, F24 or F72 format is enabled.
The received FS/DL-Bits are shifted into this register. RDL10 is
received in frame 1 and RDL17 in frame 15, if F24 format is enabled.
RDL10 is received in frame 26 and RDL17 in frame 40, if F72 format
is enabled.
In F12 format the FS-Bits of a complete multiframe is stored in this
register. RDL10 is received in frame 2 and RDL15 in frame 12.
This register will be updated with every receive multiframe begin
interrupt ISR0.RMB.
Receive DL-Bit Register 2 (Read)
7
0
RDL2
RDL27 RDL26 RDL25 RDL24 RDL23 RDL22 RDL21 RDL20
(x5D)
RDL27…RDL20…Receive DL-Bit
Only valid if F24 or F72 format is enabled.
The received DL-Bits are shifted into this register. RDL20 is received
in frame 17 and RDL23 in frame 23, if F24 format is enabled. RDL20
is received in frame 42 and RDL27 in frame 56, if F72 format is
enabled.
This register will be updated with every receive multiframe begin
interrupt ISR0.RMB.
Receive DL-Bit Register 3 (Read)
7
0
RDL3
RDL37
RDL30
(x5E)
RDL37…RDL30…Receive DL-Bit
Only valid if F72 format is enabled.
The received DL-Bits are shifted into this register. RDL30 is received
in frame 58 and RDL37 in frame 72, if F72 format is enabled.
This register will be updated with every receive multiframe begin
interrupt ISR0.RMB.
Semiconductor Group
351
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Receive Signaling Pointer 1 (Read)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
RSP1
RS8C
RS7C
RS6C
RS5C
RS4C
RS3C
RS2C
RS1C
(x62)
RS8C…RS1C
Receive Signaling Register RS1-8 Changed
A one in each bit position indicates that the received signaling data in
the corresponding RS1-8 registers are updated. Bit RS1C is the
pointer for register RS1,... while RS8C points to RS8.
Receive Signaling Pointer 2 (Read)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
RSP2
RS12C RS11C RS10C RS9C
(x63)
RS12C…RS9C Receive Signaling Register RS9-12 Changed
A one in each bit position indicates that the received signaling data in
the corresponding RS9-12 registers are updated. Bit RS9C is the
pointer for register RS9,... while RS12C points to RS12
Semiconductor Group
352
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Signaling Status Register (Read)
7
0
SIS
XDOV
XFW
XREP
IVB
RLI
CEC
SFS
BOM
(x64)
XDOV…
Transmit Data Overflow
More than 32 bytes have been written to the XFIFO.
This bit is reset by:
– a transmitter reset command XRES or
– when all bytes in the accessible half of the XFIFO have been moved
in the inaccessible half.
XFW…
XREP…
IVB…
Transmit FIFO Write Enable
Data can be written to the XFIFO.
Transmission Repeat
Status indication of CMDR.XREP.
Invalid BOM Frame Received
0…
1…
valid BOM frame (11111111, 0xxxxxx0) received.
invalid BOM frame received.
RLI…
Receive Line Inactive
Neither FLAGs as Interframe Time Fill nor frames are received via the
signaling timeslot.
CEC…
Command Executing
0…
No command is currently executed, the CMDR register can be
written to.
1…
A command (written previously to CMDR) is currently
executed, no further command can be temporarily written in
CMDR register.
Note: CEC will be active at most 2.5 periods of the current system
data rate.
SFS…
Status Freeze Signaling
0… freeze signaling status inactive.
1… freeze signaling status active.
Semiconductor Group
353
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
BOM…
Bit Oriented Message
Significant only in ESF frame format and auto switching mode is
enabled.
0… HDLC mode
1… BOM mode
Receive Signaling Status Register (Read)
7
0
RSIS
VFR
RDO
CRC16
RAB
HA1
HA0
HFR
LA
(x65)
RSIS relates to the last received HDLC or BOM frame; it is copied into RFIFO when
end-of-frame is recognized (last byte of each stored frame).
VFR…
Valid Frame
Determines whether a valid frame has been received.
1… valid
0… invalid
An invalid frame is either
– a frame which is not an integer number of 8 bits (n × 8 bits) in length
(e.g. 25 bits), or
– a frame which is too short taking into account the operation mode
selected via MODE (MDS2-0) and the selection of receive CRC
ON/OFF (CCR2.RCRC) as follows:
• MDS2-0 = 011 (16 bit Address),
RCRC = 0 : 4 bytes; RCRC = 1 : 3-4 bytes
• MDS2-0 = 010 (8 bit Address),
RCRC = 0 : 3 bytes; RCRC = 1 : 2-3 bytes
Note: Shorter frames are not reported.
RDO…
Receive Data Overflow
A data overflow has occurred during reception of the frame.
Additionally, an interrupt can be generated
(refer to ISR1.RDO/IMR1.RDO).
CRC16…
CRC16 Compare/Check
0… CRC check failed; received frame contains errors.
1… CRC check o.k.; received frame is error-free.
Semiconductor Group
354
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
RAB…
Receive Message Aborted
The received frame was aborted from the transmitting station.
According to the HDLC protocol, this frame must be discarded by the
receiver station.
HA1, HA0…
High Byte Address Compare
Significant only if 2-byte address mode has been selected.
In operating modes which provide high byte address recognition, the
QuadFALC compares the high byte of a 2-byte address with the
contents of two individually programmable registers (RAH1, RAH2)
and the fixed values FEH and FCH (broadcast address).
Dependent on the result of this comparison, the following bit
combinations are possible:
00… RAH2 has been recognized
01… Broadcast address has been recognized
10… RAH1 has been recognized C/R = 0(bit 1)
11… RAH1 has been recognized C/R = 1 (bit 1)
Note: If RAH1, RAH2 contain identical values, a match is indicated
by ‘10’or ‘11’.
HFR …
LA …
HDLC Frame Format
0… A BOM frame was received.
1… A HDLC frame was received.
Note: RSIS 7-2, 0 is not valid with a BOM frame.
Low Byte Address Compare
Significant in HDLC modes only.
The low byte address of a 2-byte address field, or the single address
byte of a 1-byte address field is compared with two registers. (RAL1,
RAL2).
0… RAL2 has been recognized
1… RAL1 has been recognized
Semiconductor Group
355
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Receive Byte Count Low (Read)
7
0
RBCL
RBC7
RBC0
(x66)
Together with RBCH (bits RBC11 - RBC8), indicates the length of a received frame
(1…4095 bytes). Bits RBC4-0 indicate the number of valid bytes currently in RFIFO.
These registers must be read by the CPU following a RME interrupt.
Received Byte Count High (Read)
Value after RESET: 000xxxxx
7
0
RBCH
OV
RBC11
RBC8
(x67)
OV…
Counter Overflow
More than 4095 bytes received.
RBC11 – RBC8… Receive Byte Count (most significant bits)
Together with RBCL (bits RBC7… RBC0) indicate the length of the
received frame.
Interrupt Status Register 0 (Read)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
ISR0
RME RFS/BIV
ISF
RMB
RSC
CRC6
PDEN
RPF
(x68)
All bits are reset when ISR0 is read.
If bit GCR.VIS is set to ‘1’, interrupt statuses in ISR0 may be flagged although they are
masked via register IMR0. However, these masked interrupt statuses neither generate a
signal on INT, nor are visible in register GIS.
RME…
Receive Message End
One complete message of length less than 32 bytes, or the last part
of a frame at least 32 bytes long is stored in the receive FIFO,
including the status byte.
Semiconductor Group
356
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
The complete message length can be determined reading the RBCH,
RBCL registers, the number of bytes currently stored in RFIFO is
given by RBC4-0. Additional information is available in the RSIS
register.
RFS / BIV …
Receive Frame Start
This is an early receiver interrupt activated after the start of a valid
frame has been detected, i.e. after an address match (in operation
modes providing address recognition), or after the opening flag
(transparent mode 0) is detected, delayed by two bytes. After a RFS
interrupt, the contents of RAL1and RSIS.3-1 are valid and can be
read by the CPU.
BOM Frame Invalid
Only valid if CCR2.RBFE is set.
When the BOM receiver left the valid BOM status (detecting 7 out of
10 equal BOM frames) this interrupt is generated.
ISF…
Incorrect Sync Format
The QuadFALC could not detect eight consecutive one’s within 32
bits in BOM mode. Only valid if BOM receiver has been activated.
RMB…
RSC…
Receive Multiframe Begin
This bit is set with the beginning of a received multiframe of the
receive line timing.
Received Signaling Information Changed
This interrupt bit is set during each multiframe in which signaling
information on at least one channel changes its value from the
previous multiframe. This interrupt will only occur in the synchronous
state. The registers RS1-12 should be read within the next 3 ms
otherwise the contents may be lost.
CRC6…
PDEN…
Receive CRC6 Error
0… No CRC6 error occurs.
1… The CRC6 check of the last received multiframe failed.
Pulse Density violation
The pulse density violation of the received data stream defined by
ANSI T1. 403 is violated. More than 14 consectuive zeros or less than
N ones in each and every time window of 8(N+1) data bits (N=23) are
detected. If GCR.SCI is set high this interrupt status bit will be
activated with every change of state of FRS1.PDEN.
Semiconductor Group
357
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
RPF…
Receive Pool Full
32 bytes of a frame have arrived in the receive FIFO. The frame is not
yet completely received.
Interrupt Status Register 1 (Read)
7
0
ISR1
CASE
RDO
ALLS
XDU
XMB
XLSC
XPR
(x69)
All bits are reset when ISR1 is read.
If bit GCR.VIS is set to ‘1’, interrupt statuses in ISR1 may be flagged although they are
masked via register IMR1. However, these masked interrupt statuses neither generate a
signal on INT, nor are visible in register GIS.
CASE…
Transmit CAS Register Empty
In ESF format this bit is set with the beginning of a transmitted
multiframe related to the internal transmitter timing. In F12 + F72
format this interrupt will occur every 24 frames to inform the user that
new bit robbing data has to written to XS1-12 registers. This interrupt
will only be generated if the serial signaling access on the system
highway is not enabled.
RDO…
Receive Data Overflow
This interrupt status indicates that the CPU does not respond quickly
enough to an RPF or RME interrupt and that data in RFIFO has been
lost. Even when this interrupt status is generated, the frame continues
to be received when space in the RFIFO is available again.
Note: Whereas the bit RSIS.RDO in the frame status byte indicates
whether an overflow occurred when receiving the frame
currently accessed in the RFIFO, the ISR1.RDO interrupt
status is generated as soon as an overflow occurs and does
not necessarily pertain to the frame currently accessed by the
processor.
ALLS…
XDU…
All Sent
This bit is set if the last bit of the current frame is completely sent out
and XFIFO is empty.
Transmit Data Underrun
Transmitted frame was terminated with an abort sequence because
no data was available for transmission in XFIFO and no XME was
issued.
Semiconductor Group
358
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Note: Transmitter and XFIFO are reset and deactivated if this
condition occurs. They are re-activated not before this
interrupt status register has been read. Thus, XDU should not
be masked via register IMR1.
XMB…
Transmit Multiframe Begin
This bit is set with the beginning of a transmitted multiframe related to
the internal transmit line interface timing.
XLSC…
Transmit Line Status Change
XLSC is set to one with the rising edge of the bit FRS1.XLO or with
any change of bit FRS1.XLS.
The actual status of the transmit line monitor can be read from the
FRS1.XLS and FRS1.XLO.
XPR…
Transmit Pool Ready
A data block of up to 32 bytes can be written to the transmit FIFO.
XPR enables the fastest access to XFIFO. It has to be used for
transmission of long frames, back-to-back frames or frames with
shared flags.
Interrupt Status Register 2 (Read)
7
0
ISR2
FAR
LFA
MFAR
LMFA
AIS
LOS
RAR
RA
(x6A)
All bits are reset when ISR2 is read.
If bit GCR.VIS is set to ‘1’, interrupt statuses in ISR2 may be flagged although they are
masked via register IMR2. However, these masked interrupt statuses neither generate a
signal on INT, nor are visible in register GIS.
FAR…
Frame Alignment Recovery
The framer has reached synchronization. Set with the falling edge of
bit FSR0.LFA.
It is set also after alarm simulation is finished and the receiver is still
synchron.
LFA…
Loss of Frame Alignment
The framer has lost synchronization and bit FRS0.LFA is set.
It will be set during alarm simulation.
Semiconductor Group
359
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
MFAR…
LMFA…
AIS…
Multiframe Alignment Recovery
Set when the framer has reached multiframe alignment in F12 or F72
format. With the negative transition of bit FRS0.LMFA this bit will be
set. It will be set during alarm simulation.
Loss of Multiframe Alignment
Set when the framer has lost the multiframe alignment in F12 or F72
format. With the positive transition of bit FRS0.LMFA this bit will be
set. It will be set during alarm simulation.
Alarm Indication Signal (Blue Alarm)
This bit is set when an alarm indication signal is detected and bit
FRS0.AIS is set. If GCR.SCI is set high this interrupt status bit will be
activated with every change of state of FRS0.AIS.
It will be set during alarm simulation.
LOS…
Loss of Signal (Red Alarm)
This bit is set when a loss of signal alarm is detected in the received
data stream and FRS0.LOS is set. If GCR.SCI is set high this interrupt
status bit will be activated with every change of state of FRS0.LOS.
It will be set during alarm simulation.
RAR…
RA…
Remote Alarm Recovery
Set if a remote alarm (yellow alarm) is cleared and bit FRS0.RRA is
reset. It is set also after alarm simulation is finished and no remote
alarm is detected.
Remote Alarm
A remote alarm (yellow alarm) is detected. Set with the rising edge of
bit FRS0.RRA. It will be set during alarm simulation.
Interrupt Status Register 3 (Read)
7
0
ISR3
ES
SEC
LLBSC
RSN
RSP
(x6B)
All bits are reset when ISR3 is read.
If bit GCR.VIS is set to ‘1’, interrupt statuses in ISR3 may be flagged although they are
masked via register IMR3. However, these masked interrupt statuses neither generate a
signal on INT, nor are visible in register GIS.
Semiconductor Group
360
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
ES…
Errored Second
This bit is set if at least one enabled interrupt source via ESM is set
during the time interval of one second. Interrupt sources of ESM
register:
LFA = Loss of frame alignment detected
FER = Framing error received
CER= CRC error received
AIS = Alarm indication signal (blue alarm)
LOS = Loss of signal (red alarm)
CVE= Code violation detected
SLIP= Transmit Slip or Receive Slip positive/negative detected
SEC…
Second Timer
The internal one second timer has expired. The timer is derived from
clock RCLK.
LLBSC…
Line Loop Back Status Change / PRBS Status Change
Depending on bit LCR1.EPRM the source of this interrupt status
changed:
LCR1.EPRM=0: This bit is set to one, if the LLB actuate signal or the
LLB deactuate signal respective is detected over a period of 33,16
msec with a bit error rate less than 1/100.
The LLBSC bit is also set to one, if the current detection status is left,
i.e., if the bit error rate exceeds 1/100.
The actual detection status can be read from the FRS1.LLBAD and
FRS1.LLBDD, respective.
PRBS Status Change
LCR1.EPRM=1: With any change of state of the PRBS synchronizer
this bit will be set. The current status of the PRBS synchronizer is
indicated in FRS1.LLBAD.
RSN…
RSP…
Receive Slip Negative
The frequency of the receive route clock is greater than the frequency
of the receive system interface working clock based on 1.544 MHz. A
frame will be skipped. It will be set during alarm simulation.
Receive Slip Positive
The frequency of the receive route clock is less than the frequency of
the receive system interface working clock based on 1.544 MHz. A
frame will be repeated. It will be set during alarm simulation.
Semiconductor Group
361
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Interrupt Status Register 4(Read)
7
0
ISR4
XSP
XSN
(x6C)
All bits are reset when ISR4 is read.
If bit GCR.VIS is set to ‘1’, interrupt statuses in ISR4 may be flagged although they are
masked via register IMR4. However, these masked interrupt statuses neither generate a
signal on INT, nor are visible in register GIS.
XSP…
Transmit Slip Positive
The frequency of the transmit clock is less than the frequency of the
transmit system interface working clock based on 1.544 MHz. A frame
will be repeated. After a slip has performed writing of register XC1 is
not necessary.
XSN…
Transmit Slip Negative
The frequency of the transmit clock is greater than the frequency of
the transmit system interface working clock based on 1.544 MHz. A
frame will be skipped. After a slip has performed writing of register
XC1 is not necessary.
Semiconductor Group
362
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Global Interrupt Status Register (Read)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
GIS
ISR4
ISR3
ISR2
ISR1
ISR0
(x6E)
This status register points to pending interrupts sourced by ISR4 ... ISR0.
Channel Interrupt Status Register (Read)
Value after RESET: 00H
7
0
CIS
GIS4
GIS3
GIS2
GIS1
(6F)
This status register points to pending interrupts sourced by the GIS registers of each
channel.
GIS4 ... register GIS of FALC4
GIS3 ... register GIS of FALC3
GIS2 ... register GIS of FALC2
GIS1 ... register GIS of FALC1
Semiconductor Group
363
09.98
PEB 22554
Operational Description T1 / J1
Receive Signaling Register (Read)
Value after RESET: not defined
7
0
RS1
RS2
RS3
RS4
RS5
RS6
RS7
RS8
RS9
RS10
RS11
RS12
A1
B1
C1/A2
C3/A6
D1/B2
D3/B6
A2/A3
A4/A7
B2/B3
B4/B7
C2/A4
C4/A8
D2/B4
D4/B8
(x70)
(x71)
A3/A5
A5/A9
B3/B5
B5/B9
C5/A10 D5/B10 A6/A11 B6/B11 C6/A12 D6/B12 (x72)
A7/A13 B7/B13 C7/A14 D7/B14 A8/A15 B8/B15 C8/A16 D8/B16 (x73)
A9/A17 B9/B17 C9/A18 D9/B18 A10/A19 B10/B19 C10/A20 D10/B20 (x74)
A11/A21 B11/B21 C11/A22 D11/B22 A12/A23 B12/B23 C12/A24 D12/B24 (x75)
A13/A1 B13/B1 C13/A2 D13/B2 A14/A3 B14/B3 C14/A4 D14/B4 (x76)
A15/A5 B15/B5 C15/A6 D15/B6 A16/A7 B16/B7 C16/A8 D16/B8 (x77)
A17/A9 B17/B9 C17/A10 D17/B10 A18/A11 B18/B11 C18/A12 D18/B12 (x78)
A19/A13 B19/B13 C19/A14 D19/B14 A20/A15 B20/B15 C20/A16 D20/B16 (x79)
A21/A17 B21/B17 C21/A18 D21/B18 A22/A19 B22/B19 C22/A20 D22/B20 (x7A)
A23/A21 B23/B21 C23/A22 D23/B22 A24/A23 B24/B23 C24/A24 D24/B24 (x7B)
Receive Signaling Register 1-12
Each register contains the received bit robbing information for 8 DS0 channels. The
received robbed bit signaling information of a complete ESF multiframe will be compared
with the previously received one. In F12/72 frame format the received signaling
information of every 24 frames will be compared with the previously received 24 frames.
If the contents changed a Receive Signaling Changed interrupt ISR0.RSC is generated
and informs the user that a new multiframe has to be read within the next 3 ms. Received
data will be stored in RS1-12 registers. The RS1.7 is received in channel 1 frame 1 and
RS12.0 in channel 24 frame 24 (ESF).
If requests for reading the RS1-12 registers will be ignored the received data may be lost.
Additionally a receive signaling data change pointer indicates an update of register
RS1-12 . Refer also to register RSP1/2.
Access to RS1-12 registers is only valid if the serial receive signaling access on the
system highway is disabled.
Semiconductor Group
364
09.98
PEB 22554
Preliminary Electrical Characteristics
9
Preliminary Electrical Characteristics
Absolute Maximum Ratings
9.1
Parameter
Symbol
TA
Limit Values
– 40 to 85
Unit
°C
°C
V
Ambient temperature under bias
Storage temperature
Tstg
– 65 to 150
– 0.3 to 5.5
– 0.3 to 5.5
– 0.3 to 5.5
– 0.3 to 5.5
IC supply voltage digital
IC supply voltage receive
IC supply voltage transmit
Voltage on any pin with respect to ground
VDD
VDDR
VDDX
VS
V
V
V
ESD robustness1)
VESD,HBM 1000
V
HBM: 1.5 kΩ, 100 pF
1) According to MIL-Std 883D, method 3015.7 and ESD Ass. Standard EOS/ESD-5.1-1993.
Note: Stresses above those listed here may cause permanent damage to the
device. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended
periods may affect device reliability.
9.2
Operating Range
Parameter
Symbol
Limit Values
Unit Test Condition
min.
max.
85
Ambient temperature
Supply voltage digital
Supply voltage receive
Supply voltage transmit
Ground digital
TA
- 40
3.135
3.135
3.135
0
°C
V
V
V
V
V
V
VDD
VDDR
VDDX
VSS
3.465
3.465
3.465
0
Ground receive
VSSR
VSSX
0
0
Ground transmit
0
0
Note: In the operating range, the functions given in the circuit description are fulfilled.
VDD, VDDR and VDDX have to be connected to the same voltage level;
VSS, VSSR and VSSX have to be connected to ground level.
Semiconductor Group
365
09.98
PEB 22554
Preliminary Electrical Characteristics
Semiconductor Group
366
09.98
PEB 22554
9.3
DC Characteristics
Parameter
Symbol
Limit Values
Unit Notes
min.
max.
1)
Input low voltage
Input high voltage
Output low voltage
Output high voltage
VIL
– 0.4
2.0
0.8
V
1)
VIH
VDD+ 0.4 V
VOL
VOH
IDDE1
0.45
300
V
IOL = + 2 mA 1)
I
OH = - 2 mA1)
mA E1 application2)
2.4
V
Avg. power
supply current
(Analog line interface)
IDDT1
IDD
350
90
mA T1 application3)
Avg. power
mA SIC1.SSC1/0 = 10
supply current
(Digital line interface)
Register GCR.PD=0, all
4 single FALCs
Power down current
IPD
10
mA
4)
Input leakage current
Input leakage current
Input leakage current
Input leakage current
Output leakage current
IIL11
IIL12
IIL21
IIL12
IOZ
1
µA VIN = VDD
4)
1
µA VIN = VSS
5)
1
µA VIN = VDD
5)
250
1
µA VIN = VSS
µA
V
OUT = tristate1)
VSS < Vmeas < VDD
measures against
VDD and VSS
Transmitter output
impedance
RX
3
Ω
applies to XL1and
XL26)
Transmitter output current IX
100
mA XL1, XL2
V
Differential peakvoltageof VX
a mark
2.15
(between XL1 and XL2)
Receiver differential peak VR
voltage of a mark
VDDR+0.3 V
RL1, RL2
(between RL1 and RL2)
6)
Receiver input impedance ZR
50
kΩ
(typical value)
Semiconductor Group
367
09.98
PEB 22554
Parameter
Symbol
Limit Values
min. max.
10
Unit Notes
Receiver sensitivity
SRSH
0
dB
dB
RL1, RL2
LIM0.EQON=0
(short haul)
Receiver sensitivity
SRLH
0
36
RL1, RL2
LIM0.EQON=1
(long haul)
6)
Receiver input threshold VRTH
Loss of signal threshold
55
%
V
(typical value)
VLOS
0.90
0.70
0.60
0.40
0.30
0.20
0.10
0.05
RIL2-0 = 000
RIL2-0 = 001
RIL2-0 = 010
RIL2-0 = 011
RIL2-0 = 100
RIL2-0 = 101
RIL2-0 = 110
RIL2-0 = 111
(typical values)
6)
7)
1) Applies to all pins except analog pins RLx, TLx
2) The power consumption of the device is calculated by the internal chip consumption minus the consumption
of the external transmit line components.
Wiring conditions and external circuit configuration according to figure 11;
values of registers: SIC1.SSC1/0=00; XPM2-0 = BDH, 03H, 00H
3) The power consumption of the device is calculated by the internal chip consumption minus the consumption
of the external transmit line components.
Wiring conditions and external circuit configuration according to figure 44;
values of registers: SIC1.SSC1/0=00; XPM2-0 = 9FH, 27H, 02H
4) Applies to all pins except RCLK, SCLKR, SYNC, RPA, XPA, TDI, TMS, TCK, RL1, RL2, XL1, XL2
5) Applies to pins RCLK, SCLKR, SYNC, RPA, XPA, TDI, TMS, TCK only
6) Parameter not tested in production
7) Differential input voltage between pins RL1 and RL2; depends on programming of register LIM1.RIL2-0
Semiconductor Group
368
09.98
PEB 22554
9.4
AC Characteristics
9.4.1
Input/Output Waveforms for Testing
All inputs except RLx.y are driven to VIH = 2.4 V for a logical “1”
and to VIL = 0.4 V for a logical “0”
Timing measurements except for XLx.y are made at VH = 2.0 V for a logical “1”
and at VL = 0.8 V for a logical “0”
The AC testing input/output waveforms are shown below.
VH
VL
VH
VL
Device
under
Test
Test Points
CLoad = 100 pF max
ITS06467
Figure 74
Input/Output Waveform for AC Testing
9.4.2
Master Clock Timing
1
2
3
2.0 V
MCLK
0.8 V
MCLK
Figure 75
MCLK Timing
Table 32
MCLK Timing Parameter Values
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
min. typ. max.
Unit
Condition
1
Clock period of MCLK
488
648
ns
ns
%
%
E1
T1
2
3
High phase of MCLK
Low phase of MCLK
Clock accuracy
40
40
50 ppm
Semiconductor Group
369
09.98
PEB 22554
9.4.3
JTAG Boundary Scan Interface
80
81
82
TCK
TMS
83
85
84
86
TDI
87
TDO
TRS
88
ITT10943
Figure 76
JTAG Boundary Scan Timing
Table 33
JTAG Boundary Scan Timing Parameter Values
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
min. max.
250
Unit
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
TCK period
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
TCK high time
TCK low time
TMS setup time
TMS hold time
TDI setup time
TDI hold time
TDO valid delay
TRS active low
80
80
40
40
40
40
100
200
Identification Register : 32 bit; Version: 1H; Part Number: 4DH, Manufacturer: 083 H
Semiconductor Group
370
09.98
PEB 22554
9.4.4
Reset
1
RES
Reset
Figure 77
Reset Timing
Table 34
Reset Timing Parameter Values
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
max.
Unit
min.
1
RES pulse width low
100001)
ns
1) while MCLK is running
9.4.5
Microprocessor Interface
9.4.5.1 Siemens/Intel Bus Interface Mode
Ax
BHE
CS
3
3A
1
2
RD
WR
ITT10975
Figure 78
Siemens/Intel Non-Multiplexed Address Timing
Note: Ax = Address pins A0 - A9
Semiconductor Group
371
09.98
PEB 22554
Ax
BHE
5
4
6
ALE
CS
7
7A
1
3
3A
RD
WR
ITT10977
Figure 79
Siemens/Intel Multiplexed Address Timing
CS
8
9
RD
12
WR
11A
11
10
Float
Float
D7...D0
(D15...D8)
ITT06470
Figure 80
Siemens/Intel Read Cycle Timing
Semiconductor Group
372
09.98
PEB 22554
CS
13
14
WR
RD
12
15
16
D7...D0
(D15...D8)
ITT06471
Figure 81
Siemens/Intel Write Cycle Timing
Table 35
Siemens/Intel Bus Interface Timing Parameter Values
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
max.
Unit
min.
15
0
1
Address, BHE setup time
Address, BHE hold time
CS setup time
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
2
3
0
3A
4
CS hold time
0
Address, BHE stable before ALE inactive
Address, BHE hold after ALE inactive
ALE pulse width
20
10
30
5
6
7
Address latch setup time before cmd active 0
7A
8
ALE to command inactive delay
RD pulse width
30
80
70
9
RD control interval
10
11
11A
12
Data valid after RD active
Data hold after RD inactive
RD inactive to data bus tristate1)
WR to RD or RD to WR control interval
75
30
10
70
Semiconductor Group
373
09.98
PEB 22554
Unit
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
max.
min.
80
13
14
15
16
WR pulse width
ns
ns
ns
ns
WR control interval
70
Data stable before WR inactive
Data hold after WR inactive
30
10
1) typical value, not tested in production
9.4.5.2 Motorola Bus Interface Mode
Ax
BLE
17
18
CS
19
19A
RW
20
21
22
23
DS
25A
24
25
Float
Float
D7...D0
(D15...D8)
ITT10976
Figure 82
Motorola Read Cycle Timing
Semiconductor Group
374
09.98
PEB 22554
Ax
BLE
17
18
CS
19
19A
RW
20
21
22A
23
DS
26
27
D7...D0
(D15...D8)
ITT10974
Figure 83
Motorola Write Cycle Timing
Table 36
Motorola Bus Interface Timing Parameter Values
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
max.
Unit
min.
Address, BLE, setup time before DS active 15
17
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
18
Address, BLE, hold after DS inactive
CS active before DS active
0
19
0
19A
20
CS hold after DS inactive
0
RW stable before DS active
RW hold after DS inactive
10
0
21
22
DS pulse width (read access)
DS pulse width (write access)
DS control interval
80
70
70
22A
23
24
Data valid after DS active (read access)
Data hold after DS inactive (read access)
75
25
10
Semiconductor Group
375
09.98
PEB 22554
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
Unit
min.
max.
25A
DS inactive to databus tristate (read
access)1)
30
ns
26
27
Data stable before DS active (write access) 30
Data hold after DS inactive (write access) 10
ns
ns
1) typical value, not tested in production
9.4.6
Line Interface
30
32
31
RCLKI
34
33
ROID
XCLK
35
37
36
38
XOID/
XDOP/
XDON/
XFM
38A
XOID1)
1) CMI Coding
ITT10978
Figure 84
Timing of Dual Rail Optical Interface
Semiconductor Group
376
09.98
PEB 22554
Table 37
Dual Rail Optical Interface Parameter Values
No. Parameter
Limit Values
Unit
E1
T1
max. min. typ.
648
min. typ.
max.
30
RCLKI clock period
488
ns
31
32
33
34
35
RCLKI clock period low
180
240
240
50
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
RCLKI clock period high 180
ROID setup
50
50
ROID hold
50
XCLK clock period
488
648
36
37
38
XCLK clock period low
XCLK clock period low4)
190
150
230
200
ns
XCLK clock period high
190
230
200
ns
XCLK clock period high4) 150
XOID delay1)
60
60
60
60
ns
ns
XDOP/XDON delay2)
38A XOID delay3)
RCLK (output)
488
122
648
162
ns
ns
RCLK clock period low
RCLK clock period high
40
40
60
60
40
40
60
60
%
%
1)
2)
3)
4)
NRZ coding
HDB3/AMI/B8ZS coding
CMI coding
depends on input RCLKI in optical interface and remote loop without transmit jitter attenuator enabled (LIM1.JATT/RL=01).
Semiconductor Group
377
09.98
PEB 22554
9.4.7
System Interface
1
2
3
RCLK (output)
4
RFSP
data valid
1) active edge can be programmed to be positive or negative (only negative edge timing shown here)
valid only, if RCLK is derived from DPLL (not, if RCLK is jitter attenuated)
RFSP
Figure 85
RCLK, RFSP Output Timing
Table 38
RCLK, RFSP Timing Parameter Values
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
min. typ. max.
Unit
1
RCLK period E1 (2.048 MHz)
RCLK period E1 (2.048 MHz x 4)
RCLK period T1 (1.544 MHz)
RCLK period T1 (1.544 MHz x 4)
RCLK pulse high
488
122
648
162
ns
ns
ns
ns
%
2
3
4
40
40
60
60
80
RCLK pulse low
%
RFSP delay
ns
Semiconductor Group
378
09.98
PEB 22554
1
2
3
SCLKR
SCLKX
(input)
SCLKRX_input
Figure 86
SCLKR/SCLKX Input Timing
Table 39
SCLKR/SCLKX Timing Parameter Values
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
min. typ. max.
Unit
1
SXLKR/SCLKX period at 16.384 MHz
SXLKR/SCLKX period at 8.192 MHz
SXLKR/SCLKX period at 4.096 MHz
SXLKR/SCLKX period at 2.048 MHz
SXLKR/SCLKX period at 12.352 MHz
SXLKR/SCLKX period at 6.176 MHz
SXLKR/SCLKX period at 3.088 MHz
SXLKR/SCLKX period at 1.544 MHz
SCLKR/SCLKX pulse high
61
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
%
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
122
244
488
81
162
324
648
40
40
SCLKR/SCLKX pulse low
%
Semiconductor Group
379
09.98
PEB 22554
positive edge timing 1)
negative edge timing 1)
SCLKR
(input)
1
2
data valid
RDO, RSIG,
RSIGM, DLR,
RFM, RFMB,
FREEZE
1
2
data valid
Receive
Marker
1) active edge can be programmed to be positive or negative
Figure 87
System Interface Marker Timing (Receive)
Table 40
System Interface Marker Timing Parameter Values
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
min. typ. max.
100 ns
100 ns
Unit
1
RDO, RSIG delay
2
RSIGM, RMFB, DLR, RFM, FREEZE
marker delay
Semiconductor Group
380
09.98
PEB 22554
1
active edge
SCLKR (input)
SYPR, SYPX
2
3
4
inactive
active low
SYPR
Figure 88
SYPR, SYPX Timing
Table 41
SYPR/SYPX Timing Parameter Values
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
Unit
min.
61
typ. max.
1
SCLKR period (t1)
648 ns
2
3
4
SYPR/SYPX inactive setup time1)
SYPR/SYPX setup time
SYPR/SYPX hold time
4 x t1
5
ns
ns
ns
50
1) typical value, not testd in production
Semiconductor Group
381
09.98
PEB 22554
active edge 1)
SCLKX, SCLKR
1
XMFB, DLX, XSIGM
1) active edge can be programmed to be positive or negative (only negative edge timing shown here)
XMFB
Figure 89
System Interface Marker Timing (Transmit)
Table 42
System Interface Marker Timing Parameter Values
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
min. typ. max.
100 ns
Unit
1
XMFB, DLX, XSIGM delay
Semiconductor Group
382
09.98
PEB 22554
active edge 1)
SCLKX, SCLKR
XDI, XSIG
1
2
1) active edge can be programmed to be positive or negative (only negative edge timing shown here)
Transmit
Marker
Figure 90
XDI, XSIG Timing
Table 43
XDI, XSIG Timing Parameter Values
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
min. typ. max.
Unit
1
XSIG, XDI setup time
XSIG, XDI hold time
5
ns
ns
2
55
Semiconductor Group
383
09.98
PEB 22554
1
SCLKX, SCLKR
3
2
4
XMFS
XMFS
Figure 91
XMFS Timing
Table 44
XMFS Timing Parameter Values
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
Unit
min.
typ. max.
1)
1
SCLKR/SCLKX period (t1)
XMFS inactive Setup Time2)
ns
ns
ns
ns
2
3
4
4 x t1
5
XMFS Setup Time
XMFS Hold Time
50
1) depending on application
2) typical value, not tested in production
Semiconductor Group
384
09.98
PEB 22554
1
2
3
TCLK
TCLK
Figure 92
TCLK Input Timing
Table 45
TCLK Timing Parameter Values
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
Unit
min.
typ. max.
1
TCLK period E1 (2.048 MHz)
488
122
648
162
ns
ns
ns
ns
%
TCLK period E1 (2.048 MHz x 4)
TCLK period T1 (1.544 MHz)
TCLK period T1 (1.544 MHz x 4)
TCLK high
2
3
40
40
TCLK low
%
Semiconductor Group
385
09.98
PEB 22554
SCLKX, SCLKR
1
2
3
XCLK
XCLK
Figure 93
XCLK Timing
Table 46
XCLK Timing Parameter values
No. Parameter
Limit Values
Unit
E1
T1
min. typ.
max. min. typ.
max.
100 ns
1
2
XCLK delay
100
230
200
230
200
XCLK clock period low
XCLK clock period low1)
XCLK clock period high
XCLK clock period high1)
190
150
190
150
ns
ns
ns
ns
3
1) depends on input RCLKI in optical interface and remote loop without transmit jitter attenuator enabled
(LIM1.JATT/RL=01)
Semiconductor Group
386
09.98
PEB 22554
1
2
3
SEC (input)
4
5
SEC (output) 1)
Second Clock
1) clock running continuously
Figure 94
SEC Timing
Table 47
SEC Timing Parameter Values
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
min. typ. max.
Unit
1
SEC input period E1
SEC input high E1
SEC input high T1
SEC input low E1
SEC input low T1
SEC output period
SEC high output E1
SEC high output T1
1
s
2
976
1296
976
ns
ns
ns
ns
s
3
1296
4
5
1
976
ns
ns
1296
Semiconductor Group
387
09.98
PEB 22554
1
2
FSC
FSC high
Figure 95
FSC Timing
Table 48
FSC Timing Parameter Values
No.
Parameter
Limit Values
Unit
min.
typ. max.
125
1
FSC period
µs
ns
ns
2
2
FSC low time E1
FSC low time T1
488
648
Semiconductor Group
388
09.98
PEB 22554
9.4.8
Pulse Templates - Transmitter
9.4.8.1 Pulse Template E1
269 ns
(244 + 25)
194 ns
(244 - 50)
V=100 %
Nominal Pulse
50 %
244 ns
219 ns
(244 - 25)
0 %
488 ns
(244 + 244)
ITD00573
Figure 96
E1 Pulse Shape at Transmitter Output for CEPT Applications
Semiconductor Group
389
09.98
PEB 22554
9.4.8.2 Pulse template T1
Normalized Amplitude
V=100%
50%
0
-50%
t
0
250
500
750
1000
ns
ITD00574
Figure 97
T1 Pulse Shape at the Cross Connect Point
Table 49
T1 Pulse Template Corner Points at the Cross Connect Point (T1.102)
Maximum Curve
Time [ns] V [%]
Minimum Curve
Time [ns]
V [%]
( 0,
0.05)
0.05)
0.80)
1.15)
1.15)
1.05)
1.05)
-0.07)
0.05)
0.05)
( 0,
-0.05)
-0.05)
0.5)
0.95)
0.95)
0.90)
0.50)
-0.45)
-0.45)
-0.2)
( 250,
( 325,
( 325,
( 425,
( 500,
( 675,
( 725,
( 1100,
( 1250,
( 350,
( 350,
( 400,
( 500,
( 600,
( 650,
( 650,
( 800,
( 925,
( 1100,
( 1250,
-0.05)
-0.05)
100 % Value must be in the range between 2.4 V and 3.6 V.
Semiconductor Group
390
09.98
PEB 22554
9.5
Capacitances
Parameter
Symbol
Limit Values
Unit Pins
typ.
5
max.
10
Input capacitance1)
CIN
pF
Output capacitance1) COUT
Output capacitance1) COUT
8
15
pF
pF
all except XLx.y
XLx.y
8
20
1)
Not tested in production.
Semiconductor Group
391
09.98
PEB 22554
Package Outlines
10
Package Outlines
P-MQFP-144-8
(Plastic Metric Quad Flat Package)
Sorts of Packing
Package outlines for tubes, trays etc. are contained in our
Data Book “Package Information”
Dimensions in mm
SMD = Surface Mounted Device
Semiconductor Group
392
09.98
PEB 22554
Glossary
11
Glossary
ADC
Analog to digital converter
Alarm indication signal (blue alarm)
Automatic gain control
AIS
AGC
ALOS
AMI
Analog loss of signal
Alternate mark inversion
ANSI
ATM
American National Standards Institute
Asynchronous transfer mode
Auxiliary pattern
AUXP
B8ZS
BER
Line coding to avoid too long strings of consecutive ’0’
Bit error rate
BFA
Basic frame alignment
BOM
Bellcore
BPV
Bit orientated message
Bell Communications Research
Bipolar violation
CAS
Channel associated signaling
Channel associated signaling - bit robbing
Channel associated signaling - common channel
Common channel signaling
Cyclic redundancy check
CAS-BR
CAS-CC
CCS
CRC4
CSU
Channel service unit
CVC
Code violation counter
DCO
DL
Digitally controlled oscillator
Digital loop
DPLL
Digitally controlled phase locked loop
Semiconductor Group
393
09.98
PEB 22554
Glossary
DS1
ESD
ESF
EQ
Digital signal level 1
Electrostatic discharge
Extended superframe (F24) format
Equalizer
ETSI
FALC®
FAS
FCC
FCS
FISU
FPS
HBM
HDB3
HDLC
IBL
Eurpean Telecommunication Standards Institute
Framing and line interface component
Frame alignment sequence
US Federal Communication Commission
Frame check sequence
Fill in signaling unit
Framing pattern sequence
Human body model for ESD classification
High density bipolar of order 3
High level data link control
In band loop (=LLB)
ISDN
ITU
Intergrated sevices digital network
International Telecommunications Group
Jitter attenuator
JATT
JTAG
LBO
LCV
LIU
Joined Test Action Group
Line build out
Line code violation
Line interface unit
LFA
Loss of frame alignment
Local loop
LL
LLB
Line loop back (= IBL)
LOS
Loss of signal (red alarm)
Semiconductor Group
394
09.98
PEB 22554
Glossary
LSB
Least significant bit
LSSU
MF
Link status signaling unit
Multiframe
MSB
MSU
NRZ
PDV
PLB
Most significant bit
Message signaling unit
Non return to zero signal
Pulse density violation
Payload loop back
PLL
Phase locked loop
PMQFP
PPR
PRBS
PTQFP
RAI
Plastic metric quad flat pack (device package)
Periodical performance report
Pseudo ramdom binary sequence
Plastic thin metric quad flat pack (device package)
Remote alarm indication (yellow alarm)
Remote loop
RL
SF
Superframe
Sidactor
TAP
UI
Overvoltage protection device for transmission lines
Test access port
Unit interval
Semiconductor Group
395
09.98
PEB 22554
Appendix
12
Appendix
12.1
Protection Circuitry
The design in figure 98 is a suggestion how to build up a generic E1/T1 platform. With
the selection of the appropriate components the same circuitry is also able to handle the
return loss and impedance to ground requirements of ETSI. For more details of this
circuits, please refer to the appropriate application notes listed on the following page.
R1
R3
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Diodes
VCC
W1 : W2
XL1
XL2
RL1
RL2
Sidactor
GND
GND
R1
R3
FALC R
R3
10
Ω
Ω
W2 : W1
Sidactor
VCC
R2
GND
GND
R3
10
ITS10821
Figure 98
Protection Circuitry
Semiconductor Group
396
09.98
PEB 22554
Appendix
12.2
Application Notes
The following application notes and technical documentation provide additional
information:
• Transformer Recommendation
• Transmit Pulse Shape Programming
• Frequently Asked Questions
• Designing a Generic E1/T1 Platform for Short Haul and Long Haul Applications
• Different Hints to pass ETS300 011
• Key Features and Applications
12.3
Software Support
The following software package is provided together with the FALC Evaluation System
EASY22554:
• Application Wizard
• E1 driver functions supporting different ETSI requirements including HDLC signaling
• LAPD Signaling Software
• FDL Signaling Software
• Boundary Scan File
• IBIS Model
Semiconductor Group
397
09.98
相关型号：
PEB2256EV1.2
PCM Jitter Attenuator, 1-Func, CEPT PCM-30/E-1, CMOS, PBGA81, 10 X 10 MM, 1 MM PITCH, PLASTIC, LBGA-81
INFINEON
PEB2256HT
E1/T1/J1 Framer and Line Interface Component for Long and Short Haul Applications
INFINEON
PEB2256HV1.2
Digital Transmission Interface, 1-Func, CEPT PCM-30/E-1, CMOS, PQFP80, 14 X 14 MM, 0.50 MM PITCH, PLASTIC, MQFP-80
INFINEON
©2020 ICPDF网 联系我们和版权申明